regulations - National Engineering College

Transcription

NATIONAL ENGINEERING COLLEGE
(An Autonomous Institution – Affiliated to Anna University Chennai)
K.R.NAGAR, KOVILPATTI – 628 503
www.nec.edu.in
REGULATIONS - 2013
DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI OF
M.E. – ENERGY ENGINEERING
Regulations’
Curriculum & Syllabi of M.E. (Energy Engg.)
National Engineering College, K. R. Nagar, Kovilpatti-628503
(An Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University Chennai)
Centre for Energy Studies
Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)
 Produce researchers in the field of Renewable and Non-renewable Energy Technology.
 Prepare students to pursue research for emerging as a good academician in a leading
Institution as well as acquire full-fledged knowledge in the technological advancements
of a specific energy field to serve in an industry.
 Equip the students to understand and evaluate alternative modes of energy source and
planning of energy source-demand chain.
Programme Outcomes (POs)
The students will attain the following outcomes:
a. an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering to the field of
study to pursue research and excel as professionals in the various fields of Energy
Engineering
b. an ability to apply energy, momentum, continuity, state and constitutive equations to
thermal, fluids and Energy systems in a logical and discerning manner.
c. an ability to create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering tools, including prediction and modeling, to complex energy engineering
activities, with an understanding of the limitations.
d. an ability to design solutions for complex energy systems, components or processes that
meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public health and safety, cultural,
societal, and ethical considerations.
e. an ability to understand energy and environmental problems and conduct investigations of
various renewable energy technologies including design of experiments, analysis and
interpretation of data, and synthesis of information to provide valid conclusions.
f. an ability to understand the potential in Solar Energy, the energy of future and to develop
the technologies that make it economical for the production of energy.
g. an ability to communicate effectively on energy engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
h. an ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse
teams and in multidisciplinary settings.
2
National Engineering College (An Autonomous Institution), Kovilpatti
Regulations’
REGULATIONS - 2013
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI OF FULL TIME
M.E. ENERGY ENGINEERING
SEMESTER I
SL.
No
THEORY
1
COURSE
CODE
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
0
0
3
2
18
1
3
21
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
EEC21
Solar Energy and Utilization
3
0
0
3
2
EEC22
Wind Energy Technology
3
0
0
3
3
EEC23
Bio Energy Engineering
3
0
0
3
4
Elective I
3
0
0
3
5
Elective II
3
0
0
3
6
Elective III
3
0
0
3
EEC11
2
EEC12
3
EEC13
4
EEC14
5
EEC15
6
EEC16
PRACTICAL
7
EEC17
COURSE TITLE
Advanced Thermal Engineering
Instrumentation and Control
in Energy Systems
Electrical Technology For Energy
Engineers
Energy Planning, Conservation and
Management
Renewable Energy Sources
Conversion and Technology
Waste Management And Energy
Recovery
Energy Laboratory – I
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
SL.
No
THEORY
1
COURSE
CODE
PRACTICAL
7
EEC24
Energy Laboratory – II
0
0
3
2
8
EEC25
Mini Project*
0
0
3
1
18
0
6
21
TOTAL
*Mini Project:
Studies to demonstrate simple basic concepts and aspects of various Energy
Technologies have to be carried out by the students which will be evaluated by the Internal
Examiner.
3
Regulations’
SEMESTER III
SL.
No
COURSE
CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1
Elective IV
3
0
0
3
2
Elective V
3
0
0
3
3
Elective VI
3
0
0
3
Project work - Phase I#
0
0
12
6
9
0
12
15
PRACTICAL
4
EEC31
TOTAL
#Phase I: Review of Literature, Problem Identification, Methodology, Work Plan, theoretical
modeling (if any), Presentation and Viva.
SEMESTER IV
SL.
COURSE
No
CODE
PRACTICAL
1
EEC41
COURSE TITLE
Project work - Phase II**
TOTAL
L
T
P
C
0
0
24
12
0
0
24
12
**Phase II: Experimental and/or theoretical analysis, Results and discussions, Presentation and Viva
TOTAL CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR THE AWARD OF THE DEGREE
-
69
4
Regulations’
ELECTIVES FOR M.E ENERGY ENGINEERING (FULL TIME)
Semester - II
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1.
EEE2A
Hydro Power Technology
3
0
0
3
2.
EEE2B
Nuclear Engineering
3
0
0
3
3.
EEE2C
Industrial Energy Management
3
0
0
3
4.
EEE2D
Cogeneration and Waste Heat Recovery Systems
3
0
0
3
5.
EEE2E
Alternative Fuels
3
0
0
3
6.
EEE2F
Solar Architecture
3
0
0
3
7.
EEE2G
Fluidized Bed Systems
3
0
0
3
8.
EEE2H
Advanced Power Plant Engineering
3
0
0
3
9.
EEE2J
Materials Sciences And Engineering
3
0
0
3
10.
EEE2K
Advances In Metallurgical Engineering
3
0
0
3
Semester - III
11.
EEE3A
Design of Heat Exchangers
3
0
0
3
12.
EEE3B
Advanced Thermal Storage Technologies
3
0
0
3
13.
EEE3C
Materials for Energy Applications
3
0
0
3
14.
EEE3D
Nanotechnology and Nano Electronics
3
0
0
3
15.
EEE3E
Solar Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning
3
0
0
3
16.
EEE3F
Fuel cells and Hydrogen Energy
3
0
0
3
17.
EEE3G
Concentrators and Solar Thermal Power Plants
3
0
0
3
18.
EEE3H
Solar Photovoltaic Power Plants: Planning, Design and
Balance of Systems
3
0
0
3
19.
EEE3J
Solar Thermal Applications: Low and Medium Temperatures
3
0
0
3
5
Regulations’
M.E. (ENERGY ENGINEERING)
CURRICULUM I TO VI SEMESTERS (PART TIME)
SEMESTER - I (Part time)
SL.
COURSE
NO
CODE
THEORY
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1
EEC11
Advanced Thermal Engineering
3
1
0
4
2
EEC12
Instrumentation and Control in Energy Systems
3
0
0
3
Electrical Technology For Energy Engineers
3
0
0
3
Energy Laboratory – I
0
0
3
2
9
1
3
12
L
T
P
C
3
EEC13
PRACTICAL
4
EEC17
TOTAL
SEMESTER - II (Part time)
SL.
COURSE
NO
CODE
THEORY
COURSE TITLE
1
EEC21
Solar Energy and Utilization
3
0
0
3
2
EEC22
Wind Energy Technology
3
0
0
3
Bio Energy Engineering
3
0
0
3
Energy Laboratory – II
0
0
3
2
9
0
3
11
L
T
P
C
3
EEC23
PRACTICAL
4
EEC24
TOTAL
SEMESTER - III (Part time)
SL.
COURSE
NO
CODE
THEORY
COURSE TITLE
1
EEC14
Energy Planning, Conservation and Management
3
0
0
3
2
EEC15
Renewable Energy Sources Conversion and
Technology
3
0
0
3
3
EEC16
Waste Management And Energy Recovery
3
0
0
3
9
0
0
9
TOTAL
6
Regulations’
SEMESTER - IV (Part time)
SL.N COURSE
O
CODE
THEORY
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1
Elective I
3
0
0
3
2
Elective II
3
0
0
3
3
Elective III
3
0
0
3
Mini Project*
0
9
0
0
3
3
1
10
PRACTICAL
4
EEC25
TOTAL
*Mini Project:
Studies to demonstrate simple basic concepts and aspects of various Energy
Technologies have to be carried out by the students which will be evaluated by the Internal Examiner.
SEMESTER - V (Part time)
SL.
COURSE
NO
CODE
THEORY
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1
Elective IV
3
0
0
3
2
Elective V
3
0
0
3
3
Elective VI
3
0
0
3
Project work - Phase I#
0
0
12
6
9
0
12
15
PRACTICAL
4
EEC31
TOTAL
#Phase I: Review of Literature, Problem Identification, Methodology, Work Plan, theoretical
modeling (if any), Presentation and Viva.
SEMESTER VI (Part time)
SL.
COURSE
No
CODE
PRACTICAL
1
EEC41
COURSE TITLE
Project work - Phase II**
TOTAL
L
T
P
C
0
0
24
12
0
0
24
12
**Phase II: Experimental and/or theoretical analysis, Results and discussions, Presentation and Viva
TOTAL CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR THE AWARD OF THE DEGREE
-
69
7
Regulations’
ELECTIVES FOR M.E ENERGY ENGINEERING (PART TIME)
Semester - IV
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1.
EEE2A
Hydro Power Technology
3
0
0
3
2.
EEE2B
Nuclear Engineering
3
0
0
3
3.
EEE2C
Industrial Energy Management
3
0
0
3
4.
EEE2D
Cogeneration and Waste Heat Recovery Systems
3
0
0
3
5.
EEE2E
Alternative Fuels
3
0
0
3
6.
EEE2F
Solar Architecture
3
0
0
3
7.
EEE2G
Fluidized Bed Systems
3
0
0
3
8.
EEE2H
Advanced Power Plant Engineering
3
0
0
3
9.
EEE2J
Materials Sciences And Engineering
3
0
0
3
10.
EEE2K
Advances In Metallurgical Engineering
3
0
0
3
Semester - V
11.
EEE3A
Design of Heat Exchangers
3
0
0
3
12.
EEE3B
Advanced Thermal Storage Technologies
3
0
0
3
13.
EEE3C
Materials for Energy Applications
3
0
0
3
14.
EEE3D
Nanotechnology and Nano Electronics
3
0
0
3
15.
EEE3E
Solar Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning
3
0
0
3
16.
EEE3F
Fuel cells and Hydrogen Energy
3
0
0
3
17.
EEE3G
Concentrators and Solar Thermal Power Plants
3
0
0
3
18.
EEE3H
Solar Photovoltaic Power Plants: Planning, Design and
Balance of Systems
3
0
0
3
19.
EEE3J
Solar Thermal Applications: Low and
Medium Temperatures
3
0
0
3
8
Regulations’
EEC11 - ADVANCED THERMAL ENGINEERING
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to understand the basics of thermodynamics and various improvements possible in vapor
power cycles and refrigeration cycles.
2. Ability to use the heat transfer concepts for various applications like finned systems &
turbulence flows.
3. Capability to perform the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers and to learn the heat
transfer coefficient for compact heat exchanges.
UNIT I THERMODYNAMICS
10
Basic Concepts of Thermodynamics, Thermodynamics Laws, Entropy: Entropy as a property,
Combined First and Second Law, Increase of Entropy Principle, Entropy Change of a Pure Substance,
Liquid and solids, Efficiency of devices, second – law efficiency for a closed system and steady –
state control volume.
UNIT II VAPOR POWER CYCLES
10
Properties of steam, phase change process, Rankine cycle, Deviation of Actual Vapor Power Cycles
from Idealized Ones, Reheat cycle, Regenerative cycle, Second-Law Analysis of Vapor Power
Cycles.
UNIT III REFRIGERATION
08
Refrigerators and Heat Pumps, The Reversed Carnot Cycle, The Ideal Vapor-Compression
Refrigeration Cycle,
Actual Vapor-Compression Refrigeration Cycle, Selecting the Right
Refrigerant, Heat Pump Systems, Innovative Vapor-Compression Refrigeration Systems, Gas
Refrigeration Cycles, Absorption Refrigeration Systems.
UNIT IV HEAT TRANSFER
10
Introduction to heat transfer processes, Heat transfer from finned surfaces; fin efficiency and
effectiveness, two dimensional steady state heat conduction using analytical and numerical methods Radiation from a black body & grey body - Quantitative analysis of heat transfer co-efficient for all
the modes of heat transfer.
UNIT V HEAT EXCHANGERS
07
Different types of heat exchangers, arithmetic and logarithmic mean temperature differences, heat
transfer coefficient for parallel, counter and cross flow type heat exchanger; effectiveness of heat
exchanger, N.T.U. method, fouling factor. Constructional and manufacturing aspects of Heat
Exchangers.
Tutorial: 15 Periods
Total: 60 Periods
REFERENCES:
1. R. K. Rajput, “Thermal Engineering”, Laxmi Publications, Ltd., 2010
2. A.Faghri, JHowell, Y Zhang, “Advanced Heat and Mass Transfer”, Global Digital Press,
2010
3. P.K.Nag, “Engineering Thermodynamics” 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008
4. Y.A Cengel, M.A.Boles, “Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach” 6th edition McgrawHill Series 2007
5. Bejan,A., “Advanced Engineering Thermodynamics” 3rd Edition, John Wiley and Cons, 2006.
6. Arora.C.P, “Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001
7. Frank Kreith., “The CRC handbook of thermal engineering”, Springer, 2000.
8. Hans Dieter Baehr, Karl Stephan,” Heat and Mass Transfer”, Springer, 2011.
9
Regulations’
EEC12 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN ENERGY SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. To be familiar with the basic instruments for measurement of specific thermo physical
properties
2. Able to understand the advanced measurement techniques
3. Able to develop fundamental knowledge of system control and process parameters
UNIT I MEASUREMENT CHARACTERISTICS
09
Instrument classification - characteristics of instruments – static and dynamic - experimental error
analysis - systematic and random errors - statistical analysis – uncertainty - experimental planning and
selection of measuring instruments - reliability of instruments
UNIT II MEASUREMENT OF PHYSICAL QUANTITIES
10
Measurement of thermo – physical properties, instruments for measuring temperature - pressure and
flow
UNIT III ADVANCE MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES
08
Shadow graph – Schileren – Interferometer - Laser doppler anemometer - Hot wire anemometer, Heat
flux sensors - Telemetry in measurement.
UNIT IV CONTROL SYSTEMS
09
Introduction - controllability, observability, Continuous and discrete process Controllers – Control
Mode – Two – Step mode – Proportional Mode – Derivative Mode – Integral Mode – PID Controllers
– Programmable Logic Controllers - Microprocessor PC based control applications.
UNIT V DATA ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING
09
Multi Channel Data acquisition system – Architecture of data acquisition and computer control
system - Compact Data loggers – Sensor based, Computerized data systems - Micro – computer
interfacing - Intelligent instruments in use.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Manabendra Bhuyan, “Intelligent Instrumentation”, CRC Press, 2009
2. Morris A.S., “Principles of Measurements and Instrumentation”, Butterworth-Heinemann,
2003
3. Ernest Doebelin, “Measurement Systems”, McGraw-Hill, 2003
4. Singh. S. K., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003
5. Holman J.P. “Experimental methods for Engineers, 7th Edition”, McGraw – Hill, 2001
6. Rangan., “Instrumentation Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001
7. John G. Webster., “The Measurement, Instrumentation, and Sensors Handbook”, Springer,
1999
10
Regulations’
EEC13 - ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY ENGINEERS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to understand the basic working principles of Electrical & Electronic devices
2. Able to understand various types of Transformers & Motors with energy efficiency
perspective
3. Capable of analyzing and understanding storage concepts of electricity
4. To be familiar with the concepts of Electricity Transmission & Distribution
5. Able to understand the concepts of Wheeling and Power Evacuation of Wind & Solar Power
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
12
Introduction to Motors, Generators – Classification of Motors & Generators - Induction Synchronous – Applications - Electronic Converter – Types - Rectifier - Dc – Dc Converter - Inverter
– Transformer – Working Principle
UNIT II ELECTRICAL ENERGY STORAGE
07
Introduction for Electrical Energy storage - Types of storage – Electrical Storage – Batteries – Types
– Selection of Batteries - Electrochemical Storage – Electro- magnetic Storage - Capacitor – Super
capacitors
UNIT III ELECTRICITY TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
10
Introduction to Transmission – Sub transmission – Types of transmission – Losses in transmission –
Control strategies - Grid – Types of grid – Distribution – Types of Distribution – Metering Measuring Instruments
UNIT IV ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FOR WIND ENERGY SYSTEMS
08
Generators for wind energy applications – Types of generators - Grid Connected and self excited
Induction Generator – Speed control - Constant Voltage - Constant Frequency Operation – Reactive
Power Compensation – Power evacuation
UNIT V ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FOR SOLAR ENERGY SYSTEMS
08
Introduction – Balance of System – Tracking – Types of tracking - Inverter – Charge controller –
Standalone System – Grid-Tied System – Efficiency – Frequency variation – Data monitoring –
Types - Remote – On-site monitoring
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
REFERENCES:
1. B.L.Thereja “A Textbook of Electrical Technology”, 25th Edition S Chand Publishers, 2008
2. S.N.Bhadra, D.Kastha and S. Banerjee, “ Wind electrical systems”, Oxford University Press,
2005
3. C.L. Wadhwa “Generation Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy” Revised Edition
New Age International 2005.
4. H.A. Kiehne “Battery Technology Handbook” Second Edition, Taylor & Francis
11
Regulations’
EEC14 - ENERGY PLANNING, CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. The present energy scenario and the need for energy conservation and various energy
conservation measures would be learnt
2. Talented to understand the concepts of Energy Planning and forecasting techniques for
performing energy analysis
3. Be aware of the methods of pollution controls produced during energy generation
4. To be familiar with various energy policies ( National and International) & standards
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
09
Energy Scenario - world and India. Energy Resources- Availability in India. Energy consumption
pattern. Energy conservation potential - Industries and commercial establishments. Energy intensive
industries - overview. Energy conservation and energy efficiency – needs and advantages.
UNIT II ENERGY FORECASTING TECHNIQUES
09
Energy demand – supply balancing, Energy models, Software for energy planning, Simulation and
forecasting of future energy demand consistent with macroeconomic parameters in India. Basic
concept of Econometrics (OLS) and statistical analysis (Multiple Regression), Econometrics
techniques used for energy analysis and forecasting with case studies from India
UNIT III POLLUTION FROM ENERGY GENERATION
09
Coal and Nuclear based Power Plants – Fly Ash generation and environment impact, Fly ash
utilization and disposal, nuclear fuel cycle, radioactive wastes – treatment and disposalEnvironmental pollution limits guidelines for thermal power plant pollution control- Environmental
emissions from extraction, conversion, transport and utilization of fossil fuels- Green house effectGlobal warming
UNIT IV ENERGY POLICIES
09
National energy policy in the last plan periods, Energy use and Energy supply, Overview of
renewable energy policy and the Five Year Plan programmes, Basic concept of Input-Output analysis,
Concept of energy multiplier and implication of energy multiplier for analysis of regional and national
energy policy- Carbon Trading- Renewable Energy Certification - CDM
UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION AND AUDITING
09
Definition, need, and types of energy audit; Energy management (audit) approach: Understanding
energy costs, bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing
system efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements; Fuel & energy substitution; Energy
audit instruments; Energy Conservation Act; Duties and responsibilities of energy managers and
auditors.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Steve Doty, Wayne C. Turner “Energy management handbook”, 7th Edition, the Fairmont
Press, Inc., 2009.
2. Michael Wickens “Macroeconomic Theory: A Dynamic General Equilibrium Approach”,
Princeton University Press, 2009
3. F Kreith , D. Y Goswami, “Energy management and conservation handbook”, CRC Press,
2008
4. YP Abbi and Shashank Jain. “Handbook on Energy Audit and Environment Management”,
TERI Publications, 2006
5. R Loulou, P R Shukla and A Kanudia, “Energy and Environment Policies for a sustainable
Future”, Allied Publishers Ltd, New Delhi, 1997
12
Regulations’
EEC15 - RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES CONVERSION AND TECHNOLOGY
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to understand the basic principles of concept of various forms of renewable energy
2. Be familiar with the concept of Solar radiation and Energy conversion
3. Able to understand the concepts of extraction of Wind Energy
4. Able to understand the concepts of various Bio-Energy Conversion techniques
5. Be familiar with the concepts of Hydrogen Energy and other forms of Renewable Energy
UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY
09
Solar radiation its measurements and prediction - solar thermal flat plate collectors concentrating
collectors – applications - heating, cooling, desalination, power generation, drying, cooking etc principle of photovoltaic conversion of solar energy, types of solar cells and fabrication. Photovoltaic
applications: battery charger, domestic lighting, street lighting, and water pumping, power generation
schemes.
UNIT II WIND ENERGY
09
Atmospheric circulations – classification - factors influencing wind - wind shear – turbulence - wind
speed monitoring - Betz limit - Aerodynamics of wind turbine rotor- site selection - wind resource
assessment - wind energy conversion devices - classification, characteristics and applications. Hybrid
systems - safety and environmental aspects.
UNIT III BIO-ENERGY
09
Biomass resources and their classification - chemical constituents and physicochemical characteristics
of biomass - Biomass conversion processes - Thermo chemical conversion: direct combustion,
gasification, pyrolysis and liquefaction - biochemical conversion: anaerobic digestion, alcohol
production from biomass - chemical conversion process: hydrolysis and hydrogenation. Biogas generation - types of biogas Plants- applications
UNIT IV HYDROGEN AND FUEL CELLS
09
Thermodynamics and electrochemical principles - basic design, types, and applications - production
methods - Biophotolysis: Hydrogen generation from algae biological pathways - Storage gaseous,
cryogenic and metal hydride and transportation. Fuel cell – principle of working- various types construction and applications.
UNIT V OTHER TYPES OF ENERGY
09
Ocean energy resources - principles of ocean thermal energy conversion systems - ocean thermal
power plants - principles of ocean wave energy conversion and tidal energy conversion – hydropower
– site selection, construction, environmental issues - geothermal energy - types of geothermal energy
sites, site selection, and geothermal power plants.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sukhatme S.P., “Solar Energy”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
2. Mukund R. Patel, “Wind and Solar Power Systems”, CRC Press, 1999.
3. Hart, A.B., and Womack, G. J.,”Fuel Cells: Theory & Applications”, Prentice Hall, 1997.
4. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University
Press, U.K, 1996.
5. Veziroglu, T.N., “Alternative Energy Sources”, Vol 5 and 6, McGraw-Hill, 1990
6. Twidell, J.W. and Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., 1986.
7. Khandelwal K.C, Mahdi S.S., “Biogas Technology” - A Practical Handbook, Tata McGraw
Hill, 1986.
8. Kreith, F and Kreider, J. F.,” Principles of Solar Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 1978 Soterius
13
Regulations’
EEC16 - WASTE MANAGEMENT AND ENERGY RECOVERY
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Provision of information on various methods of waste management
2. Familiarization of the students with recent energy generation techniques
3. Knowledge on recent technologies of waste disposal
4. Importance of healthy environment will be realized.
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
UNIT I SOLID WASTE – CHARACTERISTICS AND PERSPECTIVES
06
Definition - types – sources – generation and estimation. Properties: physical, chemical and biological
– regulation
UNIT II COLLECTION, TRANSPORTATION AND PROCESSING TECHNIQUES
08
Onsite handling, storage and processing – types of waste collection mechanisms - transfer Stations:
types and location – manual component separation – volume reduction: mechanical, thermal –
separation: mechanical, magnetic electro mechanical
UNIT III LIQUID WASTE MANAGEMENT
16
Basics, types, working and typical conversion efficiencies of composting – anaerobic digestion – RDF
– combustion – incineration – gasification – pyrolysis
UNIT IV HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT
08
Hazardous waste – definition - potential sources - waste sources by industry – impacts – waste control
methods – transportation regulations - risk assessment - remediation technologies – Private public
paternership – Government initiatives.
UNIT V ULTIMATE DISPOSAL
07
Landfill – classification – site selection parameters – design aspects – Leachate control –
environmental monitoring system for Land Fill Gases.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Michael D. Lagrega., et al., “Hazardous Waste Management”, Waveland Pr Inc, 2010
2. Paul T. Williams, “Waste treatment and disposal”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2005
3. Velma I. Grover, “Recovering Energy” Science Publishers, 2002
4. Tchobanoglous, Theisen and Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste Management”, 2nd Edition
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1993
5. Stanley E. Manahan. “Hazardous Waste Chemistry, Toxicology and Treatment”, Lewis
Publishers, Chelsea, Michigan, 1990
.
14
Regulations’
EEC17 - ENERGY LABORATORY – I
L
0
T
0
P
3
C
2
RENEWABLE ENERGY
27
1. Performance testing of Solar Water Collector
2. Characteristics of Solar photovoltaic devices
 Investigation of PV Characteristics – Amorphous Silicon.
 Investigation of PV Characteristics – Amorphous Silicon – Shadow effect
 Comparative Performance Analysis of Mono & Poly Crystalline Silicon PV cell
3. Testing of Gasifier
4. Properties of Fuels
 Determination of Flash and Fire Point using Pensky Marten Apparatus
 Determination of Flash and Fire Point using Abel Apparatus
 Determination of Density and Dynamic Viscosity of oil using Redwood Viscometer
5. Solar Radiation measurement
6. Performance testing of Solar Air Heater
7. Performance testing of Solar Still
8. Performance Study on Concentric Collectors
9. Study of biogas plant
ENERGY CONSERVATION
1. Performance Test of Parallel flow and Counter flow Heat Exchanger
2. Energy consumption measurement of lighting systems
3. Performance Test on Vapour Compression Refrigeration Systems
4. Performance Test on Air conditioning Systems
12
ADVANCED ENERGY SYSTEMS
1. Thermal Storage Systems
06
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15
Regulations’
EEC21 - SOLAR ENERGY AND UTILIZATION
L
3
T
0
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Knowledge on radiation principles with respective solar energy estimation
2. Be familiar with various collecting techniques of solar energy and storage
3. PV technology principles and techniques of various solar cells / materials for energy
conversion will be learnt
4. Economical and environmental merits of solar energy for variety of applications will be
understood
P
0
C
3
UNIT - I SOLAR RADIATION
09
Source of radiation – Sun earth relationship- extra terrestrial radiation.– Atmospheric attenuation –
Terrestrial radiation-radiation on a horizontal surfaces and inclined planes - relations between
monthly, daily and hourly radiation and components of the radiations– solar charts – Critical
radiation-Measurement of global, direct and diffuse solar radiation- pyroheliometer, pyrano meter,
pyro geo meter, sunshine recorder – an overview of solar radiation data in India.
UNIT II SOLAR COLLECTORS
09
Design considerations – classification- Flat plate collectors- air heating collectors liquid heating –
Temperature distributions- Heat removal rate- Useful energy gain – Losses in the collectors-for
efficiency of flat plate collectors – selective surfaces – tubular solar energy collectors analysis of
concentric tube collector – testing of flat plate collectors. Concentric collectors - Limits to
concentration – concentrator mounting – tracking mechanism - performance analysis focusing solar
concentrators: Heliostats.
.
UNIT III PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS
09
Conversion of Solar energy into Electricity - Photovoltaic Effect, Photovoltaic material - Solar Cell –
Module – Silicon solar cell, Efficiency limits, Variation of efficiency with band-gap and temperature,
Efficiency measurements, High efficiency cells, Recent developments in Solar Cells- PV systems applications
UNIT IV ENERGY STORAGE
09
Sensible Heat Storage – Liquid media storage – Solid media storage – Latent heat storage - Phase
change materials – Chemical storage
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS OF SOLAR HEAT
09
Solar Thermal Power Plant, Solar Desalination, Solar Water Heating, Solar Air Heating, Solar
Drying, Solar Cooking, Solar Greenhouse technology: Fundamentals, design, modeling and
applications
Total: 45 Periods
REFERENCES
1. L D. Partain, L M. Fraas, “Solar Cells and Their Applications”,2nd Edition, John Wiley and
Sons, 2010
2. Soteris Kalogirou, “Solar Energy Engineering”, Academic Press, 2009
3. Sukhatme S P, “Solar Energy, 3rd Edition”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008
4. Duffie, J. A. and Beckman, W. A., “Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes”,3 rd Edition,
Wiley, 2006
5. A Luque, S Hegedus, “Handbook of Photovoltaic Science and Engineering”, John Wiley and
Sons, 2003
6. G. N. Tiwari, “Solar Energy Fundamentals, Design, Modelling and Applications”, Narosa
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2002
7. H.P. Garg and J. Prakash, “Solar Energy- Fundamentals & Applications”, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2000.
16
Regulations’
EEC22 - WIND ENERGY TECHNOLOGY
L
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. The fundamentals of wind energy and its conversion system will be
2. To be familiar with the wind measurement techniques
3. Be aware of the concepts of aerodynamics, wind farms and cycles
T
0
P
0
C
3
comprehended
UNIT I WIND CHARACTERISTICS AND RESOURCES
09
Characteristics of the Wind Resource- Characteristics of the Atmospheric Boundary Layer-Wind Data
Analysis and Resource Estimation-Wind Turbine Energy Production Estimates Using Statistical
Techniques-Regional Wind Resource Assessment-Wind Prediction and Forecasting-Wind
Measurement and Instrumentation.
UNIT II AERODYNAMICS OF WIND TURBINES
09
One-dimensional Momentum Theory and the Betz Limit-Ideal Horizontal Axis Wind Turbine with
Wake Rotation-Airfoils and General Concepts of Aerodynamics-Blade Design for Modern Wind
Turbines-Momentum Theory and Blade Element Theory-Blade Shape for Ideal Rotor without Wake
Rotation-General Rotor Blade Shape Performance Prediction-Blade Shape for Optimum Rotor with
Wake Rotation-Generalized Rotor Design Procedure-Simplified HAWT Rotor Performance
Calculation Procedure-Effect of Drag and Blade Number on Optimum Performance-Computational
and Aerodynamic Issues in Aerodynamic Design-Aerodynamics of Vertical Axis Wind Turbines
UNIT III MODERN WIND TURBINE CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEM
09
Details of Pitch and Yaw Systems & Control Algorithms, Protections used & Safety Consideration in
Wind turbines, Wind Turbine Monitoring with Error codes, SCADA & Databases: Remote
Monitoring and Generation Reports, Operation & Maintenance for Product Life Cycle, Balancing
technique (Rotor & Blade), FACTS control & LVRT & New trends for new Grid Codes
UNIT IV CONCEPT OF WIND FARMS
09
Wind Farms - Site Preparation-Installation and Operation Issues - Wind Farms in Electrical GridsTypical Grid-connected Turbine Operation. Environmental concerns: Pollution free power; Noise;
birds; Aesthetics, Radio waves, interference, Rainfall,
UNIT V ECONOMICS ANALYSIS
09
Economic Assessment of Wind Energy Systems- Capital Costs of Wind Energy Systems- Operation
and Maintenance Costs- Value of Wind Energy- Economic Analysis Methods- Wind Energy Market
Considerations
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1.
T Burton, et.al, “Wind Energy Handbook”,2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2011
J.F. Manwell, et.al, “Wind Energy Explained”,2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2009
2.
3. D. A. Spera, “Wind Turbine Technology: Fundamental concepts of Wind Turbine
Engineering”, 2nd Edition, ASME Press, 2009
4. William W. Peng, “Fundamentals of turbomachinery”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008
5. Mukund. R. Patel, “Wind and solar power systems” 2nd Edition, Taylor & Francis, 2006
17
Regulations’
EEC23 - BIO ENERGY E N G IN E E RI N G
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Knowledge on the types of biomass, its surplus availability and characteristics.
2. Capability to analyze the technologies available for conversion of biomass to energy in
terms of its technical competence and economic implications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
08
Biomass: types – advantages and drawbacks – Indian scenario – characteristics – carbon
neutrality – conversion mechanisms – fuel assessment studies
UNIT II BIO METHANATION
08
Microbial systems – phases in biogas production – parameters affecting gas production – effect
of additives on biogas yield – possible feed stocks. Biogas plants – types – design – constructional
details and comparison – biogas appliances – Burner, illumination and power generation – effect
on engine performance. Kinetics and mechanism- High rate digesters for industrial waste water
treatment.
10
UNIT III COMBUSTION
Perfect, complete and incomplete – equivalence ratio – fixed Bed, fluid Bed – fuel and ash
handling – steam cost comparison with conventional fuels. Briquetting: types of Briquetting –
merits and demerits – feed requirements and preprocessing – advantages – drawbacks
UNIT IV GASIFICATION
10
Types – comparison – application – performance evaluation – economics – dual fuel engines – 100
% Gas Engines – engine characteristics on gas mode – gas cooling and cleaning train.
UNIT V PYROLYSIS AND CARBONIZATION
09
Pyrolysis - Types – process governing parameters – differential thermal analysis – differential
scanning calorimetry – Typical yield rates. Effect of carbonisation temperature on yield and
composition of charcoal- Industrial safety in carbonization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. A.A. Vertès, N Qureshi, H Yukawa, “Biomass to biofuels: strategies for global
industries”, John Wiley and Sons, 2009
2. J D. Wall, C S. Harwood, A L. Demain ,” Bioenergy”, ASM Press, 2008
3. D.M. Mousdale, “Biofuels”, CRC Press, 2008
4. Nijaguna, B.T.,” Biogas Technology”, New Age International publishers (P) Ltd.,2006
5. Rezaiyan. J and N. P. Cheremisinoff, “Gasification Technologies, A Primer for Engineers
and Scientists”, Taylor & Francis, 2005
6. IEEE Journals for “Power, Energy, & Industry Applications”
18
Regulations’
EEC24 - ENERGY LABORATORY – II
L
0
I Cycle (using ANSYS)
T
0
P
3
C
2
24 Periods
Steady State Conductive Heat Transfer Analysis in a cubical block
Analysis of Thermal Mixed Boundary for an infinitely long block
Analysis of Transient Thermal Heat Conduction for an infinitely long block
Study of temperature distribution along a Straight rectangular stainless steel cooling fin
Determination of heat conducted by a Cooling Spine
Laminar Flow Analysis in a 2D Duct
Analysis of flow in a System of Pipes to compute the velocity distribution
II Cycle (using TRNSYS)
21 Periods
Performance analysis of Solar PV panel
Performance analysis of Flat Plate Collecting System
Performance analysis of Evacuated Tube Collecting System
Performance analysis of Concentrated Solar Thermal Collecting System
Simulation of Solar Water Heating System
Cooling tower Analysis
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
19
Regulations’
EEE2A - HYDRO POWER TECHNOLOGY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to understand the basic concepts of aerodynamics, horizontal and vertical axis wind
turbines, small hydro system components and design
2. Ability to develop prototype systems
3. Ability to select and analyze the particular turbinse for specific need
UNIT I HYDROLOGY
09
Overview of Hydropower systems-Preliminary Investigation- Rainfall and Run of measurementsHydrographs- flow duration graph and mass storage graphs- Determination of site selection- types
hydro electric power plants- General arrangements and Layouts- Preparation of Reports and
Estimates-Review of World Resources-Basic Factors in Economic Analysis of Hydropower projectsProject Feasibility-Load Prediction and Planned Development.
UNIT II DEVELOPMENT OF PROTO TYPE SYSTEMS
12
Advances in Planning, Design and Construction of Hydroelectric Power Stations-Trends in
Development of Generating Plant and Machinery-Plant Equipment for pumped Storage SchemesSome aspects of Management and Operations-Updating and Refurbishing of Turbines-Case Studies
UNIT III SELECTION AND ANALYSIS OF TURBINES
07
Measurement of pressure head, Velocity- Various parameters for finding out the potential of Hydro
Energy- Selection of turbines based on Specific quantities- Performance characteristics – Testing of
hydraulic turbines - Governing of Impulse and reaction turbines.
UNIT IV HYDRO POWER STATION OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE
SHOOTING
10
Governing of Power Turbines-Functions of Turbine Governor-Condition for Governor Stability-Surge
Tank Oscillation and Speed Regulative Problem of Turbine Governing in Future Planning, Design
and Construction of Hydroelectric Power Stations-Remaining Lifecycle Analysis.
UNIT - V SMALL, MINI AND MICRO HYDRO POWER PLANTS TURBINES
09
Introduction – Analysis of Small, mini and micro hydro turbines – Economical and Electrical Aspects
of Small, mini and micro hydro turbines- potential developments – Design and reliability of Small,
mini and micro hydro turbines – Case Study. A compulsory Seminar/ Assignment on Design/Case
Study/Analysis/Application in any one the Small, Mini and Micro Hydro Power Plants and
Components (viz..Turbines, Controls, and Storage etc.,)
Total: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. P.K Nag ,”Power plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008
2. A.K.Raja, Amit Prakash Srivastava, “Power Plant Engineering”, New Age International, 2007
3. Finn R. Førsund , “Hydropower economics”, Springer, 2007
4. Scott Davis,” Microhydro: clean power from water”, New Society Publishers, 2004.
20
Regulations’
EEE2B - NUCLEAR ENGINEERING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Knowledge on fundamentals of nuclear reactions
2. Be able to learn nuclear fuels cycles, characteristics. Fundamental principles governing
nuclear fission chain reaction and fusion
3. Awareness on future nuclear reactor systems with respect to generation of energy, fuel
breeding, incineration of nuclear material and safety.
UNIT I NUCLEAR REACTIONS
09
Mechanism of nuclear fission - nuclides - radioactivity – decay chains – neutron reactions - the fission
process - reactors - types of fast breeding reactor - design and construction of nuclear reactors - heat
transfer techniques in nuclear reactors - reactor shielding.
UNIT II REACTOR MATERIALS
09
Nuclear Fuel Cycles - characteristics of nuclear fuels - Uranium - production and purification of
Uranium - conversion to UF4 and UF6 - other fuels like Zirconium, Thorium - Berylium.
UNIT III REPROCESSING
09
Nuclear fuel cycles - spent fuel characteristics - role of solvent extraction in reprocessing - solvent
extraction equipment.
UNIT IV SEPARATION OF REACTOR PRODUCTS
09
Processes to be considered - 'Fuel Element' dissolution - precipitation process – ion exchange - redox purex - TTA - chelation -U235 - Hexone - TBP and thorax Processes - oxidative slaging
and electro - refinng - Isotopes - principles of Isotope separation.
UNIT V WASTE DISPOSAL AND RADIATION PROTECTION
09
Types of nuclear wastes - safety control and pollution control and abatement - international
convention on safety aspects - radiation hazards prevention.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Raymond LeRoy Murray, “Nuclear energy: an introduction to the concepts, systems, and
applications of nuclear processes”,6th Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2009
2. John R. Lamarsh, “Introduction to nuclear reactor theory”, American Nuclear Society, 2002
3. Glasstone, S. and Sesonske, A, “Nuclear Reactor Engineering”, 4th Edition,
Springer, 1994.
4. Winterton, R.H.S., “Thermal Design of Nuclear Reactors”, Pergamon Press, 1981.
21
Regulations’
EEE2C - INDUSTRIAL ENERGY MANAGEMENT
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Be aware of present energy scenario and the need for energy conservation and various energy
conservation measures
2. Concepts of basic measurement, instruments for measuring various parameters in energy
systems, energy auditing, digital data processing, computer data processing, etc. will be
familiarized
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
09
Energy Scenario - world and India. Energy Resources Availability in India. Energy consumption
pattern. Energy conservation potential in various Industries and commercial establishments. Energy
intensive industries - an overview. Energy conservation and energy efficiency – needs and
advantages. Energy auditing - types, methodologies, barriers.Role of energy manager – Energy audit
questionnaire - Energy Conservation Act 2003.
UNIT II INSTRUMENTS FOR ENERGY AUDITING
09
Instrument characteristics – sensitivity, readability, accuracy, precision, hystersis. Error and
calibration. Measurement of flow, velocity, pressure, temperature, speed, Lux, power and
humidity.Analysis of stack, water quality, power and fuel quality.
UNIT III STEAM SYSTEMS
09
Properties of steam - Steam distribution - Assessment of steam distribution losses Steam leakages,
Steam trapping - Condensate recovery and flash steam utilisation system, Identifying opportunities for
energy savings Thermal Insulation. Boiler –efficiency testing, excess air control
UNIT IV WASTE HEAT RECOVERY
09
Recuperators, regenerators, heat pipes, heat pumps. Cogeneration - concept, options (steam/gas
turbines/diesel engine based), selection criteria, control strategy. Heat exchanger networking- concept
of pinch, target setting, problem table approach, composite curves. Demand side management.
UNIT V ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
09
Demand control, power factor correction, load scheduling/shifting, Motor drives- motor efficiency
testing, energy efficient motors, motor speed control. Lighting- lighting levels, efficient options,
fixtures, day lighting, timers, Energy efficient windows. Energy conservation in Pumps, Fans (flow
control), Compressed Air Systems, Refrigeration & air conditioning systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. “Industrial Energy Conservation Manuals”, MIT Press, Mass, 2007.
2. I.G.C.Dryden, Butterworths, “the Efficient Use of Energy”, London, 2001
3. W.C.Turner, Wiley, “Energy Management Handbook”, New York, 2010.
4. “Technology Menu for Efficient energy use- Motor drive systems”, Prepared by National
Productivity Council and Center for & Environmental Studies- Princeton Univ 1993.
5. Guide book for “National Certification Examination for Energy Managers and Energy
Auditors” (Could be downloaded from www.energymanagertraining.com)
22
Regulations’
EEE2D - COGENERATION AND WASTE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Importance of cogeneration in improving the overall efficiency, thus reducing fuel consumption,
improving economy and limiting global warming will be brought out
2. Capability to analyze the basic energy generation cycles
3. Detailed knowledge of concepts of cogeneration, its types and probable areas of applications
4. To study the significance of waste heat recovery systems and carry out its economic analysis
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
09
Introduction - principles of thermodynamics – cycles - topping - bottoming – combined cycle organic rankine cycles – performance indices of cogeneration systems – waste heat recovery – sources
and types – concept of tri generation.
UNIT II COGENERATION TECHNOLOGIES
09
Configuration and thermodynamic performance – steam turbine cogeneration systems – gas turbine
cogeneration systems – reciprocating IC engines cogeneration systems – combined cycles
cogeneration systems – advanced cogeneration systems: fuel cell, Stirling engines etc.,
UNIT III ISSUES AND APPLICATIONS OF COGENERATION TECHNOLOGIES
09
Cogeneration plants electrical interconnection issues – utility and cogeneration plant interconnection
issues – applications of cogeneration in utility sector – industrial sector – building sector – rural sector
– impacts of cogeneration plants – fuel, electricity and environment
UNIT IV WASTE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEMS
09
Election criteria for waste heat recovery technologies - recuperators - Regenerators - Economizers plate heat exchangers - thermic fluid heaters - Waste heat boilers classification, location, service
conditions, design Considerations - fluidized bed heat exchangers - heat pipe exchangers - heat pumps
– sorption systems.
UNIT V ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
09
Investment cost – economic concepts – measures of economic performance – procedure for economic
analysis – examples – procedure for optimized system selection and design – load curves - sensitivity
analysis – regulatory and financial frame work for cogeneration and waste heat recovery systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. R.Kehlhofer, B. Rukes, F. Hannemann, F. Stirnimann, “Combined-cycle gas & steam turbine
power plants,3rd Edition”, PennWell Books, 2009.
2. Steve Doty, Wayne C. Turner, “Energy management handbook”,7th Edition, The Fairmont
Press, Inc., 2009
3. A.Thumann, D. Paul Mehta, “Handbook of energy engineering”, 6th Edition, The Fairmont
Press, Inc., 2008
4. B.F.Kolanowski, “Small-scale cogeneration handbook”, 2nd Edition, Fairmont Press, 2003
5. M.P. Boyce, “Handbook for cogeneration and combined cycle power plants”, ASME Press,
2002
6. EDUCOGEN – “The European Educational tool for cogeneration”, Second Edition, 2001
23
Regulations’
EEE2E - ALTERNATIVE FUELS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to get an insight into the availability of petroleum based fuels, their progress and its
influence on environment.
2. Able to get an exposure to the need, production and technology of utilizing different
alternative liquid and gaseous fuels for transportation which include alcohol, biodiesel, CNG,
LPG, DME, DEE and hydrogen
UNIT I OVERVIEW
09
Introduction – Alternative fuels – Potential solid - liquid - and gaseous fuels. – Alcohols – ethanol,
methanol, M85, E85 and gashol – properties – SI engine combustion performance and emission
characteristics. Alcohols for CI engine – Alcohol fumigation – Dual fuel injection – Surface ignition
and spark ignition- storage, dispensing and safety – material compatibility.
UNIT II VEGETABLE OILS AND OTHER SIMILAR FUELS DERIVED
09
Vegetable oils- properties – advantages and disadvantages – Biodiesel – trans-esterification -Factors
affecting the process – Properties- Biodiesel blends – engine combustion, performance and emission
characteristics- material compatibility , other alternative liquid fuels – benzol – acetone – diethyl
ether.
UNIT III NATUARAL GAS AND LPG
09
Alternative gaseous fuels – natural gas and LPG – production – properties of natural gas and LPG –
CNG conversion kits – Advantages and disadvantages of NG and LPG – comparison of gasoline and
LPG – CNG and LPG fuel feed system – LPG & CNG for CI engine – methods of fuel induction
engine combustion, performance and emission characteristics.
UNIT IV HYDROGEN AS ALTERNATIVE FUEL
09
Hydrogen energy – properties , production , thermo- chemical methods – Hydrogen storage –
Delivery – conversion – safety – Hydrogen engines, methods of usage in SI and CI engine –
Hydrogen injection system – Hydrogen induction in SI engine.
UNIT V BIOGAS FOR IC ENGINES
09
Biogas – properties – Biogas for running IC engine – Biogas as vehicle fuel – biogas consumption –
engine performance and emission- Biomass gasification – producer gas – consumption – dual fuel
operation – engine performance and emission.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. D Tomes, P Lakshmanan., Biofuels: “Global Impact on Renewable Energy, Production
Agriculture, and Technological Advancements”, Springer, 2010
2. Ram B. Gupta, “Hydrogen fuel: production, transport, and storage”, CRC Press, 2009
3. Ganesan.V, - “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008
4. M.F. Hordeski, “Alternative fuels: the future of hydrogen”,2nd Edition, The Fairmont Press,
Inc., 2008
5. Sunggyu Lee, J.G.Speight, S.K.Loyalka, “Handbook of alternative fuel technologies”, CRC
Press, 2007.
6. B. T. Nijaguna, “Biogas Technology”, New Age International, 2006
24
Regulations’
EEE2F - SOLAR ARCHITECTURE
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Ability to elaborate the current trends in solar architecture and following key concepts: Solar
Passive Architecture and heat transfer in buildings
2. Able to understand the Natural Heating/Cooling concepts for Building, Earth to Air Heat
Exchanger, Thermal Comfort Requirements
3. Knowledge on Energy Conservation , Concept of Zero Energy Buildings
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
09
Bio-climatic classification of India, Passive Solar Passive Building and Green Building Concepts,
National Building Code, Energy Star Rating , Policies on Energy Efficient and Green buildings
UNIT II PASSIVE HEATING & COOLING CONCEPTS
09
Passive heating concepts: Direct heat gain, indirect heat gain, isolated gain and sunspaces, Solar
Green Houses, Solar Wall, Solar Trombe wall Evaporative cooling, radiative cooling, Application of
wind, water and earth for cooling, Shading, paints and cavity walls for cooling, Roof radiation traps,
Earth air-tunnel systems for cooling
UNIT III THERMAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN FOR HUMAN COMFORT
09
Thermal comfort, Criteria and various parameters, Psychometric chart, Thermal indices, Climate and
comfort zones, Concept of sol-air temperature and its significance, Calculation of instantaneous heat
gain through building envelope, Calculation of solar radiation on buildings, Building orientation,
Introduction to design of shading devices, Overhangs, Factors that affect energy use in buildings,
Ventilation and its significance, Air-conditioning systems,
UNIT IV HEAT TRANSMISSION IN BUILDINGS
09
Surface co-efficient: air cavity, internal and external surfaces, overall thermal transmittance, Wall and
windows, Heat transfer due to ventilation/infiltration, internal heat transfer, solar temperature,
Decrement factor, Phase lag, Day lighting, Estimation of Building loads: Steady state method,
network method, numerical method, correlations
UNIT V PASSIVE SOLAR DESIGNS OF BUILDING
09
Thumb rules for design of buildings and building codes, Typical design of selected buildings in
various climatic zones, Simulation Software’s for carrying out thermal design of buildings and
predicting performance
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. David Findley, “Solar Power for Your Home”, McGraw-Hill Professional, 2010
2. Jan F. Kreider, P Curtiss, Ari Rabl, “Heating and cooling of buildings: design for efficiency”,
2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2010.
3. Sue Reed, “Energy-Wise Landscape Design”, New Society Publishers, 2010
4. S Roaf, M Fuentes, S Thomas, “Ecohouse: a design guide”,3rd Edition, Architectural Press,
2007
5. DS Lal “Climatology”, Sharda Pustak Bhawan, Allahabad, 2003
6. Christian Schittich, “Solar architecture: strategies, visions, concepts”, Edition Detail, 2003
7. Daniel D. Chiras, “The solar house: passive heating and cooling”, Chelsea Green Publishing,
2002
25
Regulations’
EEE2G - FLUIDIZED BED SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Understand the concepts of fluidization and heat transfer in fluidized beds.
2. Able to understand the design principles and apply the same for industrial applications.
P
0
C
3
UNIT I FLUIDIZED BED BEHAVIOUR
12
Characterization of bed particles - comparison of different methods of gas – solid contacts.
Fluidization phenomena - regimes of fluidization – bed pressure drop curve.Two phase and wellmixed theory of fluidization.Particle entrainment and elutriation – unique features of circulating
fluidized beds.
UNIT II HEAT TRANSFER
06
Different modes of heat transfer in fluidized bed – bed to wall heat transfer – gas to solid heat transfer
– radiant heat transfer – heat transfer to immersed surfaces.Methods for improvement – external heat
exchangers – heat transfer and part load operations.
UNIT III COMBUSTION AND GASIFICATION
06
Fluidized bed combustion and gasification – stages of combustion of particles – performance - startup methods. Pressurized fluidized beds.
UNIT IV DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
09
Design of distributors – stoichiometric calculations – heat and mass balance – furnace design – design
of heating surfaces – gas solid separators.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS
12
Physical operations like transportation, mixing of fine powders, heat exchange, coating, drying and
sizing.Cracking and reforming of hydrocarbons, carbonization, combustion and gasification. Sulphur
retention and oxides of nitrogen emission control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Prabir Basu., “Combustion and gasification in fluidized beds”, CRC/Taylor & Francis, 2006
2. Simeon Oka, E. J. Anthony, “Fluidized bed combustion”, M. Dekker, 2004
3. Wen-ching Yang, “Handbook of fluidization and fluid-particle systems”, Marcel Dekker,
2003
4. C. K. Gupta, D. Sathiyamoorthy ,”Fluid bed technology in materials processing”, CRC Press,
1999
5. Otto Molerus, Karl-Ernst Wirth, “Heat transfer in fluidized beds”, Springer, 1997
26
Regulations’
EEE2H - ADVANCED POWER PLANT ENGINEERING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to understand the energy scenario and the environmental issues related to the power
plants.
2. Familiarized with various improvements possible in steam cycles, gas power cycles.
3. Be aware of the advances in nuclear and MHD power plants.
4. Able to study the economic feasibility of various power plants.
UNIT I ANALYSIS OF STEAM POWER PLANTS (SPP):
09
Components of steam power plants, typical layout, Rankine Cycle – performance - energy analysis of
Rankine cycle - cycle improvements – Ideal reheat Rankine cycle - The Ideal Regenerative Rankine
Cycle - Open Feedwater Heaters - Closed Feedwater Heaters
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANTS (HEPP):
09
Components of HEPP, typical layout, Classification of Hydraulic Turbines - Pelton, Francis, Kaplan,
Propeller, Deriaz and Bulb turbines – specific speed – hydraulic efficiency and comparison Performance of turbines – Constant head characteristics, Constant speed characteristics and Constant
efficiency curves.
UNIT III ANALYSIS OF GAS TURBINE POWER PLANTS:
09
Gas turbine cycles – optimization – thermodynamic analysis of cycles – cycle improvements Intercoolers, reheaters, regenerators - operation and performance – layouts. - comparison with other
types of power plants.
UNIT IV NUCLEAR AND MHD POWER PLANTS
09
Overview of Nuclear power plants - radioactivity - fission process- reaction rates - elastic scattering
and slowing down - criticality calculations – critical heat flux - power reactors - nuclear safety. MHD
and MHD - steam power plants
UNIT V ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF POWER PLANT OPERATION:
09
Load curves, load factor, diversity factors and their significance, Economic scheduling of power
stations. Interest and depreciation, Costs of electrical energy, Methods of determining depreciation
Tariff, characteristics and types of tariff. Economic efficiency - Payback period and Net-present value
methods to assess financial efficiency of power plants
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Nag, P.K., “Power Plant Engineering, 3rd Edition”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.
2. Arora and Domkundwar, “A course in Power Plant Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai and CO, 2004.
3. Philip Kiameh., “Power generation handbook”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004
4. Stan Kaplan, “Power Plant Characteristics and Costs”, Nova Science Publishers, Inc., 2010
5. R.K. Rajput , “A Textbook of Power Plant Engineering” , Laxmi Publications, 2005
27
Regulations’
EEE2J - MATERIALS SCIENCES AND ENGINEERING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Knowledge in advanced materials to make him aware of the vast selection of engineering
materials.
2. Able to analyze the crystal structure by knowing the bonding of materials.
3. Student will be well-versed with the magnetic, electrical and thermal properties of
materials.
UNIT I ADVANCED MATERIALS
06
Materials and Engineering, Types of materials - Metallic materials - Dual phase steels, High strength
low alloy (HSLA) steel, Transformation induced plasticity (TRIP) Steel,- Advanced structural
ceramics, WC, TIC, Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4, and diamond –properties, processing and applications - Future
trends in materials usage
UNIT II ATOMIC STRUCTURE AND BONDING
08
Structure of atoms- - Bohr’s atomic model-Sommerfeld’s extension of atomic structure; Electronic
structure - Electronic configuration and Quantum numbers; Shapes of s,p,d,f orbitals - Pauli’s
exclusion principle - Hund’s Rule of maximum multiplicity- Aufbau principle, , Types of atomic and
molecular bonding – Octet rule - Primary Bonds - Ionic Bonds, Covalent Bonds, Metallic Bonds Secondary Bonds - Permanent Dipole Bonds, Fluctuating Dipole Bonds
UNIT III CRYSTAL STRUCTURE AND CRYSTAL GEOMETRY
10
Space lattice, crystal systems and Bravais lattices, principal metallic crystal structures, Miller indices,
crystallographic planes and directions, comparisons of principle metallic crystal structures, volume
and density calculations, crystal structure analysis.
UNIT IV PHASE DIAGRAM AND PHASE TRANSFORMATION
09
Gibbs phase rule, Binary alloy system, Iron-iron carbide diagram, Heat treatment of steels and other
non ferrous materials Solidification, crystalline imperfections and diffusion in solids Electrical,
optical and mechanical properties of materials.
UNIT V MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF THE MATERIALS
12
Magnetic Properties - Definition of Magnetic Properties, Types of magneticbodies, Diamagnetism and
Pascal’s Constant, Russell-Saunders or LS Coupling, Multiple width Large compared to kT, Multiple
width small compared to kT,Stereo chemical applications of Magnetic Properties of the First
Transition Series, Determination of magnetic susceptibility by Gouy’s Method, Derivation of Van
Vleck formula for Susceptibility.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
REFERENCES:
1. W.D.Callister, Jr., "Materials Science and engineering", Wiley India (P) LTD., 2007
2. G.E.Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill book Company (UK) LTD., London,
1988
3. R.E.Reed-Hill; “Physical Metallurgy Principles“ 4th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2003
4. Willam F. Smith, “Foundations of Materials Science and Engineering”, McGraw-Hill series
in materials science, third edition, 2003
5. Buschow K.H.J. (Ed.), “Handbook of Magnetic Materials”, Amsterdam : Elsevier
28
Regulations’
EEE2K - ADVANCES IN METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to apply their knowledge of the fundamental concepts and principles in
materials and engineering in the development and design of new product, to ensure
quality assurance in the practice of material engineering.
2. Able to characterize the synthesized materials.
3. Students will gain fundamental understanding of electrical conduction (transport) in
solids, major properties of bulk and nanostructured superconductors.
4. Able to create a scientific basis to ensure the safe and responsible development of
engineered nanoparticles and nanotechnology-based materials and products
UNIT I ADVANCED MATERIALS AND TOOLS
09
Smart materials, exhibiting ferroelectric, piezoelectric, optoelectric, semiconducting behavior, lasers
and optical fibers, photoconductivity and superconductivity, nanomaterials, synthesis, properties and
applications.
UNIT II PHYSICAL METHODS FOR CHARACTERIZATION
09
X-ray diffraction, Powder diffraction, Single crystal X-ray diffraction, Electro-optical and related
techniques like SEM, TEM, EDS, WDS/EPMA etc.; Spectroscopic techniques - Vibrational, UVvisible and Electron resonance spectroscopies. Thermal analysis (Differential thermal analysis,
Thermogravimetric analysis, Differential scanning calorimery)
UNIT III ELECTRONIC MATERIALS
09
Dielectric properties, Polarization mechanism, Frequency and Temperature effects, Electrical
breakdown, Classification of ferroelectric materials, Piezoelectricity, Capacitor dielectric materials,
Insulating materials and Pyroelectric materials, ceramic composites as capacitors & sensors.
UNIT IV SUPERCONDUCTIVITY
09
History and background of superconductivity, Superconducting phenomenon, low temperature
Superconductors, Bardeen – Cooper and Schrieffer Theory (BCS), Cooper pair, High temperature
Superconductivity. Applications of Superconductors.
UNIT V NANOMATERIALS & NANOTECHNOLOGY
09
Top down and bottom up approaches, classification of nanomaterials, carbon nanotubes (CNT),
particulate reinforced metal/ceramic/polymer nanocomposites, Characterization of nanomaterials,
Applications of nanotechnology in medicine, automobile sector, Bragg reflector, Butterfly-wings,
Different applications.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
REFERENCES:
1. William F. Smith – “Foundation of Materials Science and Engineering”, Mc Graw- Hill
International Edition, 2nd Edition, 1993.
2. S. O. Kasap – “Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices”, Tata Mc Graw-Hill
Publication, 2nd Edition, 2002.
3. B.D. Cullity, “Elements of X-ray Diffraction (For X-rays) “, 3rd edition, Prentice-Hall, Upper
Saddle River 2001
29
Regulations’
4. C.N. Banwell, “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy“, 4th edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, 1994.
5. Paul Gabbott, “Principles and Applications of Thermal Analysis”, Publisher WileyBlackwell, 2007.
6. A.V. Narlikar, “Frontiers in Superconducting Materials”, Editor, A.V. Narlikar, Publisher
Springer, ISBN 978-3-540-27294-6.
7. Dieter Vollath, Nanomaterials: “An introduction to synthesis, properties and applications”,
Wiley- CVH.
8. Kenneth J. Klabunde, Nanoscale “Materials in Chemistry”, Publisher- Wiley- Interscience.
30
Regulations’
EEE3A DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to understand the basic principles of Heat transfer & Heat Exchangers and applications
2. Able to understand various types of flows and disturbances
3. Able to design Shell& Tube and Double-Pipe Heat Exchanger
4. Able to design Compact and Plate Heat Exchanger
5. Able to design Condenser and performance analysis of Cooling Towers
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF HEAT EXCHANGER
09
Introduction – Modes of Heat transfer - Temperature distribution and its implications types – Heat
exchangers – Classification - Regenerators and Recuperators – Analysis of heat exchangers –
Logarithmic Mean temperature difference – Number of transfer Units – Applications.
UNIT II FLOW AND STRESS ANALYSIS
09
Flow – types – Disturbances in flow - Effect of turbulence – friction factor – Pressure loss – stress in
tubes – Fouling – Process – types of fouling – control strategies - thermal stresses – types - shear
stresses
UNIT II DOUBLE PIPE AND SHELL & TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER
09
Introduction to Double pipe heat exchangers – Types – Bare inner tube – finned inner tube - Design –
Applications - Shell and tube heat exchangers - Types – Design – sizing of heat exchangers – Pressure
drop calculations - Applications
UNIT IV COMPACT AND PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
09
Introduction to Compact and Plate heat exchanger - Types – merits and demerits – design of compact
heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers – performance influencing parameters - limitations.
UNIT V CONDENSERS AND COOLING TOWERS
09
Condensers – Types – Shell & tube – Plate condenser - Design - Cooling tower – types – Natural draft
– Mechanical draft - performance characteristics – Range and approach of a cooling tower
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. R.W.Serth, “Process Heat Transfer: Principles and Applications”, Academic Press, 2007
2. R. K. Shah, D P. Sekulić, “Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design”, John Wiley and
Sons, 2003
3. Sadik Kakac and Hongtan Liu, “Heat Exchangers Selection, Rating and Thermal Design”,
CRC Press, 2002
4. T. Kuppan, “Heat exchanger design handbook”, Marcel Dekker, 2000
31
Regulations’
EEE3B ADVANCED THERMAL STORAGE TECHNOLOGIES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Familiar with the various types of thermal storage systems and the storage materials
2. Ability to develop the model and analyze the sensible and latent heat storage units
3. Be aware of various applications of thermal storage systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
08
Necessity of thermal storage – types-energy storage devices – comparison of energy storage
technologies - seasonal thermal energy storage - storage materials.
UNIT II SENSIBLE HEAT STORAGE SYSTEM
09
Basic concepts and modeling of heat storage units - modeling of simple water and rock bed storage
system – pressurized water storage system for power plant applications – packed beds.
UNIT III REGENERATORS
10
Parallel flow and counter flow regenerators – finite conductivity model – non – linear model –
transient performance – step changes in inlet gas temperature – step changes in gas flow rate –
parameterization of transient response – heat storage exchangers.
UNIT IV LATENT HEAT STORAGE SYSTEMS
09
Modeling of phase change problems – temperature based model - enthalpy model - porous medium
approach - conduction dominated phase change – convection dominated phase change.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS
09
Specific areas of application of energy storage – food preservation – waste heat recovery – solar
energy storage – green house heating – power plant applications – drying and heating for process
industries.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Ibrahim Dincer and Mark A. Rosen, “Thermal Energy Storage Systems and Applications”,
John Wiley & Sons 2010.
2. A Thumann, D. Paul Mehta , “Handbook of energy engineering“, 6th Edition, The Fairmont
Press, Inc., 2008
3. Halime Ö Paksoy, “Thermal energy storage for sustainable energy consumption”, Springer,
2007
32
Regulations’
EEE3C MATERIALS FOR ENERGY APPLICATIONS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to understand the properties and characteristics of materials used in energy applications
2. Basic design concepts and technologies for manufacturing the solar cells will be acquired
3. Be familiar about various heat storage media viz., rock-bed, earth, Aquifers etc.,
UNIT I MATERIALS
09
Glazing materials, Properties and Characteristics of Materials, Reflection from surfaces, Selective
Surfaces: Ideal coating characteristics, Types and applications, Anti-reflective coating, Preparation
and characterization. Reflecting Surfaces and transparent materials. Types of Insulation and properties
UNIT II PHYSICS OF SOLAR CELLS
09
Intrinsic, extrinsic and compound semiconductors, Electrical conductivity, Density of electrons and
holes, Carrier transport: Drift, diffusion, Absorption of light, Recombination process, Materials for
Photovoltaic’s Conversion, Si and Non-Si materials, crystalline, semi-crystalline, Polycrystalline and
Amorphous materials, p-n junction: homo and hetero junctions, Metal-semiconductor interface
UNIT III TECHNOLOGY FOR SI EXTRACTION
09
Purification, Method of doping and junction fabrication, Cell fabrication and metallization techniques:
Preparation of metallurgical, electronic and solar grade Silicon, Production of single crystal Silicon:
Procedure of masking, photolithography and etching, Design of a complete silicon, GaAs, InP solar
cell
UNIT IV SENSIBLE HEAT STORAGE MATERIALS
09
Stratified storage systems, Rock-bed storage systems, Thermal storage in buildings, Earth storage,
Energy storage in aquifers, Heat storage in SHS systems, Aquifers storage
UNIT V PHASE CHANGE MATERIALS, PIEZOELECTRICITY AND FERRO
ELECTRICITY
09
Selection criteria of Phase change, Materials use in Solar heating or cooling, Research Status Optical
properties, Interaction of solids with radiation, Luminescence, Photoconductivity
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. İbrahim Dinçer, Marc Rosen “Thermal Energy Storage“, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons,
2010
2. WD Callister, Jr, “Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction”, John Wiley, New
York, 2010
3. Robert A. Huggins, “Energy Storage”, Springer, 2010
4. Srinivasan, “Engg Materials And Mettalurgy”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
2010
5. A Ter-Gazarian, “Energy Storage for Power Systems”, Peter Peregrinus Ltd London, 1994
6. R Narayan, B Viswanathan, “Chemical and Electrochemical Energy System”, Universities
Press, 1998
33
Regulations’
EEE3D NANOTECHNOLOGY AND NANO ELECTRONICS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. A scientific basis to ensure the safe and responsible development of engineered
nanoparticles and nanotechnology-based materials and products.
2. Better knowledge of the risks of nanomaterials for health and the environment will
form a solid basis to avoid unnecessary damage and loss of investments; and allow
for a sustainable development of the nanotechnology industries and markets.
3. Student will be able to explore, develop, characterize and evaluate unique nanoscale
packaging materials for thin film passive components.
4. Familiarize students with semiconductors and devices including the P-N junction, and
the transistors.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF SOLID STATE ENGINEERING:
09
Future of semiconductor device and research, Applications in food, energy, transportation,
communication, entertainment, health and medicine etc. Necessity of innovative technology and
prospect for future.
UNIT II CRYSTALLINE PROPERTIES OF SOLID:
09
Crystal lattice and seven crystal systems, The unit cell concept, The Weigner-Seitz cell, Bravais
lattices, Space and point groups, Miller indices, reciprocal lattice, Brillouin zone.
UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR HETEROSTRUCTURES AND LOW-DIMENSIONAL
QUANTUM STRUCTURES:
09
Energy bands, Application of model solid theory, Anderson model for heterojunctions, Multiple
quantum wells (MQWs) and super lattices, Two-dimensional nanostructure: quantum well, Onedimensional nanostructure: quantum wire, Zero-dimensional nanostructure: quantum dot, Optical
properties of low-dimensional structures, Examples and applications in real world.
UNIT IV FABRICATION OF NANOSTRUCTURES:
09
Basic compound semiconductors, Bulk single crystal growth techniques, Epitaxial growth techniques,
Physical vapor deposition and sputtering, Thermodynamics and kinetics of growths, Nan scale growth
modes
UNIT V CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES:
09
Structural, X-ray diffraction, Electron microscopy, Energy dispersive analysis using X-rays, X-ray
photoelectron spectroscopy, Secondary ion mass spectroscopy, Rutherford backscattering, Scanning
probe microscopy, Optical, Photoluminescence spectroscopy, Absorbance measurement, Raman
spectroscopy, Fourier transform spectroscopy.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
REFERENCES:
1. M. Razeghi, “Fundamentals of Solid State Engineering“, 2nd Edition Springer, 2006
2. W. R. Fahrner, “Nanotechnology and Nan electronics: Materials, Devices, Measurement
Techniques” Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2005
3. R. W. Kelsall, I. W. Hamley, and M. Geoghegan, “Nanoscale Science and Technology” John
Wiley & Sons Ltd, England, 2005
4. B.D. Cullity, “Elements of X-ray Diffraction (For X-rays), 3rd edition”., Prentice-Hall, Upper
Saddle River, 2001
34
Regulations’
EEE3E SOLAR REFRIGERATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Able to understand the Basic Thermodynamic Modelling, Design Studies and Evaluation
Methods for Solar Cooling Systems.
2. Familiar with the economical use of the systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
09
Potential and scope of solar cooling. Types of solar cooling systems, solar collectors and storage
systems for solar refrigeration and airconditioning.
UNIT II VAPOUR ABSORPTION AND COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 09
Solar operation of vapour absorption – Lithium Bromide –Water Absorption system – Aqua
Ammonia Absorption system Intermitent Absorption Refrigeration system – Vapour compression
refrigeration cycles and their assessment.
UNIT III THERMODYNAMIC MODELLING
09
Thermal modelling and computer simulation for continuous and intermittent solar refrigeration and
airconditioning systems.
UNIT IV SOLAR COOLING SYSTEMS
09
Solar dessicant cooling systems. Open cycle absorption/ desorption solar cooling alternatives.
Advanced solar cooling systems. Refrigerant storage for solar absorption cooling systems.
UNIT V ECONOMICS
Solar thermoelectric refrigeration and airconditioning. Solar economics of cooling systems.
09
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ursula Eicker, “Low Energy Cooling for Sustainable Buildings”, John Wiley and Sons, 2009
2. Hans-Martin Henning, “Solar-assisted air conditioning in buildings: a handbook for
planners”, Springer, 2007
3. M. Santamouris, D. Asimakopoulos, “Passive cooling of buildings”, Earthscan, 1996
4. A. A. M. Sayigh, J. C. McVeigh, “Solar air conditioning and refrigeration”, Pergamon Press,
1992
35
Regulations’
EEE3F FUEL CELLS AND HYDROGEN ENERGY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Knowledge on the hydrogen production methodologies, possible applications and various
storage options
2. Ability to converse about the working of a typical fuel cell, its types and to elaborate on its
thermodynamics and kinetics
3. Able to analyze the cost effectiveness and eco-friendliness of Fuel Cells
UNIT I FUEL CELL BASICS
09
Fuel cell definition, Difference between batteries and fuel cells, fuel cell history, components of fuel
cells, principle of working of fuel cells Fuel cell thermodynamics - second law analysis of fuel cells,
efficiency of fuel cells fuel cell electrochemistry - Nernst equation, Electrochemical kinetics, ButlerVolmer equation
UNIT II FUEL CELL TYPES
09
Classification by operating temperature/electrolyte type, Fuel Cell Performance, Activation, Ohmic
and Concentration over potential
UNIT III FUEL CELL DESIGN AND COMPONENTS
09
Cell components, stack components, system components Overview of intermediate/high temperature
fuel cells - Solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC), Molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC), Phosphoric acid fuel
cells (PAFC) Polymer Electrolyte fuel cells ,Heat and mass transfer in polymer electrolyte fuel cells,
water management in PEFCs, Current issues in PEFCs, Direct methanol fuel cells (DMFC) Electrochemical kinetics methanol oxidation, Current issues in MFCs, Fuel crossover in DMFCs,
Water management in DMFCs, high methanol concentration operation, limiting current density
UNIT IV HYDROGEN PRODUCTION METHODS
09
Production of hydrogen from fossil fuels, electrolysis, thermal decomposition, photochemical and
photo-catalytic methods.
UNIT V HYDROGEN STORAGE METHODS
Metal hydrides, metallic alloy hydrides, carbon nano-tubes, sea as source of deuterium.
09
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
REFERENCES
1. A Faghri & Y Zhang, “Transport Phenomena in Multiphase Systems”, Elsevier 2006
2. S Srinivasan, “Fuel Cells: From Fundamentals to Applications”, Springer 2006
3. O’Hayre, SW Cha, W Colella and FB Prinz, “Fuel Cell Fundamentals”, Wiley, 2005
4. Xianguo Li, “Principles of Fuel Cells”, Taylor and Francis, 2005
5. J Larminie and A Dicks, “Fuel Cell Systems Explained, 2nd Edition”, Wiley,2003
36
www.nec.edu.in
REGULATIONS - 2013
DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
M.E. – MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING
Regulations’
Curriculum & Syllabi of M.E. (Manufacturing Engg.)
REGULATIONS - 2013
M.E., MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING
SEMESTER –I
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
THEORY
1
PEC11
Numerical Methods and Graph Theory
2
PEC12
Advanced Materials Technology
Automated and Computer Integrated
3
PEC13
Manufacturing Systems
4
PEC14
Polymers and Composite Materials
5
PEC15
Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics
S.NO
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
Metal Cutting Theory and Practice
3
0
0
3
Advanced Computing Laboratory
0
0
3
2
18
1
3
21
L
T
P
C
Metal Forming Processes
3
0
0
3
Manufacturing Metrology and Quality Control
Composite Materials and Mechanics
3
3
0
1
0
0
3
4
4
Elective - I
3
0
0
3
5
Elective - II
3
0
0
3
6
Elective - III
3
0
0
3
Metrology and Materials Testing Laboratory
0
0
3
2
18
1
3
21
6
PEC16
PRACTICAL
7
PEC17
TOTAL
SEMESTER –II
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
PEC21
2
3
PEC22
PEC23
PRACTICAL
7
PEC24
COURSE TITLE
TOTAL
2
Regulations’
SEMESTER –III
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
L
T
P
C
Elective – IV
3
0
0
3
2
Elective – V
3
0
0
3
3
Elective – VI
3
0
0
3
Project Work Phase-I
0
0
12
6
12
15
THEORY
1
PRACTICAL
4
PEC31
COURSE TITLE
TOTAL
9
0
SEMESTER –IV
COURSE
CODE
PRACTICAL
1
PEC41
S.NO
COURSE TITLE
Project Work Phase – II
TOTAL
L
T
P
C
0
0
0
0
24
24
12
12
Total Credits to Be Earned For the Award of the Degree: 21+21+15+12 = 69
3
Regulations’
REGULATIONS 2013
CURRICULUM & SYLLABI OF PART TIME
M.E., MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING
SEMESTER – I
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
THEORY
1
PEC11
Numerical Methods and Graph Theory
S.NO
2
PEC14
PRACTICAL
3
PEC17
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
Polymers and Composite Materials
3
0
0
3
Advanced Computing Laboratory
0
0
3
2
6
1
3
9
L
T
P
C
Metal Forming Processes
Manufacturing Metrology and Quality Control
Composite Materials and Mechanics
3
3
3
0
0
1
0
0
0
3
3
4
Metrology and Materials Testing Laboratory
TOTAL
0
9
0
1
3
3
2
12
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
TOTAL
SEMESTER – II
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
PEC21
1
2
PEC22
3
PEC23
PRACTICAL
S.NO
4
PEC24
COURSE TITLE
SEMESTER – III
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
S.NO
1
PEC12
Advanced Materials Technology
3
0
0
3
2
PEC13
3
0
0
3
3
PEC15
Automated and Computer Integrated Manufacturing
Systems
Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics
3
0
0
3
4
PEC16
Metal Cutting Theory and Practice
3
0
0
3
12
0
0
12
TOTAL
4
Regulations’
SEMESTER – IV
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
2
3
S.NO
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
3
3
3
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
9
L
T
P
C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
9
0
0
12
12
6
15
L
T
P
C
0
0
24
12
0
0
24
12
Elective - I
Elective - II
Elective - III
TOTAL
SEMESTER – V
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
2
3
PRACTICAL
4
PEC31
S.NO
COURSE TITLE
Elective - IV
Elective - V
Elective - VI
Project Work Phase – I
TOTAL
SEMESTER –VI
COURSE
CODE
PRACTICAL
S.NO
1
PEC41
COURSE TITLE
Project Work Phase – II
TOTAL
Total Credits to Be Earned For the Award of the Degree: 9+12+12+9+15+12 = 69
5
Regulations’
LIST OF ELECTIVES FOR SEMESTER II
1.
COURSE
CODE
PEE2A
2.
PEE2B
Advances in Casting and Welding Processes
3
0
0
3
3.
PEE2C
3
0
0
3
4.
PEE2D
Instrumentation for Non-Destructive Testing
(Common to C&I, MPE)
Artificial Intelligence
3
0
0
3
5.
PEE2E
Design for Manufacturing and Assembly
3
0
0
3
6.
PEE2F
Finite Element Application in Manufacturing
3
0
0
3
7.
PEE2G
Manufacturing System Simulation
3
0
0
3
8.
PEE2H
3
0
0
3
9.
PEE2J
Mechanical Behavior of Materials
Optimisation Techniques in Engineering
3
0
0
3
10.
PEE2K
Probability and Statistics
3
0
0
3
11.
PEE2L
Rapid Manufacturing
3
0
0
3
12.
PEE2M
Robot Design and Programming
3
0
0
3
S.NO
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
Advanced Tool Design
3
0
0
3
LIST OF ELECTIVES FOR SEMESTER III
1.
COURSE
CODE
PEE3A
2.
PEE3B
Computer Aided Product Design
3
0
0
3
3.
PEE3C
Financial Management
3
0
0
3
4.
PEE3D
Industrial Ergonomics
3
0
0
3
5.
PEE3E
Nano Composites
3
0
0
3
6.
PEE3F
Lean Manufacturing system and Implementation
3
0
0
3
7.
PEE3G
Manufacturing Management
3
0
0
3
8.
PEE3H
Materials Management and Logistics
3
0
0
3
9.
PEE3J
Mechanical Processing
Nanostructure Materials
3
0
0
3
10.
PEE3K
3
0
0
3
11.
PEE3L
MEMS and Nanotechnology
Quality and Reliability Engineering
3
0
0
3
12.
PEE3M
Synthesis and Applications of Nano Materials
3
0
0
3
S.NO
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
Advanced Manufacturing Processes
3
0
0
3
and
Properties
of
6
Regulations’
PEC11
NUMERICAL METHODS AND GRAPH THEORY
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
AIM:
To solve some engineering models and problems by using Numerical Analysis and
Graph Theoretical concepts.
OBJECTIVE:
The engineers will have an exposure on various topics such as Systems of Equation,
Interpolation
and Numerical Integration,
Initial and
Boundary Value
Problems,
Fundamentals of Graphs, Graphs Algorithms to understand their applications in engineering
problems.
UNIT I
SYSTEMS OF EQUATIONS
12
Simultaneous linear equations – Direct method – LU decomposition methods - Gauss
elimination, Gauss Jordan methods – Iterative methods – Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel methods.
UNIT II
INTERPOLATION AND INTEGRATION
12
Hermite’s interpolation – Cubic Spline Interpolation – Gaussian – Numerical Integration –
Trapezoidal and Simpson rules – Newton-Cotes formula – Gaussian quadrature – cubature.
UNIT III
NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ODE
12
Single step methods – multi step methods – Taylor series and Euler methods – Runge Kutta
method of fourth order – Multi step methods – Adams-Bashforth, Milnes Predictor- Corrector
methods – Boundary value problems by Finite difference method.
UNIT IV
FUNDAMENTALS OF GRAPHS
12
Graphs – sub graphs - Complements – Graph isomorphism – vertex degree: Eulerian graphs –
Planar graphs – Hamiltonian paths, tree and Cut-sets.
UNIT V
TREES AND ALGORITHMS
12
Kruskal’s algorithm – Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm, Prim’s algorithm – Transport
Networks.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K., and Jain, R.K., “Numerical Methods for Scientific
& Engineering computation”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1987.
2. Froberg, C.E. “Numerical Mathematics”, the Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co., Inc.,
1985.
3. Grimaldi R.P., “ Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics”, Pearson Education Inc.,
1999.
REFERENCES
1. Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K., and Jain, R.K., “Numerical Methods for Scientific
& Engineering computation”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1987.
2. Bondy, J.A. and Murthy, U.S.R., “Graph Theory with Applications”, Macmillan.
3. Narsingh Deo. “Graph Theory with applications to Engineering and Computer
Science”, Prentice Hall, First Edition, 2004.
7
Regulations’
PEC12
ADVANCED MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To impart knowledge on advance concepts of material technology.
OBJECTIVE:
To enlight the PG students on elastic, plastic and fractured behaviour of engineering materials.
To train the PG students in selection of metallic and non-metallic materials for the various
engineering applications.
UNIT I
ELASTIC AND PLASTIC BEHAVIOR
10
Elasticity in metals and polymers Anelastic and visco-elastic behaviour – Mechanism of plastic
deformation and nonmetallic shear strength of perfect and real crystals – Strengthening
solid solutioning, grain boundary strengthening, poly phase
mechanisms, work hardening,
mixture, precipitation, particle, fibre
and dispersion strengthening.
Effect of
temperature, strain and strain rate on plastic behaviour – Super plasticity – Deformation of non
crystalline materials.
UNIT II
FRACTURE BEHAVIOUR
10
Griffith’s theory, stress intensity factor and fracture
toughness – Toughening
mechanisms – Ductile, brittle transition in steel – High temperature fracture, creep – Larson
Miller parameter – Deformation and fracture mechanism maps – Fatigue, low and high
cycle fatigue test, crack initiation and propagation mechanisms and Paris law. Effect of surface
and metallurgical parameters on fatigue – Fracture of non metallic materials – Failure analysis,
sources of failure, procedure of failure analysis.
UNIT III
SELECTION OF MATERIALS
10
Motivation for selection, cost basis and service requirements – Selection for mechanical
properties, strength, toughness, fatigue and creep – Selection for surface durability
corrosion and wear resistance – Relationship between materials selection and processing –
Case studies in materials selection with relevance to aero, auto, marine, machinery and nuclear
applications – Computer aided materials selection.
UNIT IV
MODERN METALLIC MATERIALS
8
Dual phase steels, High strength low alloy (HSLA) steel, Transformation induced
plasticity (TRIP) Steel, Maraging steel, Nitrogen steel – Intermetallics, Ni and Ti aluminides –
smart materials, shape memory alloys – Metallic glass and nano crystalline materials.
UNIT V
NON METALLIC MATERIALS
7
Polymeric materials – Formation of polymer structure – Production techniques of fibers, foams,
adhesives and coating – structure, properties and applications of engineering polymers –
Advanced structural ceramics, WC, TIC, TaC, Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4 CBN and diamond –
properties, processing and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. George E.Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill, 1988
2. Thomas H. Courtney, “Mechanical Behaviour of Materials”, 2nd Edition, McGraw
Hill, 2000
3. Charles, J.A., Crane, F.A.A. and Fumess, J.A.G., “Selection and use of engineering
materials”, 3rd Edition, Butterworth-Heiremann, 2001.
8
Regulations’
4. Flinn, R.A., and Trojan, P.K., “Engineering Materials and their Applications”, 4th
Edition, Jaico, 1999.
5. ASM Hand book, Vol.11, “Failure Analysis and Prevention”, 10th Edition, ASM, 2002.
6. Ashby M.F., “Material Selection in Mechanical Design”, 3rd Edition, Butter Worth
2005.
9
Regulations’
PEC13
AUTOMATED AND COMPUTER INTEGRATED
MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To stress the role of computers in production.
OBJECTIVE:
To teach the role of computers in processing the information knowing across the various stages
and various departments in a manufacturing concern.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
6
Introduction to CAD, CAM, CAD/CAM and CIM - Evolution of CIM – CIM wheel and
cycle – Production concepts and mathematical models – Simple problems in production models
– CIM hardware and software – Major elements of CIM system – Three step process for
implementation of CIM – Computers in CIM – Computer networks for manufacturing – The
future automated factory – Management of CIM – Impact of CIM on personnel – CIM status.
UNIT II
AUTOMATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
10
Automated production line – system configurations, work part transfer mechanisms –
Fundamentals of Automated assembly system – System configuration, Part delivery at
workstations – Design for automated assembly – Overview of material handling equipments –
Consideration in material handling system design – The 10 principles of Material handling.
Conveyor systems – Types of conveyors – Operations and features.
Automated Guided Vehicle system – Types of vehicles and AGVs applications – Vehicle
guidance technology – Vehicle management and safety.
Storage system performance – storage location strategies – Conventional storage methods and
equipments – Automated storage/Retrieval system and Carousel storage system
Deadlocks in Automated manufacturing systems – Petrinet models – Applications in Dead
lock avoidance.
UNIT III
GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND FMS
10
Part families – Visual – Parts classification and coding – Production flow analysis – Grouping
of parts and Machines by rank order clustering method – Benefits of GT – Case studies.
FMS – Components – workstations – FMS layout configurations – Computer control systems –
FMS planning and implementation issues – Architecture of FMS – flow chart showing various
operations in FMS – Machine cell design – Composite part concept, Holier method, Key
machine concept – Quantitative analysis of FMS – Bottleneck model – Simple and
complicated problems – Extended Bottleneck model - sizing the FMS ─ FMS applications,
Benefits.
UNIT IV
PROCESS PLANNING
10
Process planning – Activities in process planning, Informations required. From design to
process planning – classification of manufacturing processes – Selection of primary
manufacturing processes – selecting among casting process, forming process and machining
process. Sequencing of operations according to Anteriorities – various examples – forming of
Matrix of Anteriorities – case study.
Typical process sheet – case studies in Manual process planning.
Computer Aided Process Planning – Process planning module and data base – Variant process
planning – Two stages in VPP – Generative process planning – Flow chart showing various
activities in generative PP – Semi generative process planning.
10
Regulations’
UNIT V
TYPES OF PROCESS CONTROL AND AUTOMATIC DATA 9
CAPTURE
Introduction to process model formulation – linear feed back control systems – Optimal control
– Adaptive control –Sequence control and PLC. Computer process control – Computer process
interface – Interface hardware – Computer process monitoring – Direct digital control and
Supervisory computer control.
Overview of Automatic identification methods – Bar code technology – Other Automatic data
capture technologies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Mikell P.Groover, “Automation, Production system and Computer integrated
Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2008.
2. Radhakrishnan,P., Subramanian,S., and Raju,V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”
New
Age
International Publishers, 2000.
3. James A.Retrg, Herry W.Kraebber, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Pearson
Education, Asia, 2001.
4. Gideon Halevi and Ronald D.Weill, “Principles of Process Planning”, Chapman
Hall,1995.
5. Viswanathan,N., and Narahari,Y., “Performance Modeling
and
Automated
Manufacturing Systems”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
6. Kant Vajpayee,S., “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2007.
7. Alavudeen and Venkateshwaran, “Computer
Integrated
Manufacturing”, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
11
Regulations’
PEC14
POLYMERS AND COMPOSITE MATERIALS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To impart on types, physical properties and processing of polymer matrix and composites,
metal matrix composites and ceramics matrix composites.
OBJECTIVE:
To study matrix material, particulates and fibres of polymer matrix composites, MMC and
Ceramic matrix composites.
To develop knowledge on processing, interfacial properties and application of computers.
UNIT I
PROPERTIES OF POLYMERS
8
Chemistry and Classification of Polymers – Properties of Thermo plastics – Properties of
Thermosetting Plastics – Applications – Merits and Disadvantages.
UNIT II
PROCESSING OF POLYMERS
9
Extrusion – Injection Moulding – Blow Moulding – Compression and Transfer Moulding –
Casting – Thermo Forming General Machining properties of Plastics – Machining Parameters
and their effect – Joining of Plastics – Mechanical Fasteners – Thermal bonding – Press Fitting.
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO FIBRES AND COMPOSITE MATERIALS
9
Fibres – Fabrication, Structure, properties and applications - Glass, Boron, carbon,
organic, ceramic and metallic fibers whiskers– Matrix materials structure – polymers, – metals
and ceramics – Physical and chemical properties
UNIT IV
PROCESSING OF POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES
9
Open mould process, bag moulding, compression moulding with BMC and SMC filament
winding – pultrusion – centrifugal casting – injection moulding – structure, properties and
application of PMC’s – Carbon Matrix Composites - Interfaces – Properties – recycling of
PMC.
UNIT V
PROCESSING OF METAL MATRIX COMPOSITES AND 10
CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES
Solid state fabrication techniques – diffusion bonding – powder metallurgy techniques plasma
spray, chemical and physical vapour deposition of matrix on fibres Chemical vapour infiltration
– Sol gel – liquid state fabrication methods – infiltration – squeeze, casting – rheo casting –
compocasting - Interfaces properties– application of MMC and ceramic matrix composites.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Krishnan K Chawla, “ Composite Materials Science and Engineering”, International
Edition, Springer, 2006
2. Harold Belofsky, “ Plastics, Product Design and Process Engineering”, Hanser
Publishers, 2002.
3. Bera.E and Moet.A, “High performance polymers”, Hanser Publishers, 2001.
12
Regulations’
PEC15
APPLIED HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
Study the basic functions of Hydraulic and Pneumatic Components and develop the circuits.
OBJECTIVE:
To impart the Knowledge of Hydraulic and Pneumatic components application and industrial
development.
UNIT I
ELEMENTS OF PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS
9
Pneumatic Vs hydraulics, compressors - types, selection. Symbols of pneumatic elements.
Cylinders - types, typical construction details. Valves – direction control, flow, pressure, types,
typical construction details
UNIT II
PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS DESIGN
9
General approach, travel step diagram. Sequential circuit design, step counter method. K.V.
Mapping for minimization of logic equation, fringe condition modules, sizing of components in
pneumatic systems.
UNIT III
TYPICAL INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS OF PNEUMATIC 9
SYSTEMS
Metal working, handling, clamping, application with counters.
UNIT IV
ADVANCED TOPICS IN PNEUMATICS
9
Electro pneumatics, ladder diagram. Servo and proportional valves - types, operation,
application, hydro-mechanical servo systems. PLC-construction, types, operation, programming
UNIT V
DESIGN OF TYPICAL HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
9
Total design of a fluid power system for an industrial application. Specifications of the circuit,
circuit design, selection of elements based on force, speed, travel and time, sizing of pipes,
design of power packs/selection of compressor, piping layout and accessories.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Anthony Espisito, “Fluid Power with Application”, Pearson Education Private Limited,
Fifth Edition, First Indian Reprint, 2003.
2. Majumdar S R, “Oil Hydraulic Systems: Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Company Limited, Fourth Reprint, 2003.
3. Majumdar S R, “Pneumatic Systems : Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, Fourth Reprint, 2003.
4. Peter Rohner, “Fluid Power Logic Circuit Design – Analysis, Design Method and
Worked Examples”, The Macmillan Press Limited, 1979.
5. Werner Deppert and Kurt Stoll, “Pneumatic Controls : An Introduction to Principles“,
Vogel-Druck Wurzburg, 1975.
13
Regulations’
PEC16
METAL CUTTING THEORY AND PRACTICE
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To impart the knowledge and train the students in the area of metal cutting theory and its
importance.
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students familiar with the various principles of metal cutting, cutting tool
materials and its wear mechanisms during the machining operation.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Need for rational approach to the problem of cutting materials-observation made in the cutting
of metals-basic mechanism of chip formation-thin and thick zone modes-types of chips-chip
breaker-orthogonal Vs oblique cutting-force velocity relationship for shear plane angle in
orthogonal cutting-energy consideration in machining-review of Merchant, Lee and Shafter
theories-critical comparison.
UNIT II
SYSTEM OF TOOL NOMENCLATURE
9
Nomenclature of single point cutting tool-System of tool nomenclature and conversion of rake
angles-nomenclature of multi point tools like drills, milling-conventional Vs climb milling,
mean cross sectional area of chip in milling-specific cutting pressure.
UNIT III
THERMAL ASPECTS OF MACHINING
9
Heat distribution in machining-effects of various parameters on temperature-methods of
temperature measurement in machining-hot machining-cutting fluids.
UNIT IV
TOOL MATERIALS, TOOL LIFE AND TOOL WEAR
9
Essential requirements of tool materials-development in tool materials-ISO specification for
inserts and tool holders-tool life-conventional and accelerated tool life tests-concept of mach
inability index-economics of machining.
UNIT V
WEAR MECHANISMS AND CHATTER IN MACHINING
9
Processing and Machining – Measuring Techniques – Reasons for failure of cutting tools and
forms of wear-mechanisms of wear-chatter in machining-factors effecting chatter in machiningtypes of chatter-mechanism of chatter.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Shaw.M.C.”Metal cutting principles”, Cbs Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2002,
2. Bhattacharya.A., “Metal Cutting Theory and practice”, Central Book Publishers,
India,1984.
3. Boothroid D.G. & Knight W.A., “Fundamentals of machining and machine
tools”, Marcel Dekker, Newyork, 1989.
4. David A. Stephenson & John S. Agapiou “Metal cutting theory and practice”,CRC
Taylor & Francis,
5. Fryderyk E. Gorczyca, “Application of metal cutting theory”, Industrial Press Inc., N Y,
1987
6. B. L. Juneja, Nitin Seth, “Fundamentals of metal cutting and machine tools”, New Age
International, New Delhi,2003
14
Regulations’
PEC17
ADVANCED COMPUTING LABORATORY
L
0
T
0
P
3
C
2
AIM:
To train the students in the area of Computer Aided Design & Analysis and Computer Aided
Manufacturing.
OBJECTIVE:
To teach the students about the drafting of 3D components and analyzing the same using
various CAD/CAM softwares.
2D AND 3D GEOMETRIC MODELING
1. Excercise on 3D geometric modeling and assembly of Tail Stock.
2. Excercise on 3D geometric modeling and assembly of Screw Jack.
3. Excercise on 3D geometric modeling and assembly of Plummer Block.
4. Excercise on 3D geometric modeling and assembly of Machine Vice.
5. Excercise on 3D geometric modeling and assembly of Lathe Chuck.
6. Excercise on 3D geometric modeling and assembly of Flange Coupling.
7. Excercise on 2D geometric modeling of Sheet Metal Components.
COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING
8. Exercise on CNC Lathe: Plain Turning, Step turning, Taper turning, Threading,
Grooving & canned cycle
9. Exercise on CNC Milling Machine: Profile Milling, Mirroring, Scaling & canned
cycle.
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS
10. Exercises on analysis of Beams with different loading conditions.
11. Exercise on buckling analysis of beams.
12. Exercise on structural analysis with contact options.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
15
Regulations’
PEC21
METAL FORMING PROCESSES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To impart knowledge on plasticity, surface treatment for forming of various types of
metal forming process.
OBJECTIVE:
To study the basic concepts of metal forming techniques and to develop force calculation
in metal forming process.
To study the thermo mechanical regimes and its requirements of metal forming
UNIT I
THEORY OF PLASTICITY
9
Theory of plastic deformation – Yield criteria – Tresca and Von-mises – Distortion
energy – Stress-strain relation – Mohr’s circle representation of a state of stress – cylindrical
and spherical co-ordinate system – upper and lower bound solution methods– Overview of
FEM applications in Metal Forming analysis.
UNIT II
THEORY AND PRACTICE OF BULK FORMING PROCESSES
9
Analysis of plastic deformation in Forging, Rolling, Extrusion, rod/wire drawing and tube
drawing – Effect of friction – calculation of forces, work done – Process parameters, equipment
used – Defects – applications – Recent advances in Forging, Rolling, Extrusion and Drawing
processes – Design consideration in forming.
UNIT III
SHEET METAL FORMING
9
Formability studies – Conventional processes – HERF techniques – Superplastic forming
techniques – Hydro forming – Stretch forming – Water hammer forming – Principles
and process parameters – Advantage, Limitations and application
UNIT IV
POWDER
METALLURGY
AND
SPECIAL
FORMING 9
PROCESSES
Overview of P/M technique – Advantages – applications – Powder preform forging – powder
rolling – Tooling, process parameters and applications. - Orbital forging – Isothermal forging
– Hot and cold isostatic pressing – High speed extrusion – Rubber pad forming – Fine
blanking – LASER beam forming
UNIT V
SURFACE
TREATMENT
AND
METAL
FORMING 9
APPLICATIONS
Experiment techniques of evaluation of friction in metal forming selection – influence of
temperature and Sliding velocity – Friction heat generation – Friction between metallic layers –
Lubrication carrier layer – Surface treatment for drawing, sheet metal forming, Extrusion and
hot and cold forging.
Processing of thin Al tapes – Cladding of Al alloys – Duplex and triplex steel rolling – Thermo
mechanical regimes of Ti and Al alloys during deformation – Formability of welded blank
sheet – Laser structured steel sheet - Formability of laminated sheet.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Dieter G.E., “Mechanical Metallurgy “Revised Edition II -McGraw Hill Co., 2004
2. Altan T., Metal forming – “ Fundamentals and applications” – American Society
of Metals, Metals park, 2003.
3. ASM Hand book, “Forming and Forging”, Ninth edition, Vol – 14, 2003
16
Regulations’
4. Shiro Kobayashi, Soo-Ik-oh-Altan, T, “Metal forming and Finite Element Method”,
Oxford University Press, 2001.
5. ALTAN.T, SOO-IK-oh, GEGEL.HL – “Metal forming, fundamentals and
Applications”, American Society of Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1983.
6. Marciniak,Z., Duncan J.L., Hu S.J., ‘Mechanics of Sheet Metal Forming’, Butterworth Heinemann An Imprint of Elesevier, 2006
7. SAE Transactions, Journal of Materials and Manufacturing Section 5, 1993-2007.
17
Regulations’
PEC22
MANUFACTURING METROLOGY AND QUALITY
CONTROL
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To expose the students, the importance of measurement and the various latest measuring
techniques using Laser, Coordinate measuring machines and Opto- electronics devices. Also to
stress upon the Importance of quality in manufacturing.
OBJECTIVE:
To impart through knowledge in various latest measurement systems such as laser metrology,
coordinate measuring machines and electro-optical devices. Also to make the students to
understand quality
UNIT I
LASER METROLOGY
8
Introduction – types of lasers – laser in engineering metrology – metrological laser methods for
applications in machine systems – Interferometry applications – speckle interferometry – laser
interferometers in manufacturing and machine tool alignment testing – calibration systems
for industrial robots laser Doppler technique – laser Doppler anemometry.
UNIT II
PRECISION INSTRUMENTS BASED ON LASER
9
Laser telemetric systems – detection of microscopic imperfections on high quality
surface Pitter NPL gauge interferometer – classification of optical scanning systems – high
inertia laser scan technique – rotating mirror technique – laser gauging – bar coding – laser
dimensional measurement system.
UNIT III
CO-ORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
10
Co-ordinate metrology – CMM configurations – hardware components – software –
Probe sensors – displacement devices – Performance Evaluations – Software – Hardware –
Dynamic errors – Thermal effects diagram – temperature variations environment control –
applications.
UNIT IV
OPTO ELECTRONICS AND VISION SYSTEM
9
Opto electronic devices – CCD – On-line and in-process monitoring in production –
applications image analysis and computer vision – Image analysis techniques – spatial feature
– Image extraction – segmentation – digital image processing – Vision system for
measurement – Comparison laser scanning with vision system.
UNIT V
QUALITY IN MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING
9
Importance of manufacturing planning for quality – concepts of controllability – need for
quality management system and models – quality engineering tools and techniques – statistical
process control – six sigma concepts – Poka Yoke – Computer controlled systems used in
inspection.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. John A. Bosch, Giddings and Lewis Dayton, “ Co-ordinate Measuring Machines and
Systems”, Marcel Dekker, Inc, 1999.
2. Juran J.M. and Gyna F.M., “ Quality Planning and Analysis”, Tata-McGraw Hill,
New Delhi
3. Zuech, Nello “Understanding and Applying Machine Vision”, Marcel Dekker, Inc, 2000
4. Elanchezhian.C, Vijaya Ramnath.B and Sunder Selwyn, T., “ Engineering Metrology”,
Eswar Press, Chennai, 2004.
18
Regulations’
PEC23
COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND MECHANICS
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
AIM:
To expose the students, to know the Mechanics of lamina composites.
OBJECTIVE:
To impart through knowledge in laminate composites design.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
10
Definition - Need - General characteristics, Applications, Fibers -Glass, Carbon, Ceramic and
Aramid fibers. Matrices - Polymer, Graphite, Ceramic and Metal Matrices - Charecteristics of
fibers and matrices. Smart materials - Types and characteristics.
UNIT II
MECHANICS AND PERFORMANCE
10
Characteristics of fibre - reinforced Lamina - Laminates - Interlaminar stresses - Static Mechanical
Properties fatigueand Impact properties - Environmental effects - Fracture Behaviour and Damage
Tolerance.
UNIT III
MANUFACTURING
5
Bag Moulding - Compression Moulding - Pultrusion - Filament Winding -Other Manufacturing
Processes QualityInspection methods, Processing of MMC’s.
UNIT IV
DESIGN
10
Failure Predictions - Laminate Design Consideration - Bolted and Bonded Joints Design Examples.
UNIT V
ANALYSIS
10
Stress Analysis of Laminated Composite Beams, Plates, Shells - Vibration and Stability Analysis Reliability of Composites - Finite Element Method of Analysis - Analysis of Sandwich structures.
TUTORIAL:15 PERIODS
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Mallick, P.K., " Fiber-Reinforced composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design ",
Marcel Dekker Inc., 1993.
2. Halpin, J.C., " Primer on Composite Materials, Analysis ", Techomic Publishing Co.,
1984.
3. Agarwal, B.D., and Broutman L.J., “Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites ",
John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1990.
4. Mallick, P.K. and Newman, S., (eds), " Composite Materials Technology: Processes and
Properties ", Hansen Publisher, Munich, 1990.
19
Regulations’
PEC24
METROLOGY AND MATERIALS TESTING
LABORATORY
L
0
T
0
P
3
C
2
AIM:
To impart knowledge in the area of metrology and materials testing.
OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students to learn the basic measuring principles followed in metrological
instruments.
 To create understanding of testing of mechanical properties of materials.
METROLOGY
1. Study of Sensors and Transducer – Potentiometer, Strain gauge, Torque, LVDT, Hall –
Effect, Speed, Vibration, Pressure, Optical transducer and Temperature transducer.
2. Study of various types of gauges.
3. Exercises on linear, angular and speed measurements
4. Exercises on Vibration measurements
5. Exercises on Motion controller using AC motor, DC motor, Servo motor and encoder.
6. Exercises on stepper motor.
7. Exercises on microprocessor based data acquisition system.
8. Exercise on measurements of surface finish parameters.
9. Experiment using pneumatic gauges.
MATERIALS TESTING
10. Study on various standards for testing.
11. Comparison of mechanical properties of any two materials (Metal or non-metal).
12. Exercise on preparation of samples for microstructure study.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
20
Regulations’
PEE2A
ADVANCED TOOL DESIGN
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To measure the importance of various tool design.
OBJECTIVE:
To develop the Knowledge on Tool Design.
UNIT I
DESIGN OF SINGLE POINT TOOLS
6
Design of form tools, Selection of tool materials for different application, ISO standard for
Inserts, tool holders, Selection of inserts and tool holders for specific examples.
UNIT II
DESIGN OF MULTI POINT TOOLS
9
Design of Drills, Reamers, Milling cutters, Tapes and dies, Broaching tools, Gear cutting tools,
Thread milling tools for CNC Machining Centers.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF CHUCKING SYSTEMS
For CNC turning applications.
DESIGN OF JIGS AND FIXTURES: Design of drill jigs and milling fixtures. Welding
fixtures, modular fixtures.
9
UNIT IV
DESIGN OF TOOLS FOR PRESS WORK
9
Design of simple, compound and progressive tools, study of power presses and accessories,
Application of EDM for tool making.
UNIT V
DESIGN OF PLASTIC MOLD DESIGN
12
Design of Thermo plastic tools, two and three plate, design of runner, gate, cooling line,
ejection.
DESIGN OF GAUGES: Plug, Ring, Snap, thread gauges, Application of Sine bar, Slip gauges
and Air gauges, Toolings for Casting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. C Donaldson, “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
2. E G Hoffman, “Jigs and Fixtures Design”, Thomson Learning, 2004.
3. Pye R G W, “Injection Mold Design”, East West Press, 2001.
4. Kempster M H A, “An Introduction to Jig and Tool Design”, Viva books, 1998.
5. HMT, “Production Technology”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992.
6. Arshinov V, “Metal Cutting Theory and Cutting Tool Design”, MIR, 1979.
7. Publications from Sandvik, Widia, Taegutec, Ceramtec.
8. Ostergaurd D E, “Advanced Die Making”, Tata McGraw Hill.2006
21
Regulations’
PEE2B
ADVANCES IN CASTING AND WELDING
PROCESSES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To impart knowledge on basic concepts and advances in casting and welding processes.
OBJECTIVE:
To study the metallurgical concepts and applications of casting and welding process.
To acquire knowledge in CAD of casting and automation of welding process.
UNIT I
CASTING DESIGN
8
Heat transfer between metal and mould –– Design considerations in casting – Designing for
directional solidification and minimum stresses - principles and design of gating and risering
UNIT II
CASTING METALLURGY
8
Solidification of pure metal and alloys – shrinkage in cast metals – progressive and directional
solidification –– Degasification of the melt-casting defects – Castability of steel , Cast
Iron, Al alloys , Babbit alloy and Cu alloy.
UNIT III
RECENT TRENDS IN CASTING AND FOUNDRY LAYOUT
8
Shell moulding, precision investment casting, CO2 moulding, centrifugal casting, Die casting,
Continuous casting, Counter gravity low pressure casting, Squeeze casting and semisolid
processes. Layout of mechanized foundry – sand reclamation – material handling in
foundry pollution control in foundry –– Computer aided design of casting.
UNIT IV
WELDING METALLURGY AND DESIGN
10
Heat affected Zone and its characteristics – Weldability of steels, cast iron, stainless steel,
aluminum, Mg , Cu , Zirconium and titanium alloys – Carbon Equivalent of Plain and alloy
steels Hydrogen embrittlement – Lamellar tearing – Residual stress – Distortion and its
control . Heat transfer and solidification - Analysis of stresses in welded structures – pre and
post welding heat treatments – weld joint design – welding defects – Testing of weldment.
UNIT V
RECENT TRENDS IN WELDING
11
Friction welding, friction stir welding – explosive welding – diffusion bonding – high
frequency induction welding – ultrasonic welding – electron beam welding – Laser beam
welding –Plasma welding – Electroslag welding- narrow gap, hybrid twin wire active TIG –
Tandem MIG- modern brazing and soldering techniques – induction, dip resistance, diffusion
processes – Hot gas, wave and vapour phase soldering. Overview of automation of
welding in aerospace, nuclear, surface transport vehicles and under water welding.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. ASM Handbook, Vol 15, Casting, 2004
2. ASM Handbook vol.6, welding Brazing & Soldering, 2003
3. Parmer R.S., “Welding Engineering and Technology”, Khanna Publishers,2002
4. Srinivasan N.K., “Welding Technology”, Khanna Tech Publishers, 2002
5. Heineloper & Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
6. Jain P.L., “Principles of Foundry Technology”,Tata McGrawHill Publishers, 2003
7. Carrry B., “Modern Welding Technology”, Prentice Hall Pvt Ltd., 2002
8. Iotrowski “Robotic welding A guide to selection and application – Society of
mechanical Engineers”, 1987.
9. Schwariz, M.M. “Source book on innovative welding processes”, American Society
for Metals (OHIO), 1981
10. Cornu.J. “ Advanced welding systems” – Volumes I, II and III, JAICO Publishers,
1994.
11. Lancaster.J.F, “Metallurgy of welding”, George Alien & Unwin Publishers, 1984.
22
Regulations’
PEE2C
INSTRUMENTATION FOR NON-DESTRUCTIVE
TESTING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING : AN INTRODUCTION, VISUAL
INSPECTION & LIQUID PENETRANT TESTING
6
AIM:
To stress the importance of NDT in Engineering.
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce all types of NDT and their applications in Engineering.
UNIT I
Introduction to various non-destructive methods, Comparison of Destructive and Nondestructive
Tests, Conditions for effective non-destructive testing Visual Inspection, Optical aids used for
visual inspection, Applications. Physical principles, procedure for penetrant testing, Penetrant
testing materials, Penetrant testing methods-water washable, Post – Emulsification methods,
Applications.
UNIT II
ELECTROMAGNETIC TESTING
10
Eddy Current Testing: Principles, Instrumentation for ECT, Absolute, differential probes,
Inspection of Ferromagnetic materials –Instrumentation for pulsed eddy current techniquesApplications.
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing: Principles, Inductive coils probe and Hall effect probesFactors affecting Flux leakage-applications.
Magnetic Particle Testing: Principle of MPT, procedure used for testing a component,
Equipment used for MPT, Magnetizing techniques, Applications.
UNIT III
RADIOGRAPHY AND THERMOGRAPHY
10
Principle of Radiography, Radiographic imaging, Inspection Techniques – Single wall single
image, Double wall Penetration, Multiwall Penetration technique, Applications and limitations
of radiographic inspection - Real Time Radiography
Principle of Thermography, Detectors and Equipments. Applications – Thermal Imaging for
condition Monitoring of Industrial Components.
UNIT IV
ULTRASONIC AND ACCOUSTIC EMISSION TESTING
10
Principle, Ultrasonic transducers, Ultrasonic Flaw detection Equipment, Inspection Methods Normal Incident Pulse- Echo Inspection, Normal Incident Through-transmission Testing, Angle
Beam Pulse- Echo testing, Applications of Normal Beam Inspection in detecting fatigue cracks,
Inclusions, Slag, Porosity and Intergranular cracks. Modes of display A- scan, B-Scan, C- Scan,
Applications.
Principle of AET, Instrumentation, Applications - testing of metal pressure vessels, Fatigue crack
detection in aerospace structures.
UNIT V
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS, COMPARISON AND
9
SELECTION OF NDT METHODS
Applications of NDE in Nuclear, Aircraft, Automotive and petroleum Industries. A Comparison
and selection of various NDT techniques. Codes, standards, specification and procedures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
23
Regulations’
REFERENCES
1. Baldev Raj, Jeyakumar,T., Thavasimuthu,M., “Practical Non Destructive Testing”
Narosa publishing house, New Delhi, 2002
2. .Krautkramer. J., “Ultra Sonic Testing of Materials”, 1st Edition, Springer – Verlag
Publication, New York, 1996.
3. Peter J. Shull “Non Destructive Evaluation: Theory, Techniques and Application”
Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 2002
4. WWW.ndt.net
5. Prasad J and C.G.K. Nair, “ Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials”, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008
6. Charles J. Hellier, “Hand Book of Non-Destructive Evaluation”, The McGraw-Hill
Companies, New York, 2003.
24
Regulations’
PEE2D
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To understand the various types and applications of Fuzzy Logics and Artificial Neural
Networks.
OBJECTIVE:
This course is intended for learning the basic concepts, Operations and Principles of Fuzzy
Logic, applications of various Fuzzy Logic systems, architecture and Taxonomy of Neural
Networks.
This course is also gives the ideas of ANN Architectures, Genetic Algorithms. Meta
Heuristic techniques and Applications in Design and Manufacturing.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO FUZZY LOGIC
6
Basic concepts in Fuzzy Set theory – Operations of Fuzzy sets – Fuzzy relational
equations – Propositional, Predicate Logic – Inference – Fuzzy Logic Principles – Fuzzy
inference – Fuzzy Rule based systems – Fuzzification and defuzzification – Types.
UNIT II
FUZZY LOGIC APPLICATIONS
9
Fuzzy logic controllers – Principles – Various industrial Applications of Fuzzy logic
control – Adaptive Fuzzy systems – Fuzzy Decision making – Fuzzy classification –
Fuzzy pattern Recognition – Image Processing applications – Fuzzy optimization.
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS
9
Fundamentals of Neural networks – Neural network architectures – Learning methods –
Taxonomy of Neural Network Architectures – Standard back propagation Algorithms –
Selection of various parameters – Variations.
UNIT IV
OTHER ANN ARCHITECTURES
9
Associative memory – Exponential Bidirectional Associative Memory – Adaptive Resonance
Theory – Introduction – Adaptive Resonance Theory 1 – Adaptive Resonance Theory 2
– Applications – Kohen Self organizing maps – counter propagation networks – Industrial
Applications.
UNIT V
RECENT ADVANCES
12
Fundamentals of Genetic Algorithms – Hybrid systems – Meta heuristic techniques like
simulated Annealing, Tabu Search, Ant colony optimization, Perpetual self organizing,
Artificial immune systems – Applications in Design and Manufacturing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Klir, G.J. Yuan Bo, ‘Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic: Theory and Applications”, Prentice
Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1997.
2. Jacek M. Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems” Jaico Publishing House,
1994
3. Simon Haykin, ‘Neural Networks A comprehensive foundation”, Prentice Hall, 2nd
Edition, 1998.
4. Laurene Fausett, ‘Fundamentals of Neural Networks, Architectures, Algorithms and
Applications”, Prentice Hall, Englewood cliffs, 1994.
5. S. Rajasekaran, GA Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic
Algorithms”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 2003.
25
Regulations’
PEE2E
DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To know the basics of Design based on Manufacturing and Assembly.
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students familiar with the concepts of design and modeling of mechanical
components.
To develop the Knowledge on tolerance, dimensions, manufacturing and applications of
software’s.
UNIT I
TOLERANCE ANALYSIS
6
Introduction – Concepts, definitions and relationships of tolerance – Matching design
tolerances with appropriate manufacturing process – manufacturing process capability metrics –
Worst care, statistical tolerance Analysis – Linear and Non-Linear Analysis – Sensitivity
Analysis – Taguchi’s Approach to tolerance design.
UNIT II
TOLERANCE ALLOCATION
9
Tolerance synthesis – Computer Aided tolerancing – Traditional cost based analysis –
Taguchi’s quality loss function – Application of the Quadratic loss function to Tolerancing –
Principles of selective Assembly – Problems.
UNIT III
GD&T
9
Fundamentals of geometric dimensioning and tolerancing – Rules and concepts of GD&T
– Form controls – Datum systems – Orientation controls – Tolerance of position –
Concentricity and symmetry controls – Run out controls – Profile controls.
UNIT IV
TOLERANCE CHARTING
9
Nature of the tolerance buildup – structure and setup of the tolerance chart – piece part sketches
for tolerance charts – Arithmetic ground rules for tolerance charts – Determination of Required
balance dimensions – Determination of Mean working Dimensions – Automatic tolerance
charting – Tolerance charting of Angular surfaces.
UNIT V
MANUFACTURING GUIDELINES
12
DFM guidelines for casting, weldment design – Formed metal components – Turned parts
– Milled, Drilled parts – Non metallic parts – Computer Aided DFM software – Boothroyd and
Dewhurst method of DFMA – DCS – Vis/VSA – 3D Dimensional control – Statistical tolerance
Analysis Software – Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. C.M. Creveling, “Tolerance Design – A handbook for Developing Optimal
Specifications”, Addison – Wesley, 1997.
2. James D. Meadows, “Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing”, Marcel Dekker Inc.,
1995.
3. Alex Krulikowski, “Fundamentals GD&T”, Delmar Thomson Learning,
1997.
4. Oliver R. Wade, “Tolerance Control in Design and Manufacturing”, Indus. Press,NY,
1967.
5. James G. Bralla, “Handbook of Product Design for Manufacturing”, McGraw
Hill, 1986.
26
Regulations’
PEE2F
FINITE ELEMENT APPLICATION IN
MANUFACTURING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
AIM:
To impart knowledge in the area of finite element methods and its application in manufacturing.
OBJECTIVE:
To study the fundamentals of one dimensional and two dimensional problems using FEAin
manufacturing.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
6
Fundamentals – Initial, boundary and eigen value problems – weighted residual, Galerkin
and Raleigh Ritz methods - Integration by parts – Basics of variational formulation –
Polynomial and Nodal approximation.
UNIT II
ONE DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS
9
Steps in FEM – Discretization. Interpolation, derivation of elements characteristic matrix,
shape function, assembly and imposition of boundary conditions-solution and post processing –
One dimensional analysis in solid mechanics and heat transfer.
UNIT III
SHAPE FUNCTIONS AND HIGHER ORDER FORMULATIONS
9
Shape functions for one and two dimensional elements- Three noded triangular and four
nodded quadrilateral element Global and natural co-ordinates—Non linear analysis –
Isoparametric elements – Jacobian matrices and transformations – Basics of two dimensional,
plane stress, plane strain and axisymmetric analysis.
UNIT IV
COMPUTER IMPLEMENTATION
9
Pre Processing, mesh generation, elements connecting, boundary conditions, input of
material and processing characteristics – Solution and post processing – Overview of
application packages – Development of code for one dimensional analysis and validation
UNIT V
ANALYSIS OF PRODUCTION PROCESSES
12
FE analysis of metal casting – special considerations, latent heat incorporation, gap element –
Time stepping procedures – Crank – Nicholson algorithm – Prediction of grain structure –
Basic concepts of plasticity and fracture – Solid and flow formulation – small incremental
deformation formulation – Fracture criteria – FE analysis of metal cutting, chip separation
criteria, incorporation of strain rate dependency – FE analysis of welding.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Reddy, J.N. “ An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill, Third
Edition, 2006
2. Rao, S.S., “Finite Element method in engineering”, Pergammon press, 1989.
3. Bathe, K.J., “Finite Element procedures in Engineering Analysis”, 1990
4. Kobayashi,S, Soo-ik-Oh and Altan,T, “Metal Forming and the Finite Element
Methods”, Oxford University Press, 1989.
5. Lewis R.W.Morgan, K, Thomas, H.R. and Seetharaman, K.N. “The Finite Element
Method in Heat Transfer Analysis”, John Wiley, 1994.
6. www.tbook.com, www.pollockeng.com
27
Regulations’
PEE2G
MANUFACTURING SYSTEM SIMULATION
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To introduce the various concepts of manufacturing system simulation..
OBJECTIVE:
To model manufacturing systems of different kinds.
To make use of simulation languages for manufacturing systems.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Basic concepts of system – elements of manufacturing system - concept of simulation –
simulation as a decision making tool – types of simulation – Monte-Carlo simulation - system
modeling – types of modeling – Limitations and Areas of application of simulation.
UNIT II
RANDOM NUMBERS
10
Probability and statistical concepts of simulation – Pseudo random numbers – methods of
generating random numbers – discrete and continuous distribution – testing of random
numbers – kolmogorov-Smirnov test, the Chi-Square test - sampling - simple, random and
simulated.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF SIMULATION EXPERIMENTS
9
Problem formulation – data collection and reduction – time flow mechanical – key
variables -logic flow chart starting condition – run size – experimental design
consideration – output analysis, interpretation and validation – application of simulation in
engineering industry..
UNIT IV
SIMULATION LANGUAGE
9
Comparison and selection of simulation languages - Study of GPSS (Basic blocks only)
Generate, Queue, Depart, Size, Release, Advance, Terminate, Transfer, Enter and Leave.
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
9
Development of simulation models using GPSS for queuing, production, inventory,
maintenance and replacement systems – case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Jerry Banks and John S.Carson, “Discrete event system simulation”, Prentice Hall
1991
2. John H.Mize and J.Grady Cox, “Essentials of simulation” – Prentice hall 1989.
3. Geoffrey Gordon “System simulation” – Prentice Hall of India, 992
4. Jeffrey L.Written, Lonnie D, Bentley and V.M. Barice, “System analysis and Design
5. Methods”, Galgotia publication, 1995
6. Averill M.Law and W.David Kelton, “Simulation Modeling and analysis”, McGraw
Hill International Editions, 1991
7. Shannon R.E., “System simulation”, Prentice Hall 1993
28
PEE2H
MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR OF MATERIALS
Regulations’
L T P C
3 0 0 3
AIM:
To Study the Mechanical Behaviour of Materials
OBJECTIVE:
To know the mechanical behavior of materials under various loading Conditions.
UNIT I
BASIC CONCEPTS OF MATERIAL BEHAVIOR
10
Elasticity in metals and polymers– Strengthening mechanisms, work hardening, solid solutioning,
grain boundary strengthening, poly phase mixture, precipitation, particle, fibre and dispersion
strengthening. Effect of temperature, strain and strain rate on plastic
behaviour–Super lasticity –.
Griffith’s theory,– Ductile, brittle transition in steel – High temperature fracture, creep – Larson
Miller parameter – Deformation and fracture mechanism maps.
UNIT II BEHAVIOUR UNDER DYNAMIC LOADS AND DESIGN APPROACHES
10
Stress intensity factor and fracture toughness – Fatigue, low and high cycle fatigue test, crack
initiation and propagation
mechanisms and Paris law.- Safe life, Stress-life, strain-life and fail safe design approaches -Effect of surface and metallurgical parameters on
fatigue – Fracture
of non metallic materials – Failure analysis, sources of failure, procedure of failure analysis.
UNIT III
SELECTION OF MATERIALS
10
Motivation for selection, cost basis and service requirements – Selection for mechanical properties,
strength, toughness, fatigue and creep – Selection for surface durability corrosion and wear resistance
– Relationship between materials selection and processing – Case studies in materials selection with
relevance to aero, auto, marine, machinery and nuclear applications – Computer aided materials
selection.
UNIT IV
MODERN METALLIC MATERIALS
8
Dual phase steels, High strength low alloy (HSLA) steel, Transformation induced plasticity (TRIP)
Steel, Maraging steel, Nitrogen steel – Intermetallics, Ni and Ti aluminides – smart materials, shape
memory alloys – Metallic glass and nano crystalline materials.
UNIT V
NON METALLIC MATERIALS
7
Polymeric materials – Formation of polymer structure – Production techniques of fibers, foams,
adhesives and coating – structure, properties and
applications of engineering polymers –
Advanced structural ceramics, WC,
TiC, TaC, Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4 CBN and diamond – properties,
processing and applications.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. George E.Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill, 1988
2. Thomas H. Courtney, “Mechanical Behavior of Materials”, 2nd edition , McGraw Hill, 2000
3. Charles, J.A., Crane, F.A.A. and Fumess, J.A.G., “Selection and use of engineering
materials”, 3rd edition, Butterworth-Heiremann, 1997.
4. Flinn, R.A., and Trojan, P.K., “Engineering Materials and their Applications”, 4th Edition
Jaico, 1999.
5. Metals Hand book, Vol.10, “Failure Analysis and Prevention”, 10th Edition , Jaico, 1999.
6. Ashby M.F., “Materials selection in Mechanical Design” 2nd Edition, Butter worth, 1999.
29
Regulations’
PEE2J
OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES IN ENGINEERING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To introduce the various optimization techniques and their advancements.
OBJECTIVE:
To make use of the above techniques while modeling and solving the engineering problems
of different fields.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
5
Optimization – Historical Development – Engineering applications of optimization –
Statement of an Optimization problem – classification of optimization problems.
UNIT II
CLASSIC OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
10
Linear programming - Graphical method – simplex method – dual simplex method – revised
simplex method – duality in LP – Parametric Linear programming – Goal Programming.
UNIT III
NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING
Introduction – Lagrangeon Method – Kuhn-Tucker conditions – Quadratic programming
– Separable programming – Stochastic programming – Geometric programming
9
UNIT IV
INTEGER AND DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING AND NETWORK 12
TECHNIQUES
Integer programming - Cutting plane algorithm, Branch and bound technique, Zero-one implicit
enumeration – Dynamic Programming – Formulation, Various applications using Dynamic
Programming. Network Techniques – Shortest Path Model – Minimum Spanning Tree
Problem – Maximal flow problem.
UNIT V
ADVANCES IN SIMULATION
Genetic algorithms – simulated annealing – Neural Network and Fuzzy systems
9
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. R.Panneerselvam, “Operations Research”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi 1 – 2005
2. P.K. Guptha & Man-Mohan, “ Problems in Operations Research”, Sultan chand &
Sons, 1994
3. Ravindran, Philips and Solberg, “Operations Research Principles and Practice”, John
Wiley & Sons, Singapore, 1992
4. J.K.Sharma, “Operations Research Theory & Appln”, Macmillan India Ltd., 1997
5. Hamdy A. Taha, “Operations Research An Introduction” , Prentice Hall of India, 1997
30
Regulations’
PEE2K
PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To introduce the concepts of probability, sampling techniques, estimation to the students.
OBJECTIVE:
To train the students so that students will be able to design experimental designs and use
these concepts for research design.
UNIT I
PROBABILITY THEORY
14
Random variables – probability density and distribution functions-moment generating and
characteristic functions – Binomial, Poisson, Normal distributions and their applications.
UNIT II
SAMPLING THEORY
Sampling distributions – Standard error – t, F, Chi square distributions – applications.
9
UNIT III
ESTIMATION THEORY
5
Interval estimation for population mean, standard deviation, difference in means, ratio of
standard deviations – point estimation.
UNIT IV
TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS AND ANOVA
12
Hypothesis testing – Small samples – Tests concerning proportion, means, standard deviations
– Tests based on chi square – Non parametric methods – Sign test – Rank sum test One, two
factor models-Design of experiments
UNIT V
CORRELATION, REGRESSION AND TIME SERIES ANALYSIS
5
Correlation analysis, estimation of regression line – Time series analysis – Trend
analysis – cyclical variations – Seasonal variations – Irregular variations
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Levin and Rubin, “Statistics for Management”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001
2. Hooda, “Statistics for Business and Economics”, Macmillan India, 2001
3. John.E.Freunds, “Mathematical statistics with applications”, Pierson Educations, 2007
4. Gupta and Kapoor, “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultanchand, 2002.
31
Regulations’
PEE2L
RAPID MANUFACTURING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To expose the students the importance of concurrent engineering in the present manufacturing
and also the need and importance of rapid prototype tooling in manufacturing
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students understand the concepts of concurrent engineering such as artificial
intelligence, expert system, JIT, automated assembly system etc. Also to impart knowledge in
various rapid tooling techniques and processes.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO CONCURRENT ENGINEERING
9
Extensive definition of CE – CE design methodologies organizing for CE – CE tool box
collaborative product development – IT support – Solid modeling – Product data management
– collaborative product – Artificial intelligence – Expert systems – software hardware co –
design
UNIT II
DESIGN STATE
9
Life cycle design of products – opportunity for manufacturing enterprises – modality of
concurrent engineering design – Automated Analysis Idealization control – concurrent
Engineering in optimal structural design – Real time constraints
UNIT III
MANUFACTURING CONCEPTS AND ANALYSIS
9
Manufacturing competitiveness – checking design process – conceptual design mechanism –
qualitative physical approach – An intelligent design for manufacturing system – JITsystem –
low inventory – modular fixtures modeling and Reasoning for computer based Assembly
planning – Design of Automated Manufacturing systems.
UNIT IV
RAPID PROTO TYPE TOOLING PROCESSES
9
Ed for coessiomn in product development classification of RP systems – Fused
deposition modeling selective laser sintering – stereo lithography systems – laminated object
manufacturing. Solid ground curing – laser engineered net shaping (LENS).
UNIT V
MODULAR AND RAPIDTOOLING
9
Principle – Thermojet printer, Sander’s model 3D printer, Genisys Xs printer, JP system
object yudra system – In direct rapid tooling , silicon rubber tooling – aliminium fitted epoxy
tooling – spray metal tooling, direct rapid tooling – quick cast process – copper polyamide,
rapid tools sand casting tooling laminated tooling soft tooling Vs hard tooling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Anderson M.M and Hein L. Berlin “Integrated Product Development” Springer Ver
Log 1987.
2. Cleetus. J. “Design for concurrent Engineering”, Concurrent Engineering Research
Center, and Mongantown W.V.1992.
3. Andrew Kusaik, “Concurrent Engineering Automation tools and technology”, Wiley
John and Sons Inc 1992.
4. Prasad, “Concurrent Engineering Fundamentals Integrated Product Development” 1996.
5. Pham, D.T. and Dimov, S.S. “Rapid Manufacturing”, Verlag London, 2001.
6. Paul P.Jacob, Stereo Lithography and other Rapid Prototyping &Manufacturing
Technologies, SME., New York,1996.
32
Regulations’
PEE2M
ROBOT DESIGN AND PROGRAMMING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To impart knowledge in the area of Robot designing and programming in Robotic languages.
OBJECTIVE:
To teach the students about the kinematic arrangement of robots and its applications in the area
of manufacturing sectors.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definition, Need Application, Types of robots – Classifications – Configuration, work volume,
control loops, controls and intelligence, specifications of robot, degrees of freedoms, end
effectors – types, selection applications.
UNIT II
ROBOT KINEMATICS
9
Introduction – Matrix representation Homogeneous transformation, forward and inverse–
Kinematic equations, Denvit – Hartenbers representations – Inverse Kinematic
relations.Fundamental problems with D-H representation, differential motion and velocity
of frames – Jacobian, Differential Charges between frames
UNIT III
ROBOT DYNAMICS AND TRAJECTORY PLANNING
9
Lagrangeon mechanics, dynamic equations for sing, double and multiple DOF robots – static
force analysis of robots, Trajectory planning – joint space, Cartesian space description and
trajectory planning – third order, fifth order – Polynomial trajectory planning
UNIT IV
ROBOT PROGRAMMING & AI TECHNIQUES
9
Types of Programming – Teach Pendant programming – Basic concepts in A1
techniques – Concept of knowledge representations – Expert system and its
components.
UNIT V
ROBOT SENSORS AND ACTUATORS
9
Design of Robots – characteristics of actuating systems, comparison, microprocessors control
of electric motors, magneto strictive actuators, shape memory type metals, sensors, position,
velocity, force, temperature, pressure sensors – Contact and non-contact sensors, infrared
sensors, RCC, vision sensors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Gordon Mair, ‘Industrial Robotics’, Prentice Hall (U.K.), 1988
2. Wesley E Snyder R, ‘Industrial Robots, Computer Interfacing and Control’, Prentice
Hall International Edition, 1988.
3. Groover.M.P. “Industrial Robotics”, McGraw – Hill, International edition, 1996.
4. Saeed.B.Niku, “Introduction to Robotics” Analysis, system, Applications’, Pearsonn
educations, 2002
33
Regulations’
PEE3A
ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To expose the students in the art of manufacturing new products due to the development of new
materials and processes. The students will totally get a feel of the relevant suitable process
while evaluating and deciding.
OBJECTIVE:
To inform the students about the various alternative manufacturing processes available.
To develop an altitude to look for the unconventional manufacturing process to machine
To make them to understand and appreciate the latest manufacturing process for micro
fabrication and devices
UNIT I
NEWER MACHINING PROCESSES - I
9
(Non thermal energy) – Abrasive machining – water jet machining - ultrasonic machining–
chemical machining – electro chemical machining – construction working principle – steps types – process parameters – derivations – problems, merits, demerits and applications .
UNIT II
NEWER MACHINING PROCESS – II
9
Wire cut EDM - Electro chemical machining – ECG - Electric discharge machining –
construction – principle – types – control - circuits – tool design – merits, demerits &
applications.
UNIT III
NEWER MACHINING PROCESS – III
9
Laser beam machining – Electron beam machining – Plasma arc machining – Ion beam
machining – construction working principle types – process parameter – derivations –
problems, merits, demerits and applications.
UNIT IV
FABRICATION OF MICRO DEVICES
9
Semiconductors – films and film de purification – Oxidation - diffusion – ion implantation –
etching – metallization – bonding – surface and bulk machining – LIGA Process – Solid free
form fabrication.
UNIT V
MICRO FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY
9
Wafer preparation – monolithic processing – moulding – PCB board hybrid & mcm technology
– programmable devices & ASIC – electronic material and processing.– stereo lithography
SAW devices, Surface Mount Technology
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Serope kelpekijian & stevan r. schmid “ Manufacturing process Engg Material” – 2003
2. “Micro senors Mems & smart devices”, Julian W.Hardner, 2002
3. Brahem T. Smith,”Advanced machining I.F.S.” UK, 1989.
4. Jaeger R.C., “Introduction to microelectronic fabrication”, Addison Wesley, 1988.
5. Nario Taniguchi “Nano technology” Oxford University Press 1996.
6. Pandey P.C. & Shan HS “ Modern Machining Processes”, Standard Publishing
Co.,1980
7. More Madon, “Fundamentals of Micro fabrication”, CRC Press, 1997.
34
Regulations’
PEE3B
COMPUTER AIDED PRODUCT DESIGN
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To introduce the computer aided modeling and various concepts of product design.
OBJECTIVE:
To model a product using CAD software.
To apply the various design concepts and design tools and techniques while designing a
product.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Introduction to Engineering Design – Various phases of systematic design – sequential
engineering and concurrent engineering – Computer hardware & Peripherals – software
packages for design and drafting.
UNIT II
COMPUTER GRAPHICS FUNDAMENTALS AND GEOMETRIC 8
MODEL
Computer graphics – applications – principals of interactive computer graphics – 2D 3D
transformations – projections – curves - Geometric Modeling – types – Wire frame surface and
solid modeling – Boundary Representation, constructive solid geometry – Graphics standards –
assembly modeling – use of software packages
UNIT III
PRODUCT DESIGN CONCEPTS
8
Understanding customer needs – Product function modeling – Function trees and
function structures – Product tear down methods – Bench marking – Product portfolio –
concept generation and selection.
UNIT IV
PRODUCT DESIGN TOOLS & TECHNIQUES
12
Product modeling – types of product models; product development process tools – TRIZ–
Altshuller’s inventive principles – Modeling of product metrics – Design for reliability –
design for manufacturability – machining, casting, and metal forming – design for assembly
and disassembly - Design for environment – FMEA – QFD – Poka Yoke - DOE –
Taguchi method of DOE – Quality loss functions – Design for product life cycle.
UNIT V
PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT
9
Product Data Management – concepts – Collaborative product design and commerce –
Information
Acquisition –Sourcing
factor –manufacturing
planning factor–
Customization factor – Product life cycle management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. Kevin Otto, Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson Education, 2000.
REFERENCES
1. Biren Prasad, “Concurrent Engineering Fundamentals Vol.11”, Prentice Hall, 1997.
2. James G.Bralla, “Handbook of Product Design for Manufacturing”, McGraw Hill, 1994
3. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM theory and Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991.
4. David F.Rogers.J, Alan Adams, “Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics”,
McGraw Hill, 1990
35
Regulations’
PEE3C
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To introduce the concepts of financial and various functions of financial management so
that the students will be able to handle higher level financial decisions.
OBJECTIVE:
To train students in various functions of finance such as working capital management, current
assets management so that students will be able to make high investment decisions when
they take up senior managerial positions.
UNIT I
FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
8
Accounting principles - Basic records - Preparation and interpretation of profit and loss
statement - balance sheet - Fixed assets - Current assets.
UNIT II
COST ACCOUNTING
12
Elements of cost - cost classification - material cost - labour costs - overheads - cost of a
product - costing systems - cost determination - process - costing - Allocation of overheads Depreciation - methods.
UNIT III
MANAGEMENT OF WORKING CAPITAL
10
Current assets - Estimation of working capital requirements - Management of accounts
receivable - Inventory - Cash - Inventory valuation methods.
UNIT IV
CAPITAL BUDGETING
8
Significance of capital budgeting - payback period - present value method - accounting rate of
return method - Internal rate of return method.
UNIT V
PROFIT PLANNING AND ANALYSIS
7
Cost - Volume profit relationship Relevant costs in decision making profit management
analysis - Break even analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Presanna Chandra, “Financial Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
2. C.James, Vanhorn, “Fundamentals of Financial Management” PHI, 1996
3. G.B.S. Narang, “Production and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 1993.
4. R Kesavan, C.Elanchezian, Vijayaramnath, “ Process Planning and cost estimation”;
New Age International Publishers, New Delhi 2004
5. RKesavan, C.Elanchezian, Sundar Selwyn, “ Engineering Economics and Financial
Accounting”, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2005.
6. R Kesavan, C. Elanchezian, B.Vijaramnath, “ Engineering Economics and Cost
Analysis”, Anuratha Publications, Chennai.
36
Regulations’
PEE3D
INDUSTRIAL ERGONOMICS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To introduce the concepts of human and Environmental factors for man and Machine.
OBJECTIVE:
To train the students based on ergonomics and work Physiology
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Concepts of human factors engineering and ergonomics – Man – machine system and design
philosophy – Physical work – Heat stress – manual lifting – work posture – repetitive motion.
UNIT II
ANTHROPOMETRY
9
Physical dimensions of the human body as a working machine – Motion size
relationships – Static and dynamic anthropometry – Anthropometric aids – Design principles –
Using anthropometric measures for industrial design – Procedure for anthropometric design.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF SYSTEMS
9
Displays – Controls – Workplace – Seating – Work process – Duration and rest periods– Hand
tool design – Design of visual displays – Design for shift work.
UNIT IV
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS IN DESIGN
10
Temperature – Humidity – Noise – Illumination –Vibration – Measurement of illumination and
contrast – use of photometers – Recommended illumination levels. The ageing eye– Use of
indirect (reflected) lighting – cost efficiency of illumination – special purpose lighting for
inspection and quality control – Measurement of sound – Noise exposure and hearing loss –
Hearing protectors – analysis and reduction of noise – Effects of Noise on performance –
annoyance of noise and interference with communication – sources of vibration discomfort.
UNIT V
WORK PHYSIOLOGY
8
Provision of energy for muscular work – Role of oxygen physical exertion –
Measurement of energy expenditure Respiration – Pulse rate and blood pressure during
physical work – Physical work capacity and its evaluation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Martin Helander, “A guide to the ergonomics of manufacturing”, East West press, 1996
2. E.J. McCormic, “Human factors in engineering design”, McGraw Hill 1976
3. R.S. Bridger, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, McGraw Hill, 1995.
4. Rauwendaal,C., “Polymer extrusion”, Hanser publishers, 2000.
5. Rosatao, D.V. “Blow moulding HandBook”, Hanser Publishers, 1989.
6. Seamour, E.B. “Modern Plastics Technology”, Prentice Hall, 2002
7. Mallick, P.K. and Newman.S., “Composite Materials Technology”,Hanser Publishers,
2003
8. “Reactive Processing of Polymers”, V.P.Begishev, A.Ya.Malkin
37
Regulations’
NANO COMPOSITES
PEE3E
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To impart on types, physical properties and processing of polymer atrix Nano composites, metal
matrix Nano composites and ceramics matrix Nano composites.
OBJECTIVE:
To study Nano matrix-Polymer, Metal and Ceramics matrix materials,
To develop knowledge on processing, interfacial properties and application of Nano
Composites.
UNIT I
NANO CERAMICS
9
Metal-Oxide or Metal-Ceramic composites, Different aspects of their preparation techniques
and their final properties and functionality.
UNIT II
METAL BASED NANO COMPOSITES
9
Metal-metal nanocomposites, some simple preparation techniques and their new electrical and
magnetic properties.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF SUPER HARD MATERIALS
Super hard nanocomposites, its designing and improvements of mechanical properties.
9
UNIT IV
NEW KIND OF NANOCOMPOSITES
9
Fractal based glass-metal nanocomposites, its designing and fractal dimension analysis.
Electrical property of fractal based nanocomposites. Core-Shell structured nanocomposites.
UNIT V
POLYMER BASED NANOCOMPOSITES
9
Preparation and characterization of diblock Copolymer based nanocomposites; Polymercarbon
anotubes based composites, their mechanical properties, and industrial possibilities.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. “Nanocomposites Science and Technology”, P. M. Ajayan, L.S. Schadler, P. V. Braun
2. “Physical Properties of Carbon Nanotubes”’ R. Saito,1999.
3. “Carbon Nanotubes” , Carbon , Vol 33 - M. Endo, S. Iijima, M.S. Dresselhaus
4. The search for novel, superhard materials- Stan Vepr¡ek (Review Article) JVST A, 1999
5. Nanometer versus micrometer-sized particles-Christian Brosseau,Jamal Ben,Youssef,
Philippe Talbot, Anne-Marie Konn, (Review Article) J. Appl. Phys, Vol 93, 2003
38
Regulations’
PEE3F
LEAN MANUFACTURING SYSTEM AND
IMPLEMENTATION
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To introduce the concepts of lean manufacturing system.
OBJECTIVE:
To study the various tools for lean manufacturing (LM).
To apply the above tools to implement LM system in an organization.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
Conventional
Manufacturing versus Lean Manufacturing – Principles
Manufacturing – Basic elements of lean manufacturing – Introduction to LM Tools.
7
Lean
UNIT II
CELLULAR MANUFACTURING, JIT, TPM
9
Cellular Manufacturing – Types of Layout, Principles of Cell layout, Implementation. JIT
– Principles of JIT and Implementation of Kanban. TPM – Pillars of TPM, Principles and
implementation of TPM.
UNIT III
SET UP TIME REDUCTION, TQM, 5S, VSM
10
Set up time reduction – Definition, philosophies and reduction approaches.TQM –
Principles and implementation.
5S Principles and implementation - Value stream
mapping - Procedure and principles.
UNIT IV
SIX SIGMA
9
Six Sigma – Definition, statistical considerations, variability reduction, design of experiments –
Six Sigma implementation
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
Various case studies of implementation of lean manufacturing at industries
10
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Ronald G. Askin & Jeffrey B.Goldberg, “Design and Analysis of Lean Production
Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003
2. Rother M. and Shook J, “Learning to See: Value Stream Mapping to Add Value and
Eliminate Muda”, Lean Enterprise Institute, 1999, Brookline, MA.
3. Mikell P. Groover ,‘Automation, Production Systems and CIM”, 2002.
39
Regulations’
PEE3G
MANUFACTURING MANAGEMENT
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To introduce the concepts of manufacturing management and various manufacturing
management function to the students.
OBJECTIVE:
To train the students on various functions of manufacturing management so that the students
will be able to take up these functions as they get in to senior managerial positions.
UNIT I
PLANT ENGINEERING
7
Plant location – Factors affecting plant location – Techniques – Plant layout principles.Types –Comparison of layouts – Materials handling – Principles – Factors affecting
selection of Materials handling system – Types of materials handling systems – Techniques.
UNIT II
WORK STUDY
9
Method study – Principles of motion economy – steps in method study – Tool and Techniques
– Work measurement – Purpose – stop watch time study – Production studies – work sampling
– Ergonomics – Value analysis.
UNIT III
PROCESS PLANNING AND FORECASTING
10
Process planning – Aims of process planning – steps to prepare the detailed work sheets
for manufacturing a given component – Break even analysis – Forecasting – Purpose of
forecasting – Methods of forecasting – Time series – Regression and Correlation – Exponential
smoothing – Forecast errors.
UNIT IV
SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT
9
Scheduling – Priority rules scheduling – sequencing – Johnson’s algorithm for job sequencing
– n job M machine problems – Project Network analysis – PERT/CPM – Critical path –Floats
– Resource leveling – Queuing analysis.
UNIT V
PERSONNEL AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT
10
Principles of Management – Functions of personnel management – Recruitment – Traiing
– Motivation – Communication – conflicts – Industrial relations – Trade Union – Functions of
marketing – Sales promotion methods – Advertising – Product packaging – Distribution
channels – Market research and techniques.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. R. Kesavan, C.Elanchezian and B.Vijayaramnath, “ Production Planning
and Control”, Anuratha Publications, Chennai – 2008
2. R. Kesavan,C. Elanchezian and T.Sundar Selwyn, “Engineering Management”,
Eswar Press, Chennai – 2005
3. R. Kesavan, C. Elanchezian, and B.Vijayaramnath, “Principles of Management”
Eswar Press – Chennai – 2004
4. R. Panneerselvam, “Production and Operations Management”, Prentice Hall of
India,2002
5. Martand T. Telsang, “Production Management”, S.Chand & Co., 2005
6. Thomas E Mortan, “ Production and Operations Management”, Vikas Publican, 2003.
40
Regulations’
PEE3H
MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND LOGISTICS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To introduce to the students the various functions of materials management and logistics
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students familiar with the various concepts and functions of material
management, so that the students will be in a position to manage the materials management
department independently.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
6
Introduction to materials management – Objectives – Functions – Operating Cycle – Value
analysis – Make or buy decisions.
UNIT II
MANAGEMENT OF PURCHASE
7
Purchasing policies and procedures – Selection of sources of supply – Vendor development –
Vendor evaluation and rating – Methods of purchasing – Imports – Buyer – Seller relationship
– Negotiations.
UNIT III
MANAGEMENT OF STORES AND LOGISTICS
12
Stores function – Location – Layout – Stock taking – Materials handling – Transportation–
Insurance – Codification – Inventory pricing – stores management – safety – warehousing –
Distribution linear programming – Traveling Salesman problems – Network analysis –
Logistics Management.
UNIT IV
MATERIALS PLANNING
10
Forecasting – Materials requirements planning – Quantity – Periodic – Deterministic models –
Finite production.
UNIT V
INVENTORY MANAGEMENT
10
ABC analysis – Aggregate planning – Lot size under constraints – Just in Time (JIT)
system.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Lamer Lee and Donald W.Dobler, “ Purchasing and Material Management”, Text
and cases, Tata McGraw Hill, 1996.
2. Gopalakrishnan.P, “Handbook of Materials Management”, Prentice Hall of India,
1996.
3. Guptha P.K. and Manmohan, “ Problems in Operations Research”, Suttan Chand &
Sons, 2003.
4. R. Kesavan, C.Elanchezian and T.SundarSelwyn, “ Engineering Management”
Eswar Press – 2005.
5. R. Kesavan, C.Elanchezian and B.Vijaya Ramnath, “Production Planning and
Control”, Anuratha Publications, Chennai, 2008.
6. G. Reghuram, N. Rangaraj, “ Logistics and supply chain management cases and
concepts”, Macmillan India Ltd., 2006.
41
Regulations’
PEE3J
MECHANICAL PROCESSING AND PROPERTIES
OF NANOSTRUCTURE MATERIALS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
AIM:
To know the processing and properties of Nano Structure materials.
OBJECTIVE:
To Study the Structure, Processing and Properties of Metals Ceramics and Polymers
UNIT I
PROCESSING OF METALS AND ALLOYS
6
Understanding the following processes from the viewpoints of mechanics and processes:
rolling, forging, extrusion, wire drawing, sheet metal forming.
UNIT II
PROCESSING OF POLYMERS
Special techniques like injection moulding, thermoforming, vacuum and pressure assisted
forming.
7
UNIT III
PROCESSING OF POWDERS OF METALS AND CERAMICS
12
Selection and characterization of powders, compacting and sintering; mechanical working.
Production of Porous and Dense Composite Components: Metal- polymer- and ceramic- based
composites.
UNIT IV
PROCESSING
OF
STRUCTURAL
AND
FUNCTIONAL 10
NANOCRYSTALLINE MATERIALS
Properties required of nanocrystalline materials used for structural, hydrogen storage, magnetic
and catalytic applications; processing techniques; techniques for retaining the nanocrystalline
structure in service.
UNIT V
MICROSTRUCTURE AND PROPERTIES
10
Properties slightly dependent on temperature and grain size; properties strongly dependent on
temperature and grain size; strengthening mechanisms; enhancement of available plasticity;
grain size evolution and grain size control; Hall-Petch relation, microstructure – dislocation
interactions at low and high temperatures; effects of diffusion on strength and flow of materials;
methods of enhancing or retarding diffusion; grain boundary sliding and grain boundary
migration; current limitations on approaches based on dislocation theory; possibilities for
predictive design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. H. Cottrell, “The Mechanical Properties of Matter”, John Wiley, N York- London,
1964.
2. P. Haasen, “Physical Metallurgy”, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK, 1978.
3. G. E. Dieter, adapted by D Bacon, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, SI Metric edition,
MaGraw-Hill, Singapore, 1988.
4. K. A. Padmanabhan, “Mechanical Properties of Nanostructured Materials”, Materials
Science and Engineering, A 304-306 (2001) 200-205.
5. C. C. Koch, “Nanostructured Materials: Processing, Properties and Applications” , 2nd
edition .2007.
42
Regulations’
PEE3K
MEMS AND NANOTECHNOLOGY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To inspire the students to expect to the trends in manufacturing micro components and
measuring systems to nano scale.
OBJECTIVE:
To expose the students to the evolution of micro electromechanical systems, to the various
fabrication techniques and to make students to be award of micro actuators.
To impart knowledge to the students about nano materials and various nano measurements
techniques.
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS
6
Definition – historical development – fundamentals – properties, micro fluidics, design and
fabrication micro-system, microelectronics, working principle and applications of micro
system.
UNIT II
MATERIALS, FABRICATION PROCESSES AND MICRO 10
SYSTEM PACKAGING
Substrates and wafers, silicon as substrate material, mechanical properties of Si, Silicon
Compounds silicon piezo resistors, Galium arsenide, quartz, polymers for MEMS, conductive
polymers.Photolithography, photo resist applications, light sources, in implantation,
diffusion process exudation – thermal oxidation, silicon diode, chemical vapour deposition,
sputtering- deposition by epitoxy – etching – bulk and surface machining – LIGA process
Micro system packaging – considerations packaging – levels of micro system packaging die
level, device level and system level.
UNIT III
MICRO DEVICES AND MATERIALS
8
Sensors – classification – signal conversion ideal characterization of sensors micro
actuators, mechanical sensors – measurands displacement sensors, pressure and flow sensors,
micro actuators – smart materials – applications.
UNIT IV
SCIENCE OF NANO MATERIALS
10
Classification of nano structures – effect of the nanometer length scale effects of nano scale
dimensions on various properties – structural, thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic,
optical and electronic properties – effect of nanoscale dimensions on biological systems.
Fabrication methods – Top down processes – bottom up process.
UNIT V
CHARACTERIZATION OF NANO MATERIALS
11
Nano-processing systems – Nano measuring systems – characterization – analytical imaging
techniques – microscopy techniques, electron microscopy scanning electron microscopy,
transmission electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, scanning tunneling
microscopy, atomic force microscopy, diffraction techniques – spectroscopy techniques –
Raman spectroscopy, 3D surface analysis – Mechanical, Magnetic and thermal properties –
Nano positioning systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
43
Regulations’
REFERENCES
1. Tai Ran Hsu, “ MEMS a n d Microsystems Design and Manufacture”,
Tata-McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Mark Madou, “Fundamentals of Micro fabrication”, CRC Press, New York,
3rd Edition 2011.
3. Norio Taniguchi, “Nano Technology”, Oxford University Press, New York,
2001
4. “The MEMS Hand book”, Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, CRC Press, N.Y, London. 2nd
Edition 2005
5. Charles P Poole, Frank J Owens, “Introduction to Nano technology”, John
Wiley and Sons, 2003
6. Julian W. Hardner “Micro Sensors, Principles and Applications”, CRC Press
1999.
44
Regulations’
PEE3L
QUALITY AND RELIABILITY ENGINEERING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To expose the students to the various quality control techniques and also to understand the
importance and concept of reliability and maintainability in industries.
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students to understand the various quality control techniques and to
construct the various quality control charts for variables and attributes and also the
design concepts for reliable system and maintenance aspects in industries.
UNIT I
QUALITY AND STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL
6
Quality–Definition–Quality Assurance –Variation in process –Factors –process capability –
control charts – variables X, R & X, - Attributes P, C & U-Chart tolerance design. Establishing
and interpreting control charts – charts for variables – Quality rating– Short run SPC.
UNIT II
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING
7
Lot by lot sampling – types – probability of acceptance in single, double, multiple
sampling plans – OC curves – Producer’s risk and consumer’s risk. AQL, LTPD, AOQL,
Concepts – standard sampling plans for AQL and LTPD – use of standard sampling plans.
UNIT III
EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN AND TAGUCHI METHOD
12
Fundamentals – factorial experiments – random design, Latin square design – Taguchi method
– Loss function – experiments – S/N ratio and performance measure – Orthogonal array.
UNIT IV
CONCEPT OF RELIABILITY
10
Definition – reliability vs quality, reliability function – MTBF, MTTR, availability, bathtub
curve – time dependent failure models – distributions – normal, weibull, lognormal – Reliability
of system and models – serial, parallel and combined configuration – Markove analysis, load
sharing systems, standby systems, covarientmodels, static models, dynamic models.
UNIT V
DESIGN FOR RELIABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY
10
Reliability design process, system effectiveness, economic analysis and life cycle cost,
reliability allocation, design methods, parts and material selection, derating, stress- strength and
analysis, failure analysis,
identification determination of causes, assessments of effects,
computation of criticality index, corrective action, system safety– analysis of down-time – the
repair time distribution, stochastic point processes system repair time, reliability under
preventive maintenance state dependent system with repair.
MTTR – mean system down time, repair vs replacement, replacement models,
proactive,preventive, predictive maintenance maintainability and
availability, optimization
techniques for system reliability with redundancy heuristic methods applied to optimal system
reliability.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Amata Mitra “Fundamentals of Quality Control & improvement” Pearson Edn, 2002.
2. Bester field D.H., “Quality Control” Prentice Hall, 1993.
3. Patrick D T. connor, “ Practical Reliability Engg”, John-Wiley and Sons Inc, 2002
4. Charles E Ebling, “ An Introduction to Reliability and Maintainability Engineering”,
Tata- McGraw Hill, 2000.
5. David J Smith, “Reliability Maintainability and Risk: Practical Methods for
Engineers”, Butterworth 2002.
6. Dhillon,Engg, “Maintainability How t o design for reliability & easy maintenance”, PH
2008.
45
Regulations’
PEE3M
SYNTHESIS AND APPLICATIONS OF
NANOMATERIALS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
AIM:
To impart on types, physical properties and processing of polymer matrix Nano composites,
metal matrix Nano composites and ceramics matrix Nano composites.
OBJECTIVE:
To study Nano matrix-Polymer, Metal and Ceramics matrix materials,
To develop knowledge on processing, interfacial properties and application of Nano
Composites.
UNIT I
BULK SYNTHESIS
9
Synthesis of bulk nano-structured materials –sol gel processing –Mechanical alloying and
mechanical milling- Inert gas condensation technique – Nano polymers – Bulk and nano
composite materials.
UNIT II
CHEMICAL APPROACHES
9
Self-assembly, self-assembled mono layers (SAMs). Langmuir-Blodgett (LB) films, clusters,
colloids, zeolites, organic block copolymers, emulsion polymerization, templated synthesis, and
confined nucleation and/or growth. Biomimetic Approaches: polymer matrix isolation, and
surface-templated nucleation and/or crystallization. Electrochemical Approaches: anodic
oxidation of alumina films, porous silicon, and pulsed electrochemical deposition.
UNIT III
PHYSICAL APPROACHES
9
Vapor deposition and different types of epitaxial growth techniques- pulsed laser deposition,
Magnetron sputtering - Micro lithography (photolithography, soft lithography, micromachining,
e-beam writing, and scanning probe patterning).
UNIT IV
NANOPOROUS MATERIALS
9
Nano porous Materials – Silicon - Zeolites, mesoporous materials – nano membranes and carbon
nano tubes - AgX photography, smart sunglasses, and transparent conducting oxides –molecular
sieves – nano sponges.
UNIT V
APPLICATION OF NANOMATERIALS
9
Molecular Electronics and Nano electronics – Nanobots- Biological Applications – Quantum
Devices – Nano mechanics - Carbon Nanotube – Photonics- Nano structures as single electron
transistor –principle and design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. S.P. Gaponenko, “Optical Properties of semiconductor nanocrystals”, Cambridge Univ
Press, 980.
2. W.Gaddand, D.Brenner, S.Lysherski and G.J.Infrate(Eds.), “Handbook of NanoScience,
Engg. and Technology”, CRC Press, 2002.
3. K. Barriham, D.D. Vvedensky, “Low dimensional semiconductor structures:
fundamental and device applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
4. G. Cao, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties & Applications”,
Imperial College Press, 2004.
5. J.George, Preparation of Thin Films, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York. 2005.
46
www.nec.edu.in
REGULATIONS - 2013
DEPARTMENT OF
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
M.E. – COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Regulations – 2013
Curriculum & Syllabi of M.E. (CSE)
REGULATIONS - 2013
Curriculum and Syllabi of Full Time
M.E. (COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING)
SEMESTER I
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
S.NO
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1
CEC11
Discrete Structures and Formal Languages
3
1
0
4
2
CEC12
3
0
0
3
3
CEC13
Data Structures and Algorithms
Advanced Computer Architecture
(Common to CSE, CC)
3
0
0
3
4
CEC14
Network and Management Systems
3
0
0
3
5
CEC15
Object Oriented Software Engineering
3
0
0
3
PRACTICAL
6
CEC16
Data Structures Laboratory
0
0
3
2
7
CEC17
Networking Laboratory
0
0
3
2
TOTAL 15
1
6
20
SEMESTER II
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
S.NO
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1
CEC21
Advanced Databases
3
0
0
3
2
CEC22
Advanced Operating Systems
3
0
0
3
3
CEC23
Compiler Design
3
0
0
3
4
CEC24
Internet Programming
3
0
0
3
5
Elective – I
3
0
0
3
6
Elective – II
3
0
0
3
PRACTICAL
7
CEC25
Operating System and Compiler Laboratory
0
0
3
2
8
CEC26
Internet Programming Laboratory
0
0
3
2
18
0
6
22
TOTAL
2
SEMESTER III
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1
Elective – III
3
0
0
3
2
Elective – IV
3
0
0
3
3
Elective – V
3
0
0
3
0
0
12
6
9
0
12
15
L
T
P
C
0
0
24
12
0
0
24
12
PRACTICAL
4
CEC31
Project Work (Phase I)
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
COURSE TITLE
PRACTICAL
1
CEC41
Project Work (Phase II)
TOTAL
TOTAL CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR THE AWARD OF THE DEGREE - 69
3
REGULATIONS - 2013
M.E. (COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING)
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
CEC11
2
CEC12
3
CEC13
PRACTICAL
4
CEC16
COURSE TITLE
Discrete Structures and Formal Languages
Data Structures and Algorithms
(Common to CSE, CC)
Data Structures Laboratory
L
T
P
C
3
3
1
0
0
0
4
3
3
0
0
3
0
TOTAL 9
0
1
3
3
2
12
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
CEC21
2
CEC22
3
CEC23
PRACTICAL
4
CEC25
COURSE TITLE
Advanced Databases
Advanced Operating Systems
Compiler Design
L
T
P
C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
Operating System and Compiler Laboratory
0
TOTAL 9
0
0
3
3
2
11
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
CEC14
2
CEC15
PRACTICAL
3
CEC17
COURSE TITLE
Network and Management Systems
Object Oriented Software Engineering
Networking Laboratory
L
T
P
C
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
0
TOTAL 6
0
0
3
3
2
8
4
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
CEC24
2
3
PRACTICAL
4
CEC26
COURSE TITLE
L
Internet Programming
Elective – I
Elective – II
Internet Programming Laboratory
T
P
C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
TOTAL 9
0
0
3
3
2
11
SEMESTER - V (Part time)
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
2
3
PRACTICAL
4
CEC31
COURSE TITLE
L
Elective – III
Elective – IV
Elective – V
T
P
C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
TOTAL 9
0
0
12
12
6
15
SEMESTER - VI (Part time)
COURSE
CODE
PRACTICAL
1
CEC41
S.NO
COURSE TITLE
Project Work (Phase II)
TOTAL
L
T
P
C
0
0
0
0
24
24
12
12
TOTAL CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR THE AWARD OF THE DEGREE – 69
5
LIST OF ELECTIVES FOR M.E.COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
S.NO
1.
2.
3.
4.
COURSE
CODE
CEE2A
CEE2B
CEE2C
CEE2D
5.
CEE2E
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
CEE2F
CEE2G
CEE2H
CEE2J
CEE2K
CEE2L
II SEMESTER ELECTIVE SUBJECTS
COURSE TITLE
Bio Informatics
Grid and Cloud Computing
Advanced Network Security (Common to CSE, CS)
Adhoc Networks (Common to CSE, CS and CC)
Wavelets and multiresolution analysis
(Common to CS, CSE)
Soft Computing (Common to CSE, CS and CC)
Distributed Computing (Common to CSE, CC)
Pervasive Computing (Common to CSE, CC)
Digital Imaging (Common to CSE, CC)
Theory of Computation
Software Project Management
III SEMESTER ELECTIVE SUBJECTS
COURSE TITLE
S.NO COURSE
CODE
1.
CEE3A Embedded Systems (Common to CS, CSE and CC)
2.
CEE3B Pattern Recognition (Common to CSE, CS)
Evolutionary Computing
3.
CEE3C
(Common to HV, CSE, CS and CC)
4.
CEE3D Mobile Computing (Common to CSE, CS)
Security in Wireless Sensor Networks
5.
CEE3E
(Common to CSE, CS and CC)
6.
CEE3F
Methods for Selfish Malicious Node Detection
7.
CEE3G Cross Layered Wireless ADHOC and Sensor Networks
Modeling and Simulation of Wireless Systems
8.
CEE3H
(Common to CSE, CC)
9.
CEE3J
XML and Web Services (Common to CSE, CC)
10.
CEE3K Data Warehousing and Data Mining
11.
CEE3L Software Quality Assurance
12.
CEE3M Ontology and Semantic Web
13.
CEE3N Information Retrieval Techniques
Performance Evaluation of Computer Systems and
14.
CEE3P
Networks
15.
CEE3Q Agent Based Intelligent Systems
16.
CEE3R Visualization Techniques
17.
CEE3S
Component Based Technology
18.
CEE3T Game Theory
19.
CEE3V Network Congestion Control Avoidance Technique
20.
CEE3W Trusted services and public key infrastructure
21.
CEE3X Wireless MAN
22.
CEE3Y Advanced Security Mechanism
L T P C
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
L T P C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
CEC11
DISCRETE STRUCTURES AND FORMAL LANGUAGES
LT P C
310 4
Objectives:
 To apply rules of inference to construct proofs in propositional and predicate logic.
 To describe, select and use common proof techniques including mathematical induction.
 To make the students to learn the basic terminology of sets, counting, relations, propositions,
and predicates.
 Design state machines for a range of computational problems
 Apply discrete mathematical techniques to problems in computer science
UNIT I
MATHEMATICAL LOGIC
12
Propositions and logical operators – Truth table – Equivalences and implications – Basic laws– Some
more connectives – Functionally complete set of connectives – Normal forms – Proofs in
Propositional calculus.
UNIT II
SET THEORY
12
Sets – Basic Definitions – Set operations – Laws of set theory – Principles of inclusion and exclusion
– Relations – Properties of relations–Equivalence relation – Partitions–Closure operations on relations
– Functions: Injective – Surjective – Bijective.
UNIT III
FORMAL LANGUAGES
12
Languages and Grammars – Phrase Structure Grammar – Classification of Grammars – Pumping
Lemma for Regular Languages – Context Free Languages.
UNIT IV
FINITE STATE AUTOMATA
12
Finite State Automata – Deterministic Finite State Automata(DFA) – Non Deterministic Finite State
Automata (NFA) – Equivalence of DFA and NFA– Equivalence of NFA and Regular Languages.
UNIT V
GRAPH THEORY
12
Graphs – Graph terminology and special types of graphs – Graph isomorphism – Connectivity –Euler
and Hamiltonian graphs.
L: 45 T: 15 TOTAL: 60
REFERENCES
1.
Kenneth H. Rosen, “Discrete Mathematics and its Applications”, 7th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2011.
2.
Hopcroft, Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and Computation”, 3rd
Edition, Narosa Publishing House, 2006.
3.
J.P.Trembly, R.Manohar, “Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to Computer
Science”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 1987.
4.
Narsingh Deo, “Graph Theory with applications to Engineering and Computer Science”, 2nd
Edition, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, 2006.
5.
A.Tamilarasi, A.M.Natarajan, “Discrete Mathematics and its Application”, 3rd Edition, Khanna
Publishers, 2005.
6.
Dr. M. K. Venkatraman, Dr. N. Sridharan and N. Chandrasekaran, “Discrete Mathematics”, 1st
Edition, National Publishing Company, Chennai, 2000.
7
CEC12
DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS
LTPC
3 0 03
Objectives:
 The fundamental design, analysis and implementation of basic data structures.
 To understand the heap structure and advanced tree structure.
 To understand the applications of data structure.
UNIT I
COMPLEXITY ANALYSIS AND ELEMENTARY DATA STRUCTURES
9
Asymptotic notations – Properties of big oh notation – Asymptotic notation with several parameters –
Conditional Asymptotic notation – Amortized Analysis – Solving recurrence equations – Arrays –
Linked lists – Stack – Queues.
UNIT II
HEAP STRUCTURES
9
Min-Max heaps – Deaps – Leftist heaps – Binomial heaps – Fibonacci heaps – Skew heaps –Lazy–
binomial heaps.
UNIT III
SEARCH STRUCTURES
9
Tree Traversals – Binary trees – Binary search trees – AVL trees – B–trees – 2-3 trees – 2-3-4 trees –
Red-black trees – Splay trees – Tries.
UNIT IV
GREEDY AND DIVIDE & CONQUER
9
Greedy Algorithm – Quick sort – Strassen’s matrix multiplication – Convex hull – Tree-vertex
splitting – Job sequencing with deadlines – Optimal storage on tapes.
UNIT V
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING AND BACKTRACKING
9
Multistage graphs – 0/1 Knapsack using dynamic programming – Flow shop scheduling – 8-queens
problem – Branch and Bound: Graph colouring – Knapsack using backtracking – Travelling salesman
problem.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, 3rd Impression, Pearson
Education, 2009.
2. E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, “Fundamentals of Data structures in C++”, Galgotia,
Reprint 2009.
3. Thomas H. Corman, Charles E. Leiserson and Ronald L. Rivest, “Introduction to Algorithms”, 2nd
Edition, McGraw Hill Publisher, 2001.
4. E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and S. Rajasekaran, “Computer Algorithms”, 2nd Edition, Silicon Press,
2007.
5. E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and S. Rajasekaran, “Fundamentals Computer Algorithms”, Galgotia,
Reprint 2010.
8
CEC13
ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
(Common to CSE, CC)
LTPC
3 0 03
Objectives:
 To understand quantitative and qualitative approaches and analyze various modules of
modern computer systems.
 Students will learn about the efficiency of cache memory.
 Students will also learn how many processors synchronously execute instructions to improve
performance of a computer system.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER DESIGN AND PIPELINING
9
Introduction – Measuring and reporting performance – Quantitative principles of computer design –
Instruction set principles – Classifying ISA – Design issues – Pipelining – Basic concepts – Hazards –
Implementation – Multicycle operations.
UNIT II
DYNAMIC APPROACHES
9
Concepts – Dynamic Scheduling – Dynamic hardware prediction – Multiple issue – Hardware based
speculation – Limitations of ILP.
UNIT III
SOFTWARE APPROACHES
9
Compiler techniques for exposing ILP – Static branch prediction – VLIW – Advanced compiler
support – Hardware support for exposing more parallelism – Hardware versus software speculation
mechanisms.
UNIT IV
MEMORY AND I/O
9
Cache performance – Reducing cache miss penalty and miss rate – Reducing hit time – Virtual
Memory – Buses – RAID – I/O performance measures – Designing an I/O system.
UNIT V
MULTIPROCESSORS AND MULTICORE ARCHITECTURES
9
Symmetric and distributed shared memory architectures – Performance issues – Synchronization
issues – Models of memory consistency – Software and hardware multithreading.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, “Computer Architecture – A quantitative approach”,
5th Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011.
2. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”, 9th
Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
3. David E. Culler, Jaswinder Pal Singh, “Parallel Computing Architecture: A hardware / software
approach”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 1999.
4. Behrooz Parhami, “Computer Architecture”, Oxford University Press, 2011.
5. John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.
6. Douglas E. Comer, “Essentials of Computer Architecture”, 1st International Edition, Pearson
Education, 2005.
9
CEC14
NETWORK AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To make the students to learn the basics of network management systems and the features of
Wireless LANs.
 To provide an up-to-date survey of developments in high speed networks
 Enable the students to know techniques involved to support real-time traffic and congestion
control.
 To study different types of tools for different applications.
UNIT I
DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT
9
Analogy of Telephone Network Management – Distributed Computing Environments –
Communications protocols, standards – Case histories of Networking and Management – Challenges
of Information Technology Managers – Network Management Goals – Organization and Functions –
Network and System management – Network Management System Platform – Current status and
Future of Network management.
UNIT II
SNMP
9
Standard, Models and Language – SNMPv1 Network Management: Organization – Information,
Communication and Functional model – SNMPv2: System Architecture – Structure of Management
Information – SNMPv2 Protocol – SNMpv3: Documentation Architecture – Applications.
UNIT III
RMON MANAGEMENT
9
RMON – Remote Monitoring – RMON SMI, MIB – RMON1 – RMON2 – ATM remote monitoring –
Case study of internet traffic using RMON.
UNIT IV
BROADBAND AND TMN NETWORK MANAGEMENT
9
Broadband Access Networks and Technologies – WiMAX and other Broadband Wireless
Technologies – HFC Technology – HFC management – DSL technology – Asymmetric Digital
Subscriber line Technology – Telecommunication management network – TMN Conceptual Model –
TMN standards – TMN Architecture – TMN management service architecture Implementation issues.
UNIT V
NETWORK MANAGEMENT TOOLS AND SYSTEMS
9
Network Management Tools – Network Statistics Measurement Systems – History of Enterprise
Management – Network Management Systems – Commercial Network Management Systems –
System Management – Network Management Applications – Fault management – Performance
Management – Security Management.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Mani Subramanian, “Network Management – Principles and Practice”, 4th Indian Reprint, Pearson
Education, 2003.
2. Douglas Mauro, Schmidt, “Essential SNMP”, 2nd Edition, O'Reilly Media, 2005.
3. William Stallings, “SNMP, SNMPv2, SNMPv3, and RMON 1 and 2”, 3rd Impression, Addison
Wesley, 2009.
4. Greg Shields, “Network Management for the mid market”, 1st Edition, Real Time Publishers,
2006.
5. Jeffrey G. Andrews, “Fundamentals of WiMAX: Understanding Broadband Wireless
Networking”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
6. Dave Zeltserman, “Practical Guide to Snmpv3 and Network Management”, 2nd Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2000.
10
CEC15
OBJECT ORIENTED SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
LTPC
3 0 03
Objectives:
 To learn object oriented analysis and design using UML and other techniques.
 To learn how object oriented languages support abstraction and polymorphism.
 To learn an agile software process, with multiple iterations, design patterns, test-driven
development and pair programming.
 To improve analyzing skills in the context of software development.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
System concepts – Software Engineering concepts – Development Activities – Managing Software
Development – Unified Modeling Language – Project Organization – Communication.
UNIT II
ANALYSIS
9
Requirements Elicitation – Concepts – Activities – Management – Analysis Object Model – Analysis
Dynamic Models.
UNIT III
SYSTEM DESIGN
9
Decomposing the system – Overview of system design – System design concepts – System design
activities – Addressing design goals – Managing system design.
UNIT IV
OBJECT DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION ISSUES
9
Reusing Pattern Solutions – Selecting design patterns and components - Specifying Interfaces –
Mapping Models to Code – Testing- Testing activities – Managing Testing.
UNIT V
CHANGE MANAGEMENT
9
Rationale Management – Configuration Management – Project Management – Software development
Life Cycle – IEEE Standards for developing life cycle process – Characterizing the Maturity of
Software Life Cycle Models.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Bernd Bruegge, Alan H Dutoit, “Object Oriented Software Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2005.
2. Craig Larman, “Applying UML and Patterns”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
3. Stephan R. Schach, “Software Engineering”, 7th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
4. Stephan R. Schach, “Object oriented software engineering”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
5. Roger Pressman, “Software Engineering”, 6th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.
6. Timothy C. Lethbridge, Robert Laganiere, “Object-Oriented Software Engineering practical
software development using UML and Java”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
11
CEC16
DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY
LTPC
0 03 2
Objectives:
 To learn how to implement basic concepts of data structures.
 To understand the effect of data structures on an algorithm’s complexity.
 To understand and implement the heap and advanced tree structure.
List of Experiments:
1. Write a program to implement a Quick Sort.
2. Write a program to implement the following operations in the Binary Tree: a). Insert data, b).
Delete data, c). Preorder traversal, d). Inorder Traversal, e). Postorder Traversal.
3. Write a program to implement the following operations of Deap structure: a). Insert the given data
and display the tree, b). Delete the data and display the restructured tree.
4. Write a program to implement the Min Heap Structure with the insertion of the given data, delete
the minimum value data and display the tree.
5. Write a program to implement the Leftist tree with the following operations: a). Insert a value, b).
Delete the value and c). Display the tree.
6. Write a program to implement the following operations with AVL Tree: a). Insert the data, b). LL
Rotation, c). RR Rotation, d). LR Rotation, e). RL Rotation, f). Delete the data and g). Display the
tree.
7. Write a program to implement the tries with the following operations: a). create a trie structure
using characters of key value left to right, one at a time, b). Insert a character and c). Delete a
character.
8. Write a program to implement the convex hull structure and display the convex polygon.
9. Write a program to find out the optimal solution for the given number of objects and their
associated weights using Dynamic Programming
10. Write a program to colour the vertices, where no two vertices should have the same colour for the
given number of vertices and colours.
TOTAL: 45
Required Software: C++ and Java
12
CEC17
NETWORKING LABORATORY
LTPC
0 032
Objectives:
 To study the various network programming and socket system calls.
 To study the TCP/UDP Protocol and their applications
 To understand the concepts of data transfer between client and server.
 To simulate various networking protocols
1. Write a java program to show the date and time to server using TCP.
2. Develop a java program for a client-server application for chat using TCP.
3. Write a program to implement Echo client server using TCP/IP.
4. Write a Java program to develop a DNS server to resolve the given Hostname.
5. Write a program to implement connectionless chat application.
6. Write a java RMI program to perform Prime number generation.
7. Write a java program to simulate sliding window protocol.
8. Develop a Java program to simulate Address Resolution Protocol.
9. Simulate Routing Protocol using Border Gateway Protocol(BGP)
10. Simulate the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol based on the cost assigned to the
path.
11. Implement a server that provides processing services to two or more clients. The services may
include computation of factorial of an integer and computation of power a, b where a and b
belong to double data type using Remote Procedure Call.
12. Study of Network Simulator Package – NS2
13. To perform the following exercise using NS2
i. To create a script that simulates the simplest network topology.
ii. To write a script to simulate a simple network used in an Educational Institution.
iii. To create a simple TCP scenario with Drop Tail Queue mechanism on the gateway.
iv. To create a complex topology and simulate a link failure.
TOTAL: 45
Required Software: Java and NS2
13
CEC21
ADVANCED DATABASES
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To understand the importance of distributed databases and their architectures.
 To study the concepts of object and relational databases.
 To learn the spatial, temporal, mobile and multimedia databases.
UNIT I
DISTRIBUTED DATABASES
10
Distributed Database Concepts – Design Issues – Architecture – Fragmentation – Distributed Query
Processing – Optimization of Distributed Queries – Distributed Transactions – Concurrency Control –
Data Replication.
UNIT II
OBJECT RELATIONAL DATABASES
10
Object Databases: Object Identity – Object structure – Type Constructors – Encapsulation of
Operations – Methods – Persistence – Type and Class Hierarchies – Inheritance – Complex Objects –
Object Database Standards – Languages and Design: ODMG Model – ODL – OQL – Object
Relational and Extended Relational Systems: Object Relational features in Oracle SQL.
UNIT III
SPATIAL AND TEMPORAL DATABASES
8
Spatial Databases: Introduction – Spatial Representation – Data Types – Relationships – Access
Methods – Indexing. Temporal Databases: Motivation – Indexing – Snapshot index. Spatiotemporal
databases.
UNIT IV
MOBILE DATABASES
8
Mobile Databases: Location and Handoff Management – Effect of Mobility on Data Management –
Location Dependent Data Distribution – Mobile Transaction Models – Concurrency Control –
Transaction Commit Protocols – Mobile Database Recovery Schemes.
UNIT V
MULTIMEDIA DATABASES
9
Multidimensional Databases – Image Databases – Text/Document Databases – Video Database –
Audio Databases – Multimedia Database Design.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. M.Tamer Ozsu, Patrick Valduriez, “Principles of Distributed Database Systems”, 3rd Edition,
Pearson Education, 2011.
2. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education,
2010.
3. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz and S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”,
6th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2010.
4. Thomas Cannolly, Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Philippe Rigaux, Michel O. Scholl and Agnes Voisard, “Spatial Databases: with Applications to
GIS”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2002.
6. V. S. Subramanian, “Principles of Multimedia Database Systems”, 2nd Edition, Harcourt India Pvt
Ltd., 2004.
14
CEC22
ADVANCED OPERATING SYSTEMS
LTPC
30 0 3
Objectives:
 To understand the mechanisms for synchronization.
 Provide knowledge in the distributed operating systems.
 To study the concept of distributed file systems.
 To know about the failures and the recovery mechanisms for failure.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
10
Overview of processes – Processor – Inter Process communication – Critical section – Semaphores –
Process scheduling – Performance evaluation – Deadlocks: Prevention – Avoidance – Detection –
Recovery.
UNIT II
STORAGE MANAGEMENT
10
Management strategies – Contiguous and non-contiguous storage allocation – Fixed partition multiprogramming – Variable partitions – Swapping. Virtual storage – Multilevel organization – Block
mapping – Paging – Segmentation – Page replacement – Locality-working sets – Demand Paging –
Anticipatory Paging – Page release – Page size – Program behavior under Paging.
UNIT III
FILE SYSTEMS
8
Structures, types – File operations – Memory mapped files – Hierarchical directory systems – File
system implementation – Shared files – Protection and security – File systems design in Linux,
windows.
UNIT IV
DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS
10
Introduction – Issues in Distributed Operating System – Hardware and software concepts –
Multiprocessor time sharing system – Layered protocols – Client server model – Remote Procedure
Calls – Distributed Mutual Exclusion.
UNIT V
THREADS AND DISTRIBUTED FILE SYSTEMS
7
Inherent Limitations of a Distributed systems – Clock Synchronization Algorithms – Threads –
Design Issues of Threaded Packages – Design and implementation issues of processor allocation
algorithms – Distributed file system.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Abraham Silberschatz, James Peterson and Peter Baer Galving, “Operating System Concepts”, 6th
Edition, Addison Wesley Publishing Company, 2006.
2. Milenkovich .M, “Operating Systems: Concepts and Design”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, 2000.
3. Andrew .S. Tannenbaum, “Modern Operating System”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008.
4. Mukesh Singhal, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill
5. She Tov Levi, Ashok K.Agarwal, “Real Time System Design”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill
6. William Stallings, “Operating systems”, 7th Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
15
CEC23
COMPILER DESIGN
LTPC
30 0 3
Objectives:
 To understand the concepts of language translation and compiler design.
 To recognize the underlying formal models such as finite state automata and their connection
to language definition through regular expressions and grammars.
 To learn about the effectiveness of optimization.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Basics of Compiler – Analysis of the source program – Phases of a compiler – Cousins of the
compiler – The grouping of phases – Compiler-construction tools. Simple One-Pass Compiler:
Overview – Syntax definition – Syntax-directed translation – Parsing – A translator for simple
expressions – Lexical analysis – Incorporating a symbol table.
UNIT II
LEXICAL ANALYSIS
10
Role of Lexical Analyzer – Input buffering – Token Specification – Recognition of tokens –
Lexical Analyzer Generator Lex – Finite automata – Regular expression to NFA – Regular
expression to DFA – NFA to DFA – Optimization of DFA. Syntax Analysis: Role of Parser – Context
Free Grammars – Top down parsing – Recursive Descent Parsing – Predictive Parsing –Bottom up
parsing – Shift Reduce parsing – Operator-precedence parsing – LR parsers.
UNIT III
SYNTAX DIRECTED TRANSLATION
9
Syntax directed Translation: Syntax directed Translation schemes, Implementation of Syntax directed
Translators – Intermediate code – Postfix notation – Parse trees and syntax trees. Three address code:
quadruple and triples. Translation of Language Constructs: assignment statements– Boolean
expressions – Control Statements – Back patching.
UNIT IV
CODE GENERATION
9
Issues in the design of code generator – The target machine – Runtime Storage management –Basic
blocks and flow graphs – Next-use Information – Simple code generator – DAG representation of
basic blocks – Peephole optimization.
UNIT V
CODE OPTIMIZATION AND RUN TIME ENVIRONMENTS
9
Introduction – Principal Sources of Optimization – Optimization of basic Blocks – Introduction to
Global Data Flow Analysis – Runtime Environments – Source Language issues – Storage
Organization – Storage Allocation strategies – Parameter Passing.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Alfred V. Aho, Monica S. Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffry. D. Ullman, “Compilers - Principles,
Techniques and Tools”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Publishing Company, 2007.
2. Allen I. Holub “Compiler Design in C”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
3. C. N. Fischer and R. J. LeBlanc, “Crafting a compiler with C”, 2nd Edition, Benjamin Cummings,
2003.
4. J. P. Bennet, “Introduction to Compiler Techniques”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
5. Henk Alblas and Albert Nymeyer, “Practice and Principles of Compiler Building with C”, 1st
Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
6. Kenneth C. Louden, “Compiler Construction: Principles and Practice”, 1st Edition, Thompson
Learning, 2003.
16
CEC24
INTERNET PROGRAMMING
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To understand the client and server concepts.
 To study client side scripting languages for design of GUI based applications.
 To study server side programming languages and remote services.
 To provide technical knowledge on web based system development.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Internet Protocols: ICMP, IGMP, UDP, TCP/IP, HTTP – POP, SMTP – URL – MIME – Domain
Name System. Markup languages: HTML – XHTML. Image Mapping – Web page design.
UNIT II
DYNAMIC HTML
9
Dynamic HTML: Introduction – Cascading style sheets – Z-Index – Visibility – Positioning – Object
model and collections – Event model – Filters and Transitions – Data binding – Data control.
UNIT III
SCRIPTS AND APPLETS
9
JavaScript: Introduction – Control Structures – Functions – Arrays – Objects – Simple Web
Applications – Applets – Life Cycle – Events – Layouts.
UNIT IV
SERVLETS
9
Servlets: Deployment of simple Servlets – Web Server (Java Web Server / Tomcat / Web logic) –
HTTP GET and POST requests – Session Tracking – Cookies – JDBC – Development of Web
Applications.
UNIT V
ASP AND JSP
9
ASP Basics – ASP Objects – ASP applications. JSP: JSP Basic Programming – JSP objects –
Applications – PHP – MySQL.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel and Abbey Deitel, "Internet and World Wide Web - How to
program", 5th Edition, Pearson Education Publishers, 2012.
2. Jeffrey C Jackson, “Web Technology – A computer Science perspective”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2007.
3. Chris Bates, “Web Programming – Building Internet Applications”, 3rd Edition, Wiley India,
2006.
4. R. Krishnamoorthy and S. Prabhu, "Internet and Java Programming", 1st Edition, New Age
5. Thomos A. Powell, "The Complete Reference HTML and XHTML", 4th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2003.
6. Herbert Schildt, "The Complete Reference - Java2", 8th Edition, McGraw Hill Osborne Media,
2011.
17
CEC25
OPERATING SYSTEM AND COMPILER LABORATORY
LTPC
0 032
Objectives:
 To implement semaphores and multithreading.
 To implement the concurrency conflict that occurs between multiple client applications
 To implement Lexical Analysis phase and various parsing algorithms
1. To simulate the following CPU Scheduling Algorithms
a) FCFS
b) SJF
c) Priority
d) Round Robin
2. To simulate Bankers algorithm for Deadlock Avoidance
3. To simulate Bankers Algorithm for deadlock Prevention
4. To simulate the following Page Replacement Algorithms
a) FIFO
b) LRU
5. To simulate the Best Fit Algorithm for Memory Management
6. To develop the inter process communication using following concepts
a) Pipes
b) Message Passing
c) Shared Memory
7. To simulate the following file allocation strategies
a) Sequential
b) Indexed
c) Linked
8. To implement the Lexical Analyzer to identify token present in the input file using java.
9. To implement the Finite Automate Construction from Regular Expression using java.
10. To construct SLR Parsing table for the given Grammar.
11. To construct CLR (1) items of the input Grammar
12. To generate Assembly code for the intermediate code using java.
TOTAL: 45
Required Software: Java and Linux / Windows
18
CEC26
INTERNET PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
LTPC
0 03 2
Objectives:
 To design web pages using client side scripting languages and DHTML.
 To implement server side languages like Servlets, JSP and ASP.
 To develop web services and E-business applications.
1. Design a web page with registration form using Navigation Frames in HTML.
2. Design a Web Pages using Java Script.
3. Develop a web application using CSS and DHTML for designing web site for an engineering
college.
4. Design and develop an payroll processing application using Servlets
5. Implement a web based tutorial system using JDBC
6. Implement an application for Job portal using ASP
7. Design an online shopping web site using JSP
8. Develop web services for Telemedicine application.
9. Develop an e-learning portal application using XML
10. Implement an internet banking application using XML Database.
11. Web Customization.
12. Develop an E-Business Application.
TOTAL: 45
Required Software: Java, XML, HTML and Scripting languages
19
CEE2A
BIO INFORMATICS
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To learn the process of search engines and data visualization.
 To study the statistical concepts and data analysis.
 To know about the pattern matching algorithms and simulation methods.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTORY CONCEPTS
9
The Central Dogma – The Killer Application – Parallel Universes – Watson’s Definition – TopDown
versus Bottom up – Information Flow – Convergence – Databases – Data Management– Data Life
Cycle – Database Technology – Interfaces – Implementation – Networks – Geographical Scope –
Communication Models – Transmissions Technology – Protocols – Bandwidth – Topology –
Hardware – Contents – Security.
UNIT II
SEARCH ENGINES AND DATA VISUALIZATION
9
Search Process – Search Engine Technology – Searching and Information Theory – Computational
methods – Search Engines and Knowledge Management – Data Visualization – Sequence
Visualization – Structure Visualization – User Interface – Animation versus Simulation – General
Purpose Technologies.
UNIT III
STATISTICS AND DATA MINING
9
Statistical Concepts – Microarrays – Randomness – Interface Noise – Assumptions – Sampling and
Distributions – Hypothesis Testing – Quantifying Randomness – Data Analysis – Tool selection
statistics of Alignment – Clustering and Classification – Data Mining – Methods – Selection and
Sampling – Preprocessing and Cleaning – Transformation and Reduction – Data Mining Methods –
Evaluation – Visualization.
UNIT IV
PATTERN MATCHING
9
Pairwise Sequence Alignment – Local versus Global Alignment – Multiple sequence alignment –
Computational methods – Dot Matrix Analysis – Substitution Matrices – Dynamic Programming –
Word Methods – Bayesian Methods – Multiple Sequence Alignment – Dynamic Programming –
Progressive Strategies – Iterative Strategies – Tools – Nucleotide Pattern Matching.
UNIT V
MODELING AND SIMULATION
9
Drug Discovery – components – process – Perspectives – Numeric considerations – Algorithms –
Hardware – Issues – Protein Structure – AbInitio Methods – Heuristic Methods – Systems Biology –
Tools – Collaboration and Communications – Standards – Issues – Security – Intellectual Property –
Case Study under Genomic medicine – Telemedicine.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Bryan Bergeron, “Bio Informatics Computing”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
2. T.K.Attwood and D. J. Perry Smith, “Introduction to Bio Informatics”, 3rd Edition, Longman
Essen, 2002.
3. Sumeet Dua, Pradeep Chowriappa, “Data mining for Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, CRC Press,
2012.
4. Hooman Rashidi, Lukas K. Buehler, ”Bioinformatics Basics: Applications in Biological Science
and Medicine Edition”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2005.
5. Andreas D. Baxevanis, B. F. Francis Ouellette, “Bioinformatics: A Practical Guide to the
Analysis of Genes and Protein”, 3rd Edition, Wiley, John & Sons, 2004.
20
CEE2B
GRID AND CLOUD COMPUTING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Objectives:
 To know the basic concepts in grid computing
 To learn the grid services architecture.
 To understand the abstract nature of cloud computing
 To study about the web based applications in cloud environment
 To study the technologies and tool kit for grid and cloud computing.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF GRID COMPUTING
9
Scope of Grid Computing – Desktop grids – Data grids – Applications of Grid computing. Grid
Computing Architecture – Grid computing anatomy – Next generation of Grid Computing Initiatives–
Merging the grid services architecture with Web services architecture.
UNIT II
GRID COMPUTING TECHNOLOGIES
9
OGSA – Sample Use Cases – OGSA Platform Components – OGSI and WSRF – OGSA Basic
Services. Tool Kits: Globus GT3 Toolkit – Architecture – Programming Model – UNICORE –
Pegasus.
UNIT III
FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING
9
Fundamentals – Cloud Architecture – Cloud Storage – Matters – Cloud Services – Companies on
cloud today – Pros and cons.
UNIT IV
CLOUD SERVICES
9
Need for Web Based Application – Types of cloud Service Development – Collaborating on
Schedules – Collaborating on To-Do Lists – Collaborating Contact Lists – Calenders.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS AND TOOLS
9
Online Planning and Task management – Event Management – Contact management – Tools
management – Tool kits: Hadoop – Map reduce – OpenStack – CloudSim.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Ahmar Abbas, “Grid Computing: A Practical Guide to technology and Applications”, 1st Edition,
Charles River Media, 2006.
2. Ian Foster, Carl Kesselman, “The Grid2: Blueprint for a New Computing Infrastructure”, 2 nd
Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2004.
3. Frederic Magoules, Jie Pan, Kiat-An Tan and Abhinit Kumar, “Introduction to Grid Computing”,
1st Edition, CRC Press, 2009.
4. Rajkumar Buyya, James Broberg and Andrzej M. Goscinski, “Cloud Computing: Principles and
Paradigms”, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
5. Anthony T. Velte, Toby J. Velte and Robert Elsenpeter, “Cloud Computing, A Practical
Approach”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Osborne Media, 2009
6. Kris Jamsa, “Cloud Computing”, 1st Edition, Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2012.
21
CEE2C
ADVANCED NETWORK SECURITY
(Common to CSE and CS)
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To know about various network attacks and challenges
 To study the security algorithms.
 To learn web security and wireless security.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION ON SECURITY
9
Security Goals, Types of Attacks: Passive attack, active attack, attacks on confidentiality, Integrity
and availability – Security services and mechanisms – Cryptography Techniques – Steganography.
UNIT II
SYMMETRIC AND ASYMMETRIC KEY ALGORITHMS
9
Substitutional and Transposition Ciphers – Stream and Block Ciphers – Data Encryption Standards
(DES) – Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) – RC4 – principle of asymmetric key algorithms –
RSA Cryptosystem – Diffie Hellmen Key Exchanging algorithm.
UNIT III
INTEGRITY, AUTHENTICATION AND KEY MANAGEMENT
9
Message Integrity, Hash functions – SHA – Digital signatures – Digital signature standards
Authentication – Kerberos – Entity Authentication – Biometrics – Key management Techniques.
UNIT IV
NETWORK SECURITY, FIREWALLS AND WEB SECURITY
9
Introduction on Firewalls – Types of Firewalls – Firewall Configuration and Limitation of Firewall –
IP Security Overview - IP security Architecture – authentication Header – Security payload – security
associations – Key Management – Web security requirement – secure sockets layer – transport layer
security – secure electronic transaction – dual signature.
UNIT V
WIRELESS NETWORK SECURITY
9
Attacks – Routing, Intergrity, confidentiality and availability related attacks – Wired Equivalent
Privacy, Wi-Fi Protected Access and WPA-2 for Wi-Fi network – Secure Adhoc Network – Secure
Sensor Network.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Behrouz A. Fourcuzan, “Cryptography and Network security”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2008.
2. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Mark D. Ciampa, “Security+ Guide to Network Security Fundamentals”, 3rd Edition, Cengage
Learning, 2009.
4. Stuart McClure, Joel Scambray and George Kurtz, “Hacking Exposed: Network Security Secrets
and Solutions”, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill Publications, 2009.
5. Chris McNab, “Network Security Assessment: Know Your Network”, 2nd Edition, O'Reilly
Media, 2007.
6. Fahim Hussain Yusuf Bhaiji, “Network Security Technologies and Solutions (CCIE Professional
Development Series)”, 1st Edition, Cisco Press, 2008.
22
CEE2D
ADHOC NETWORKS
LT PC
3 0 0 3
Objectives:
 To learn the MAC address spoofing concepts and basics of networks
 To learn the routing principles and Adhoc network types.
 To learn the IEEE standards, MESH networks and its heterogeneous models.
UNIT I
ADHOC MAC
9
Introduction – Issues in Adhoc Wireless Networks – MAC Protocols – Issues – Classifications of
MAC protocols – Multi channel MAC and Power control MAC protocol.
UNIT II
ADHOC NETWORK ROUTING AND TCP
9
Issues – Classifications of routing protocols – Hierarchical and Power aware. Multicast routing –
Classifications, Tree based, Mesh based. Adhoc Transport Layer Issues. TCP Over Adhoc – Feedback
based, TCP with explicit link, TCP-BuS, Adhoc TCP, and Split TCP.
UNIT III
WSN - MAC
9
Introduction – Sensor Network Architecture – Data dissemination – Data Gathering. MAC Protocols–
Self-organizing, Hybrid TDMA/FDMA and CSMA based MAC.
UNIT IV
WSN ROUTING, LOCALIZATION AND QoS
9
Issues in WSN routing – OLSR, AODV, DSR, DSDV. Localization – Indoor and Sensor Network
Localization. QoS in WSN.
UNIT V
MESH NETWORKS
9
Necessity for Mesh Networks – MAC enhancements – IEEE 802.11’s Architecture –Opportunistic
routing – Self configuration and Auto configuration – Capacity Models –Fairness - Heterogeneous
Mesh Networks – Vehicular Mesh Networks.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. C.Siva Ram Murthy, B.S. Manoj, “Adhoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols”, 1 st
2. Feng Zhao, Leonidas Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman
Publishers, 2004.
3. C.K.Toh, “Adhoc Mobile Wireless Networks”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2002.
4. Thomas Krag and Sebastin Buettrich, “Wireless Mesh Networking”, 2nd Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2007.
5. C K Toh, “Adhoc mobile wireless networks, Protocols and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2009.
6. Azzedine Boukerche, “Handbook of algorithms for wireless Networking and Mobile computing”,
2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2006.
23
CEE2E
WAVELETS AND MULTIRESOLUTION ANALYSIS
(Common to CS and CSE)
LTPC
3 003
Objectives:
 To study the mathematical background for the wavelets.
 To study the Multiresolution Analysis.
 To study the Continuous and Discrete wavelet transforms.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Vector Spaces, properties, dot product, basis, dimension, orthogonality and orthonormality,
relationship between vectors and signals, Signal spaces, concept of Convergence, Hilbert spaces
for energy signals, Generalized Fourier Expansion.
UNIT II
CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORMS
9
Wavelet Transform, definition and properties, concept of scale and its relation with frequency,
Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT), Scaling function and wavelet functions (Daubechies,
Coiflet, Mexican Hat, Sinc, Gaussian, Bi-Orthogonal), Tiling of time scale plane for CWT.
UNIT III
MULTI RESOLUTION ANALYSIS
9
Definition of Multi Resolution Analysis (MRA), Haar basis, Construction of general ortho normal
MRA, Wavelet basis for MRA, Continuous time MRA interpretation for the DTWT, Discrete time
MRA, Basis functions for the DTWT, PRQMF filter banks.
UNIT IV
DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORMS
9
Filter Bank and sub band coding principles, Wavelet Filters, Inverse DWT computation by Filter
banks, Basic Properties of Filter coefficients, Choice of wavelet function coefficients, Derivations of
Daubechies Wavelets, Mallat's algorithm for DWT, Multiband Wavelet transforms.
Lifting Scheme: Wavelet Transform using Polyphase matrix Factorization, Geometrical foundations of
lifting scheme, Lifting scheme in Z –domain.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Signal Compression, Image Compression techniques: EZW-SPHIT Coding, Image denoising
techniques: Noise estimation, Shrinkage rules, Shrinkage Functions, Edge detection and object
Isolation, Image Fusion, and Object Detection. Curve and Surface Editing, Variational modeling and
finite element method using wavelets.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Rao.R.M and A.S.Bopardikar, “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to theory and Applications”,
Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
2. K.P.Soman and K.I.Ramachandran, “Insight into Wavelets – From Theory to practice”, 3rd
Edition, Prentice- Hall, 2004.
3. Mallat.S, “A wavelet tour of Signal Processing”, Elsevier publications, 3rd Edition, Academic
Press, 2008.
4. Jaideva.C.Goswami, Andrew.K.Chan, “Fundamentals of Wavelets theory, algorithms and
applications”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley &Sons, 2011.
5. Weeks Michael, “Digital Signal Processing Using MATLAB and Wavelets”, Firewall Media,
2011.
24
CEE2F
SOFT COMPUTING
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To understand the concept of soft computing.
 To learn fuzzy logic concepts.
 To learn the different classifications of neural networks.
 To study the concepts of Genetic algorithm and its applications.
UNIT I
SOFTCOMPUTING AND CONVENTIONAL AI
9
Evolution of Computing – Soft Computing Constituents – From Conventional AI to Computational
Intelligence – Derivative based optimization: Descent Methods, Newton’s method- Step size
determination- Derivative free optimization.
UNIT II
FUZZY SYSTEMS
9
Fuzzy Sets – Operations on Fuzzy Sets – Fuzzy Relations – Membership Functions – Fuzzy Rules and
Fuzzy Reasoning – Fuzzy Inference Systems – Fuzzy Expert Systems – Fuzzy Decision Making.
UNIT III
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS
9
Machine Learning Using Neural Network, Adaptive Networks – Feed forward Networks –Supervised
Learning Neural Networks – Radial Basis Function Networks – Reinforcement Learning –
Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks.
UNIT IV
NEURO - FUZZY MODELING
9
Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference Systems – Coactive Neuro-Fuzzy Modeling – Classification and
Regression Trees – Data Clustering Algorithms – Rulebase Structure Identification – ANFIS
Applications.
UNIT V
GENETIC ALGORITHMS
9
Evolutionary Computation – Genetic Algorithms – Terminologies and Operators of GA –
Classification of GA : Simple GA, Parallel and Distributed GA, Adaptive GA – Ant Colony
Optimization – Particle Swarm Optimization – Application of GA : Machine Learning, Image
Processing, Data Mining and Wireless networks.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing”, 1st
2. S.N.Sivanandam, S.N.Deepa, “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, 1st Edition, Springer, 2007.
3. S.N.Sivanandam, S.N.Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2007.
4. Agoston E.Eiben, J.E.Smith, “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing”, 1st Edition, Springer,
2008.
5. S.N.Sivanandam, S.Sumathi and S.N.Deepa, “Introduction to Fuzzy Logic using MATLAB”, 1st
Edition, Springer, 2007.
6. James A.Freeman and David M.Skapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications, and
Programming Techniques”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
25
CEE2G
DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING
(Common to CSE and CC)
LTPC
30 0 3
Objectives:
 To learn the various paradigms in distributed environment.
 To know about distributed operating systems.
 To study the concept of distributed resource management.
 To understand the concept of fault tolerance system.
UNIT I
COMMUNICATION IN DISTRIBUTED ENVIRONMENT
8
Introduction – Various Paradigms in Distributed Applications – Remote Procedure Call – Remote
Object Invocation – Message – Oriented Communication – Unicasting, Multicasting and Broadcasting
– Group Communication.
UNIT II
12
Issues in Distributed Operating System – Threads in Distributed Systems – Clock Synchronization:
Logical Clock – Vector Clock – Causal Ordering – Global States – Election Algorithms – Distributed
Mutual Exclusion – Distributed Transactions – Distributed Deadlock – Agreement Protocols.
UNIT III
DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
10
Distributed Shared Memory – Data-Centric Consistency Models – Client-Centric Consistency Models
– Ivy – Munin – Distributed Scheduling – Distributed File Systems – Sun NFS.
UNIT IV
FAULT TOLERANCE
7
Introduction to Fault Tolerance – Process Resilience – Reliable Client Server Communication –
Reliable Group Communication – Distributed Commit Protocols – Failure – Recovery.
UNIT V
DISTRIBUTED OBJECT BASED SYSTEM
8
Distributed Object Based System: Architecture – Communication – Naming – CORBA – Distributed
Coordination Based System – Coordination model – Architecture – Content based routing –
Synchronization.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore and Tim Kindberg, “Distributed Systems Concepts and
Design”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, M. Van Steen, “Distributed Systems”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2006.
3. Hagit Attiya and Jennifer Welch, “Distributed Computing: Fundamentals, Simulations and
Advanced Topics”, 2nd Edition, Wiley publishers, 2004.
4. Mukesh Singhal, “Advanced Concepts In Operating Systems”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2004.
5. M. L. Liu, “Distributed Computing Principles and Applications”, Fourth Impression, Pearson
Education, 2009.
26
CEE2H
PERVASIVE COMPUTING
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To understand the pervasive computing concepts.
 To know the voice standards and speech applications.
 To know the issues in pervasive computing.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Pervasive Computing Application – Pervasive Computing devices and Interfaces – Device technology
trends, Connecting issues and protocols.
UNIT II
WEB APPLICATIONS
9
Pervasive Computing and web based Applications – XML and its role in Pervasive Computing –
Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) Architecture and Security – Wireless Mark-Up language
(WML) – Introduction.
UNIT III
SPEECH APPLICATIONS
9
Voice Enabling Pervasive Computing – Voice Standards – Speech Applications in Pervasive
Computing and security.
UNIT IV
PDA AND PERVASIVE COMPUTING
9
PDA in Pervasive Computing – Introduction – PDA software Components – Standards – emerging
trends – PDA Device characteristics – PDA Based Access Architecture.
UNIT V
ADVANCED CONCEPTS
9
User Interface Issues in Pervasive Computing – Architecture – Smart Card based Authentication
Mechanisms – Wearable computing Architecture.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Jochen Burkhardt, Horst Henn, Stefan Hepper, Thomas Schaec and Klaus Rindtorff, “Pervasive
Computing Technology and Architecture of Mobile Internet Applications”, 1st Edition, Addision
Wesley professional, 2002.
2. Uwe Hansman, Lothat Merk, Martin S Nicklous and Thomas Stober, “Principles of Mobile
Computing”, 2nd Edition, Springer - Verlag, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Rahul Banerjee, “Internetworking Technologies: An Engineering Perspective”, 2nd Edition,
Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
4. Rahul Banerjee, “Lecture Notes in Pervasive Computing”, Outline Notes, BITS-Pilani, 2003.
5. Jochen Burkhardt, Dr. Horst Henn, Stefan Hepper and Klaus Rintdorff, Thomas Schaeck,
“Pervasive Computing”, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2009.
6. F.Adelstein, S.K.S. Gupta, “Fundamentals of Mobile and Pervasive Computing”, 1st Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2005.
27
CEE2J
DIGITAL IMAGING
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To understand the fundamentals of image processing.
 To learn the various image enhancement and segmentation techniques.
 To know the various image compression standards.
 To know the applications of image processing.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF IMAGE PROCESSING
9
Elements of digital image processing systems, Elements of visual perception, brightness, contrast,
hue, saturation – Color fundamentals and models - Image file formats - Image Acquisition – Sampling
and Quantization – Pixel Relationships –Image operations – Morphological Image Processing –
Matlab: Basics - Implementation of Image operations.
UNIT II
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT
9
Spatial Domain Gray level Transformations Histogram Processing Spatial Filtering – Smoothing and
Sharpening Frequency Domain: Filtering in Frequency Domain – DFT, FFT, DCT – Smoothing and
Sharpening filters – Homomorphic Filtering – Matlab functions of Transformations.
UNIT III
IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND ANALYSIS
9
Color Image Processing – Image Segmentation – Detection of Discontinuities – Edge Operators–
Edge Linking and Boundary Detection – Thresholding – Region Based Segmentation –
Morphological WaterSheds – Motion Segmentation, Feature Analysis and Extraction –
Implementation of Image Segmentation techniques using Matlab.
UNIT IV
MULTI RESOLUTION ANALYSIS AND COMPRESSIONS
9
Multi Resolution Analysis: Image Pyramids – Multi resolution expansion – Wavelet Transforms.
Image Compression: Fundamentals – Models – Elements of Information Theory – Error Free
Compression – Lossy Compression – Compression Standards Matlab Implementation of Wavelets
and Compression – Matlab: Wavelets Basics- Types – Compression Techniques.
UNIT V
IMAGE REPRESENTATION AND RECOGNITION
9
Image Representation – Boundary Descriptors – Regional Descriptors – Relational Descriptors –
Object Recognition- Applications of Image Processing - Matlab Implementation of Object
Recognition
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2009.
2. S.Jayaraman, S.Esakkirajan and T.Veerakumar, “Digital Image Processing”, 1st Edition, Tata Mc
Graw Hill, 2009.
3. Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods and Steven L.Addins, “Digital Image Processing Using
MATLAB”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
4. Wilhelm Burger, Mark Burge, “Principles of Digital Image Processing: Fundamental
Techniques”, 1st Edition, Springer, 2009.
5. Castleman, “Digital Image Processing”, 1st Edition Pearson Education, 2007.
6. Anil K.Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
28
CEE2K
THEORY OF COMPUTATION
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:




To learn about the finite automata and transitions.
To study about regular expressions and languages.
To know the properties of context free grammar and languages.
To understand the programming techniques for turing machines.
UNIT I
AUTOMATA
9
Introduction to formal proof – Additional forms of Proof – Inductive Proofs – Finite Automata (FA) –
Deterministic Finite Automata – Non deterministic Finite Automata – Finite Automata with Epsilon
Transitions.
UNIT II
REGULAR EXPRESSIONS AND LANGUAGES
9
Regular Expression (RE) – FA and Regular Expressions – Proving Languages not to be regular –
Closure Properties of Regular Languages – Equivalence and Minimization of Automata.
UNIT III
CONTEXT FREE GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGES
9
Context Free Grammar (CFG) – Parse Trees – Ambiguity in Grammars and Languages – Definition
of the Pushdown Automata – Languages of a Pushdown Automata – Equivalence of Pushdown
Automata and CFG, Deterministic Pushdown Automata.
UNIT IV
PROPERTIES OF CONTEXT FREE LANGUAGES
9
Normal Forms for CFG – Pumping Lemma for CFL – Closure Properties of CFL – Turing Machines
(TM) – Programming Techniques for TM.
UNIT V
UNDECIDABILITY
9
A Language that is Not Recursive Enumerable – An Undecidable Problem that is RE – Undecidable
Problems about TM – Post’s Correspondence Problem – The Class P and NP.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. John E. Hopcroft, Rajeev Motwani and Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory,
Languages and Computations”, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2006.
2. Harry R .Lewis and Christos H. Papadimitriou, “Elements of the theory of Computation”, 2nd
3. John C. Martin, “Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation”, 3rd Edition, Tata
Mc Graw Hill, 2003.
4. Michael Sipser, “Introduction of the Theory and Computation”, 3rd Edition, Thomson Brokecole,
2005.
29
CEE2L
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To study the components, tools and techniques of a software system development.
 To understand the emerging models of project management.
 To learn the umbrella and instream activities in project development.
 To learn various challenges in project management.
UNIT I
BASIC CONCEPTS
9
Product, Process and Project – Definition – Components of Software Project Management (SPM) –
Challenges and Opportunities – Tools and Techniques – Managing Human Resource and Technical
Resource – Costing and pricing of projects – Training and development – Project management
technique - Product Life Cycle – Project Life Cycle Models.
UNIT II
FORMAT PROCESS MODELS AND THEIR USE
9
Definition and Format Model for a Process – ISO 9001 and CMM Models and their relevance to
Project Management – Other Emerging Models like People CMM.
UNIT III
UMBRELLA ACTIVITIES IN PROJECTS
9
Metrics – Methods and Tools for Metrics – Issues of Metrics in multiple Projects - Configuration
Management – Software Quality Assurance – Quality Standards and Certifications - Process and
Issues in obtaining Certifications - Risk issues in Software Development and Implementation –
Identification of Risks – Resolving and Avoiding risks – Tools and Methods for Identifying Risk
Management.
UNIT IV
INSTREAM ACTIVITIES IN PROJECTS
9
Project Initiation – Project Planning – Execution and Tracking – Project Wind up – Concept of
Process - Project Database.
UNIT V
ENGINEERING AND PEOPLE ISSUES IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT
9
Phases: Requirements, Design, Development, Testing, Maintenance, Deployment – Engineering
Activities and Management Issues in Each Phase – Special Considerations in Project Management for
India and Geographical Distribution Issues.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Bob Hughes and Mike Cotterell, “Software Project Management”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2009.
2. Kelker, S. A, “Software Project Management”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
3. Royce and Walker, “Software Project Management”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2002.
4. Gopalaswamy Ramesh, "Managing Global Projects", 1st Reprint Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2006.
5. Robert K. Wysocki, “Executive's Guide to Project Management”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2011.
6. Teresa and luckey, Joseph Phillips, “Software project Management for dummies”, 3rd Edition,
Wiley publishing Inc., 2006.
30
CEE3A
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
(Common to CS, CSE and CC)
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the Embedded processor and its architecture.
 To study the Real- time characteristics and its system design techniques.
UNIT I
EMBEDDED SYSTEM BASICS
9
Embedded Computers, Characteristics of Embedded Computing Applications, and Challenges in
Embedded Computing system design, Embedded system design process, Overview of embedded
system development-embedded system IDE- ARM Family-Core Types,-Memory Mapping-and ARM
Based embedded development system.
UNIT II
ARM ARCHITECTURE
9
Organization of CPU – Bus architecture –Memory management unit: virtual memory to physical
memory address translation, TLB, Domains and memory access permission ,cache and write buffer,
single stage and two stage cache accessing, significance of co-processor 15 Fast Context Switch
Extension.
UNIT III
EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING AND COMPUTING PLATFORM
9
Embedded software development based on ARM including: ARM basic instruction set, Thumb
instruction set- assembly programming- ARM processor mode switching-embedded C programmingC and assembly language mix programming.
UNIT IV
ARM BASIC PERIPHERAL INTERFACING
9
I/O interface concepts-interrupts-types of interrupts-ARM interrupts-serial communication real-time
clock and simple digital LED interface - LCD display interfacing- GLCD display interfacing – TFT
display interfacing -the keyboard interfacing-the touch screen interfacing.
UNIT V ARM COMMUNICATION INTERFACING AND DEVELOPMENT TOOLS 9
Synchronous and asynchronous data transfer- UART based communication-I2C Protocol basics -serial
communication using I2C bus: RTC Interfacing, EEPROM data transfer Ethernet communication –
I2S voice bus interface communication. Basic Embedded system Development Tools - Embest
embedded IDE for ARM, Study of S3C3V40 based University Teaching Kit – Keil C and Unet ICE
JTAG emulator
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. “ARM Architecture Reference Manual”, ARM Ltd, 2011.
2. “The ARM-Thumb Procedure Call Standard”, ARM Ltd, 2011.
3. Steve Furber, “ARM System-on-Chip Architecture”, 2nd Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2000.
4. Todd D. Morton, “Embedded Microcontrollers”, Prentice Hall, 2001.
5. “Embest ARM Teaching System User Manual”, Embest Info & Tech, Ltd, Version2.01.
6. Radu Muresan, “Embedded System Development and Labs for ARM”.
31
CEE3B
PATTERN RECOGNITION
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To learn the different approaches for pattern recognition.
 To study various mathematical models in pattern recognition.
 To study the non parametric and clustering techniques.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Introduction: Basics of pattern recognition – Design principles of pattern recognition system –
Learning and adaptation – Pattern recognition approaches. Mathematical foundations: Linear algebra
– Probability theory – Expectation – Mean and Covariance – Normal distribution – Multivariate
normal densities – Chi square test of hypothesis.
UNIT II
STATISTICAL PATTERN RECOGNITION
7
Statistical Patten Recognition: Bayesian Decision Theory – Classifiers – Normal density and
discriminant functions.
UNIT III
MODELS
10
Parameter estimation methods: Maximum– Likelihood estimation – Bayesian Parameter estimation –
Dimension reduction methods – Principal Component Analysis (PCA) – Fisher Linear discriminant
analysis – Expectation – maximization (EM) – Hidden Markov Models (HMM) – Gaussian mixture
models.
UNIT IV
NON PARAMETRIC TECHNIQUES
10
Nonparametric Techniques: Density Estimation – Parzen Windows – K-Nearest Neighbour
Estimation – Nearest Neighbour Rule – Fuzzy classification.
UNIT V
CLUSTERING TECHNIQUES
10
Unsupervised Learning and Clustering: Criterion functions for clustering – Clustering Techniques:
Iterative square – Error partitional clustering – K-Means – agglomerative hierarchical clustering –
Cluster validation.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Richard O. Duda, Peter E. Hart and David G. Stork, “Pattern Classification”, 2nd Edition, John
Wiley, 2006.
2. Bishop, Christopher M., “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, 1st Edition, Springer,
2009.
3. S. Theodoridis, K. Koutroumbas, “Pattern Recognition”, 4th Edition, Academic Press, 2009.
4. Keinosuke Fukunaga, “Introduction to Statistical Pattern Recognition”, 2nd Edition, Academic
Press, 2003.
5. Sergios Thedoridis, Konstantinos Koutroumbas, “Pattern Recognition”, 4th Edition, Academic
Press, 2009.
32
CEE3C
EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTING
(Common to HVE, CSE, CS and CC)
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Objectives:
 To brief the basic concepts of evolutionary computation
 To give idea about various representation, selection and search operations
 To discuss the basic of fitness evaluation and constraint handling mechanism
 To outline the concepts of hybrid systems
 To understand the effect of parameter setting and applications
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION
9
Introduction – Possible applications of evolutionary computations – History of evolutionary
computation – Genetic algorithms – Evolution strategic – Evolutionary programming – Derivative
methods – Stochastic processes – Modes of stochastic convergence – Schema processing – Transform
methods – Fitness landscape – Probably Approximately Correct(PAC) learning analysis – Limitation
of evolutionary computation methods – Local performance measures.
UNIT II REPRESENTATION, SELECTION AND SEARCH OPERATORS
9
Representation – Binary strings – Real-valued vectors – Permutations – finite-state representation –
Parse trees – Guidelines for a suitable encoding – Other representations Selection – Proportional
selection and sampling algorithms – Tournament selection – Rank based selection – Boltz Mann
selection – Other selection methods – Hybrids Generation gap methods –A comparison of selection
mechanisms – Interactive evolution – Search Operators – Mutation – recombination – Other
operators.
UNIT III FITNESS EVALUATION AND CONSTRAINT HANDLING
9
Fitness Evaluation – Encoding and decoding functions – Competitive fitness evaluation – Complexity
based fitness evaluation – Multi objective optimization – Constraint handling techniques – Penalty
functions – Decoders – Repair algorithms – Constraint preserving operators – Other constraint
handling methods – Constraint satisfaction problems – Population structures – Niching Methods –
Specification methods – Island(migration)models.
UNIT IV HYBRID SYSTEM
9
Self-adaptation – Meta evolutionary approaches – Neural – Evolutionary systems – New areas for
evolutionary computation research in evolutionary systems – fuzzy-Evolutionary Systems –
Combination with Other Optimization Methods – Combination with local search – Combination with
dynamic programming – Simulated annealing and tabu search – Comparison with existing
optimization.
UNIT V
PARAMETER SETTING AND APPLICATIONS
9
Heuristics for Parameter setting Issues – Population size – Mutation parameters – Recombination
parameters – Implementation of Evolutionary Algorithms – Efficient implementation of algorithms –
Computation time of evolutionary operators – Applications – Classical optimization problems –
Control Identification – Scheduling – Pattern recognition – Simulation models
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Thomas Back, David B. Fogel and Zbigniew Michalewicz, “Handbook on evolutionary
computation”, Institute of Physics Publishing, 2000.
2. Xin Yao, “Evolutionary Computations: Theory and Applications”, World Scientific 39
Publishing, 1999.
3. Goldberg, “Genetic algorithm in search, optimization and machine learning”, Addison Wesley,
1998.
4. Davis, “Hand book on Genetic Algorithms”, NewYork, 1991.
5. Kenneth A De Jong, “Evolutionary Computation: A Unified Approach”, MIT Press, 2006.
33
CEE3D
MOBILE COMPUTING
LTPC
30 0 3
Objectives:
 To know the fundamentals of wireless communication.
 To understand the telecommunication systems.
 To study the different network layers.
 To study various protocols and their uses.
UNIT I
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FUNDAMENTALS
9
Introduction – Wireless transmission – Frequencies for radio transmission – Signals – Antennas–
Signal Propagation – Multiplexing – Modulations – Spread spectrum – Medium Access Control–
Space Division Multiple Access – Frequency Division Multiple Access – Time Division Multiple
Access – Code Division Multiple Access – Cellular Wireless Networks.
UNIT II
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
9
GSM – System Architecture – Protocols – Connection Establishment – Frequency Allocation –
Routing – Handover – Security – General packet radio service
UNIT III
WIRELESS NETWORKS
9
Wireless LAN – IEEE 802.11 Standards – Architecture – Services – High Performance Radio LAN –
Adhoc Network – Blue Tooth.
UNIT IV
NETWORK LAYER
9
Mobile IP – Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol – Routing – Destination Sequential Distance
Vector – Dynamic Source Routing – Adhoc On-demand Distance Vector – Zone Routing Protocol –
On-Demand Multicast Routing Protocol
UNIT V
TRANSPORT AND APPLICATION LAYERS
9
TCP over Wireless Networks – Indirect TCP – Snooping TCP – Mobile TCP – Fast Retransmit / Fast
Recovery – Transmission/Timeout Freezing – Selective Retransmission – Transaction Oriented TCP –
Wireless Application Protocol – Wireless Application Protocol Architecture – Wireless Datagram
Protocol – Wireless Transport Layer Security – Wireless Transaction Protocol – Wireless Session
Protocol – Wireless Markup Language – WML Script – Wireless application environment –
Wireless Transaction Application.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
2. William Stallings, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
2004.
3. Asoke k Talukder, Hasan Ahmed, Roopa R Yavagal, “Mobile computing”, 2nd Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2010.
4. Kaveh Pahlavan, Prasanth Krishnamoorthy, “Principles of Wireless Networks”, 1st Edition,
5. Uwe Hansmann, Lothar Merk, Martin S. Nicklons and Thomas Stober, “Principles of Mobile
Computing”, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2003.
6. Burkhardt, “Pervasive Computing”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
34
CEE3E
SECURITY IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To know about the threats and vulnerabilities of communication architecture in WSN.
 To discuss about the various key management and authentication techniques in WSN
 To study about the operations of existing well known secure routing protocols in WSN
 To have an idea about the different secured data aggregation mechanisms in WSN
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Communication architecture of WSN – Constraints – security requirements – Threats - evaluation –
attacks; Vulnerabilities of physical layer- jamming, tampering; Vulnerabilities of data link layercollisions, exhaustion, unfairness; Vulnerabilities of network layer - Spoofed, Altered, or Replayed
Routing Information, Selective Forwarding, Sinkhole, Sybil, Wormholes, Hello Flood Attacks,
Acknowledgment Spoofing; Vulnerabilities of transport layer – Flooding, Desynchronization,
UNIT II
KEY
MANAGEMENT
PROTOCOLS
AND
BROADCAST
AUTHENTICATION
9
Key distribution - classifications: deterministic and probalistic; protocols: LEAP, BROSK,
IOS/DMBS, PIKE, SKEW; Broadcast authentication: μTesla, Certificate-Based Authentication
Scheme, Basic Merkle Hash Tree Based Authentication Scheme, Enhanced Merkle Hash Tree Based
Authentication Scheme, ID-Based Authentication Scheme.
UNIT III
SECURE ROUTING PROTOCOLS
9
EAR, PRSA, R-LEACH, S-SPIN, Secure-SPIN, Segment transmission secure routing protocol,
SONS, SS - LEACH, INSENS
UNIT IV
DATA
AGGREGATION,
INTRUSION
DETECTION
AND
AUTOCONFIGURATION
9
Data Aggregation- plain text based secure data aggregation- SIA, SINP, ESPDA, SSDA, WDA;
cipher based secure data aggregation- CDA, HSC, Secure hierarchical data aggregation; Intrusion
Detection: IHOP, SEF, DIDS, Decentralized intrusion detection; Auto Configuration- LEADS,
PDAA, Dynamic address allocation.
UNIT V
TRUST MANAGEMENT
9
Trust model - Certificate based - Behavior based, Combinational approach; Trust based routing
protocols-secure routing based on multiple criteria decision, LEACH -TM, TRANS; Trust based node
selection algorithm- cross layer trust model, reliable sensor selection algorithm, novel sensor node
selection algorithm.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Yang Xiao, “Security in distributed, grid, mobile and pervasive computing”, Auerbach
publications, 3rd Edition, 2006.
2. Yong Wang, Garhan Attebury and Byrav Ramamurthy, “A Survey of security issues in wireless
sensor networks” IEEE Communication Surveys & Tutorials, 2nd Quarter 2006.
3. Mohsen Sharifi, Saeid Peurroostaei Ardakani, Saeed Sedighian Kashi, “SKEW: An Efficient Self
Key Establishment Protocol for Wireless Sensor Networks”, IEEE 2009.
4. Kui Ren, Kai Zeng, Wenjing Lou and Patrick J.Moran, “On Broadcast Authentication in Wireless
Sensor Networks”, Proc. First International Conference on Wireless Algorithms, Systems, and
Applications, WASA 2006, Springer Publication.
5. Hani Alzaid, Ernest Foo and Juan Genzalez Nieto, “Secure Data Aggregation in Wireless Sensor
Network: a survey”, Australasian Information Security Conference (ACSC2008), Wollongong,
Australia, January 2008. Australian Computer Society Inc.
35
CEE3F
METHODS FOR SELFISH MALICIOUS NODE DETECTION
LTPC
3 0 0 3
Objectives:
 To understand about the legacy security architectures and services
 To know about the various attack taxonomy and their characteristics.
 To have an in depth idea about the trust and reputation systems
 To understand about the various selfish node detection techniques in adhoc networks.
 To discuss about the simulators like GloMoSim and NS2 with respect to malicious node
detections.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO NETWORK SECURITY
9
Security Trends – OSI Security Architecture – Security Services – Security Mechanisms security
Requirements – Model for Network Security – Overview of Symmetric and Public Key Encryption –
Authentication and Integrity Mechanism – Key Distribution.
UNIT II
ATTACK TAXONOMY
9
Attack Classification: Passive and Active Attacks – Attackers and their Motivation – Characteristics
of Attack Taxonomy – List of Categories – Results Categories – Empirical Lists– Matrices – Process
Based Taxonomy – Wormhole – Byzantine – Black hole – DoS – Flooding – Resource Consumption
– Location Disclosure – Impersonation Attack Trees – STRIDE
UNIT III
TRUST AND REPUTATION SYSTEMS
9
Notion of Trust – security and Trust – Collaborative Filtering and Sanctioning – Trust Classes – Trust
and Reputation Network Architectures – Reputation Computation Engines – Commercial and Live
Reputation System – Trust management in P2P systems – Trust management in Ad hoc networks –
Issues with Reputation Systems
UNIT IV
COOPERATION ENFORCEMENT AND DETECTION MECHANISMS
9
Cooperation Enforcement Techniques: Nuglets – Sprite – Detection Mechanisms: Mitigating Routing
Misbehavior – OCEAN – CORE – CONFIDENT – PACKET LEASHES
UNIT V
SIMULATION STUDY
9
GloMoSim: General Architecture of the simulator – Configuring a Network – Mobility Models –
Routing Protocols. Network Simulator 2: Nodes – Packet Forwarding – Agents Mobile Networking –
Trace Monitoring Support – Visualization.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security Principles and Practices”, 4 th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2006.
2. B. Wu, J.Chen, and J.Wu, M.Cardei, “A Survey of Attacks and Countermeasures In Mobile Ad
Hoc Networks”, Wireless Network Security, Springer – Verlag, 2007.
3. Josang, R.Ismail, and C.Boyd, “A Survey of Trust and Reputation Systems for Online Service
Provision”, Decision Support System, vol. 43, no. 2. pp. 618-644, March 2007.
4. H.Li, and M.Singhal, “Trust management in Distributed Systems”, IEEE Computers, vol 40, pp.
45-53, February 2007.
5. http://www.schneier.com/paper-attacktrees-ddj-ft.html
6. http://www.cert.org/research/JHThesis/Chapter6.htmls
36
CEE3G CROSS LAYERED WIRELESS ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS
LTPC
300 3
Objectives:
 To have an idea about the need for layered communication approaches for wireless Adhoc
and sensor networks.
 To understand about some examples of cross layered architectures of Adhoc and sensor
networks.
 To discuss about the various approaches of cross layers architectures suitable for Adhoc and
sensor networks
 To know about the key roles of cross layered architectures in UWB Adhoc Network and
Underwater Sensor Networks.
UNIT I
LAYERED COMMUNICATION APPROACHES
9
Introduction to Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks, Communication Media, Communication Technologies,
Optimization Parameters, Channel Separation and Access, Transmission Initiation, Topology, Power,
Traffic Load and Scalability, Logical Link Control, Route State Dissemination, Multipath Routing,
Power-awareness, Geographical Routing, Quality-of-Service, TCP and UDP, Transport Protocols and
Middleware for Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks, Application Layer .
UNIT II
CROSS-LAYER APPROACHES
9
Cross-Layer Design: Basics, Cross-Layer Design for Traditional Networks, Ad Hoc and Sensor
Networks: An Analogy, Motivating Factors, Design Challenges. Cross- Layer Design Guidelines:
Compatibility, Richer Interactions, Flexible and Tunable.
UNIT III
CROSS-LAYER ARCHITECTURES
9
Ad Hoc Networks: MobileMan, CrossTalk. Sensor Networks: Sensor Protocol, TinyCubus, Lu. Ad
Hoc and Sensor Networks: Jurdak.
UNIT IV
APPLIED CROSS-LAYER APPROACHES
9
Design Coupling Approaches, Information Sharing Approaches, Global Performance Goals,
Maximize Network Lifetime, Energy Efficiency, Maximize Throughput, Minimize Delay, Promote
Fairness, Data Accessibility, Efficiency and Generality. Target Networks: Ad Hoc Networks, Sensor
Networks. Input Aspects, Configuration Optimization, Implementation: Unspecified, Centralized,
Distributed.
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
9
Optimization of an RF Sensor Network: Introduction, Adaptive Low Power Listening, Qualitative
Analysis, Deployment Results. UWB Ad Hoc Network: Introduction, UWB Network Principles,
UWB Principle, UMAC Protocol, Simulation and Results. Acoustic Underwater Sensor Network:
Introduction, Network Battery Life Estimation Method, Topology-Dependent Optimizations,
Performance Evaluation.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Raja Jurdak, “Wireless AdHoc and Sensor Networks: A Cross-Layer Design Perspective”,
Springer Series, New York, 2007.
2. Feng Zhao and Leonidas Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks”, Morgan Kaufman, Publishers,
2004.
3. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2005.
37
CEE3H
MODELING AND SIMULATION OF WIRELESS SYSTEMS
LTPC
30 0 3
Objectives:
 To study about the simulation and verification techniques for generation of random numbers
and random variables.
 To understand about the simulation and modeling of communication channels and models.
 To estimate different parameters which are considered for simulation and analyses the
performance measures from simulation with some test cases.
UNIT I
SIMULATION OF RANDOM VARIABLES AND RANDOM PROCESS
9
Univariate and multi-variate models, Transformation of random variables, Bounds and approximation,
Random process models-Markov AND ARMA sequences, Sampling rate for simulation, Computer
generation and testing of random numbers.
UNIT II
MODELING OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
9
Information Sources, Formatting/Source Coding, Digital Waveforms, Line Coding, Channel Coding,
Radio frequency and Optical Modulation, Demodulation and Detection, Filtering,
Multiplexing/Multiple Access, Synchronization, Calibration of Simulations.
UNIT III
COMMUNICATION CHANNELS & MODELS
9
Fading & Multipath Channels, Almost Free-Space Channels, Finite State Channel Models,
Methodology for Simulating Communication Systems Operating over Fading Channels, Reference
Models for Mobile Channels: GSM, UMTS-IMT-2000.
UNIT IV
ESTIMATION OF PARAMETERS IN SIMULATION
9
Quality of an estimator, Estimating the Average Level of a Waveform, Estimating the Average power
of a waveform, Estimating the Power Spectral Density of a process, Estimating the Delay and Phase.
UNIT V
ESTIMATION OF PERFORMANCE MEASURES FROM SIMULATION
9
Estimation of SNR, Performance Measures for Digital Systems, Importance sampling method,
Efficient Simulation using Importance Sampling, Quasianalytical Estimation. Case Studies: 16-QAM
Equalized Line of Sight Digital Radio Link, CDMA Cellular Radio System.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. M.C. Jeruchim, Philip Balaban and K.Sam Shanmugam, “Simulation of Communication Systems
Modeling, Methodology and Techniques”, 3rd Edition, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers,
New York, 2000.
2. C. Britton Rorabaugh, “Simulating Wireless Communication Systems: Practical Models In C++”,
2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.
3. William H. Tranter, K. Sam Shanmugan, Theodore S. Rappaport, Kurt L. Kosbar, “Principles of
Communication Systems Simulation with Wireless Applications”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall PTR,
2002.
4. John G. Proakis, Masoud Salehi, Gerhard Bauch, Bill Stenquist, Tom Ziolkowski, “Contemporary
Communication Systems Using MATLAB” Thomson-Engineering, 2nd Edition, 2002.
38
CEE3J
XML AND WEB SERVICES
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To understand the need of XML in web based systems.
 To learn the architecture of web services.
 To gain knowledge in protocols used in web services.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Role of XML – XML and the Web – XML Language Basics – Comparison with HTML – XML
Documents – Well-Formed XML Document – XML Elements – Types of Elements –
Attributes – Elements Vs Attributes – C DATA Sections.
UNIT II
XML TECHNOLOGY
9
XML – XML Schemas – Validating XML documents using XML Schema – Name Spaces –
Structuring with Schemas – Presentation Techniques – Transformation Techniques.
UNIT III
WEB SERVICES
9
Overview – Architecture – Key Technologies – UDDI Data Structure – Business Entity – Business
Service – WSDL – Types, Messages, Ports, Bindings, Services.
UNIT IV
SOAP
9
Overview of SOAP – HTTP – XML – RPC – Message Structure – Intermediaries – Actors – Design
Patterns and Faults – SOAP with Attachments – SOAP and Web Services in E- Commerce.
UNIT V
XML SECURITY
9
Security Overview – Canonicalization – XML Security Framework – XML Encryption – XML
Digital Signature – XKMS Structure – Guidelines for Signing XML Documents – XML in Practice
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Michael Papazoglou, “Web Services: Principles and Technology”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall of
India, 2008.
2. Frank. P. Coyle, “XML, Web Services and the Data Revolution”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education,
2002.
3. Ron Schmalzer, Travis Vandersypen, Jason Bloomberg, “XML and Web Services Unleashed”, 2nd
4. Ramesh Nagappan, Robert Skoczylas and Rima Patel Sriganesh, “Developing Java Web
Services”, 2nd Edition, Wiley Technology Publishing, 2004.
5. Sandeep Chatterjee, James Webber, “Developing Enterprise Web Services”, 1st Edition, Prentice
Hall Professional, 2004
6. James McGovern, Sameer Tyagi, Michael Stevens and Sunil Mathew, “Java Web Services
Architecture”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2005.
39
CEE3K
DATA WAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To study the functionalities of data warehousing and data mining.
 To learn the preprocessing and association rule concepts.
 To know the various classification and clustering methods.
 To understand the different types of mining.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Fundamentals of data mining – Data Mining Functionalities – Classification – Major issues in Data
Mining – Data Warehouse and OLAP Technology for Data Mining and Data Warehouse.
Multidimensional Data Model, Architecture, Implementation.
UNIT II
DATA PREPROCESSING AND ASSOCIATION RULE MINING
9
Need of preprocessing the data – Data cleaning – Data integration and transformation – Data
reduction – Data discretization and Concept hierarchy generation. Efficient and Scalable Frequent
Item set mining methods – Mining various kinds of Association rules – Association Mining to
correlation analysis – Constraint based association mining.
UNIT III
CLASSIFICATION AND PREDICTION
9
Classification and Prediction – Classification by Decision Tree Induction – Bayesian Classification –
Rule based classification – Classification by back propagation – Support Vector Machines – Lazy
learners – Other classification methods – Prediction – Accuracy and error measures – Evaluating the
accuracy of a classifier or predictor – Ensemble methods – Model section.
UNIT IV
CLUSTER ANALYSIS
9
Types of data in cluster analysis – Categories clustering methods – Partitioning methods –
Hierarchical methods – Density based Methods – Grid based Methods – Model based clustering
methods – Clustering high dimensional data – Constraint based cluster analysis – Outlier analysis.
UNIT V
MINING COMPLEX OBJECTS
9
Multidimensional analysis – Descriptive mining of complex data objects – Spatial data mining –
Multimedia data mining – Text mining – Mining the World Wide Web.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, 3rd Edition, Elsevier,
2011.
2. Alex Berson, Stephen J. Smith, “Data Warehousing, Data Mining & OLAP”, 10th Reprint, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2007.
3. K.P. Soman, Shyam Diwakar and V. Ajay, “Insight into Data mining Theory and Practice”, 2nd
4. G. K. Gupta, “Introduction to Data Mining with Case Studies”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
2011.
5. Pang-Ning Tan, Michael Steinbach and Vipin Kumar, “Introduction to Data Mining”, 2nd Edition,
40
CEE3L
SOFTWARE QUALITY ASSURANCE
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To learn the basic concepts in Software Quality Assurance.
 To study the basics of software testing for assuring software quality.
 To understand the metrics of software quality and quality management standards.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to software quality – Challenges – Objectives – Quality factors – Components of SQA
SQA Plan: Steps to develop and implement SQA Plan – Contract review – Development – SQA
components in project life cycle – SQA defect removal policies – Reviews.
UNIT II
SOFTWARE TESTING
9
Basics of software testing – Test generation from requirements – Finite state models – Combinatorial
designs – Test selection, minimization and prioritization for regression testing – Test adequacy,
assessment and enhancement.
UNIT III
SOFTWARE TESTING TYPES
9
Testing strategies – Structured approach to testing – Test factors – White box and Black box
approach – Functional and structural testing – Workbench concept – Testing methodologies–
Testing tactics checklist – Integration testing – System and acceptance testing – Performance testing
– Regression testing – Internationalization testing – Adhoc testing – Website testing – Usability
testing – Accessibility testing – Test plan – Management – Execution and reporting – Software test
automation – Automated testing tools.
UNIT IV
IMPLEMENTATION AND VALIDATION OF SOFTWARE QUALITY
METRICS
9
Hierarchical models of software quality – software quality metrics – Product quality metrics InProcess
quality Metrics – Metrics for software maintenance – Establish quality requirements– Identify
Software quality metrics – Implement the software quality metrics – Validate the software quality
metrics– Software product quality – Software maintenance quality – Effect of case tools – Software
quality infrastructure – Procedures – Certifications – Configuration management – Documentation
control.
UNIT V
QUALITY MANAGEMENT STANDARDS
9
Project progress control – Costs – Quality management standards – Project process standards –
Management and its role in SQA – SQA unit
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Daniel Galin, “Software Quality Assurance – From Theory to Implementation”, 3rd Edition,
2. Aditya Mathur, “Foundations of software testing”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
3. Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “Software testing – principles and practices”, 2nd
4. William E. Perry, “Effective Methods for Software Testing”, 2nd Edition, Wiley Publishers, 2006.
5. Mordechai BenMenachem, Garry S. Marliss, “Software Quality”, 1st Edition, Thomson Learning
publication, 2004.
41
CEE3M
ONTOLOGY AND SEMANTIC WEB
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To study the essentials of ontology.
 To learn the tools used for the construction of ontology.
 To learn the applications of semantic web.
UNIT I
WEB INTELLIGENCE
9
Introduction – The Semantic Web Vision – Today’s Web– From Today’s Web to the Semantic Web
– Layered Approach to Semantic Web Technologies – Overview of Structured Web Documents in
XML – XML Language Overview – Structuring – Namespaces – Addressing and Querying XML
Documents – Processing of documents.
UNIT II
ONTOLOGY LANGUAGES
9
Ontologies and their role in the Semantic Web – Ontology Languages for the Semantic Web –
Resource Description Framework (RDF), / RDF Schema – Ontology Web Language (OWL) –UML –
XML / XML Schema.
UNIT III
ONTOLOGY CONSTRUCTION
9
Ontology Engineering – Constructing Ontology – Ontology Methods – Ontology Sharing and
Merging – Ontology Libraries and Ontology Mapping – Logic, Rule and Inference Engines.
UNIT IV
ONTOLOGY DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
9
Ontology Development using Protege Editor – Ontology Querying – Ontology Reasoning and
Description Logic (DL) – Semantic Web Application Areas – Ontology Programming with Jena
API.
UNIT V
SEMANTIC WEB APPLICATIONS
9
Demonstrating power of Semantic Technology for Search – Personalization, Contextual Directory and
custom/enterprise applications – Next generation Semantic Content Management–Contributions of
Information Retrieval, Artificial Intelligence, Logic, Natural Language Processing, Database and
Information system to Semantic Web – Ontology Integration versus Interoperation.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Berners Lee, Gödel and Turing “Thinking on the Web”, 2nd Edition, Wiley Inter science, 2008.
2. Peter Mika, “Social Networks and the Semantic Web”, 1st Edition, Springer Publications, 2007.
3. John Davies, Rudi Studer, Paul Warren, “Semantic Web Technologies, Trends and Research in
Ontology Based Systems”, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
4. John Hebeler, Matthew Fisher , Ryan Blace and Andrew Perez-Lopez, “Semantic Web
Programming”, 1st Edition, Wiley Publications, 2009.
5. Heiner Stuckenschmidt; Frank Van Harmelen, “Information sharing on the semantic Web”, 1st
6. T.Segaran, C.Evans and J.Taylor, “Programming the Semantic Web”, 1st Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2009.
42
CEE3N
INFORMATION RETRIEVAL TECHNIQUES
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To learn the various information retrieval models.
 To know about pattern matching algorithms and multimedia Information Retrieval.
 To study the query languages, data models and applications.
 To learn the big data analytics and create statistical models
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Basic concepts – Retrieval process – Modeling – Classic information retrieval – Set theoretic,
Algebraic and Probabilistic models – Structured text retrieval models – Retrieval evaluation –Word
sense disambiguation.
UNIT II
QUERYING
9
Languages – Key word based querying – Pattern matching – Structural queries – Query operations –
User relevance feedback – Local and global analysis – Text and multimedia languages.
UNIT III
TEXT OPERATIONS AND USER INTERFACE
9
Document preprocessing – Clustering – Text compression – Indexing and searching – Inverted files –
Boolean queries – Sequential searching – Pattern matching – User interface and Visualization –
Human Computer Interaction – Access process – Starting points – Query specification – context –
User relevance judgment – Interface for search.
UNIT IV
MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION RETRIEVAL
9
Data models – Query languages – Spatial access models – Generic approach – One dimensional time
series – Two dimensional color images – Feature extraction.
UNIT V
BIG DATA ANALYTICS AND APPLICATIONS OF IR
9
Introduction to Big Data Analytics - Big Data Applications - Challenges in Unstructured data
processing – Tools – Applications: Search engines - Digital libraries – Online public access catalogs.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Ricardo Baeza-Yate, Berthier Ribeiro-Neto, “Modern Information Retrieval”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education Asia, 2005.
2. G.G. Chowdhury, “Introduction to Modern Information Retrieval”, 3rd Edition, Facet Publishing,
2010.
3. Rajendra Akerkar, “Big Data Computing”, 1st Edition, Taylor & Francis Group, 2013.
4. David A. Grossman, Ophir Frieder, “Information Retrieval: Algorithms, and Heuristics”, 2nd
5. Charles T. Meadow, Bert R. Boyce, Donald H. Kraft and Carol L. Barry, “Text Information
Retrieval Systems”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2003.
6. Christopher D. Manning, Prabhakar Raghavan, and Hinrich Schütze, “An Introduction to
Information Retrieval”, 1st Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2008.
43
CEE3P
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION OF COMPUTER SYSTEMS
AND NETWORKS
LT PC
3 0 0 3
Objectives:
 To study the concept of workload and queuing models.
 To know the asymptotic bounds and its performance.
 To study the performance evaluation of computer systems and networks.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to performance evaluation – Metrics – Workload – Problem of workload characterization
– Representativeness of a workload model – Test workloads – Workload model implementation
techniques – Measurement – Hardware – Software monitors.
UNIT II
QUEUING NETWORK MODELING
9
Overview – Modeling cycle – Understanding the objectives of a study – Workload characterization –
Sensitivity analysis – Sources of insight – Fundamental laws – Queueing network model inputs and
outputs.
UNIT III
BOUNDS ON PERFORMANCE
9
Asymptotic bounds – Using asymptotic bounds – Balanced system bounds – Models with one job
class –Workload representation – Solution techniques.
UNIT IV
MEMORY
9
System with known average multiprogramming level – Memory constraints – Swapping– Paging –
Disk I/O – Channel in NON – RPS I/O subsystems – Channel contention in RPS I/O subsystems –
Additional path elements – Multipathing – Other architectural characteristics – Processors.
UNIT V
PARAMETERIZATION
9
Existing systems – Evolving systems – Proposed systems – Simulation – Analysis of simulation
results – Simulation of General and extended queueing networks – Response time distributions –
Local area networks – models – Link performance – Transaction response, Link throughput,
Multiplexed link Capacity – Ethernet, token ring performance analysis.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Edward D.Lazawska, John zahorjan, G.Scott Graham and Kenneth C.Sevcik, “Quantitative
system performance - Computer system analysis with queueing network models”, 1st Edition,
Prentice Hall Inc, 1984.
2. Domenico Ferrari, Giuseppe Serazzi and Alexandro Zeijher, “Measurement and Tuning of
Computer Systems”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall Inc, 2003.
3. Michael F.Mories and Paul F.Roth,. “Tools and techniques, Computer Performance Evaluation”,
2nd Edition, Springer, 2001.
4. John Freer R., “Computer Communications and networks”, 2nd Edition, East-West press Pvt, Ltd.,
2004.
44
CEE3Q
AGENT BASED INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS
LT PC
3 0 0 3
Objectives:
 To study about knowledge based systems and problem solving methods.
 To learn the probabilistic reasoning techniques for intelligent systems.
 To develop intelligent systems for concrete computational problems
 To learn different learning agents.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
Basic definition - History – Intelligent agents – Agents and environments – Structure of agents.
6
UNIT II
PROBLEM SOLVING AGENTS
9
Searching for solutions – Uninformed search strategies – Informed search strategies – online search
agents and unknown environments – Constraint satisfaction problems.
UNIT III
KNOWLEDGE BASED AGENTS
10
Knowledge representation - logic – proposition – First order logic – Inference in first order logicAlgorithms – Knowledge representation Issues - Knowledge representation language
UNIT IV
PLANNING AND PROBABLISTIC AGENTS
10
The planning problem – partial order planning – Conditional planning – multi agent planning –
uncertainty and probabilistic reasoning.
UNIT V
LEARNING AGENTS
10
Learning from observations – Learning decision trees – Statistical learning methods – Instance based
learning – Neural network techniques for learning - Communicative agents – Probabilistic agents –
Perception and robotics – AI future.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Stuart Russel, Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence – A Modern Approach”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006.
2. Padhy N P, “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Systems”, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press,
2005.
3. Nils J Nilsson, “Artificial Intelligence – A New Synthesis”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2007.
4. George F Luger, “Artificial Intelligence – Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem
Solving”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Zili Zhang, “Agent-Based Hybrid Intelligent Systems: An Agent-Based Framework for Complex
Problem Solving”, 1st Edition, Springer, 2004.
6. David Poole, Alan Mackworth, “Artificial Intelligence foundations of computational agents”, 1 st
Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
45
CEE3R
VISUALIZATION TECHNIQUES
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To learn the issues and foundations for visualization.
 To know the multidimensional visualization.
 To perform case studies using various analysis methods
 To learn about new visualization techniques and applications
UNIT I
VISUALIZATION
9
Introduction – Visualization tools and techniques – Issues – Data representation – Data presentation –
Interaction.
UNIT II
FOUNDATIONS FOR DATA VISUALIZATION
9
Visualization stages – Experimental semiotics based on perception Gibson‘s affordance theory–
Model of perceptual processing – Types of data.
UNIT III
VISUALIZATION METHODS
9
Computer Visualization: Exploring Complex Information Spaces – Fisheye views – Applications –
Comprehensible fisheye views – Fisheye views for 3D data – Non linear magnification – Comparing
visualization of information spaces – Abstraction in computer graphics – Abstraction in user
interfaces – Non-Computer Visualization.
UNIT IV
MULTIDIMENSIONAL VISUALIZATION
9
One Dimension – Two Dimension – Three Dimension – Multiple Dimension – Trees – Web Works –
Data Mapping: Document Visualization – Workspaces.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS AND ANALYSIS
9
Small interactive calendars – Selecting one from many – Web browsing through a key hole –
Communication analysis – Archival analysis.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Colin Ware, “Information Visualization Perception for Design”, 2nd Edition, Margon Kaufmann
Publishers, 2004.
2. Robert Spence, “Information visualization – Design for interaction”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2007.
3. Stuart.K.Card, Jock.D.Mackinlay and Ben Shneiderman, “Readings in Information Visualization
Using Vision to think”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2006.
4. Vitaly Friedman, "Data Visualization and Infographics in Graphics”, 2nd Edition, Monday
Inspiration, 2008.
5. Alexander N. Gorban, Balázs Kégl, Donald Wunsch, and Andrei Zinovyev, “Principal Manifolds
for Data Visualization and Dimension Reduction”, 3rd Edition, Springer, 2008.
46
CEE3S
COMPONENT BASED TECHNOLOGY
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To study the introductory concepts of components..
 To know about beans, Remote method invocation techniques.
 To learn the CORBA, COM and .NET Technologies.
 To study about frame works and its development.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Software Components – Objects – Fundamental properties of component technology – Modules–
Interfaces – Callbacks – Directory services – Component architecture – Components and middleware.
UNIT II
JAVA COMPONENT TECHNOLOGIES
9
Threads – Java Beans – Events and connections – Properties – Introspection – JAR files – Reflection
– Object serialization – Enterprise Java Beans – Distributed object models – IDL interface – Proxy –
Marshalling – RMI – IIOP.
UNIT III
CORBA TECHNOLOGIES
9
Java and CORBA – Benefits of java programming with CORBA – CORBA overview –Interface
definition language – Object request broker – System object model – Portable object adapter –
CORBA services – CORBA component model – Containers – Application server – Model driven
architecture.
UNIT IV
COM AND .NET TECHNOLOGIES
9
COM – Distributed COM – COM facilities and services – Applying COM objects – Query interface –
Reference counting – Dynamic linking –– OLE containers and servers – Active X controls – .NET
components – Assemblies – Appdomains – Contexts – Reflection – Remoting.
UNIT V
COMPONENT FRAMEWORKS AND DEVELOPMENT
9
Connectors – contexts – EJB containers – CLR contexts and channels – Black Box component
framework – Directory objects – Component – oriented programming – Component design and
implementation tools – Testing tools – Assembly tools
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Clemens Szyperski, “Component Software: Beyond Object-Oriented Programming”, 2nd Edition,
Pearson Education Publishers, 2003.
2. Ed Roman, “Enterprise Java Beans”, 3rd Edition, Wiley Publishers, 2004.
3. Andreas Vogel and Keith Duddy, “Java Programming with CORBA”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, 1998.
4. Dale Rogerson, “Inside COM”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2000.
5. Alan w. Brown, “Large scale component based development“, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000.
47
CEE3T
GAME THEORY
LTPC
3 0 0 3
Objectives:
 To provide a conceptual overview to the tools of game theory and some of its applications.
 To know the concepts of game theory in wireless network applications.
 To analyze situations in which two or more individuals/firms/political parties interactions in
a strategic manner.
 To help better understand situations involving conflicts and/or cooperation.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Introduction – Rules of the game- Strategic games – Introduction to zero sum games – Nash
Equilibrium – Bayesian game- Mixed Strategic Nash Equilibrium.
UNIT II
EXTENSIVE GAME WITH PERFECT INFORMATION
10
Extensive game with perfect information – Bargaining games – repeated games – subgame perfect
equilibrium.
UNIT III
EXTENSIVE GAME WITH IMPERFECT INFORMATION
10
Extensive game with Imperfect Information – Equivalence of Extensive games – mixed strategy –
strategy as machine.
UNIT IV
COALITION GAME THEORY
9
Coalition Game with transferable payoff- Exchange economy – Stable Set Bargaining – Shapley
Value
UNIT V
EVOLUTIONARY GAME THEORY
Evolutionary theory – stability – Dynamic structure – Stochastic stability
8
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Oborne Martin.J, “An Introduction to Game Theory”, Oxford University Press, 2003.
2. Martin J. Osborne, Ariel Rubinstein, “A course in Game Theory”, MIT press, 1984.
3. Eric Rasmesen “Games and Information: An Introduction to game theory”, Blackwell Publishing,
2007.
4. Joel Watson, “Strategy: An Introduction to Game Theory”, W.W. Norton & Company, 2001.
48
CEE3V NETWORK CONGESTION CONTROL AVOIDANCE TECHNIQUE
LTPC
3 00 3
Objectives:
 To have an in depth idea about the need for effective congestion control and avoidance
mechanisms with respect to network layer.
 To understand about the various congestion control techniques which are used in TCP and
Frame Relay Networks.
 To get a deep concept about the congestion avoidance in TCP Flow Control and various
congestion avoidance mechanisms.
UNIT I
CONGESTION CONTROL IN TCP
9
Internet Congestion Collapse - Ressource Management Solution - Van Jacobson Congestion Control Elements of Congestion Control - TCP Variants – Karns algorithme – Issues in TCP - TCP
Congestion Control Concepts
UNIT II
CONGESTION CONTROL IN NETWORK LAYER
9
Network Congestion – Routing algorithm – Packet queuing and service policy – Congestion Control
Methods – Choke Packets – Multiprotocol routers – QOS – Concatenated virtual circuits –
Tunneling – Packet Fragmentation
UNIT III
CONGESTION CONTROL IN FRAME RELAY
9
Frame Relay Congestion Technique – Discard control – FECN – BECN – Frame Relay Traffic
Shaping – Implicit Congestion Control – QOS in Frame relay – Frame Relay Virtual Circuits –
FRAD techniques
UNIT IV
CONGESTION AVOIDANCE FLOW CONTROL
9
End to end flow control in TCP – Slow Start – Fast retransmit, Fast Recovery – Additive Increase /
Multiplicative Decrease
UNIT V
CONGESTION AVOIDANCE MECHANISM
9
RED – REM – PI – Hop by Hop techniques – New Congestion Avoidance in TCP – ECN – Round
Trip Time variance estimation – Dynamic window sizing on congestion – Combined Slow start and
Congestion Avoidance algorithm
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Michael Welzl, “Network Congestion Control”, John Wiley & Sons, May 2006.
2. Pete Loshin, “TCP/IP Clearly explained”, 4th Edition, Morgan Kauffmann Series in Networking,
2003.
3. Martin P.Clark , “Data Networks, IP and the Internet”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
4. R. Srikant, “The Mathematics of Internet Congestion Control”, Springer Publications, 2004.
5. Michael Welzl, “Scalable Performance Signalling and Congestion Avoidance”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2003.
49
CEE3W
TRUSTED SERVICES AND PUBLIC KEY INFRASTRUCTURE
LTPC
300 3
Objectives:
 To understand about the need of public key infrastructure technologies, its algorithms, its
design, implementation and management issues.
 To study about the trusted services relevant to e-commerce.
 To discuss about the applications of public key infrastructure in e-commerce and egovernance.
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF PKI TECHNOLOGY
10
Overview of PKI Technology: Symmetric Vs. Asymmetric Ciphers - PKI Services - PKI Enabled
Services - Certificates and Certification - Digital Signatures - Securing Web Transactions - Key and
Certificate Life Cycles - PKI Standards - Third Party CA Systems -Secure Socket Layer(SSL) - CA
System Attacks - Key Escrow vs Key Recovery,Certification Practices - Securing Business
Applications - PKI Readiness.
UNIT II
PKI ALGORITHMS
8
Public Key Algorithms- Knapsack, RSA, Pohlig-Hellman, Rabin, Elgamal, McElliece - Elliptic Curve
Cryptosystems – LUC - Finite Automation Public Key Cryptosystems - Public Key Digital Signature
Cryptosystems - GOST, ESIGN.
UNIT III
DESIGN, IMPLEMENTATION, MANAGEMENT
10
Design, Implementation and Management of PKI: PKI Design Issues, PKI-ROI - Architecture for PKI
(APKI) - Implementing Secure Web services Requirements using PKI - Versign’s Foundation in
Managed Security Services - Implementation and Deployment - Implementation Costs - PKI
Performance - Obtaining a Certificate -Certification Revocation with Managed PKI - Open
Revocation Solutions for Today’s Enterprise PKI needs.
UNIT IV
E-COMMERCE SECURITY THREATS
9
Security Threats to E-commerce: Internet Security Issues Overview - Intellectual Property Threats,
Threats to the Security-Client Computers - Communication Channels - Server Computers Implementing Electronics Commerce Security: Objects, Protecting-Client Computers Communication Channels - Web Server - Access Control: Authentication - Authorization and
Accountability Controls.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF PKI
8
Applications of PKI: Trust Models - Deployment and Operation, X.509 Certificates - ECommerce:
the building blocks – Trusted Business Environment for E-commerce – Certification - Certification
Practice and Policy, Registration - Certification usage and revocation - PKI in Electronic Government
- Trusted Services and PKI: Technology Commonality in Approaches and Government Initiatives.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Larry Caffrey, Rogers W’o Okot-Uma, “Trusted Services and Public Key Infrastructure”, 1st
Edition, Common Wealth Secretariat Publishers, 2001.
2. Cartisle Adams, Steve Lloyd, “Understanding PKI: Concepts, Standards and Deployment
Considerations”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Vacca R Vacca, “Public Key Infrastructure: Building Trusted Applications and Web Services”, 1st
Edition, CRC Press LLC 2004.
4. Andrew Nash, William Daune, Celia Joseph and Derek Brink, “PKI – Implementing and
Managing E-Security”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, 2001.
5. Gray P.Schneider, “Electronic Commerce”, 4th Annual Edition, 2003.
6. Roberta Bragg, mark Phodes-Ousley and Keith Strassberg, “The Complete Reference Network
Security”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, 2004.
50
CEE3X
WIRELESS MAN
LTPC
3 0 03
Objectives:
 To know about what is WiMAX and its need in the current scenarios
 To study the various WiMAX standards, WiMAX broadband systems and applications.
 To get an overview of WiMAX Radio and its Channelization concepts.
 To discuss about the operations of WiMAX and its QoS.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO WIMAX
9
Advantages of Wimax Wimax compared to 802. 11 Wi-Fi ,WiMAX Comparted to Mobile, Telephone
Data Systems, Data Transmission Rates, WiMAX Service Rates,Radio Coverage Area, Frequency
Bands, channel Loading, Spectral Efficiency, Fixed WiMAX, Mobile WiMAX.
UNIT II
WIMAX STANDARDS, BROADBAND APPLICATIONS
9
WiMAX Standards, WiMAX VolP, Broadband DataConnections, Digital Television, E1/T1 over
WiMAX, Urban WiMAX Hot Zones,Surveillance Services, Multi-tenant Units (MTU) and MultiDwelling Unit (MDU) connections, Rural Connections.
UNIT III
WIRELESS BROADBAND SYSTEM PARTS, TECHNOLOGIES
10
Chassis Based Systems, Pico Based Systems,Subscriber Stations (SS), Indoor Subscriber Stations,
Outdoor Subscriber Stations,Base Stations (BS), Indoor Base Stations, Outdoor Base Stations, Packet
Switches,Operational Support System (OSS), Gateways.Antennas Orthogonal FrequencyDivision
Multiplexing (OFDM), Orthogonal Frequency Multiple Access (OFDMA),Frequency Reuse,
Adaptive Modulation, Diversity,Transmission, Transmission Diversity, Receive Diversity, Frequency
Diversity, Temporal (Time) Diversity, SpatialDiversity, Adaptive Antenna System (AAS)
UNIT IV
OVERVIEW TO WIMAX RADIO
8
WiMAX Protocol Layers, MAC Convergence, MAC Layer, MAC Privacy, Physical Layer, Security
Sub Layer, Addressing, Medium Access Control Protocol Data Units,(MACPDUs), Radio Packets
(Bursts), Channel Descriptors, Channel Coding, Duplex Transmission, Ranging, (Dynamic Time
Alignment ), Dynamic FrequencySelecton(DFS), RFPowerControl, Channel Measurement Reports,
Payload Header Suppression (PHS), Convergence Sublayer (CS), Sub Channelization (Sub64
carriers), Retransmission Policy, Selective Repeat (SR) Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ),
Physical RF Channels, Logical Channels Connections ID (CID), Service Flow ID (SFID).
UNIT V
WIMAX OPERATION AND QoS
9
WiMAX Operation, Channel Acquisition, Initial Ranging, medium Access Control, Radio Link
Control (RLC), Quality of Service (QoS), Service Availability, Data Throughput, Delay, Jitter, Error
Rate Bit Error Rate (BER), Packet Loss Rate (PLR), Scheduling Services, Unsolicited Grant Service
(UGS), Real Time Polling Service (RTPS), Non-Real Time Polling Service (nRTPS), Best Effort
Service (BE), Service Flows and Classes, Service Flows, Service Class.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Lawrence Harte, Dr. Kalai Kalaichelvan “WiMAX Explained”, 1st Edition, Althos Publishers,
2007.
2. Jeffrey G.Andrews, Arunabha Ghosh, Rais Muhamed, “Fundamentals of WiMAX :
Understanding Broadband Wireless Networking”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
3. Jonny SUN, Yanling YAO, Hongfei ZHU, “Quality of Service Scheduling For 802.16 Broadband
Wireless Access Systems”, IEEE Communications Magazine, 2006.
4. Fen Hou, Pin-Han Ho, Xuemin (Sherman) Shen, An-Yi Chen, “A Novel Qos Scheduling Scheme
in IEEE 802. 16 Networks”, IEEE Communications Society, WCNC, 2007.
51
CEE3Y
ADVANCED SECURITY MECHANISM
LTPC
30 0 3
Objectives:
 To know about the language based formal approaches to security mechanisms
 To understand about the kernel level architectures which supports to design advanced
security mechanisms.
 To get an in depth idea about the proof carrying code for development of secured and safety
programs.
 To understand in details about the java virtual machine as a case study of security internals.
UNIT I
MATHEMATICAL APPROACHES TO SECURITY
9
Basics – Language based Approach to security, Aliasing Problem, Encapsulation in Object – Oriented
Programming Language, Ownership Types and Permission – Based Protection Object Relationship
Based on Subsumption, Issues on Software Protection, Mathematical Approach To Prove Safety.
UNIT II
KERNEL INTERNALS TO SECURITY
9
Kernel Embedded Handlers – Software Based Fault Isolation, Address Based Mechanism for safety,
Inline Reference Monitor, SASI (Security Automata SFI Implementation). Trusted Compiler, Kernel
Embedded Interpreter, Code Inspection.
UNIT III
PROOF CARRYING CODE
9
Typed Assembly Language (TAL) – core and Implementation, Type Invariant, Proof Carrying Code
(PCC) – Defining Safety Policy, Certifying the Safety Programs, Validating the Safety Proofs,
Approach Towards Efficiency, Foundational Proof
Carrying Code (FPCC): mechanism.
UNIT IV
JVM INTERNALS
9
JVM Internals – Java stack Inspection and General theory, Garbage Collection, Beyond Type Safety,
Sandboxing Mechanism in Java, Lifetime of Types, JVM Memory Management, JVM Working and
Operating System Interaction.
UNIT V
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES FOR SECURITY KERNALS
9
Case Study – language based Extensible Operating System – J-Kernel and SPIN, Cyclone
Programming Language, Ownership Types, Island Types, Balloon Types, External Uniqueness ClassBased Programming Language and Prototype-Based Programming Language.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCES
1. Gary McGraw and EdFalten, “Securing Java”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley Publishers, 2005.
2. Bill Venners, “Inside Java Virtual Machine, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2000.
3. Cornel TAL group – (www.cs.cornel.edu/talc/)
4. Peter Lee (PCC) – (www.2.cs.cmu.edu/petel/papers/pccp)
52
www.nec.edu.in
REGULATIONS - 2013
DEPARTMENT OF
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
M.E. – COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Curriculum & Syllabi of M.E. (CS)
REGULATIONS - 2013
M.E. - COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
SEMESTER I
S.NO
1
2
3
4
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
CSC11
Applied Mathematics for Communication
Engineers (Common to M.E CS and M.E CC)
CSC12
Advanced Digital Signal Processing
(Common to M.E CS, M.E CC, M.E HVE and
M.E C&I)
CSC13
Advanced Network Security
(Common to M.E CSE and M.E CS)
CSC14
Modern Digital Communication Techniques
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
3
1
0
4
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
5
CSC15
Optical Communication Networks
3
0
0
3
6
CSC16
High Performance Computer Networks
3
0
0
3
Communication System Laboratory – I
0
0
4
2
2
4
22
PRACTICAL
7
CSC17
TOTAL 18
SEMESTER II
S.NO
1
2
3
4
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
CSC21
Advanced Wireless Communication
(Common to M.E CS & M.E CC)
CSC22
Wireless Networks
(Common to M.E CC & M.E CS)
CSC23
Multimedia Compression Techniques
E1
Elective
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
5
E2
Elective
3
0
0
3
6
E3
Elective
3
0
0
3
Communication System Laboratory – II
0
0
4
2
0
4
20
PRACTICAL
7
CSC24
TOTAL 18
2
SEMESTER III
S.NO
1
COURSE
CODE
E4
Elective
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
2
E5
Elective
3
0
0
3
3
E6
Elective
3
0
0
3
Project work phase I
0
0
12
6
TOTAL 9
0
12
15
P
C
PRACTICAL
4
CSC31
SEMESTER IV
S.NO
COURSE
CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
0
0
24
12
TOTAL 0
0
24
12
PRACTICAL
1
CSC41
Project work phase II
3
S.NO
1
2
3
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
CSC11
Applied Mathematics for Communication
Engineers (Common to M.E CS & M.E CC)
CSC13
Advanced Network Security
CSC14
Modern Digital Communication Techniques
Total
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
3
0
0
3
3
9
0
1
0
0
3
10
S.NO
1
2
3
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
CSC21
CSC22
Wireless Networks
CSC23
Total
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
9
0
0
9
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
0
9
0
1
4
4
2
12
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
1
CSC12
(Common to M.E CS, M.E CC, M.E HVE and
M.E C&I)
2
CSC15
Optical Communication Networks
3
CSC16
High Performance Computer Networks
PRACTICAL
4
CSC17
Communication System Laboratory-I
Total
S.NO
4
COURSE
CODE
1
E1
2
E2
3
E3
PRACTICAL
4
CSC24
S.NO
COURSE TITLE
Elective
Elective
Elective
Communication System Laboratory-II
L
T
P
C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
TOTAL 9
0
0
4
4
2
11
L
T
P
C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
0
12
6
TOTAL 9
0
12
15
SEMESTER V (Part time)
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
THEORY
1
E4
Elective
2
E5
Elective
3
E6
Elective
PRACTICAL
4
CSC31 Project Work Phase I
S.NO
SEMESTER VI (Part time)
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
PRACTICAL
1
CSC41 Project Work Phase II
S.NO
L
T
P
C
0
0
24
12
TOTAL 0
0
24
12
5
S.NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
CSE2A Advanced Radiation Systems
CSE2B DSP Architecture and Programming
CSE2C Optical Fiber Communication and Networking
(Common to M.E CS and M.E CC)
CSE2D Adhoc Networks
(Common to M.E CSE, M.E CS and M.E CC)
CSE2E
Wavelets and Multiresolution Analysis
(Common to M.E CS and M.E CSE)
CSE2F
Soft Computing
CSE2G Digital Communication Receivers
CSE2H Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility
Techniques
CSE2J
Global Positioning Systems
CSE2K Speech Signal Processing (Common to CS and CC)
CSE2L
Advanced Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
CSE2M Low Power VLSI Design
CSE2N Satellite Communication
CSE2P
Microwave Integrated Circuits
CSE2Q Digital Image Processing
L T P C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
S.NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
CSE3A Embedded Systems
(Common to M.E CS, M.E CSE and M.E CC)
CSE3B Pattern Recognition
CSE3C Evolutionary Computing
(Common to M.E HVE, CS, CSE and CC)
CSE3D Mobile Computing
CSE3E
CSE3F
High Speed Switching Architectures
CSE3G Neural Networks and Its Applications
CSE3H RF System Design
CSE3J
Communication Protocol Engineering
CSE3K ASIC Design
CSE3L Nonlinear Fiber Optics
CSE3M VLSI Signal Processing
CSE3N Medical Image Processing
L T P C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
CSC11
APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR COMMUNICATION ENGINEERS L T P C
3 10 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the concepts of matrix theory
 To understand simplex method, two phase method and graphical solution in linear
programming.
 To learn moment generating functions and one dimensional random variables.
 To understand queueing models and computation methods in engineering
UNIT I
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
9
Bessel's equation – Bessel function – Recurrence relations - Generating function and orthogonal
property for Bessel functions of first kind – Fourier-Bessel expansion.
UNIT II
ADVANCED MATRIX THEORY
9
Eigen-values using QR transformations - Generalized eigen vectors - Canonical forms - Singular
value decomposition and applications - Pseudo inverse - Least square approximations.
UNIT III
ONE DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES
9
Random variables - Probability function – moments – moment generating functions and their
properties – Binomial, Poisson, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions.
UNIT IV
TWO DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES
9
Joint distributions – Marginal and Conditional distributions – Correlation and Regression, Regression
Curve for means.
UNIT V
QUEUEING MODELS
9
Poisson Process – Markovian queues – Single and Multi-server Models – Little’s formula - Steady
State analysis – Self Service queue.
TUTORIAL: 15 PERIODS
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Taha, H.A., “Operations Research, An introduction”, 7th edition, Pearson education editions,
Asia, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Bronson.R, “Matrix operation, Schaum’s outline series”, Mc Graw Hill, New York, 1λ8λ.
3. Grewal,B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 37th edition, Khanna Publishers,2003.
4. Ramana B.V, Higher Engineering Mathematics –Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
5. Donald Gross and Carl M. Harris, “Fundamentals of Queuing theory”, 2nd edition, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 1985.
7
CSC12
ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
(Common to M.E CS, M.E CC, M.E HVE and M.E C&I)
LTPC
3 104
OBJECTIVES:
 Understand the basic concepts and to apply in discrete random signal processing.
 Estimate the spectrum using parametric methods and non parametric methods.
 Estimation and prediction using wiener FIR & IIR filters
 Study adaptive filtering techniques using LMS algorithm and to study the applications of
adaptive filtering.
 Apply multirate signal processing fundamentals.
UNIT I
DISCRETE RANDOM SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Discrete Random Processes - Ensemble Averages, Stationary processes, Bias and Estimation, Auto
covariance, Autocorrelation, Parseval’s theorem, Wiener-Khintchine relation, White noise, Power
Spectral Density, Spectral factorization, Filtering Random Processes, Special types of Random
Processes, ARMA, AR, MA.
UNIT II
SPECTRAL ESTIMATION
9
Estimation of spectra from finite duration signals, Nonparametric methods, Periodogram, Modified
periodogram, Bartlett, Welch and Blackman-Tukey methods, Parametric methods, ARMA, AR and
MA model based spectral estimation, Yule-Walker equations, Solution using Levinson-Durbin
algorithm.
UNIT III
LINEAR ESTIMATION AND PREDICTION
9
Linear prediction, Forward and Backward prediction, Signal modeling, Solution of Prony’s normal
equations, Least mean-squared error criterion, Wiener filter for filtering and prediction, FIR and IIR
Wiener filters, Discrete Kalman filter.
UNIT IV
ADAPTIVE FILTERS
9
FIR adaptive filters, adaptive filter based on steepest descent method- Widrow-Hoff LMS algorithm,
Normalized LMS algorithm, Adaptive channel equalization, Adaptive echo cancellation, Adaptive
noise cancellation, RLS adaptive algorithm.
UNIT V
MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Upsampling and down sampling, Interpolation and Decimation, Sampling rate conversion by a
rational factor, Polyphase filter structures, Multistage implementation of multirate system,
Application to subband coding.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Monson H. Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley and
Sons, Inc, Singapore, 1st Edition, 2008.
2. John G. Proakis and Dimitris K Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Pearson Education,
4th Edition, 2009.
3. Alan V. Oppenheim and Ronald W. Schafer, “Discrete-Time Signal Processing” 3rd Edition,
4. Emmanuel C. Ifeachor and Barrie W. Jervis, “Digital signal processing: A practical approach”
8
CSC13
ADVANCED NETWORK SECURITY
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To know about various network attacks and challenges
 To study the security algorithms.
 To learn web security and wireless security.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION ON SECURITY
9
Security Goals, Types of Attacks: Passive attack, active attack, attacks on confidentiality, Integrity
and availability – Security services and mechanisms – Cryptography Techniques – Steganography.
UNIT II
9
Substitutional and Transposition Ciphers – Stream and Block Ciphers – Data Encryption Standards
(DES) – Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) – RC4 – principle of asymmetric key algorithms –
RSA Cryptosystem – Diffie Hellmen Key Exchanging algorithm.
UNIT III
9
Message Integrity, Hash functions – SHA – Digital signatures – Digital signature standards
Authentication – Kerberos – Entity Authentication – Biometrics – Key management Techniques.
UNIT IV
NETWORK SECURITY, FIREWALLS AND WEB SECURITY
9
Introduction on Firewalls – Types of Firewalls – Firewall Configuration and Limitation of Firewall –
IP Security Overview - IP security Architecture – authentication Header – Security payload – security
associations – Key Management – Web security requirement – secure sockets layer – transport layer
security – secure electronic transaction – dual signature.
UNIT V
9
Attacks – Routing, Intergrity, confidentiality and availability related attacks – Wired Equivalent
Privacy, Wi-Fi Protected Access and WPA-2 for Wi- Fi network – Secure Adhoc Network – Secure
Sensor Network.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Behrouz A. Fourcuzan, “Cryptography and Network security”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2008.
2. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Mark D. Ciampa, “Security+ Guide to Network Security Fundamentals”, 3rd Edition, Cengage
Learning, 2009.
4. Stuart McClure, Joel Scambray and George Kurtz “Hacking Exposedμ Network Security Secrets
and Solutions”, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill Publications, 2009.
5. Chris McNab, “Network Security Assessmentμ Know Your Network”, 2nd Edition, O'Reilly
Media, 2007.
6. Fahim Hussain Yusuf Bhaiji “Network Security Technologies and Solutions (CCIE Professional
Development Series)”, 1st Edition, Cisco Press, 2008.
9
CSC14
MODERN DIGITAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES
LTP C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To explore Representation of Signal
 To study about Coding theory and Modulation
 To learn about M-ary signaling
UNIT I
CONSTANT ENVELOPE MODULATION
9
Advantages of Constant Envelope Modulation, Binary Frequency Shift Keying, Coherent and Noncoherent Detection of BFSK, Minimum Shift Keying, Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying, M-ary Phase
Shift Keying, M-ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation, M-ary Frequency Shift Keying – Probability
of Error.
UNIT II
BLOCK CODED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
9
Architecture and performance, Binary block codes, Orthogonal, Biorthogonal, Transorthogonal,
Shannon’s channel coding theorem, Channel capacity, Coded BPSK and DPSK demodulators, Linear
block codes, Hamming, Golay, Cyclic, BCH, Reed - Solomon codes.
UNIT III
CONVOLUTIONAL CODED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
9
Representation of codes using Polynomial, State diagram, Tree diagram, and Trellis diagram,
Decoding techniques using Maximum likelihood, Viterbi algorithm, Sequential and Threshold
methods, Error probability performance for BPSK and Viterbi algorithm, Turbo Coding.
UNIT IV
PULSE SHAPING AND EQUALIZATION TECHNIQUES
9
Band Limited Channels, ISI, Nyquist Criterion, Controlled ISI, Partial Response signals, Equalization
algorithms, Viterbi Algorithm, Linear equalizer, Decision feedback equalization, Adaptive
Equalization algorithms.
UNIT V
OFDM
9
Generation of sub-carriers using the IFFT, Guard Time and Cyclic Extension, Windowing, OFDM
signal processing, Peak Power Problem: PAPR reduction schemes, Clipping, Filtering, Coding and
Scrambling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. M.K.Simon, S.M.Hinedi and W.C.Lindsey, “Digital communication techniques; Signalling
and detection”, Prentice Hall India, US Edition, 1λλ5.
2. John G. Proakis and Masoud Salehi, “Digital Communications”, 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill
International Editions, 2008.
3. Haykins, “Communication Systems”, 5th Edition, John Wiley, 2008.
4. Richard Van Nee & Ramjee Prasad., “OFDM for Multimedia Communications”, Artech
House Publication, 2001.
10
CSC15
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
LTP C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the Optical network components for Optical Network communication.
 To study various Network architecture and topologies for optical networks.
 To study the issues in the network design and operation for wavelength routing in optical
networks.
UNIT I
OPTICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
9
Light propagation in optical fibers, Loss & bandwidth, System limitations, Non-Linear effects,
Solitons, Optical Network Components, Couplers, Isolators & Circulators, Multiplexers & Filters,
Optical Amplifiers, Switches, Wavelength Converters.
UNIT II
OPTICAL NETWORK ARCHITECTURES
9
Introduction to Optical Networks; SONET / SDH, Metropolitan Area Networks, Layered
Architecture; Broadcast and Select Networks, Topologies for Broadcast Networks, Media-Access
Control Protocols, Test beds for Broadcast & Select WDM; Wavelength Routing Architecture.
UNIT III
WAVELENGTH ROUTING NETWORKS
9
The optical layer, Node Designs, Optical layer cost tradeoff, Routing and wavelength assignment,
Virtual topology design, Wavelength Routing Test beds, Architectural variations.
UNIT IV
PACKET SWITCHING AND ACCESS NETWORKS
9
Photonic Packet Switching, OTDM, Multiplexing and Demultiplexing, Synchronization, Broadcast
OTDM networks, Switch-based networks; Access Networks, Network Architecture overview, Future
Access Networks, Optical Access Network Architectures; and OTDM networks.
UNIT V
NETWORK DESIGN AND MANAGEMENT
9
Transmission System Engineering , System model, Power penalty, transmitter, receiver, Optical
amplifiers, crosstalk, dispersion, Wavelength stabilization, Overall design considerations, Control and
Management, Network management functions, Configuration management, Performance
management, Fault management, Optical safety, Service interface.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Rajiv Ramaswami, Kumar Sivarajan and Galen Sasaki, “Optical Networksμ A Practical
Perspective”, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2009.
2. John M. Senior, “Optical Fiber Communicationsμ Principles and Practice”, 3 rd Edition,
3. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communications”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2010.
4. C. Siva Ram Moorthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networksμ Concept, Design and
Algorithms”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
11
CSC16
HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTER NETWORKS
LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the OSI and IP models for packet switched networks
 To study the ISDN and broadband ISDN architecture and protocols.
 To study the ATM backbone and advanced network architecture for high performance
communication networks.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Review of OSI, TCP/IP; Multiplexing, Modes of Communication, Switching, Routing. SONET –
DWDM – DSL – ISDN – BISDN - ATM.
UNIT II
MULTIMEDIA NETWORKING APPLICATIONS
9
Streaming stored Audio and Video – Best effort service – protocols for real time interactive
applications – Providing Multiple Classes of Service – Providing Quality of Service Guarantees.
UNIT III
ADVANCED NETWORKS CONCEPTS
10
VPN-Remote-Access VPN, site-to-site VPN, Tunneling to PPP, Security in VPN.MPLS operation,
Routing, Tunneling and use of FEC, Traffic Engineering, MPLS based VPN, overlay networks-P2P
connections.
UNIT IV
TRAFFIC MODELLING
7
Little’s theorem, Birth-and-Death Process – Queuing Disciplines – Markovian FIFO Queuing
Systems – Non-Markovian and Self-Similar Models – Networks of Queues.
UNIT V
NETWORK SECURITY AND MANAGEMENT
10
Principles of cryptography – Message Integrity and End-Point Authentication – Securing Email –
Securing TCP connections – Network Layer Security – Securing Wireless LANs Operational Security
- Infrastructure for network management – The internet standard management framework – SMI,
MIB, SNMP, Security and administration – ASN.1
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. J.F. Kurose & K.W. Ross, “Computer Networking - A top down approach featuring the
internet”, 6th Edition, Pearson education, 2012.
2. Nader F.Mir, “Computer and Communication Networks”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Walrand. J. Varatya, “High performance communication network”, 2nd Edition, Morgan
Kaufmann, Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
4. Leom-Garcia, Widjaja, “Communication networks”, 7th reprint, TMH, 2002.
12
CSC17
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM LABORATORY -I
L T P C
0 0 4 2
1. Channel equalizer design using MATLAB (LMS, RLS)
2. Transform based compression techniques
3. Design of Adaptive filters
4. Implementation of Polyphase filter structures
5. Performance Evaluation of digital modulation schemes using MATLAB and Lab view
6. Implementation of Linear and Cyclic Codes
7. OFDM transceiver design using MATLAB
8. Performance evaluation of Digital Data Transmission through Fiber Optic Link
9. Fiber optic characterization using OTDR
13
CSC21
ADVANCED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basics of Wireless voice and data communications technologies.
 To build working knowledge on various telephone and satellite networks.
 To study the working principles of wireless LAN and its standards.
 To build knowledge on various Mobile Computing algorithms.
 To build skills in working with Wireless application Protocols to develop mobile
content applications.
UNIT I
THE WIRELESS CHANNEL
9
Overview of wireless systems, Physical modeling for wireless channels, Time and Frequency
coherence, Statistical channel models, Fading, Capacity of wireless Channel, Capacity of Flat Fading
Channel, Channel Distribution Information known, Channel Side Information at Receiver, Channel
Side Information at Transmitter and Receiver.
UNIT II
PERFORMANCE OF DIGITAL MODULATION OVER WIRELESS
CHANNELS
8
Capacity with Receiver diversity, Capacity comparisons, Capacity of Frequency Selective Fading
channels, Outage Probability, Average Probability of Error, Combined Outage and Average Error
Probability, Doppler Spread, Intersymbol Interference.
UNIT III
DIVERSITY
9
Realization of Independent Fading Paths, Receiver Diversity, Selection Combining, Threshold
Combining, Maximal-Ratio Combining, Equal Gain Combining, Transmitter Diversity, Channel
known at Transmitter, Channel unknown at Transmitter, The Alamouti Scheme.
UNIT IV
MULTICARRIER MODULATION
10
Data Transmission using Multiple Carriers, Multicarrier Modulation with Overlapping Sub channels,
Mitigation of Subcarrier Fading, Space-time Multiplexing, Peak to Average Power Ratio- Frequency
and Timing offset, Case study IEEE 802.11a.
UNIT V
SPREAD SPECTRUM
9
Spread Spectrum Principles, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum, Spreading Codes, Synchronization,
RAKE receivers, Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum, Multiuser DSSS Systems, Multi user FHSS
Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
2. T.S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communicationsμ Principles and Practices”, 2nd Edition,
3. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, 1st Edition,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. Andreas F. Molisch, “Wireless Communications”, 2nd Edition, Wiley - IEEE, 2011.
14
CSC22
WIRELESS NETWORKS
(Common to CC & CS)
L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To Study about Wireless transmission basics and Protocols
 To know about Wireless LAN and ATM
 To Understand the Mobile Application Architecture, Messaging and security
 To understand the concepts of 4G technologies
UNIT I
WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS
9
Introduction to wireless LANs - IEEE 802.11 WLANs - Physical Layer- MAC sublayer - MAC
Management Sublayer- Wireless ATM - HIPERLAN- HIPERLAN-2, WiMax
UNIT II
3G OVERVIEW AND 2.5G EVOLUTION
9
Migration path to UMTS, UMTS Basics, Air Interface, 3GPP Network Architecture, CDMA2000
overview- Radio and Network components, Network structure, Radio network, TD-CDMA, TDSCDMA.
UNIT III
ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS
9
Characteristics of MANETs, Table-driven and Source-initiated On Demand routing protocols, Hybrid
protocols, Wireless Sensor networks- Classification, MAC and Routing protocols.
UNIT IV
INTERWORKING BETWEEN WLANS AND 3G WWANS
9
Interworking objectives and requirements, Schemes to connect WLANs and 3G Networks, Session
Mobility, Interworking Architectures for WLAN and GPRS, System Description, Local Multipoint
Distribution Service, Multichannel Multipoint Distribution system.
UNIT V
4G AND BEYOND
9
4G features and challenges, Technology path, IMS Architecture, Convergent Devices, 4G
technologies, Advanced Broadband Wireless Access and Services, Multimedia, MVNO.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Vijay. K. Garg, “Wireless Communication and Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers, http://books.elsevier.com/9780123735805. 2007.
2. Kaveth Pahlavan, K.Prashanth Krishnamuorthy, "Principles of Wireless networks", Prentice
Hall of India, 2006.
3. Clint Smith. P.E., and Daniel Collins, “3G Wireless Networks”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2007.
15
CSC23
MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES
LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the image fundamentals and mathematical transforms necessary for image
processing.
 To study the image enhancement techniques
 To study image restoration procedures.
 To study the image compression procedures.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Special features of Multimedia, Graphics and Image Data Representations, Fundamental Concepts in
Video and Digital Audio, Storage requirements for multimedia applications, Need for Compression,
Taxonomy of compression techniques, Overview of source coding, source models, scalar and vector
quantization theory, Evaluation techniques, Error analysis and methodologies.
UNIT II
TEXT COMPRESSION
9
Compression techniques, Huffman coding, Adaptive Huffman Coding, Arithmetic coding, ShannonFano coding, Dictionary techniques, LZW family algorithms
UNIT III
AUDIO COMPRESSION
9
Audio compression techniques - µ- Law and A- Law companding, Frequency domain and filtering,
Basic sub-band coding, Application to speech coding, G.722, Application to audio coding, MPEG
audio, progressive encoding for audio, silence compression, speech compression techniques , Formant
and CELP Vocoders.
UNIT IV
IMAGE COMPRESSION
9
Predictive techniques, DM, PCM, and DPCM: Optimal Predictors and Optimal Quantization, Contour
based compression, Transform Coding, JPEG Standard, Sub-band coding algorithms: Design of Filter
banks, Wavelet based compression: Implementation using filters, EZW, SPIHT coders, JPEG 2000
standards, JBIG, JBIG2 standards.
UNIT V
VIDEO COMPRESSION
9
Video compression techniques and standards, MPEG Video Coding I: MPEG - 1 and 2, MPEG Video
Coding II: MPEG – 4 and 7, Motion estimation and compensation techniques, H.261 Standard, DVI
technology, PLV performance, DVI real time compression, Packet Video.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Khalid Sayood, “Introduction to Data Compression”, Morgan Kauffman Harcourt India, 2 nd
Edition, 2000.
2. David Salomon, “Data Compression – The Complete Reference”, Springer Verlag New York
Inc., 2nd Edition, 2007.
3. Mark S.Drew, Ze-Nian Li, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, PHI, 1st Edition, 2003.
4. John F. Buford, “Multimedia Systems”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
16
CSC24
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM LABORATORY -II
L T P C
0 0 4 2
1. Simulation of Audio and speech compression algorithms
2. Simulation of EZW / SPIHT Image coding algorithm
3. Simulation of Microstrip Antennas
4. S-parameter estimation of Microwave devices
5. Study of Global Positioning System
6. Performance evaluation of simulated CDMA System
7. Design and testing of a Microstrip coupler
8. Characteristics of /4 and /2 transmission lines
9. Antenna Radiation Pattern measurement
10. Design of Digital Receiver in AWGN and Fading channels
17
CSE2A
ADVANCED RADIATION SYSTEMS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the concepts of radiation from a current element.
 To study Antenna arrays.
 To study various antenna synthesis methods.
 To study horn , microstrip , reflector antennas and various types of antennas.
UNIT I
ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS
9
Antenna fundamental parameters, Radiation integrals, Radiation from surface and line current
distributions, dipole, monopole, loop antenna; Mobile phone antenna, base station, hand set antenna;
Image, Induction, reciprocity theorem, Broadband antennas and matching techniques, Balance to
unbalance transformer, Introduction to numerical techniques
UNIT II
RADIATION FROM APERTURES
9
Field equivalence principle, Radiation from Rectangular and Circular apertures, Uniform aperture
distribution on an infinite ground plane; Slot antenna; Horn antenna; Reflector antenna, aperture
blockage, and design consideration.
UNIT III
ARRAY ANTENNA
9
Linear array, uniform array, end fire and broad side array, gain, beam width, side lobe level; Two
dimensional uniform array; Phased array, beam scanning, grating lobe, feed network, Linear array
synthesis techniques , Binomial and Chebyshev distributions.
UNIT IV
MICRO STRIP ANTENNA
9
Radiation Mechanism from patch; Excitation techniques; Microstrip dipole; Rectangular patch,
Circular patch, and Ring antenna , radiation analysis from cavity model; input impedance of
rectangular and circular patch antenna; Microstrip array and feed network; Application of microstrip
array antenna.
UNIT V
EMI/EMC AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS
9
Concept of EMI/EMC; Rx and Tx antenna factors; Log periodic dipole, Biconical, Ridge guide, Multi
turn loop; Antenna measurement and instrumentation , Gain, Impedance and antenna factor
measurement; Antenna test range Design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Constantine A. Balanis, “Antenna Theoryμ Analysis and Design”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-Inter
science, 2005.
2. Krauss.J.D, “Antennas”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.
3. Robert S. Elliott, “Antenna Theory and Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
4. W.L. Stutzman and G.A.Thiele, “Antenna Theory and Design”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley &
Sons Inc., 1998.
18
CSE2B
DSP ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING
LTPC
30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study DSP system design & CMOS technologies, DFT & FFT computation.
 To study the digital filters and finite word length.
 To introduce the architecture of synthesis of DSP.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMABLE DSP
9
Basic Architectural features-DSP computation building blocks-Bus architecture-Data Addressing
Capabilities-Address generation unit-Speed issues-Features for external interfacing-Basic DSP
algorithms-Q Notation-FIR filters-Interpolation Filters-Decimation Filters-Adaptive filters-2D Signal
Processing.
UNIT II
TMS 320C6474 MULTICORE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR
9
Functional Block Diagram-Device overview-Device configuration-System interconnect-C64x+ mega
module-Peripherals-Mapping an Application to a Multicore Processor-Interprocess CommunicationData transfer Engines-DSP code and Data images-Memory Management-Simple Programs using
TMS 320C6474.
9
UNIT III
OMAP FAMILY DSP PROCESSORS
OMAP 35x Family Introduction-Memory mapping-MPU subsystem-Power and clock management Interprocessor communication-DMA-Interrupt Controller-Memory subsystem-Timers-Display
subsystem—Serial interfaces like UART, USB, Multichannel buffered serial port-MMC/SD Card
interface-Simple programs using OMAP 3530.
UNIT IV
SHARC PROCESSOR
9
ADSP 21363 Family core architecture: Independent parallel computation unit, Data register file,
Instruction cache, Data address generators-Memory and I/O interface features: On chip memory,
DMA controller, serial ports, Digital audio interface, Parallel port, PWM, Timers, Development tools.
UNIT V
BLACKFIN PROCESSOR
9
ADSP-BF534 Processor block diagram-Memory architecture-DMA support-System interruptsExternal bus interface-Ethernet MAC-CAN module-SPORT controller-Timers-RTC Simple
programs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. “Multicore Programming Guide-Application Report”, Texas Instruments, 2012.
2. “TMS320C6474 Multicore Digital Signal Processor-Technical Reference”, Revised Edition,
Texas Instruments, 2011.
3. “OMAP35x Applications Processor-Technical Reference”, Revised Edition, Texas
Instruments, 2012.
4. “ADSP-21363 SHARC Processor-Hardware Reference”, 2004.
5. “ADSP-BF534 Blackfin Processor-Hardware Reference”, Revision 2.0, 2005.
6. Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, “Digital Signal Processing Implementations”, 1st Edition,
Thomson Publications, 2004.
19
CSE2C
OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING
LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
networks.
UNIT I
FIBER OPTIC WAVE GUIDES
9
Light wave generation systems, system components, optical fibers, SI, GI, fibers, modes, Dispersion
in fibers, limitations due to dispersion, Fiber loss, non linear effects. Dispersion shifted and
Dispersion flattened fibers.
UNIT II
OPTICAL TRANSCEIVER
9
Basic concepts, LED’s structure, spectral distribution, semiconductor lasers, gain coefficients, modes,
SLM and STM operation, Transmitter design, Receiver PIN and APD diodes design, noise sensitivity
and degradation, Receiver amplifier design, Basic concepts of Semiconductor Optical amplifiers and
EDFA operation.
UNIT III
LIGHT WAVE SYSTEM
9
Coherent, homodyne and heterodyne keying formats, BER in synchronous and asynchronous
receivers, Multichannel, WDM, multiple access networks, WDM components, TDM, Subcarrier and
Code division multiplexing.
UNIT IV
DISPERSION COMPENSATION
9
Limitations, Post- and Pre- compensation techniques, Equalizing filters, fiber based gratings,
Broadband compensation, Soliton communication system, fiber Soliton, Soliton based communication
system design, High capacity and WDM Soliton system.
UNIT V
PRINCIPLES OF OPTICAL NETWORKS
9
First and second generation optical networks: system network evaluation. SONET / SDH, MAN
layered architecture broadcast and select networks MAC protocols, test beds, wavelength routing
networks.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. G.P. Agarwal, “ Fiber optic communication systems”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
New York, 2008.
2. G. Keiser, “ Optical fiber communications”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Rajiv Ramaswami, Kumar Sivarajan and Galen Sasaki, “Optical Networks: A
Practical Perspective”, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2009.
4. Harold Kolimbiris, “Fiber Optic Communication”, 1st Edition (Reprint), Pearson Education,
2004.
20
CSE2D
ADHOC NETWORKS
LT PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the MAC address spoofing concepts and basics of networks
UNIT I
ADHOC MAC
9
Introduction – Issues in Adhoc Wireless Networks - MAC Protocols – Issues - Classifications of
MAC protocols - Multi channel MAC and Power control MAC protocol.
UNIT II
9
Classifications, Tree based, Mesh based. Adhoc Transport Layer Issues. TCP Over Adhoc –Feedback
UNIT III
WSN - MAC
9
Introduction – Sensor Network Architecture - Data dissemination - Data Gathering. MAC Protocols –
UNIT IV
9
UNIT V
MESH NETWORKS
9
Necessity for Mesh Networks – MAC enhancements – IEEE 802.11’s Architecture –Opportunistic
routing – Self configuration and Auto configuration – Capacity Models –Fairness - Heterogeneous
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. C.Siva Ram Murthy, B.S. Manoj, “Adhoc Wireless Networksμ Architectures and Protocols”,
1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
Publishers, 2004.
Publishers, 2007.
Education, 2009.
6. Azzedine Boukerche, “Handbook of algorithms for wireless Networking and Mobile
Computing”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2006.
21
CSE2E
WAVELETS AND MULTIRESOLUTION ANALYSIS
(Common to M.E CS and M.E CSE)
LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the mathematical background for the wavelets.
 To study the Multiresolution Analysis.
 To study the Continuous and Discrete wavelet transforms.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Vector Spaces, properties, dot product, basis, dimension, orthogonality and orthonormality,
relationship between vectors and signals, Signal spaces, concept of Convergence, Hilbert spaces
for energy signals, Generalized Fourier Expansion.
UNIT II
CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORMS
9
Wavelet Transform, definition and properties, concept of scale and its relation with frequency,
Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT), Scaling function and wavelet functions (Daubechies,
Coiflet, Mexican Hat, Sinc, Gaussian, Bi-Orthogonal), Tiling of time scale plane for CWT.
UNIT III
MULTI RESOLUTION ANALYSIS
9
Definition of Multi Resolution Analysis (MRA), Haar basis, Construction of general ortho normal
MRA, Wavelet basis for MRA, Continuous time MRA interpretation for the DTWT, Discrete time
MRA, Basis functions for the DTWT, PRQMF filter banks.
UNIT IV
DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORMS
9
Filter Bank and sub band coding principles, Wavelet Filters, Inverse DWT computation by Filter
banks, Basic Properties of Filter coefficients, Choice of wavelet function coefficients, Derivations of
Daubechies Wavelets, Mallat's algorithm for DWT, Multiband Wavelet transforms.
Lifting Scheme: Wavelet Transform using Polyphase matrix Factorization, Geometrical foundations of
lifting scheme, Lifting scheme in Z –domain.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Signal Compression, Image Compression techniques: EZW-SPHIT Coding, Image denoising
techniques: Noise estimation, Shrinkage rules, Shrinkage Functions, Edge detection and object
Isolation, Image Fusion, and Object Detection. Curve and Surface Editing, Variational modeling and
finite element method using wavelets.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Rao .R.M and A.S.Bopardikar, “Wavelet Transformsμ Introduction to theory and
Applications”, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
2. K.P.Soman and K.I.Ramachandran, “Insight into Wavelets – From Theory to practice”, 3rd
Edition, Prentice- Hall, 2004.
3. Mallat.S, “A wavelet tour of Signal Processing”, Elsevier publications, 3rd edition, Academic
Press, 2008.
4. Jaideva.C.Goswami, Andrew.K.Chan, “Fundamentals of Wavelets theory, algorithms and
applications”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley &Sons, 2011.
5. Weeks Michael, “Digital Signal Processing Using MATLAB and Wavelets”, Firewall Media,
2011.
22
CSE2F
SOFT COMPUTING
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
UNIT I
9
Intelligence – Derivative based optimizationμ Descent Methods, Newton’s method- Step size
determination- Derivative free optimization.
UNIT II
FUZZY SYSTEMS
9
UNIT III
9
Machine Learning Using Neural Network, Adaptive Networks – Feed forward Networks –Supervised
UNIT IV
9
Applications.
UNIT V
GENETIC ALGORITHMS
9
Classification of GA : Simple GA, Parallel and Distributed GA, Adaptive GA –Ant Colony
Optimization – Particle Swarm Optimization – Application of GA : Machine Learning, Image
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing”,
1st Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
2. S.N.Sivanandam, S.N.Deepa, “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, 1st Edition, Springer,
2007.
3. S. N. Sivanandam, S. N. Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition,
2007.
4. Agoston E. Eiben, J.E. Smith, “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing”, 1st Edition,
Springer, 2008.
5. S. N. Sivanandam, S. Sumathi and S. N. Deepa, “Introduction to Fuzzy Logic using
MATLAB”, 1st Edition, Springer, 2007.
6. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications, and
23
CSE2G
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION RECEIVERS
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To review the digital communication techniques for the optimum receiver design for
AWGN channels and Fading channels
 To study the synchronization techniques and adaptive equalization techniques in the
receiver design
UNIT I
DEMODULATION
9
Gaussian basics, Hypothesis testing basics, Signal space concepts - Geometrical representation of
signals, Receiver structure and sufficient statistics, Decision region, Optimal reception in AWGN,
Performance analysis of ML reception, Link budget analysis.
UNIT II
SYNCHRONIZATION
9
Receiver design requirements, Parameter estimation basics, Parameter estimation for synchronization,
Carrier phase estimation, Symbol timing estimation, Joint carrier phase and symbol timing estimation.
UNIT III
PARAMETER SYNCHRONIZATION FOR FADING CHANNELS
9
Data aided and non data aided flat fading channel estimation and detection, Data aided and non data
aided selective fading channel estimation and detection
UNIT IV
RECEIVER STRUCTURE FOR FADING CHANNELS
9
Outer and inner receiver for fading channels, Inner receiver for frequency selective and flat fading
channels, Rake receivers, Non-coherent communication – Hypothesis testing, Optimal demodulation,
Differential modulation and demodulation, Performance.
UNIT V
CHANNEL EQUALIZATION
9
The channel model, Receiver front end, Eye Diagrams, Maximum likelihood sequence estimation,
Geometrical model for suboptimal equalizer design, Linear equalization, Decision feedback
equalization, Performance analysis of MLSE, Adaptive equalization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Upamanyu Madhow, “Fundamentals of Digital Communication”, Cambridge University
press, 2008.
2. Heinrich Meyer, Mare Moeneclacy, Stefan.A.Fechtel, “Digital communication
Receivers”, Vol I & Vol II, John Wiley, New York, 1λλ7.
4. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge university press, 2005.
5. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communications – Principles and practice”, 2nd Edition,
24
CSE2H ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND COMPATIBILITY TECHNIQUES
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the EMI Environment and its coupling principles.
 To study the EMI / EMC standards and measurements for the test procedures.
 To design the PCBs with EMC compliance.
UNIT I
EMI/EMC CONCEPTS
9
EMI-EMC definitions and Units of parameters, Sources and victim of EMI, Conducted and Radiated
EMI Emission and Susceptibility, Transient EMI, ESD, Radiation Hazards.
UNIT II
EMI COUPLING PRINCIPLES
9
Conducted, radiated and transient coupling, Common ground impedance coupling, Common mode
and ground loop coupling, Differential mode coupling, near field cable to cable coupling, cross talk,
Field to cable coupling, Power mains and Power supply coupling.
UNIT III
EMI CONTROL TECHNIQUES
9
Shielding, Filtering, Grounding, Bonding, Isolation transformer, Transient suppressors, Cable routing,
Signal control.
UNIT IV
EMC DESIGN OF PCBS
9
Component selection and mounting, PCB trace impedance, Routing, Cross talk control, Power
distribution decoupling, Zoning, Grounding, VIAs connection, Terminations.
UNIT V
EMI MEASUREMENTS
9
Open area test site, TEM cell, EMI test shielded chamber and shielded ferrite lined anechoic
chamber, Tx /Rx Antennas, Sensors, Injectors / Couplers, and coupling factors, EMI Rx and spectrum
analyzer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. V.P.Kodali, “Engineering EMC Principles, Measurements and Technologies”, IEEE Press,
Newyork, 1996.
2. Clayton R. Paul, “Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility”, 2nd Edition, Wiley Series
in Microwave and Optical Engineering, 2006.
3. Ralph Morrison, “Grounding and Shieldingμ Circuits and Interference”, 5th Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, 2007.
4. Christos Christopoulos, “Principles and Techniques of Electromagnetic Compatibility”,
Electronic Engineering Systems, Second Edition, CRC Press, 2010.
5. Xingcun Colin Tong, “Advanced Materials and Design for Electromagnetic Interference
Shielding”, 1st Edition, CRC Press, 2008.
25
CSE2J
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEMS
LT PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the History of GPS and its various segments.
 To Study the co-ordinate system for the GPS systems.
 To study the navigational aids and signal processing for GPS systems.
 To Study the propagation media for the GPS.
 To learn the Inter disciplinary applications for GPS.
UNIT I
HISTORY OF GPS
9
History of GPS, BC-4 System, HIRAN, NNSS, NAVSTAR GLONASS and GNSS Systems, GPS
Constellation, Space Segment, Control Segment, User Segment, Single and Dual Frequency, Point
Relative, Differential GPS, Static and Kinematic Positioning, 2D and 3D, reporting Anti Spoofing
(AS); Selective Availability (SA), DOP Factors.
UNIT II
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
9
Coordinate Systems, Geo Centric Coordinate System, Conventional Terrestrial Reference System,
Orbit Description, Keplerian Orbit, Kepler Elements, Satellite Visibility, Topocentric Motion,
Disturbed Satellite Motion, Perturbed Motion, Disturbing Accelerations, Perturbed Orbit, Time
Systems, Astronomical Time System, Atomic Time, GPS Time, Need for Coordination, Link to Earth
Rotation, Time and Earth Motion Services.
UNIT III
C/A CODE
9
C/A code; P-code; Y-code; L1, L2 Carrier frequencies, Code Pseudo Ranges, Carrier Phases, Pseudo
Ranges, Satellite Signal Signature, Navigation Messages and Formats, Undifferenced and Differenced
Range Models, Delta Ranges, Signal Processing and Processing Techniques, Tracking Networks,
Ephemerides, Data Combination: Narrow Lane; Wide Lane, OTF Ambiguity.
UNIT IV
PROPAGATION MEDIA
9
Propagation Media, Multipath, Antenna Phase Centre, Atmosphere in brief, Elements of Wave
Propagation, Ionospheric Effects on GPS Observations, Code Delay, Phase Advances, Integer Bias,
Clock Error, Cycle Slip, Noise, Bias, Blunders, Tropospheric Effects on GPS Observables, Multipath
Effect, Antenna Phase Centre Problems and Correction.
UNIT V
INTER DISCIPLINARY APPLICATIONS
9
Inter Disciplinary Applications, Crystal Dynamics, Gravity Field Mapping, Atmospheric Occulation,
Surveying, Geophysics, Air borne GPS, Ground Transportation, Space borne GPS Metrological and
Climate Research using GPS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. B.Hoffman - Wellenhof, H.Lichtenegger and J.Collins, “GPSμ Theory and Practice”, 5th
revised Edition, Springer, Wein, New york, 2001.
2. A.Leick, “GPS Satellites Surveying”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, NewYork, 2003.
3. James Ba – Yen Tsui, “Fundamentals of GPS receivers – A software approach”, 2nd
Edition, John Wiley & Son, 2005.
4. http://www.auslig.gov.au.
5. http://igscb.jpl.nasa.gov
26
CSE2K
SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the fundamental mechanics of speech production and the nature of the speech
signals.
 To study the time domain and frequency domain methods for speech processing.
 To study the Predictive analysis of speech an the algorithm for estimation and detection.
UNIT I
MECHANICS OF SPEECH
8
Speech production mechanism, Nature of Speech signal, Discrete time modeling of Speech
production, Representation of Speech signals, Classification of Speech sounds, Phones, Phonemes,
Phonetic and Phonemic alphabets, Articulatory features. Music production, auditory perception,
Anatomical pathways from the ear to the perception of sound, peripheral auditory system, Psycho
acoustics.
UNIT II
TIME DOMAIN METHODS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING
8
Time domain parameters of Speech signal, Methods for extracting the parameters Energy, Average
Magnitude, Zero crossing Rate, Silence Discrimination using ZCR and energy, Short Time Auto
Correlation Function, Pitch period estimation using Auto Correlation Function.
UNIT III
FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHOD FOR SPEECH PROCESSING
9
Short Time Fourier analysis, Filter bank analysis, Formant extraction, Pitch Extraction Analysis by
Synthesis, Analysis synthesis systems, Phase vocoder, Channel Vocoder. Homomorphic Speech
Analysis: Cepstral analysis of Speech, Formant and Pitch Estimation, Homomorphic Vocoders.
UNIT IV
LINEAR PREDICTIVE ANALYSIS OF SPEECH
10
Formulation of Linear Prediction problem in Time Domain, Basic Principle, Auto correlation method,
Covariance method, Solution of LPC equations, Cholesky method, Durbin’s Recursive algorithm,
lattice formation and solutions, Comparison of different methods, Application of LPC parameters,
Pitch detection using LPC parameters, Formant analysis, VELP, CELP.
UNIT V
APPLICATION OF SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING
10
Algorithms: Spectral Estimation, dynamic time warping, hidden Markov model, Music analysis, Pitch
Detection, Feature analysis for recognition, Automatic Speech Recognition, Feature Extraction for
ASR, Deterministic sequence recognition, Statistical Sequence recognition, ASR systems, Speaker
identification and verification, Voice response system, Speech Synthesis: Text to speech, voice over
IP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, “Speech and Audio Signal Processing”, 2nd Edition,
John Wiley and Sons Inc., Singapore, 2004.
2. Quatieri, “Discrete-time Speech Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2008.
3. Lawrence Rabiner and Ronald Schafer, “Theory and Applications of Digital Speech
Processing”, Pearson Education, 2010.
4. Nejat Ince, “Digital Speech Processing-Speech Coding, Synthesis and Recognition”, The
Springer International Series in Engineering and Computer Science, 2010.
27
CSE2L ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the architecture and programming of various 16 bit microprocessors and
microcontrollers.
 To introduce the concepts and architecture of RISC processor and ARM processors.
 To study Motorola 68HC11 Microcontrollers and PIC Micro Controller architecture and
programming
UNIT I
MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE
9
ISA Architecture –Application specific ISA Models: Finite State machine Models, Data path Models,
Java Virtual machine Models-General purpose ISA Models: CISC Model, RISC Model-Instruction
level parallelism ISA Models: Single instruction Multiple data model (SIMD), Superscalar machine
Models, Very long instruction word model – Processor Internals: CPU, ALU, Registers, Memory, I/O
mechanism diagram – RISC versus CISC Characteristics of Embedded Processor.
UNIT II
HIGH PERFORMANCE RISC ARCHITECTURE – ARM
9
memory address translation, TLB, Domains and memory access permission, cache and write buffer,
single stage and two stage cache accessing, significance of coprocessor 15 Fast Context Switch
Extension - ARM instruction set-addressing modes – Programming.
UNIT III
MOTOROLA 68HC11 MICROCONTROLLERS
9
Organization of CPU- Architecture -Block diagram -Instruction set -addressing modes operating
modes-I/O Ports-Registers structures- Interrupt system- RTC-Serial Communication Interface – A/D
Converter- PWM and UART.
UNIT IV
MSP430 MICRO CONTROLLERS
9
MSP430 RISC CPU architecture, Compiler-friendly features, Instruction set, Clock system, Memory
subsystem. Key differentiating factors between different MSP430 families. Digital I/O - I/O ports
programming using C and assembly, Understanding the multiplexing scheme of the MSP430 pins.
UNIT V
MSP430 ON CHIP PERIPHERALS AND INTERFACING
9
On-chip peripherals. Watchdog Timer, Comparator, Op-Amp, Basic Timer, Real Time Clock (RTC),
ADC, DAC, SD16, LCD, DMA. Using the Low-power features of MSP430. Clock system; lowpower modes, Clock request feature, Low-power programming and Interrupt. Interfacing LED, LCD,
External memory. Seven segment LED modules interfacing. Example - Real-time clock.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, 2nd Edition, Newnes, 2012.
2. Steve Furber, “ARM System –On –Chip architecture”, 2nd Edition, Addision Wesley, 2000.
3. Gene. H. Miller, “Micro Computer Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
4. Tim Wilmshurst, “Designing Embedded Systems with PIC Microcontrollers: Principles and
Applications”, 2nd Edition, Elsevier, 2009.
5. John Davies, “MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, 1st Edition, Elsevier, 2008.
28
CSE2M
LOW POWER VLSI DESIGN
LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn principles of design, analysis, modeling and optimization of Low Power VLSI.
 To study the approaches for power consumption estimation and different methods to
reduce the power consumption, low power architectures and algorithmic level analysis for
low power optimization.
UNIT I
POWER DISSIPATION IN CMOS
9
Hierarchy of limits of power, Sources of power consumption, Physics of power dissipation in CMOS
FET devices, Basic principle of low power design.
UNIT II
POWER OPTIMIZATION
9
Logic level power optimization, Circuit level low power design, circuit techniques for reducing power
consumption in adders and multipliers.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF LOW POWER CMOS CIRCUITS
9
Computer arithmetic techniques for low power system, reducing power consumption in memories,
low power clock, Inter connect and layout design, advanced techniques, Special techniques.
UNIT IV
POWER ESTIMATION
9
Power Estimation technique, logic power estimation, Simulation power analysis, Probabilistic power
analysis.
UNIT V
SYNTHESIS AND SOFTWARE DESIGN FOR LOW POWER
Synthesis for low power, Behavioral level transforms, software design for low power.
9
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Dimitrios Soudris, Chirstian Pignet, Costas Goutis, “Designing CMOS Circuits for Low
Power”, 1st Edition (Reprint) Springer, 2010.
2. J.B.Kuo and J.H Lou, “Low voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits”, 1st Edition, Wiley, 1999.
3. A.P.Chandrasekaran and R.W.Broadersen, “Low power digital CMOS design”, 1st Edition,
Wiley, 1998.
4. James B.Kulo, Shih-Chia Lin, “Low voltage SOI CMOS VLSI devices and Circuits”, John
Wiley and sons, inc., 2001.
5. Kaushik Roy, Sharat Prasad, Jean Claude Ed Roy, “Low- power CMOS VLSI Circuit
Design”, Wiley- Interscience, 2000.
6. Alice Wang, Benton Highsmith Calhoun and Anantha P. Chandrakasan, “Sub-threshold
Design for Ultra Low-Power Systems (Integrated Circuits and Systems)”, 1st Edition
(Reprint), Springer, 2010.
29
CSE2N
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the orbital mechanics and space craft sub systems and earth station.
 To study space links for the satellite link design.
 To study the various multiple access techniques and network aspects for Space services and
applications.
UNIT I
ELEMENTS OF SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
8
Satellite Systems, Orbital description and Orbital mechanics of LEO, MEO and GSO, Placement of a
Satellite in a GSO, Satellite – description of different Communication subsystems, Bandwidth
allocation.
UNIT II
TRANSMISSION, MULTIPLEXING, MODULATION, MULTIPLE
ACCESS AND CODING
12
Different modulation, coding and Multiplexing Schemes, Multiple Access Techniques – FDMA,
TDMA, CDMA, and DAMA.
UNIT III
SATELLITE LINK DESIGN
9
Basic link analysis, Interference analysis, Rain induced attenuation and interference, Ionospheric
characteristics, Link Design with and without frequency reuse.
UNIT IV
SATELLITE NAVIGATION AND GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
8
Radio and Satellite Navigation, GPS Principles, GPS Receivers and Codes, Satellite Signal
Acquisition, GPS Receiver Operation and Differential GPS
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
8
Satellite Packet Communications, Intelsat series – INSAT series –VSAT, mobile satellite services,
INMARSAT, Satellite and Cable Television, DBS (DTH), VSAT, Satellite Phones.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Wilbur L. Pritchard, H.G. Suyderhoud ,Robert A.Nelson, “Satellite Communication
Systems Engineering”, 2nd Edition (Reprint), Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2008.
2. D.Roddy, “Satellite Communication”, 4th Edition (Reprint), McGraw Hill, 2009.
3. Tri T Ha, “Digital Satellite Communication”, 2nd Edition, McGrawHill, 2009.
4. Timothy Pratt and Charles W.Bostain, “Satellite Communications”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley
and Sons, 2003.
30
CSE2P
MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the Microstrip lines and its field analysis.
 To Study the waveguide systems using the equivalent circuit theory concepts.
 To study the design and analysis of microwave solid state amplifiers
 To learn integrated antennas and measurement techniques
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
7
MMIC- technology, advantages and applications, Active device technologies, design approaches,
multichip module technology, substrates.
UNIT II
PASSIVE COMPONENTS
10
Inductors, capacitors, resistors, microstrip components, coplanar circuits, multilayer techniques, micro
machined passive components, switches & attenuators, filter design.
UNIT III
AMPLIFIERS
Stability & gain analysis, matching techniques, reactively matched amplifier design, LNA
10
UNIT IV
OSCILLATORS
9
Design principles, active device CAD techniques for large signal oscillators design, phase noise,
MMIC VCO, mixers.
UNIT V
INTEGRATED ANTENNAS AND MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES
9
Integrated antenna selection, photonic band gap antennas, micro machined antenna, micro electro
mechanical system antennas, test fixture measurements, probe station measurements, thermal and
cryogenic measurements, experimental field probing techniques.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Ravender Goyal, “Monolithic MIC; Technology and Design”, Artech House, 1λ8λ.
2. Arjuna Marzuki, Ahmad Ismat Bin Abdul Rahim and Mourad Loulou, “Advances in
Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuits: Modeling and Design Technologies”, 1st Edition,
IGI Global, 2011.
3. David M. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, 4th Edition, Wiley, 2011.
4. Annapurna Das and Sisir K. Das, “Microwave Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.Co.Ltd.,
2010.
31
CSE2Q
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
processing.
 To study the image enhancement and restoration techniques.
 To study the image segmentation and recognition techniques.
UNIT I
DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS
9
hue, saturation, Mach Band effect, Image sampling, Quantization, Dither, Two dimensional
mathematical preliminaries, Basic Principles of Tomography, Tomography, Projection, Image
Reconstruction, Radon Transform, Central Slice Theorem.
UNIT II
IMAGE TRANSFORMS
9
1D DFT, 2D transforms - DFT, DCT, Discrete Sine, Walsh, Hadamard, Slant, Haar, KLT, SVD,
Wavelet transform.
UNIT III
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT AND RESTORATION
9
Histogram modification, Noise distributions, Spatial averaging, Directional Smoothing, Median,
Geometric mean, Harmonic mean, Contra harmonic and Yp mean filters, Design of 2D FIR filters,
Image restoration - degradation model, Unconstrained and Constrained restoration, Inverse filteringremoval of blur caused by uniform linear motion, Wiener filtering, Geometric transformations, spatial
transformations, Gray Level interpolation.
UNIT IV
IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND RECOGNITION
9
Image segmentation , Edge detection, Edge linking and boundary detection, Region growing, Region
splitting and Merging, Image Recognition , Patterns and pattern classes, Matching by minimum
distance classifier, Matching by correlation, Neural networks, Back propagation network and training,
Neural network to recognize shapes.
UNIT V
IMAGE REGISTRATION AND VISUALIZATION
9
Notation and terminology in Image Registration, Classification of Image Registration techniques,
Types of Transformation, Non Rigid Registration - Registration Using Basis Functions -Registration
Using Splines -Thin-Plate Splines – B-Splines -Elastic Registration - Fluid Registration - Role of
Registration in Clinical Applications and Remote Sensing - Image Registration in Nuclear Medicine .
Image visualization - Rigid body visualization - 2D display methods, 3D display methods, Virtual
Reality based interactive visualization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Addison Wesley, 3rd
Edition, 2007.
2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
3. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley, New York, 2007.
4. A.Ardeshir Goshtasby, “2-D and 3-D Image Registration for Medical- Remote Sensing-and
Industrial Applications”, Wiley Interscience Publication, 2005.
32
CSE3A
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
UNIT I
9
system development-embedded system IDE- ARM Family-Core Types,-Memory Mapping-and ARM
UNIT II
ARM ARCHITECTURE
9
memory address translation, TLB, Domains and memory access permission ,cache and write buffer,
Extension.
UNIT III
9
UNIT IV
9
UNIT V
ARM COMMUNICATION INTERFACING AND DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
9
I2S voice bus interface communication. Basic Embedded system Development Tools-Embest
JTAG emulator
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
6. Embedded System Development and Labs for ARM, (Edited, revised and updated by Radu
Muresan).
33
CSE3B
PATTERN RECOGNITION
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the different approaches for pattern recognition.
 To study various mathematical models in pattern recognition.
 To study the non parametric and clustering techniques.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Introduction: Basics of pattern recognition – Design principles of pattern recognition system –
Learning and adaptation – Pattern recognition approaches. Mathematical foundations: Linear algebra
– Probability theory – Expectation – Mean and Covariance – Normal distribution – Multivariate
normal densities – Chi square test of hypothesis.
UNIT II
STATISTICAL PATTERN RECOGNITION
7
Statistical Patten Recognition: Bayesian Decision Theory – Classifiers – Normal density and
discriminant functions.
UNIT III
MODELS
10
Parameter estimation methods: Maximum– Likelihood estimation – Bayesian Parameter estimation –
Dimension reduction methods – Principal Component Analysis (PCA) – Fisher Linear discriminant
analysis – Expectation – maximization (EM) – Hidden Markov Models (HMM) – Gaussian mixture
models.
UNIT IV
NON PARAMETRIC TECHNIQUES
Nonparametric Techniques: Density Estimation – Parzen Windows –
Estimation – Nearest Neighbor Rule – Fuzzy classification.
10
K-Nearest Neighbor
UNIT V
CLUSTERING TECHNIQUES
10
Unsupervised Learning and Clustering: Criterion functions for clustering – Clustering Techniques:
Iterative square – Error partitional clustering – K means – agglomerative hierarchical clustering –
Cluster validation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Richard O. Duda, Peter E. Hart and David G. Stork, “Pattern Classification”, 2 nd Edition,
John Wiley, 2006.
2. Bishop, Christopher M., “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, 1st Edition,
Springer, 2009.
3. S. Theodoridis, K. Koutroumbas, “Pattern Recognition”, 4th Edition, Academic Press,
2009.
4. Keinosuke Fukunaga, “Introduction to Statistical Pattern Recognition”, 2nd Edition,
Academic Press, 2003.
5. Sergios Thedoridis, Konstantinos Koutroumbas, “Pattern Recognition”, 4th Edition,
Academic Press, 2009.
34
CSE3C
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the fundamentals of evolutionary computations.
 To understand the Genetic Algorithms.
 To study the various hybrid systems.
 To study various Applications on Evolutionary Computations.
9
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION
9
operators.
9
9
optimization.
UNIT V PARAMETER SETTING AND APPLICATIONS
9
L =45 Total = 45 Periods
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Backetal., “Handbook on evolutionary computation”, Institute of Physics,
Publishing, 2000.
2. Xin Yao, “Evolutionary Computationsμ Theory and Applications”, World Scientific 3λ
Publishing, 1999.
3. Goldberg, “Genetic algorithm in search, optimization and machine learning”, Addison
Wesley, 1998.
4. Davis, “Hand book on Genetic Algorithms”, NewYork, 1λλ1.
5. Kenneth A. De Jong, “Evolutionary Computationμ A Unified Approach”, MIT Press, 2006.
35
CSE3D
MOBILE COMPUTING
LTPC
30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the fundamentals of wireless communication.
 To understand the telecommunication systems.
 To study the different network layers.
 To study various protocols and their uses.
UNIT I
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FUNDAMENTALS
9
Introduction – Wireless transmission – Frequencies for radio transmission – Signals – Antennas –
Signal Propagation – Multiplexing – Modulations – Spread spectrum – Medium Access Control–
Space Division Multiple Access – Frequency Division Multiple Access – Time Division Multiple
Access – Code Division Multiple Access – Cellular Wireless Networks.
UNIT II
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
9
GSM – System Architecture – Protocols – Connection Establishment – Frequency Allocation –
Routing – Handover – Security – General packet radio service
UNIT III
WIRELESS NETWORKS
9
Wireless LAN – IEEE 802.11 Standards – Architecture – Services – High Performance Radio LAN –
Adhoc Network – Blue Tooth.
UNIT IV
NETWORK LAYER
9
Mobile IP – Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol – Routing – Destination Sequential Distance
Vector – Dynamic Source Routing – Adhoc On-demand Distance Vector – Zone Routing Protocol –
On-Demand Multicast Routing Protocol
UNIT V
TRANSPORT AND APPLICATION LAYERS
9
TCP over Wireless Networks – Indirect TCP – Snooping TCP – Mobile TCP – Fast Retransmit / Fast
Recovery – Transmission/Timeout Freezing – Selective Retransmission – Transaction Oriented TCP –
Wireless Application Protocol – Wireless Application Protocol Architecture – Wireless Datagram
Protocol – Wireless Transport Layer Security – Wireless Transaction Protocol – Wireless Session
Protocol – Wireless Markup Language – WML Script – Wireless application environment –
Wireless Transaction Application.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
2. William Stallings, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
3. Asoke k Talukder, Hasan Ahmed, Roopa R Yavagal, “Mobile computing”, 2nd Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2010.
4. Kaveh Pahlavan, Prasanth Krishnamoorthy, “Principles of Wireless Networks”, 1st Edition,
5. Uwe Hansmann, Lothar Merk, Martin S. Nicklons and Thomas Stober, “Principles of Mobile
Computing”, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2003.
6. Burkhardt, “Pervasive Computing”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
36
CSE3E
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To discuss about the various key management and authentication techniques in WSN
 To study about the operations of existing well known secure routing protocols in WSN
 To have an idea about the different secured data aggregation mechanisms in WSN
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Communication architecture of WSN – Constraints – security requirements – Threats - evaluation –
attacks; Vulnerabilities of physical layer- jamming, tampering; Vulnerabilities of data link layercollisions, exhaustion, unfairness; Vulnerabilities of network layer - Spoofed, Altered, or Replayed
Acknowledgment Spoofing; Vulnerabilities of transport layer – Flooding, Desynchronization.
UNIT II KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOLS AND BROADCAST AUTHENTICATION 9
Key distribution- classifications: deterministic and probalistic; protocols: LEAP, BROSK,
IOS/DMBS, PIKE, SKEW; Broadcast authenticationμ Tesla, Certificate-Based Authentication
UNIT III
9
SONS, SS-LEACH, INSENS
UNITIV
DATA AGGREGATION, INTRUSION DETECTION AND
AUTOCONFIGURATION
9
Data Aggregation- plain text based secure data aggregation- SIA, SINP, ESPDA, SSDA, WDA;
cipher based secure data aggregation- CDA, HSC, Secure hierarchical data aggregation; Intrusion
Detection: IHOP, SEF, DIDS, Decentralized intrusion detection; Auto Configuration- LEADS,
UNIT V
TRUST MANAGEMENT
9
Trust model- Certificate based- Behavior based, Combinational approach; Trust based routing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
2. Yong Wang et al., “A Survey of security issues in wireless sensor networks” IEEE
Communication Surveys & Tutorials, 2nd Quarter 2006.
3. Mohsen Sharifi et al., “SKEWμ An Efficient Self Key Establishment Protocol for Wireless
Sensor Networks”, IEEE 200λ.
4. Kui Ren et al., “On Broadcast Authentication in Wireless Sensor Networks”, Proc. First
International Conference on Wireless Algorithms, Systems, and Applications, WASA 2006,
Springer Publication.
5. Hani Alzaid et al., “Secure Data Aggregation in Wireless Sensor Networkμ a survey”,
Australasian Information Security Conference (ACSC2008), Wollongong, Australia, January
2008. Australian Computer Society Inc.
37
CSE3F
HIGH SPEED SWITCHING ARCHITECTURES
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 Introduction to Various high speed networks and its standards.
 To study the LAN and ATM switching architecture.
 To study the packet switching architectures and IP switching
UNIT I
LAN SWITCHING TECHNOLOGY
9
Switching Concepts, switch forwarding techniques, switch path control, LAN Switching, cut through
forwarding, store and forward, virtual LANs.
UNIT II
ATM SWITCHING ARCHITECTURE
9
Blocking networks, basic and enhanced banyan networks, sorting networks, merge sorting, rearrangable networks, full and partial connection networks, non blocking networks - Recursive
network construction, comparison of non-blocking network, Switching with deflection routing,
shuffle switch, tandem banyan switch.
UNIT III
QUEUES IN ATM SWITCHES
`
9
Internal Queueing, Input, output and shared queueing, multiple queueing networks, combined Input,
output and shared queueing, performance analysis of Queued switches.
UNIT IV
PACKET SWITCHING ARCHITECTURES
9
Architectures of Internet Switches and Routers, Bufferless and buffered Crossbar switches, Multistage switching, Optical Packet switching, switching fabric on a chip, internally buffered Crossbars.
UNIT V
IP SWITCHING
9
Addressing model, IP Switching types, flow driven and topology driven solutions, IP over ATM
address and next hop resolution, multicasting, IPV6 over ATM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Achille Pattavina, “Switching Theoryμ Architectures and performance in Broadband ATM
networks”, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, New York. 1998.
2. Itamar Elhanany and Mounir Hamdi, “High-performance Packet Switching Architectures”,
Springer Publications, 2011.
3. Rich Seifert and James Edwards, “The All-New Switch Book: The Complete Guide to LAN
Switching Technology”, 2nd Edition (Reprint), John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
4. Christopher Y.Metz , “IP Switchingμ Protocols and architectures”, McGraw Hill, 1λλλ.
38
CSE3G
NEURAL NETWORKS AND ITS APPLICATIONS
(Common to CC & CS)
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about basic neural models and learning algorithms
 To impart knowledge about vector machines and basic function networks
 To learn about EM ALGORITHMS & non linear dynamical systems
 To learn about various neuron models
LTPC
30 0 3
UNIT I
BASIC LEARNING ALGORITHMS
9
Biological Neuron – Artificial Neural Model - Types of activation functions – Architecture:
Feedforward and Feedback – Learning Process: Error Correction Learning –Memory Based
Learning – Hebbian Learning – Competitive Learning- Boltzman Learning – Supervised and
Unsupervised Learning – Learning Tasks: Pattern Space – Weight Space – Pattern Association
– Pattern Recognition – Function Approximation – Control – Filtering - Beamforming – Memory
– Adaptation - Statistical Learning Theory – Single Layer Perceptron – Perceptron Learning
Algorithm – Perceptron Convergence Theorem – Least Mean Square Learning Algorithm –
Multilayer Perceptron – Back Propagation Algorithm – XOR problem – Limitations of Back
Propagation Algorithm.
UNIT II
RADIAL-BASIS FUNCTION NETWORKS AND SUPPORT
VECTOR MACHINES:
9
Radial Basis Function Networks:
Cover’s Theorem on the Separability of Patterns - Exact Interpolator – Regularization Theory –
Generalized Radial Basis Function Networks - Learning in Radial Basis Function Networks Applications: XOR Problem – Image Classification.
Support Vector Machine:
Optimal Hyperplane for Linearly Separable Patterns and Nonseparable Patterns – Support
Vector Machine for Pattern Recognition – XOR Problem - -insensitive Loss Function – Support
Vector Machines for Nonlinear Regression.
UNIT III
COMMITTEE MACHINES:
9
Ensemble Averaging - Boosting – Associative Gaussian Mixture Model – Hierarchical Mixture
of Experts Model(HME) – Model Selection using a Standard Decision Tree – A Priori and
Postpriori Probabilities – Maximum Likelihood Estimation – Learning Strategies for the
HME Model - EM Algorithm – Applications of EM Algorithm to HME Model.
Neurodynamics Systems: Dynamical Systems – Attractors and Stability – Non-linear
Dynamical Systems- Lyapunov Stability – Neurodynamical Systems – The Cohen- Grossberg.
UNIT IV ATTRACTOR NEURAL NETWORKS
10
Associative Learning – Attractor Neural Network Associative Memory – Linear
Associative Memory – Hopfield Network – Content Addressable Memory – Strange
Attractors and Chaos- Error Performance of Hopfield Networks -Applications of Hopfield
Networks – Simulated Annealing – Boltzmann Machine – Bidirectional Associative
Memory – BAM Stability Analysis – Error Correction in BAMs -Memory Annihilation of
Structured Maps in BAMS – Continuous BAMs – Adaptive BAMs Applications.
ADAPTIVE RESONANCE THEORY:
Noise-Saturation Dilemma - Solving Noise-Saturation Dilemma – Recurrent On-center – Offsurround Networks – Building Blocks of Adaptive Resonance – Substrate of Resonance
Structural Details of Resonance Model – Adaptive Resonance Theory – Applications
39
UNIT V
SELF ORGANISING MAPS:
8
Self-organizing Map – Maximal Eigenvector Filtering – Sanger’s Rule – Generalized Learning
Law – Competitive Learning - Vector Quantization – Mexican Hat Networks - Self-organizing
Feature Maps – Applications
PULSED NEURON MODELS:
Spiking Neuron Model – Integrate-and-Fire Neurons – Conductance Based Models –
Computing with Spiking Neurons.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Satish Kumar, “Neural Networksμ A Classroom Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, Reprint 2007.
2. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networksμ A Comprehensive Foundation”, 2nd Edition, Addison
Wesley Longman (Singapore) Private Limited, Delhi, 2001.
REFERENCES:
1. Martin T.Hagan, Howard B. Demuth, and Mark Beale, “Neural Network Design”, Thomson
Learning, New Delhi, 2003.
2. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms,
Applications, and Programming Techniques”, Pearson Education (Singapore) Private
Limited, Delhi, 2003.
3. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks and Learning Machines”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall,
2009.
40
CSE3H
RF SYSTEM DESIGN
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamentals of RF design and its parameters.
 To study the RF filter design and implementations.
 To analyze and design active RF components
UNIT I
CMOS PHYSICS, TRANSCEIVER SPECIFICATIONS AND
ARCHITECTURES
9
CMOS: Introduction to MOSFET Physics, Noise: Thermal, shot, flicker, popcorn noise Transceiver
Specifications: Two port Noise theory, Noise Figure, THD, IP2,IP3,Sensitivity, SFDR, Phase noise,
Specification distribution over a communication link Transceiver Architectures: Receiver:
Homodyne, Heterodyne, Image reject, Low IF Receiver Architectures, Transmitter: Direct
upconversion, Two step upconversion.
UNIT II
IMPEDANCE MATCHING AND AMPLIFIERS
9
S-parameters with Smith chart, Passive IC components, Impedance matching networks Amplifiers:
Common Gate, Common Source Amplifiers, OC Time constants in bandwidth estimation and
enhancement, High frequency amplifier design, Low Noise Amplifiers: Power match and Noise
match, Single ended and Differential LNAs, Terminated with Resistors and Source Degeneration
LNAs.
UNIT III
RF POWER AMPLIFIERS AND FEEDBACK SYSTEMS
9
Feedback Systems: Stability of feedback systems: Gain and phase margin, Root-locus techniques
Time and Frequency domain considerations, Compensation Power Amplifiers: General model, Class
D, E, F and S amplifiers, Linearization Techniques , Efficiency boosting techniques, ACPR metric,
Design considerations
UNIT IV
PLL AND FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZERS
9
PLL: Linearized Model, Noise properties, Phase detectors, Loop filters and Charge Pumps Frequency
Synthesizers: Integer-N frequency synthesizers, Direct Digital Frequency synthesizers
UNIT V
MIXERS AND OSCILLATORS
9
Mixer: characteristics, Non-linear based mixers: Quadratic mixers, Multiplier based mixers: Single
balanced and double balanced mixers, subsampling mixers Oscillators: Describing Functions, Colpitts
oscillators, Resonators, Tuned Oscillators, Negative resistance oscillators, Phase noise
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas.H.Lee, “The Design of CMOS Radio-Frequency Integrated Circuits”, 2nd Edition,
2. Jaime Aguilera and Roc Berenguer, “Design and Test of Integrated Inductors for RF
Applications”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2010.
3. Qizheng Gu, “RF System Design of Transceivers for Wireless Communications”,
Springer, 2010.
4. Michael B. Steer , “Microwave and RF Design: A Systems Approach”, SciTech
Publishing, 2009.
41
CSE3J
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL ENGINEERING
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the network reference model for the communication Protocol engineering process.
 To study the Protocol specifications, verification and Validation process.
 To study the performance testing, synthesis and implementation of the Protocols.
UNIT I
NETWORK REFERENCE MODEL
9
Communication model, software, subsystems, protocol, protocol development methods, Protocol
engineering process, Layered architecture, Network services and Interfaces, Protocol functions, OSI
model,TCP/IP protocol suite.
UNIT II
PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONS
9
Components of protocol, Specifications of Communication service, Protocol entity, Interface,
Interactions, Multimedia protocol, Internet protocol, SDL, SDL based protocol other protocol
specification languages.
UNIT III
PROTOCOL VERIFICATION/VALIDATION
9
Protocol verification, Verification of a protocol using finite state machines, Protocol validation,
protocol design errors, Protocol validation approaches, SDL based protocol verification and
validation.
UNIT IV
PROTOCOL CONFORMANCE/PERFORMANCE TESTING
9
Conformance testing methodology and frame work, Conformance test architectures, Test sequence
generation methods, Distributed architecture by local methods, Conformance testing with TTCN,
systems with semi controllable interfaces - RIP,SDL based tools for conformance testing, SDL based
conformance testing of MPLS Performance testing, SDL based performance testing of TCP and
OSPF, Interoperability testing, SDL based interoperability testing of CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA
protocol using Bridge, Scalability testing.
UNIT V
PROTOCOL SYNTHESIS AND IMPLEMENTATION
9
Protocol synthesis, Interactive synthesis algorithm, Automatic synthesis algorithm, Automatic
synthesis of SDL from MSC, Protocol Re-synthesis; Requirements of protocol implementation,
Object based approach to protocol implementation, Protocol compilers, Tool for protocol engineering
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Pallapa Venkataram and Sunilkumar S.Manvi, “Communication protocol Engineering”,
Eastern Economy edition, 2004.
2. Richard Lai and Jirachiefpattana, “Communication Protocol Specification and Verification”,
Kluwer Publishers, Boston, 1998.
3. Tarnay, K., “Protocol Specification and Testing”, Plenum, New York, 1λλ1.
4. Mohamed G. Gouda, “Elements of Network Protocol Design”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New
York, USA, 1998.
42
CSE3K
ASIC DESIGN
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand capabilities and limitations of CMOS logic and adjust designs to best use
CMOS ASIC technologies.
 To demonstrate an understanding of verilog and logic synthesis.
 To perform an ASIC design from requirements to timing verification
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ASIC
9
Types of ASICs, Design flow, CMOS transistors CMOS Design rules, Combinational Logic Cell,
Sequential logic cell, Data path logic cell, Transistors as Resistors, Transistor Parasitic Capacitance,
Logical effort, Library cell design, Library architecture.
UNIT II
PROGRAMMABLE ASIC
9
Anti fuse, static RAM, EPROM and EEPROM technology, PREP benchmarks, Actel, Xilinx LCA,
Altera FLEX, Altera MAX DC & AC inputs and outputs, Clock & Power inputs, Xilinx I/O blocks.
UNIT III
PROGRAMMABLE ASIC INTERCONNECT
9
Actel ACT, Xilinx EPLD, Altera MAX 9000, Altera FLEX Design systems, Logic Synthesis, Half
gate ASIC, Schematic entry, Low level design language, PLA tools, EDIF, CFI design representation.
UNIT IV
LOGIC SYNTHESIS, SIMULATION AND TESTING
9
Verilog and logic synthesis, VHDL and logic synthesis, types of simulation, boundary scan test, fault
simulation, automatic test pattern generation.
UNIT V
ASIC CONSTRUCTION
9
System partition, FPGA partitioning, partitioning methods, floor planning, placement, physical design
flow, global routing, detailed routing, special routing, circuit extraction, DRC.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. M.J.S .Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”,Prentice Hall, 2008.
2. Farzad Nekoogar and Faranak Nekoogar, “From ASICs to SOCsμ A Practical Approach”, 3rd
Edition, Prentice Hall PTR, 2003.
3. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA-Based System Design”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall PTR, 2004.
4. R. Rajsuman, “System-on-a-Chip Design and Test”, Artech House Publishers, 2000.
43
CSE3L
NONLINEAR FIBER OPTICS
LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about the basics of fiber Nonlinearities, Gaussian Pulse.
 To impart knowledge about Soliton Lasers.
 To study various Applications of Soliton Lasers.
UNIT I
FIBER NONLINEARITIES
9
Introduction, Nonlinear Refraction, Maxwell's Equations, Fiber Modes, Eigen value Equations Single
Mode Condition, Nonlinear pulse Propagation, Higher Order Nonlinear Effects.
UNIT II
GROUP VELOCITY DISPERSION AND PHASE MODULATION
10
Gaussian Pulse, Chirped Gaussian Pulse, Higher Order Dispersions, Changes in Pulse Shape, Self
Phase Modulation (SPM) induced Spectral Broadening, Non-linear Phase Shift, Effect of Group
Velocity Dispersion, Self Steepening, Application of SPM, Cross Phase Modulation (XPM),
Coupling between Waves of Different Frequencies, Non-linear Birefringence, Optical Kerr Effect,
Pulse Shaping.
UNIT III
OPTICAL SOLITONS AND DISPERSION MANAGEMENT
9
Soliton Characteristics, Soliton Stability, Dark Solitons, Other kinds of Solitons, Effect of
Birefringence in Solitons, Solitons based Fiber Optic Communication System, Demerits, Dispersion
Managed Solitons (DMS).
UNIT IV
SOLITON LASERS
8
Non-linear Fiber Loop Mirrors, Soliton Lasers, Fiber Raman Lasers, Fiber Raman Amplifiers, Fiber
Raman Solitons, Erbium doped fiber amplifiers.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF SOLITONS
9
DMS for single channel transmission, WDM transmission, Fiber Gratings, Fiber Couplers, Fiber
Interferometers, Pulse Compression, Soliton Switching, Soliton light wave systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Govind P. Agrawal, “Nonlinear Fiber Optics”, 4th Edition, Academic Press, New York, 2007.
2. A.Hasegawa and M. Matsumoto, “Optical Solitons in Fibers”, 3rd revised Edition, Springer,
Berlin, 2003.
3. Govind P. Agrawal, “Applications of Nonlinear Fiber Optics”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press,
2008.
4. M. Lakshmanan and S. Rajasekar, “Nonlinear Dynamics: Integrability, Chaos and Patterns”,
Springer, Berlin, 2003.
44
CSE3M
VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic approaches and methodologies for VLSI design of signal processing
and communication systems.
 To design high-speed, low-area, and low-power VLSI systems for a broad range of DSP
applications.
 To present real-life case studies of architectures at the implementation level, and presents
several approaches to analysis, estimation, and reduction of power consumption.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO DSP SYSTEMS, PIPELINING AND PARALLEL
PROCESSING OF FIR FILTERS
9
Introduction to DSP systems, Typical DSP algorithms, Data flow and Dependence graphs, critical
path, Loop bound, iteration bound, longest path matrix algorithm, Pipelining and Parallel processing
of FIR filters, Pipelining and Parallel processing for low power.
UNIT II
RETIMING, ALGORITHMIC STRENGTH REDUCTION
9
Retiming – definitions and properties, Unfolding – an algorithm for unfolding, properties of
unfolding, sample period reduction and parallel processing application, Algorithmic strength
reduction in filters and transforms, 2-parallel FIR filter, 2-parallel fast FIR filter, DCT architecture,
rank-order filters, Odd-Even merge-sort architecture, parallel rank order filters.
UNIT III
FAST CONVOLUTION, PIPELINING AND PARALLEL
PROCESSING OF IIR FILTERS
9
Fast convolution, Cook-Toom algorithm, modified Cook-Toom algorithm, Pipelined and parallel
recursive filters, Look-Ahead pipelining in first-order IIR filters, Look-Ahead pipelining with powerof-2 decomposition, Clustered look-ahead pipelining, Parallel processing of IIR filters, combined
pipelining and parallel processing of IIR filters.
UNIT IV
NUMERICAL STRENGTH REDUCTION, SYNCHRONOUS, WAVE
AND ASYNCHRONOUS PIPELINING
9
Numerical strength reduction, sub expression elimination, multiple constant multiplication, iterative
matching, synchronous pipelining and clocking styles, clock skew in edge-triggered single phase
clocking, two-phase clocking, wave pipelining, Asynchronous pipelining bundled data versus dual rail
protocol.
UNIT V
SCALING, ROUND-OFF NOISE, BIT-LEVEL ARITHMETIC
ARCHITECTURES
9
Scaling and round-off noise, scaling operation, round-off noise, state variable description of digital
filters, scaling and round-off noise computation, round-off noise in pipelined IIR filters, Bit-level
arithmetic architectures, parallel multipliers with sign extension, parallel carry-ripple and carry-save
multipliers, Design of Lyon’s bit-serial multipliers using Horner’s rule, bit-serial FIR filter, CSD
representation, CSD multiplication using Horner’s rule for precision improvement, Distributed
Arithmetic fundamentals and FIR filters
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Keshab K. Parhi, “VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems, Design and implementation”,
1st Edition (Reprint), Wiley Interscience, 2008.
2. U. Meyer – Baese, “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays”,
3rd Edition, Springer, 2007.
3. Rogger Woods, John MCallister, Richard Turner and Ying Yi, “FPGA – based
Implementation of Signal Processing Systems”, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
45
CSE3N
MEDICAL IMAGE PROCESSING
LTPC
30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about the computational and mathematical methods in medical image processing.
 To impart knowledge about main sources of medical imaging data (CT, MRI, PET, and
ultrasound).
 To study various methods used to enhance and extract useful information from medical
images.
UNIT I IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS
9
Image Perception, MTF of the visual system, Image Fidelity criteria, Image model, Image sampling
and quantization – two dimensional sampling theory, Image quantization, Optimum mean square
quantizer, Image transforms – 2D- DFT and other transforms
UNIT II
IMAGE PREPROCESSING
9
Image enhancement – point operation, Histogram modeling, spatial operations, Transform operations,
Image restoration- Image degradation model, Inverse and Weiner filtering, Image CompressionSpatial and Transform methods
UNIT III
IMAGE RECONSTRUCTION IN MEDICAL IMAGING MODALITIES
9
Mathematical preliminaries and basic reconstruction methods, Image reconstruction in CT scanners,
MRI, Nuclear Medicine Imaging Modalities, Ultra sound imaging, 3D Ultra sound imaging
UNIT IV
IMAGE ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION
9
Image segmentation- pixel based, edge based, region based segmentation, Image representation and
analysis, Feature extraction and representation, Statistical Shape, Texture, feature and Image
classification- Statistical, Rule based, Neural Network approaches
UNIT V
IMAGE REGISTRATIONS AND VISUALIZATION
9
Rigid body visualization, Principal axis registration, Interactive principal axis registration, Feature
based registration, Elastic deformation based registration, Image visualization- 2D display methods,
3D display methods, virtual reality based interactive visualization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Atam P.Dhawan , “Medical Image Analysis” Wiley Interscience Publication, NJ, US 2003
2. R.C. Gonzalez and R.E woods , “Digital Image Processing” , Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2002
3. Anil. K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing” Pearson education, Indian
Reprint, 2002
4. Eric Krestel, “Image System for Medical diagnosis” Siemens Aktiengesell Schaft,
Germany, 1990
5. Alfred Horowitz, “MRI Physics for Radiologists” – A Visual Approach’ , Second edition
Springer Vertag New York, 1991.
46
www.nec.edu.in
REGULATIONS - 2013
DEPARTMENT OF
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI (FULL TIME)
M.E. – EMBEDDED SYSTEM TECHNOLOGIES
M.E. (EMBEDDED SYSTEM TECHNOLOGIES)
REGULATIONS – 2013
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS (FULL TIME)
SEMESTER I
1
COURSE
CODE
ESC11
2
3
4
ESC12
ESC13
ESC14
S.NO.
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
5
ESC15
Applied Mathematics for Electrical Engineers
(Common to M.E EST, M.E HVE and M.E
Real Time Systems
Mixed Signal Processor
Advanced Computer Architecture and Parallel
Processing
Modern Digital System Design
6
ESC16
Design of Embedded Control System
3
Embedded System Laboratory
0
0
4
Total Credits
PRACTICAL
7
ESC17
2
21
SEMESTER II
1
COURSE
CODE
ESC21
2
ESC22
RTOS and its Applications
3
0
0
3
3
ESC23
Embedded Networking
3
0
0
3
4
ESC24
Open source Multimedia Application Processor
3
0
0
3
5
Elective I
3
0
0
3
6
Elective II
3
0
0
3
Advanced Embedded System Laboratory
0
0
4
Total Credits
S.NO.
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
Low power CISC Microcontroller
3
1
0
4
PRACTICAL
7
ESC25
2
21
SEMESTER III
S.NO.
COURSE
CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1
Elective III
3
0
0
3
2
Elective IV
3
0
0
3
3
Elective V
3
0
0
3
Project Work Phase I
0
0
12
Total Credits
4
ESC31
6
15
SEMESTER IV
S.NO.
1
COURSE
CODE
ESC41
COURSE TITLE
Project Work Phase II
L
T
P
C
0
0
24 12
Total Credits 12
LIST OF ELECTIVES FOR M.E. EMBEDDED SYSTEM TECHNOLOGIES
S.NO.
COURSE
CODE
1
ESE2A
2
ESE2B
3
ESE2C
4
ESE2D
5
ESE2E
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor
Networks
3
0
0
3
VLSI Architecture and Design Methodologies
3
0
0
3
Cryptography and Wireless Network Security
Computers in Networking and Digital Control
Advanced Embedded Systems
S.NO.
COURSE
CODE
1
ESE3A
2
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
Software Technology for Embedded Systems
3
0
0
3
ESE3B
Embedded Communication and Software Design
3
0
0
3
3
ESE3C
Embedded Wireless Sensor Networks
3
0
0
3
4
ESE3D
Embedded Linux
3
0
0
3
5
ESE3E
RISC Processor Architecture and Programming
3
0
0
3
ESC11 APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
(Common to M.E EST, M.E HVE and M.E C&I)
AIM
To gain knowledge on applied mathematics for electrical engineers
LTPC
3 1 04
OBJECTIVES
To learn the concepts of matrix theory
To understand simplex method, two phase method and graphical solution in linear
programming.
To learn moment generating functions and one dimensional random variables.
To understand queuing models and computation methods in engineering
UNIT I
9
Eigen-values using QR transformations - Generalized eigen vectors - Canonical forms Singular value decomposition and applications - Pseudo inverse - Least square approximations.
UNIT II
LINEAR PROGRAMMING
9
Formulation - Graphical Solution - Simplex Method - Two Phase Method - Transportation and
Assignment Problems.
UNIT III
9
Random variables - Probability function - moments - moment generating functions and their
properties - Binomial, Poisson, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions.
UNIT IV
QUEUEING MODELS
9
Poisson Process - Markovian queues - Single and Multi Server Models - Little's formula Steady State analysis - Self Service queue.
UNIT V
COMPUTATIONAL METHODS IN ENGINEERING
9
Boundary value problems for ODE - Finite difference methods - Numerical solution of PDE Solution of Laplace and Poisson equations - Liebmann's iteration process - Solution of heat
conduction equation by Schmidt explicit formula and Crank - Nicolson implicit scheme Solution of wave equation.
L=45; T=15; TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Bronson, R., “Matrix Operation, Schaum's outline series”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1989.
2. Taha, H. A., “Operations Research: An Introduction”, 7th Edition, Pearson Education
Edition, Asia, New Delhi, 2002.
3. R. E. Walpole, R. H. Myers, S. L. Myers and K. Ye, “Probability and Statistics for
Engineers & Scientists”, Asia, 8th Edition, 2007.
4. Donald Gross and Carl M. Harris, “Fundamentals of Queueing theory”, 2nd Edition, John
5. Grewal, B.S, “Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, 7th Edition, Khanna
Publishers, 2009.
ESC12
AIM
REAL TIME SYSTEMS
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
To expose the students to the fundamentals of Real Time Systems, its communication
and evaluation techniques
OBJECTIVES
To introduce real time computing and scheduling algorithms.
To understand the programming languages and their tools for real time systems.
To study real time communication concepts and fault tolerant techniques.
To study the evaluation techniques of Real time systems.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction - Issues in Real Time Computing - Structure of a Real Time System - Task classes
- Performance Measures for Real Time Systems - Estimating Program Run Times - Task
Assignment and Scheduling - Classical Uniprocessor scheduling algorithms - Uniprocessor
scheduling of IRIS tasks - Task assignment - Mode changes and Fault Tolerant Scheduling.
UNIT II
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES AND TOOLS
9
Programming Languages and Tools - Desired language characteristics - Data typing - Control
structures - Facilitating Hierarchical Decomposition, Packages, Run time (Exception) Error
handling - Overloading and Generics - Multitasking - Low level programming - Task Scheduling
- Timing Specifications - Programming Environments - Run - time support.
UNIT III
REAL TIME DATABASES
9
Real time Databases - Basic Definition, Real time Vs General Purpose Databases, Main Memory
Databases, Transaction priorities, Transaction Aborts, Concurrency control issues, Disk
Scheduling Algorithms, Two - phase Approach to improve Predictability - Maintaining
Serialization Consistency - Databases for Hard Real Time Systems.
UNIT IV
FAULT TOLERANCE SYSTEMS
9
Real - Time Communication - Communications media, Network Topologies Protocols, Fault
Tolerant Routing. Fault Tolerance Techniques - Fault Types - Fault Detection., Fault Error
containment Redundancy - Data Diversity - Reversal Checks - Integrated Failure handling.
UNIT V
EVALUATION TECHNIQUES
9
Reliability Evaluation Techniques - Obtaining parameter values, Reliability models for Hardware
Redundancy - Software error models. Clock Synchronization - Clock, A Nonfault - Tolerant
Synchronization Algorithm - Impact of faults - Fault Tolerant Synchronization in Hardware Fault Tolerant Synchronization in software.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real - Time Systems”, McGraw - Hill International
Editions, 2010.(3rd Reprint)
2. Rajib Mall, “Real-time systems: theory and practice”, Pearson Education, 2008. (2nd Reprint)
3. Peter D.Lawrence, “Real Time Micro Computer System Design - An Introduction”, McGraw
Hill, 1988.
4. Stuart Bennett, “Real Time Computer Control - An Introduction”, Prentice Hall of
India, 2009.(3rd Reprint)
ESC13
L T P
3 0 0
MIXED SIGNAL PROCESSOR
C
3
AIM
To impart knowledge on Mixed Signal Processor, its architecture and interfacing.
OBJECTIVES
To understand the processor classification and its architecture’s.
To understand the architecture of MSP430 Processor.
To study the interfacing techniques of the processor.
To study the on-chip peripheral’s and special features of the processor.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
9
Embedded system definition, Approaches to Embedded system Design, Anatomy of a Typical
Microcontroller. MSP 430 series overview – Functional block diagram of MSP 430 F2013, memory map of
F2013, MSP 430 CPU. Clock generator, Exceptions. Development tools for MSP 430.
UNIT II
MSP 430 ARCHITECTURE
9
Programmers model of MSP 430 CPU, Addressing modes, Instruction set, Resets, Clock System, Interrupt
handling mechanism, Low-Power models of operation, Digital I/O port registers
UNIT III
ONCHIP LCD CONTROLLER AND TIMERS
9
Interfacing I/O ports with LEDs, LCD Controller- LCD Controller in MSP 430, Functional Block diagram of
LCD Controller and its description, Simple application of LCD Controller to display Real Time Clock on
LCD display - Seven segment display - DC motor - Timers in MSP 430 Series: Watchdog Timer – Block
diagram, registers, configuration of registers. Basic Timer 1 – Block diagram, simple application using Timer
1. Real Time Clock – functional block diagram, description of registers for programming. Timer A –
functional block diagram, Description of Timer block, Capture/ Compare channels.
UNIT IV
MIXED SIGNAL SYSTEM
9
Methods of Analog to Digital conversion in MSP 430, Architecture and operation of Comparator block, An
example of capacitive touch sensing with comparator, Basic operation of ADC block in MSP 430, Low
power example with ADC, Triggering the ADC from Timer A - More advanced operation of ADC, DAC
block in MSP 430 and its operation.
UNIT V
SERIAL COMMUNICATION PERIPHERALS
9
Overview of communication peripherals in MSP 430, USCI block diagram and its features, Asynchronous
serial communication – Asynchronous serial communication with USCI.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. John Davies, “MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, Elsevier, 2008.
2. Raj Kamal, “Microcontrollers: Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and System
Design”, Pearson Education, 2009. (3rd Reprint)
3. MSP430 Teaching CD-ROM, Texas Instruments, 2008 (http://www.uniti.in ).
4. Jerry Luecke, “Analog and Digital Circuits for Electronic Control System Applications”,
Elsevier, 2010.
5. Chris Nagy, “Embedded Systems Design Using TI MSP 430 series”, Elsevier, 2008.
ESC14
ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND
PARALLEL PROCESSING
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
AIM
To learn advanced computer architecture and their processing.
OBJECTIVES
To learn the concepts of parallel computing.
To study the program partitioning, scheduling and performance analysis.
To understand the data path design and memory organization.
To understand parallel processing and architectures.
UNIT I
PARALLEL COMPUTING
9
Computing and Computers - Parallel Computer models - the state of computing - Multiprocessors
and Multicomputers – Multivectors - and SIMD computers - superscalar and vector processors PRAM and VLSI models - Program and network properties - Conditions of parallelism.
UNIT II
DATA PATH DESIGN
9
Fixed point and floating point arithmetic - Control design - Hardwired and micro programmed
control - CPU control unit - memory hierarchy technology - virtual memory technology - cache
memory organizations - shared memory organizations.
UNIT III
SCHEDULING AND PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS
9
Speed up techniques - Program partitioning and scheduling - Program flow mechanisms - System
interconnect architectures - Principles of scalable performance - performance matrices and
measures - Parallel processing applications - speedup performance laws - scalability analysis and
approaches.
UNIT IV
PARALLEL COMPUTER ARCHITECTURES
9
Pipeline design and performance - Instruction pipeline - Pipeline control - Superscalar processing
- RISC and CISC processors - Parallel and scalable architectures - Multithreaded data flow
architectures.
UNIT V
PARALLEL PROCESSING
9
Parallel models - Languages and compilers - Parallel program development and environments UNIX for parallel computers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Kai Hwang, “Advanced Computer Architecture”, McGraw Hill International, 2008.(18th
Reprint).
2. Dezso Sima, Terence Fountain, Peter Kacsuk, “Advanced computer Architecture - A design
Space Approach”, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. David E. Culler, Jaswinder Pal Singh with Anoop Gupta, “Parallel Computer
Architecture”, Elsevier, 2004.
4. Carl Hamacher, “Computer Organization”, McGraw-Hill, 5th Edition, 2002.
ESC15
MODERN DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
AIM
To understand the models and schemes of digital system design
OBJECTIVES
To realize Mealy and Moore model networks
To learn the design techniques of fundamental mode asynchronous circuits
To study the various fault models of system design
To impart knowledge on programmable logic devices and HDL.
UNIT I
REALIZATION OF MEALY AND MOORE MODEL NETWORKS
9
Analysis of Clocked Mealy and Moore model Networks, Modelling of Mealy and Moore network
- State Stable Assignment and Reduction - Design of Mealy and Moore model networks - Design of
Iterative Circuits - ASM Chart - ASM Realizations using Discrete gates, Multiplexers, PLA,
PROMs.
UNIT II
DESIGN OF FUNDAMENTAL MODE ASYNCHRONOUS CIRCUITS 9
Fundamental mode Asynchronous Sequential Circuit analysis –Excitation Table, Transition Table,
State Table, Flow Table and its Reduction - Races, Primitive Flow Table - State Assignment
Problem - Design of Fundamental mode asynchronous sequential circuits – Timing Hazards Design of a Microcontroller CPU.
UNIT III
FAULT MODEL AND TESTING SCHEMES
9
Stuck at Models, Fault Table method - Path Sensitization Method - Boolean Difference Method Kohavi Algorithm - Tolerance Techniques - The Compact Algorithm - Practical PLA's - Fault in PLA
- Test Generation - Masking Cycle – Design for Testability Schemes - Built-in Self Test.
UNIT IV
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES
9
Complex Programmable Logic Devices- Xilinx XC9500 functional block - I/O block – Switch
matrix - Field-Programmable Gate Arrays: Xilinx XC4000 CLB, I/O block, Programmable
interconnects, Altera MAX 5000 series logic cell - I/O block – Programmable interconnects,
FPGA Design flow – Constraints – Programming file generation
UNIT V
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE
9
Introduction to VHDL – VHDL Modules, Signals and Constants, Data types, Arrays - VHDL
Operators, Packages and Libraries, IEEE Standard Logic – VHDL for Combinational Logic:
Multiplexer & demultiplexer, Encoder and decoders, Comparator - VHDL for Sequential Logic –
Modeling of Flip-Flops, Registers, Counters, Sequential Machine. VHDL for Digital System Design
– VHDL Code for Serial Adder, Binary Multiplier, Binary Divider.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Donald G. Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
2. Nripendra N Biswas, “Logic Design Theory”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
3. John F. Wakerly, “Digital Design: Principles and Practices”, Pearson, 4th Edition, 2011.
4. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Fundamentals of Logic design”, Cengage Learning, 5th Edition, 2012.
ESC16
DESIGN OF EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
AIM
To learn the methods of designing and interfacing embedded systems.
OBJECTIVES
To learn the basics of embedded system hardware organization.
To understand the basics of real time operating system.
To learn the design methodologies and hardware and software interface.
To study the designing concepts of software for embedded system, basics of
exemplary RTOS.
UNIT I
EMBEDDED SYSTEM ORGANIZATION
9
Embedded computing - characteristics of embedded computing applications - embedded
system design challenges; Build process of Real time Embedded system -Selection of processor;
Memory; I/O devices-Rs-485, MODEM, Bus Communication system using I2C, CAN, USB
buses, 8 bit -ISA, EISA bus;
UNIT II
REAL-TIME OPERATING SYSTEM
9
Introduction to RTOS; RTOS- Inter Process communication, Interrupt driven Input and Output
– Non maskable interrupt, Software interrupt; Thread - Single, Multithread concept;
Multitasking Semaphores.
UNIT III
INTERFACE WITH COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
9
Design methodologies and tools - design flows - designing hardware and software Interface system integration; SPI, High speed data acquisition and interface-SPI read/write protocol, RTC
interfacing and programming.
UNIT IV
DESIGN OF SOFTWARE FOR EMBEDDED CONTROL
9
Software abstraction using Mealy-Moore FSM controller, Layered software development, Basic
concepts of developing device driver - SCI - Software - interfacing & porting using standard C &
C++ ; Functional and performance Debugging with benchmarking Real- time system software Survey on basics of contemporary RTOS – VX Works, UC/OS-II.
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES WITH EMBEDDED CONTROLLER
9
Programmable interface with A/D & D/A interface; Digital voltmeter, control- Robot system; PWM motor speed controller, serial communication interface.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Steven F. Barrett, Daniel J. Pack, “Embedded Systems - Design and Applications with
the 68HC12 and HCS12”, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming and Design”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2006.
3. Micheal Khevi, “The M68HC11 Microcontroller application in control,
Instrumentation & Communication”, PH NewJersy, 1997.
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Rolin D. Mckinlay, Danny Causey, “PIC Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems- Using Assembly and C for PIC18”, Pearson Education, 2008.
ESC17
EMBEDDED SYSTEM LABORATORY
L T P
0 0 4
C
2
AIM
To impart knowledge on different embedded processors, their architectures and
programming.
OBJECTIVES
To understand the Architecture of MSP430 chip using Cross Works Development
Environment.
To interface MSP chip with interfacing modules to develop single chip solutions on
Cross Works Development Environment.
To understand the Architecture of ARM7 Processor using Cross Works Development
Environment.
To understand the use of RTOS with ARM7 Processor using Cross Works
Development Environment.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PART- I
Write programs to understand the Architecture of MSP430 chip using Cross Works Development
Environment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Data Transfer - Block move, Exchange, Sorting, Finding largest element in an array.
Arithmetic Instructions - Addition/subtraction, multiplication and division,
Square, Cube - (16 bits Arithmetic operations - bit addressable).
Counters design.
Boolean & Logical Instructions (Bit manipulations).
Conditional CALL & RETURN.
Code conversion: BCD - ASCII; ASCII - Decimal; Decimal - ASCII; HEX - Decimal and
Decimal - HEX.
8. Programs to generate delay, programs using serial port and on-Chip timer / counter.
PART- II
Write programs to interface MSP chip with interfacing modules to develop single chip solutions
on Cross Works Development Environment.
9. Write a Program to test the ADC Signal by using 8-LEDs array.
10. Write a program to study on board relay.
11. External ADC and Temperature control interface to MSP
12. Stepper and Bi directional DC motor control interface to MSP
13. Alphanumeric LCD panel and Hex keypad input interface to MSP.
14. Generate different waveforms Sine, Square, Triangular and Ramp using DAC interface to
MSP.
15. Simple Calculator Using 6 digit seven segment display and Hex Keyboard
PART- III
Write programs to understand the Architecture of ARM7 Processor using Cross Works
16. Simple Assembly Program for
a. Addition | Subtraction | Multiplication | Division
17. 8 Bit LED and Switch Interface
18. Buzzer Relay and Stepper Motor Interface
19. Time delay program using built in Timer / Counter feature
20. External Interrupt
21. Displaying a number in 7-Segment Display
22. 4x4 Matrix Keypad Interface
23. Multi digit seven segment display
24. Displaying a message in a 2 line x 16 Characters LCD display
25. ADC and Temperature sensor LM 35 Interface
26. I2C Interface – 7 Segment display
27. I2C Interface – Serial EEPROM
28. Transmission from Kit and reception from PC using Serial Port
29. Generation of PWM Signal
PART- IV
Write programs to understand the use of RTOS with ARM7 Processor using Cross Works
30. Blinking two different LEDs at different timings.
31. Displaying two different messages in LCD display in two lines
32. Sending messages to mailbox by one task and reading the message from mailbox by
another task
33. Sending message to PC through serial port by three different tasks on priority Basis
34. Reading temperature from LM35 chip and any other external element at different timings using
RTOS.
ESC21
LOW POWER CISC MICROCONTROLLER
L T P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE OUTCOMES
After Completion of the course, the students are able to
Know the basic processor core of RL78 and their software development tools.
Use the interrupts and interrupt processing activities of RL78 for external device
interfacing.
Design RL 78 based system by utilizing timer and serial communication blocks
like I2C and UART
UNITI
MICROCONTROLLER CONCEPTS
9
Microcontroller-based Embedded System - Infrastructure: Power, Clock, and Reset Interfacing
with Digital Signals: GPIO, Driving a Common Signal with Multiple MCUs, Scanning Matrix
Keypads, Driving Motors and Coils - Interfacing with Analog Signals : Multi bit Analog to
Digital Conversion- Introduction about RENESAS Family of microcontrollers.
RL78 PROCESSOR CORE
9
UNITII
RL78 Processor Core basics – Block Diagram - Data flow diagram within core –
Instruction set-Addressing Modes- RL78 Pipeline structure – Implementation of C
language statements in RL78Assembly language- - Programming Examples- Software
development tools for RL78.
RL78 INTERRUPTS
9
UNIT III
RL78 Interrupt mechanism- Interrupt processing activities: both hardware and software
with ISR examples- Interrupt Characteristics- RL78 Interrupt vector table-Concurrent
Interrupt - External Interrupt.
UNIT IV
R L 7 8 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
9
Basic Concepts: Synchronous, Asynchronous – Example Protocols: CSI, UART, I2C - Serial
Array Unit concepts: CSI Mode, UART Mode, Simplified I2C Mode - Serial Communications
Device Driver Code- Programming Examples for serial communication.
UNIT V
TIMER AND ENERGY OPTIMIZATION IN RL78
9
Basic Concepts: - Interval Timer - Timer Array Unit: Independent Channel Operation Modes,
Simultaneous Channel Operation Modes – Basic concepts of Power and Energy- Digital Circuit
power consumption- Optimization of Power in Digital Circuit- RL78 Clock System OverviewStandby Modes- Power and Energy Optimization in RL78 with simple Examples.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. G.Alexander, M.Conrad, "Embedded Systems using Renesas RL78 Microcontroller",
Micrium Press, 2012.
2. J.Ganssle, "The Art of Designing Embedded systems ", Newnes, 2008.
3. RL78 Family User‟ s Manual: RENESAS Electronics, 2011.
4. www.renesassingapore.com
ESC22
RTOS AND ITS APPLICATIONS
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Explain the concepts of RTOS based systems
Summarize the models of distributed operating systems and design strategies.
Use the real time kernel related functions of µC/OS II.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO OPERATING SYSTEM
9
Basic Principles - System Calls - Files - Processes - Design and Implementation of processes Communication between processes - Operating System structures.
UNIT II
RTOS CONCEPTS
9
Need for RTOS–Advantage and Disadvantage of using RTOS-Multitasking-Tasks-Non
preemptive Kernels-Preemptive Kernels-Round Robin Scheduling-Task
Priorities-Static
Priorities-Mutual Exclusion-deadlock-inter task Communication-Message Mailboxes-Message
Queues-Interrupts.
UNIT III µC/OS II BASICS
9
Introduction- µC/OS II Features-Goal of µC/OS II- Kernel Structures: Task- Task States-Task
Scheduling- Idle Task – Statistics Task- Interrupts under µC/OS II - Clock Tick- µC/OS II
Initialization. Task Management: Creating Tasks-Task Stacks-Stack Checking-Task‟ s PrioritySuspending Task- System Time.
UNIT IV RTOS INTERPROCESS FUNCTIONS
9
Message Mailbox Management: Creating a Mailbox-Waiting for a Message box-Sending
Message to a Mailbox. Message Queue Management: Creating Message Queue-Deleting a
Message Queue-Waiting for a Message at a Queue-Sending Message to a Queue-Flushing a
Queue- Semaphores in µC/OS II .
UNIT V
MEMORY MANAGEMENT AND RTOS APPLICATIONS
9
Memory Management: Memory Control Blocks- Creating Partition- Obtaining a Memory
Block function -Returning a Memory Block function - Porting µC/OS II: Development toolsDirectories and Files. RTOS for Image Processing - RTOS for Voice Over IP - RTOS for
Control Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Jean J. Labrosse, “Micro C/OS-II :The Real Time Kernal”, CMP Books, 2nd Edition 1998.
2. Herma K., “Real Time Systems - Design for distributed Embedded Applications”,
Kluwer Academic, 1997.
3. C.M. Krishna, Kang, G.Shin, “Real Time Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1997.
4. Raj Kamal, "Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming and Design", Tata McGraw
Hill, 2006.
ESC23
EMBEDDED NETWORKING
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Explain the basics of Ethernet and Embedded communication protocols.
Design interfacing circuit using USB and CAN bus.
Discuss the concepts of embedded Ethernet and wireless embedded
networking.
UNIT I
EMBEDDED COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
9
Embedded Networking: Introduction-Serial/Parallel Communication - Serial communication
protocols-RS232 standard - RS485 - Synchronous Serial Protocols - Serial Peripheral
Interface (SPI) - Inter Integrated Circuits (I2C) - ISA/PCI Bus protocols.
UNIT II
USB 2.0 AND CAN BUS
9
USB bus 2.0 - Introduction - Speed Identification on the bus - USB States - USB bus
communication: Packets
-Data flow types - Enumeration - Descriptors - CAN Bus:
Introduction - Frames – Bit stuffing - Types of errors - Nominal Bit Timing - A simple
application Program with CAN.
UNIT III ETHERNET BASICS
9
Elements of a network- Inside Ethernet - Building a Network: Hardware options
Cables, Connections and network speed - Internet protocol in local and internet
communications - Inside the Internet protocol.
UNIT IV EMBEDDED ETHERNET
9
Inside UDP and TCP, Protocols for Serving WebPages – HTTP, HTML, Server Side
Include (SSI) Directives, Web pages that respond to user Input – Rabbit Device Controller
– TINI Device Controller - Email Protocols - Keeping Devices and Network secure.
UNIT V
WIRELESS EMBEDDED NETWORKING
9
Wireless sensor networks - Introduction – Devices - Applications - Network TopologyTraditional MAC Protocols – Aloha and CSMA – Hidden and exposed node problems
MACA – IEEE 802.11 MAC – IEEE 802.15.4 MAC - Energy efficient MAC protocols:
Sleep-Scheduled Techniques – S-MAC - T-MAC - D-MAC – Data Centric routing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Frank Vahid, Givargis „Embedded Systems Design: A Unified Hardware/Software
Introduction‟ , Wiley Publications, 2001.
2. Robert Murphy, “USB 101: An Introduction to Universal Serial Bus 2.0”, 2003.
3. Jan Axelson, “Embedded Ethernet and Internet Complete”, Penram publications, 2003.
4. Bhaskar Krishnamachari, „Networking wireless sensors‟ , Cambridge press 2005
ESC24
OPEN SOURCE MULTIMEDIA APPLICATION
PROCESSOR
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Choose Image transform for particular Image processing task.
Explain Image enhancement and segmentation algorithms.
Design Image processing applications using openCV functions.
Discuss the architecture of OMAP processor.
UNIT I
IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS AND IMAGE TRANSFORMS
9
Introduction, Image sampling, Quantization, Resolution, Image file formats, Need for transform,
image transforms , 2 D Discrete Fourier transform, Importance of phase, Walsh transform,
Hadamard transform, Haar Transform, Slant transform, Discrete cosine transform, KL transform,
singular value Decomposition.
UNIT II
IMAGE ENHANCEMENTS
9
Introduction to image enhancement, Enhancement in spatial domain, enhancement through
point operation, Types of point operation, Histogram manipulation, Linear Gray level
transformation, Nonlinear Gray level transformation, Local or neighbourhood operation, Median
filter, Image sharpening, Bit plane slicing, Image enhancement in the frequency domain.
UNIT III
IMAGE SEGMENTATION
9
Introduction to image segmentation, Classification of segmentation techniques, Region approach
to image segmentation, clustering techniques, Image segmentation based on thresholding, Edge
based segmentation, Edge detection and linking, Hough transform, Active contour.
UNIT IV
OPENCV
9
Introduction to OpenCV- OpenCV Primitive Data Types- CVMat Matrix Structure- Ipl Image
Data Structure- Matrix and Image Operators- openCV functions for Displaying Images openCV functions for Image processing- openCV functions for Image Transforms.
UNIT V
OMAP 3530 ARCHITECTURE
9
Introduction to OMAP3530- OMAP 3530 Architecture- Memory mapping – Interconnect
Architecture- Block diagram of IPC - Interrupt controller – Timers-UART- Multichannel
buffered serial port.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. S.Jayaraman, S.Esakkirajan and T.VeeraKumar, “Digital Image processing, Tata Mc
Graw Hill publishers, 2009.
2. Gary Bradski and Adrian Kaehler, “Learning OpenCV” O‟ RIELLEY, 2003.
3. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of digital image processing” Prentice Hall, 1989.
4. R.Gonzalez, R.E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,
India, 2009.
5. John W.Woods, “Multidimensional Signal, Image and Video Processing and Coding”,
Elsevier Academic Press Publications, 2006.
6. OMAP 3530 Processor Technical Reference Manual(www.ti.com)
ESC25
ADVANCED EMBEDDED SYSTEM LABORATORY
L T P
0 0 4
C
2
COURSE OUTCOMES
Develop simple systems which contains both Analog and Digital logic blocks.
Explain the architecture of RENESAS, OMAP and interfacing external
peripherals.
PART I PSoC
Experiments to understand the architecture and developing
simplesystemswhichcontainsbothAnalog and Digital logicblocks.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LED Blinking : Software Control
LED Blinking : Hardware Control
LED Blinking : PWM Control
Moving Characters Display
Interrupt generation using timer
ADC-LCD Interface
Cap sense – Buttons and Sliders test
PART II RENESAS
Experiments to understand the architecture and interfacing externalperipherals.
1. Measure room temperature and display the same in a LCD with keyboard interaction
2. Design a real time clock using 7- segment displays and create keyboard interaction
for the operations.
3. Create a Foreground – background application system using interrupt structure of RL78
4. Design an embedded system to measure the unknown signal frequency
using timer/counter of RL78.
5. P r o g r a m t o i l l u s t r a t e t h e u s e o f P W M S i g n a l t o v a r y t h e B r i g h t n e s s
of
LE Ds .
PART III OMAP
1. Experiments to understand the architecture and interfacing external peripherals.
2. Zigbee based wireless communication using Higher end processor
ESE2A
CRYPTOGRAPHY AND WIRELESS NETWORK
SECURITY
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Use encryption techniques and ciphers.
Practice key management and authentication concepts.
Summarize the network and system security concepts.
UNIT I
SYMMETRIC CIPHERS
9
Overview - Classical Encryption Techniques - Block Ciphers and the Data Encryption standard
Introduction to Finite Fields - Advanced Encryption standard - Contemporary Symmetric Ciphers Confidentiality using Symmetric Encryption.
UNIT II
PUBLIC-KEY ENCRYPTION AND HASH FUNCTIONS
9
Introduction to Number Theory - Public-Key Cryptography and RSA - Key Management -Diffie
Hellman Key Exchange - Elliptic Curve Cryptography - Hash Functions - Hash Algorithm - SHA-1 Digital Signatures.
UNIT III
NETWORK SECURITY APPLICATIONS
9
Authentication Applications - Kerberos - X.509 Authentication Service - Electronic mail Security –
Pretty Good Privacy - S/MIME - Secure HTTP - IP Security architecture – Authentication Header Encapsulating Security Payload.
UNIT IV
SYSTEM SECURITY
9
Intruders - Intrusion Detection - Password Management - Malicious Software – Firewalls Firewall
Design Principles - Trusted Systems.
UNIT V
SECURITY PROTOCOLS FOR ADHOC WIRELESS NETWORK 9
Security in Adhoc wireless networks – Requirements – Issues and Challenges – Attacks in various
layers – Key Management. Secure Routing Protocols – Requirements – Authenticated Routing for
Adhoc Networks - Security Aware AODV Protocol.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. William Stallings, "Cryptography and Network Security - Principles And Practices", Pearson
Education, 3rd Edition, 2003.
2. Atul Kahate, "Cryptography and Network Security", Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
3. Bruce Schneier, "Applied Cryptography", John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2001.
4. C.Siva Ram Murthy, B.S.Manoj, “Adhoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols”,
5. Charles B. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, "Security in Computing", 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2003.
6. Mai, "Modern Cryptography: Theory and Practice", First Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
ESE2B
COMPUTERS IN NETWORKING AND DIGITAL
CONTROL
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Know the concepts of data communication, encoding and congestion control
P e r f o r m hardware and software simulation of I/O communication blocks and
virtual instrumentation.
Analyze Virtual instrument based control unit.
UNIT I
NETWORK FUNDAMENTALS
9
Data communication networking - Data transmission concepts – Communication
networking - Overview of OSI- TCP/IP layers - IP addressing - DNS - Packet Switching
Routing -Fundamental concepts in SMTP, POP, FTP, Telnet, HTML, HTTP, URL,
SNMP, ICMP.
UNIT II
DATA COMMUNICATION
9
Sensor data acquisition, Sampling, Quantization, Filtering ,Data Storage, Analysis using
compression techniques, Data encoding - Data link control - Framing, Flow and Error
control, Point to point protocol, Routers, Switches , Bridges - MODEMs, Network layer
Congestion control, Transport layer- Congestion control, Connection establishment.
UNIT III
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
9
Block diagram and Architecture - Data flow techniques - Graphical programming using GUI
- Real time system - Embedded controller - Instrument drivers - Software and hardware
simulation of I/O communication blocks - ADC/DAC - Digital I/O - Counter , Timer, Data
communication ports.
UNIT IV
MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL THROUGH I NTE R N ET
9
Web enabled measurement and control - data acquisition for Monitoring of plant
parameters through Internet - Calibration of measuring instruments through Internet, Web
based control - Tuning of controllers through Internet
UNIT V
VI BASED MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL
9
Simulation of signal analysis and controller logic modules for Virtual Instrument control
Case study of systems using VI for data acquisition, Signal analysis, controller design, Drives
control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Wayne Tomasi, "Introduction to Data communications and Networking" Pearson
Education, 2007.
2. A Williams, "Embedded Internet Design", Second Edition, TMH, 2007.
3. Cory L. Clark, "LabVIEW Digital Signal Processing and Digital Communication", TMH,
2005.
4. Behrouza A Forouzan, "Data Communications and Networking" Fourth edition, TMH,
2007.
5. Krishna Kant, "Computer based Industrial control",PHI,2002.
6. Gary Johnson, "LabVIEW Graphical Programming", Second edition, McGraw Hill,
Newyork, 1997.
7. Kevin James, "PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition: Techniques for measurement,
Instrumentation and control, Newnes, 2000.
ESE2C
ADVANCED EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Review the hardware and software of embedded systems
Explain the system modeling and partitioning of hardware and software
Analyze the hardware software co-synthesis and concurrent design process
models
Discuss the memory types and interfacing peripherals with embedded systems
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE 9
Terminology - Gates - Timing diagram - Memory - Microprocessor buses – Direct memory
access- Interrupts : Interrupts basis - Shared data problems - Interrupt latency Embedded system evolution trends - Interrupt routines in an RTOS environment .
UNIT II
SYSTEM MODELLING WITH HARDWARE/SOFTWARE
PARTITIONING
9
Embedded systems Hardware/Software Co-Design- System Specification
and modeling
Single-processor Architectures & Multi-Processor Architectures,
comparison of Co
Design Approaches, Models of Computation, Requirements for
Embedded System
Specification, Hardware/Software
Partitioning Problem, Hardware/Software
Cost
Estimation, Generation of Partitioning by Graphical modeling, Formulation of the HW/SW
scheduling, Optimization.
UNIT III
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CO-SYNTHESIS
9
The Co- Synthesis Problem, State- Transition Graph, Refinement and Controller
Generation, Distributed System Co-Synthesis.
UNIT IV
MEMORY AND INTERFACING
9
Memory: Memory write ability and storage performance - Memory types – composing
memory - Advance RAM interfacing communication basic - Microprocessor interfacing
I/O addressing - Interrupts - Direct memory access - Arbitration multilevel bus
architecture - Serial protocol - Parallel protocols - Wireless protocols - Digital camera
example.
UNIT V
CONCURRENT PROCESS MODELS AND HARDWARE SOFTWARE
CO- DESIGN
9
Modes of operation - Finite state machines models - HCFSL and state charts language –
state machine models - Concurrent process model - Concurrent process communication
-Synchronization among process - Implementation - Data Flow model - Automation
synthesis - Hardware software co-simulation - IP cores - Design Process Model.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. David. E. Simon, "An Embedded Software Primer", Pearson Education, 2001.
2. Tammy Noergaard, "Embedded System Architecture, A comprehensive Guide
for Engineers and Programmers", Elsevier, 2006.
3. Raj Kamal, "Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming and Design” Tata McGraw
Hill, 2006.
4. Frank Vahid and Tony Gwargie, "Embedded System Design", John Wiley & sons,
2002.
5. Steve Heath, "Embedded System Design", Elsevier, Second Edition, 2004.
6. Jorgen Staunstrup, Wayne Wolf, "Hardware/Software Co-Design: Principles and
Practice", Kluwer Academic Pub,1997.
7. Giovanni De Micheli, Rolf Ernst Morgon, "Reading in Hardware/Software CoDesign Kaufmann Publishers, 2001.
ESE2D
PROTOCOLS AND ARCHITECTURES FOR WIRELESS
SENSOR NETWORKS
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Know the basis of communication protocols and Network protocols
Explain the design principles of routing and security protocols
Categorize Network development platforms and its related tools
UNIT I
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
9
Physical Layer and Transceiver Design Considerations – Choice of modulation schemes – Comparison of
various modulation schemes – MAC protocols for WSN – Address and Name management - Assignment of
MAC addresses.
UNIT II
NETWORK PROTOCOLS
9
Low duty cycle protocols - SMAC protocols – Wake up radio concepts – Energy Efficient Routing
– Energy aware protocols: LEACH protocols, SPIN protocols – Node level Energy saving –
Network level Energy saving
UNIT III
ROUTING AND SECURITY PROTOCOLS
9
Geographic Routing – Routing protocols - On demand routing protocols - Security Trends – OSI
Security Architecture – Security Services – Security Mechanisms – Security Requirements
Model for Network Security – Overview of Symmetric and Public Key Encryption
Authentication and Integrity Mechanism – Key Distribution.
UNIT IV
INFRASTRUCTURE ESTABLISHMENT
9
Topology control – Clustering – Time Synchronization – Localization and Positioning – Sensor
Tasking and Control
UNIT V
SENSOR NETWORK PLATFORMS AND TOOLS
9
Sensor network programming challenges – Node level software platforms – Node level simulators
State-centric programming
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Holger Karl & Andreas Willig, "Protocols And Architectures for Wireless Sensor
Networks", John Wiley, 2005.
2. Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003.
3. Bhaskar Krishnamachari, ”Networking Wireless Sensors”, Cambridge Press,2005.
4. Mohammad Ilyas And Imad Mahgaob,”Handbook Of Sensor Networks: Compact
Wireless and Wired Sensing Systems”, CRC Press, 2005.
5. Wayne Tomasi, “Introduction to Data Communication And Networking”, Pearson
Education, 2007.
ESE2E
VLSI ARCHITECTURE AND DESIGN METHODOLOGIES
L T P
3 0 0
COURSE OUTCOMES
Discuss the CMOS and Analog VLSI Design.
Explain the ASIC Concepts.
Distinguish different FPGA Architectures.
Write Verilog coding for given circuit.
C
3
UNIT I
CMOS DESIGN
9
Overview of digital VLSI design methodologies - Logic design with CMOS-transmission gate circuitsClocked CMOS-dynamic CMOS circuits, Bi-CMOS circuits- CMOS IC technology - Stick diagram for
all basic gates, Layout diagram for Inverter.
UNIT II
ANALOG VLSI DESIGN
9
Introduction to analog VLSI- Design of 2 stage and 3 stage Op Amp -High Speed and High frequency
Op Amps-Super MOS-Analog primitive cells.
UNIT III
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES
9
Generic Architecture of FPGA – Functional blocks - I/O blocks – Interconnects - Programming
Techniques-Anti fuse- SRAM-EPROM and EEPROM technology – Spartan VI: Functional Block
Diagram and features - Cyclone V: Functional Block Diagram and features.
UNIT IV
ASIC CONSTRUCTION, FLOOR PLANNING, PLACEMENT AND ROUTING
9
System partitioning - Partitioning methods- floor planning – placement and routing - global routing detailed routing - special routing- circuit extraction – Design Rule Checker.
UNIT V
VERILOG HDL
9
Introduction to Verilog HDL, hierarchical modeling concepts, modules and port definitions, gate level
modeling, data flow modeling, behavioral modeling, task & functions, Verilog Simulation and
synthesis, Verilog coding for Carry Look ahead adder, Multiplier, ALU, Shift Registers using
structural modeling – Multiplexer, Sequence detector, Traffic light controller using behavioral
modeling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. M.J.S Smith, "Application Specific integrated circuits", Addition Wesley Longman Inc.1997.
2. KamranEshraghian, Douglas A. Pucknell and Sholeh Eshraghian, "Essentials of VLSI circuits and
system", Prentice Hall India, 2005.
3. Wayne Wolf, "Modern VLSI design" Prentice Hall India, 2006.
4. Mohamed Ismail, TerriFiez, "Analog VLSI Signal and information Processing", McGraw Hill
nd
5. SamirPalnitkar, "Verilog HDL, A Design guide to Digital and Synthesis" 2 Edition, Pearson, 2005.
ESE3A
SOFTWARE TECHNOLOGY FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Know the programming concepts of embedded systems
Explain embedded C programming concepts
Discuss design and analysis of software development process
Describe web architectural framework protocols and unified modeling language
UNIT I
PROGRAMMING EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
9
Embedded Program - Role of Infinite loop - Compiling, Linking and locating
downloading and debugging - Emulators and simulators - Microcontroller – External
peripherals - Types of memory -Memory testing - Flash Memory.
UNIT II
C AND ASSEMBLY
9
Overview of Embedded C - Compilers and Optimization - Programming and Assembly
Register usage conventions - typical use of addressing options - instruction sequencing
procedure call and return - parameter passing - retrieving parameters - everything in pass by
value - temporary variables.
UNIT III.
EMBEDDED PROGRAM AND SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
PROCESS
9
Program Elements - Queues - Stack- List and ordered lists-Embedded programming in C++
Inline Functions and Inline Assembly - Portability Issues - Embedded Java Software
Development process: Analysis - Design- Implementation - Testing - Validation
Debugging - Software maintenance.
UNIT IV
UNIFIED MODELLING LANGUAGE
9
Object State Behaviour - UML State charts - Role of Scenarios in the Definition of
Behaviour -Timing Diagrams - Sequence Diagrams - Event Hierarchies - Types and
Strategies of Operations - Architectural Design in UML Concurrency Design Representing Tasks - System Task Diagram -Concurrent State Diagrams - Threads.
Mechanistic Design - Simple Patterns.
UNIT V
WEB ARCHITECTURAL FRAMEWORK FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEM 9
Basics - Client/server model- Domain Names and IP address – Internet Infrastructure and
Routing- URL - TCP/IP protocols - Embedded as Web Client - Embedded Web servers
HTML - Web security - Case study : Web-based Home Automation system.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. David E.Simon, "An Embedded Software Primer", Pearson Education, 2003.
2. Michael Barr, "Programming Embedded Systems in C and C++", Oreilly, 2003.
3. H.M. Deitel, P.J.Deitel, A.B. Golldberg " Internet and World Wide Web - How to
Program" 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
4. Bruce Powel Douglas, "Real-Time UML: Developing Efficient Object for
Embedded Systems", 2nd Edition, Addison-Wesley, 1999
5. Daniel W. Lewis, "Fundamentals of Embedded Software where C and Assembly
meet", PHI 2002.
6. Raj Kamal, "Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming and Design", Tata McGraw
Hill,2006.
ESE3B
EMBEDDED COMMUNICATION AND SOFTWARE
DESIGN
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Know the basics of OSI reference model and basics of OS and RTOS
Explain the concepts of data structure, tables and management devices concepts.
Demonstrate the multi board communication software design.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Communication Devices - Communication Echo System - Design Consideration – Host
Based Communication - Embedded Communication System - OS Vs RTOS.
UNIT II
SOFTWARE PARTITIONING
9
Limitation of strict Layering - Tasks & Modules - Modules and Task Decomposition
Layer2 Switch - Layer3 Switch / Routers - Protocol Implementation - Management
Types- Debugging Protocols.
UNIT III
TABLE AND DATA STRUCTURES
9
Partitioning of Structures and Tables - Implementation - Speeding Up access - Table
Resizing - Table access routines - Buffer and Timer Management - Third Party Protocol
Libraries.
UNIT IV
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
9
Device Management - Management Schemes - Router Management - Management of Sub
System Architecture - Device to manage configuration - System Start up and configuration.
UNIT V
MULTI BOARD COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE DESIGN
9
Multi Board Architecture - Single control Card and Multiple line Card Architecture
Interface for Multi Board software - Failures and Fault - Tolerance in Multi Board
Systems - Hardware independent development - Using a COTS Board - Development
Environment - Test Tools.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Sridhar .T, "Designing Embedded Communication Software" CMP Books, 2003.
2. Comer.D, "Computer networks and Internet", Third Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008.
3. Raj Kamal, "Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming and Design", Tata
McGraw Hill, 2006.
ESE3C
EMBEDDED WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Know the basics of wireless sensor networks
Discuss about the sensor network components, architecture and environments
Explain the design principles of WSN and wireless standards
Design the Smart Sensors and Applications of WSN
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
9
Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks - Characteristics requirements - Required mechanisms,
Difference between mobile ad-hoc and sensor networks - Enabling Technologies for Wireless
Sensor Networks.
UNIT II
ARCHITECTURES
9
Single-Node Architecture - Hardware Components - Energy Consumption of Sensor Nodes
Operating Systems and Execution Environments - Sensor node Examples: EYES, MICA,
MICAZ motes.
UNIT III
NETWORK SCENARIOS AND DESIGN PRINCIPLES FOR WSN 9
Sensor Network Scenarios – Optimization goals and Figure of Merit – Design principles for
WSNs – Gateway concepts - Wireless channel .
UNIT IV
SMART SENSORS
9
Introduction to Smart Sensors – Signal Conditioning Circuits – Architecture of Smart Sensors
Humidity Sensors – Soil Moisture Sensors – Temperature Sensors – Color Sensors – Level
Sensors.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS AND PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION ON WSN 9
Home control - Medical Applications - Civil and Environmental Engineering applications – Wildfire
monitoring- Habitat monitoring. Embedding LEACH protocol on ARM7 TDM microcontroller using
C language- Embedding Caesar cipher encryption and decryption algorithm on ARM 7 TDM
microcontroller using C language
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Feng Zhao & Leonidas J. Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks- An Information
Processing Approach", Elsevier, 2007.
2. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, & Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks- Technology,
Protocols and Applications”, John Wiley, 2012.
3. Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003.
4. Bhaskar Krishnamachari, ”Networking Wireless Sensors”, Cambridge Press,2005.
5. Mohammad Ilyas and Imad Mahgaob,”Handbook of Sensor Networks: Compact
Wireless and Wired Sensing Systems”, CRC Press, 2005.
ESE3D
L T P
3 0 0
EMBEDDED LINUX
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Know the basics of embedded Linux and its concepts
Know about the bootloader, role of bootloader and universal bootloader concepts.
Describe power management, interrupt management, timer management and device
drivers.
UNIT I
LINUX FUNDAMENTALS
Introduction to Linux - Basic Linux commands and concepts - Shells and shell scripting - Linux File System: concepts, types, representation.
10
Advanced shells
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED LINUX
8
Embedded Linux - Introduction - Advantages- Embedded Linux Distributions
Architecture - Linux kernel architecture - User space - Linux startup sequence - GNU cross
platform Tool chain.
UNIT III
BOOTLOADERS
Bootloader definition – role of bootloader – bootloader
bootloader - Porting Universal bootloader – Device tree Blob.
Challenges-
8
Universal
UNIT IV
BOARD SUPPORT PACKAGE AND EMBEDDED STORAGE
10
Inclusion of BSP in kernel build procedure - - Memory Map - Interrupt Management
Timers - UART - Power Management - Embedded Storage - Flash Map - Memory
Technology Device (MTD) –MTD Architecture - MTD Driver for NOR Flash - The Fla
Mapping drivers
UNIT V
DEVICE DRIVERS
9
Device driver introduction – driver methods-Building
and running modules Communicating with hardware –USB Driver : Basics, USB and Sysfs - USB Urbs-writing a
USB device driver.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Matthias Kalle Dalheimer, Matt Welsh, "Running Linux", O'Reilly Publications 2005.
2. Mark Mitchell, Jeffrey Oldham and Alex Samuel, "Advanced Linux
Programming", New Riders Publications 2008.
3. P.Raghavan, Amol Lad, Sriram Neelakandan, "Embedded Linux System
Design and Development", Auerbach Publications 2006.
4. Karim Yaghmour, "Building Embedded Linux Systems", O'Reilly Publications 2003.
5. Christopher Hallinan, ”Embedded Linux Primer” Second edition, Pearson education
2012.
6. M.Beck, H.Bohme, “Linux kernel Programming”, 3rd Pearson education, 2004.
7. Greg Kroah Heartman, Jonathan corbet, "Linux Device Drivers", O'Reilly Publications
2005.
ESE3E
RISC PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND
PROGRAMMING
L T P
3 0 0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Know about the background of ARM family specifically ARM Cortex M3
Processor, Operating Modes, and Instruction set etc.
Discuss about the memory systems and debugging strategy of Cortex Processor.
UNIT I
ARM CORTEX – M3 PROCESSOR
9
Overview of ARM Cortex-M3 Processor – Background of ARM and ARM Architecture,
Architecture Versions – ARM Nomenclature – Thumb and Jazelle Architecture – Cortex-M3
Processor Applications – Registers – General Purpose Registers, Special Purpose Registers
Operation Modes – Memory Map – Bus Interface – MPU – Interrupts and Exceptions – Stack
Memory Operations – Reset Sequence – Debugging Support.
UNIT II
INSTRUCTION SET
9
Cortex-M3 Instruction Set, Mnemonics, Syntax and their Description – Unsupported
Instructions –Moving Data Instructions – Pseudo Instructions – Data Processing Instructions
– Unconditional Branch Instructions – Decision and Conditional Branch Instructions –
Combined Compare and Conditional Branch Instructions – Instruction Barrier and Memory
Barrier Instructions Saturation Operations – Useful Instructions – MSR and MRS Instructions
– Multiply and Divide Instructions – SDIV and UDIV Instructions – REV, REVH and
REVSH Instructions – Reverse Bit – SXTB, SXTH, UXTB and UXTH Instructions – UBFX
and SBFX – LDRD and STRD Table Branch Byte and Table Branch Halfword
UNIT III
MEMORY SYSTEMS
9
Memory System Features – Memory Access Attributes – Bit Band Operations– Advantages
Exclusive Accesses – Endian Mode – Pipeline – Bus Interfaces – Other Interfaces – Types of
Exceptions – Vector Tables – Fault Exceptions – Interrupt Control – Software Interrupts
Interrupt Latency – Faults related to Interrupts – Memory Protection Unit – Registers –
Typical Setup – Other Features – SYSTICK Timer – Power Management – Multiprocessor
Communication – Self-Reset Control.
UNIT IV
DEBUGGING ARCHITECTURE
9
Debugging Features – Coresight Overview – Debug Modes – Debugging Events – Accessing
Register Content in Debug – Trace System – Trace Components – DWT, ITM, ETM and
TPIU Flash Patch and Breakpoint Unit – Advanced High-Performance Bus Access Port –
ROM Table.
UNIT V
CORTEX - M3 PROGRAMMING
Overview- A typical Development Flow - Simple programs using C - CMSIS : Background,
areas of standardization, Organization, Benefits – Assembly language programs for CortexM3-Bit band for Semaphores-Working with bit field extract and table branch.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Daniel Tabak, “Advanced Microprocessors”, McGraw Hill. Inc., 2nd Edition, 1996.
2. Joseph Yiu, “The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M3”, Elsevier, 2nd Edition,
2010.
3. Andrew N.Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, “ARM System Developer‟ s
Guide- Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Morgan Kaufmann, 1st
Edition, 2004.
4. Steave Furber, “ARM System-On-Chip Architecture”, Addison Wesley, 2nd Edition,
2000.
5. Daniel W. Lewis, “Fundamentals of Embedded Software with the ARM Cortex-M3”,
Prentice Hall, 1st Edition, 2012.
(An Autonomous Institution – Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
www.nec.edu.in
DEPARTMENT OF
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
M.E. – COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING
Regulations’
Curriculum & Syllabi of M.E. (Communication and Networking)
REGULATIONS - 2013
M.E. (COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING)
SEMESTER I
SL COURSE
NO
CODE
THEORY
1.
CCC11
2.
CCC12
3.
CCC13
4.
CCC14
5.
CCC15
6.
CCC16
PRACTICAL
7.
CCC17
COURSE TITLE
Applied mathematics for communication Engineers
(Common to CS & CC)
(Common to CS, CC, HVE & C&I)
(Common to CSE & CC)
Principles of Operating System
Internet and Java Programming
Computer Communication Networks
Communication and Networking Laboratory – I
TOTAL
L
T P
C
3
1
0
4
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
18
0
1
4
4
2
21
L
T
P
C
3
3
0
1
0
0
3
4
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
0
4
2
18
1
4
21
SEMESTER II
SL. COURSE
COURSE TITLE
NO CODE
THEORY
1.
CCC21 Design Principles of Computer Networks
2.
CCC22 Wireless Networks (Common to CC & CS)
Optical Fiber Communication and Networking
3.
CCC23
(Common to CS & CC)
4.
E1
Elective
5.
E2
Elective
6.
E3
Elective
PRACTICAL
7. CCC24 Communication and Networking Laboratory – II
TOTAL
2
Regulations’
SEMESTER III
SL. COURSE
NO
CODE
THEORY
1.
E4
2.
E5
3.
E6
PRACTICAL
4.
CCC31
COURSE TITLE
Elective
Elective
Elective
TOTAL
L
T
P
C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
9
0
0
12
12
6
15
L
T
P
C
0
TOTAL 0
0
0
24
24
12
12
SEMESTER IV
SL. COURSE
COURSE TITLE
NO
CODE
PRACTICAL
1.
CCC41 Project Work (Phase II)
TOTAL CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR THE AWARD OF THE DEGREE – 69
3
Regulations’
LIST OF ELECTIVES FOR M.E. COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING
List of Electives for Semester – II
SL.
NO
COURSE
CODE
1.
CCE2A
2.
CCE2B
3.
CCE2C
4.
CCE2D
5.
CCE2E
6.
CCE2F
7.
CCE2G
8.
CCE2H
9.
CCE2J
10.
CCE2K
COURSE TITLE
(Common to CS & CC)
Network Security
(Common to CS & CC)
Adhoc Networks
(Common to CSE, CS & CC)
System Modeling and Simulation
Soft Computing
(Common to CSE & CS, CC)
Distributed Computing
Pervasive Computing
Digital Imaging
Speech Signal Processing
(Common to CS & CC)
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
List of Electives for Semester – III
SL.
NO
COURSE
CODE
1.
CCE3A
2.
CCE3B
3.
CCE3C
4.
CCE3D
5.
CCE3E
6.
CCE3F
7.
CCE3G
8.
CCE3H
9.
CCE3J
COURSE TITLE
Embedded Systems
(Common to CS, CSE & CC)
Data Mining Algorithms
Evolutionary Computing
(Common to HVE, CSE, CS & CC)
Cloud Computing
(Common to CSE, CS & CC)
High Speed Switching Architectures
(Common to CS & CC)
Neural Networks and Its Applications
(Common to CC & CS)
Modeling and Simulation of Wireless
Systems (Common to CSE & CC)
XML and Web Services
4
CCC11
Regulations’
APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR COMMUNICATION ENGINEERS L T P C
3 10 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concepts and properties of Bessel’s functions and Fourier-Bessel
expansion.
 To enrich the knowledge about matrix decomposition, generalized eigenvectors and
Pseudo inverse.
 To acquire the knowledge about properties of moment generating functions and
some theoretical distributions.
 To understand the concepts of two dimensional random variables and their joint
distributions and to know the methods of correlation and regression.
 To learn the various queuing models and to apply them in practical problems.
UNIT I
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
9
Bessel's equation – Bessel function – Recurrence relations - Generating function and orthogonal
property for Bessel functions of first kind – Fourier-Bessel expansion.
UNIT II
9
Eigen-values using QR transformations - Generalized eigen vectors - Canonical forms - Singular
value decomposition and applications - Pseudo inverse - Least square approximations.
UNIT III
9
properties – Binomial, Poisson, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions.
UNIT IV
TWO DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES
9
Joint distributions – Marginal and Conditional distributions – Correlation and Regression, Regression
Curve for means.
UNIT V
QUEUEING MODELS
9
Poisson Process – Markovian queues – Single and Multi-server Models – Little’s formula - Steady
State analysis – Self Service queue.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Taha, H.A., “Operations Research, An introduction”, 7th Edition, Pearson Education Editions,
2. Bronson.R, “Matrix operation, Schaum’s outline series”, Mc Graw Hill, New York, 1989.
3. Grewal,B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 37th Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2003.
4. Ramana B.V, Higher Engineering Mathematics –Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
5. Donald Gross and Carl M. Harris, “Fundamentals of Queuing theory”, 2nd Edition, John
5
CCC12
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
adaptive filtering.
UNIT I
9
UNIT II
SPECTRAL ESTIMATION
9
algorithm.
UNIT III
9
UNIT IV
ADAPTIVE FILTERS
9
UNIT V
9
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
4th Edition, 2009.
4. Emmanuel C. Ifeachor and Barrie W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing: A practical
approach” 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002.
6
CCC13
ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
(Common to CSE, CC)
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES
 To understand quantitative and qualitative approaches and analyze various modules of
modern computer systems.
 Students will learn about the efficiency of cache memory.
 Students will also learn how many processors synchronously execute instructions to improve
performance of a computer system.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER DESIGN AND PIPELINING
9
Introduction – Measuring and reporting performance – Quantitative principles of computer design –
Instruction set principles – Classifying ISA – Design issues – Pipelining – Basic concepts – Hazards –
Implementation – Multicycle operations.
UNIT II
DYNAMIC APPROACHES
9
Concepts – Dynamic Scheduling – Dynamic hardware prediction – Multiple issues – Hardware based
speculation – Limitations of ILP.
UNIT III
SOFTWARE APPROACHES
9
Compiler techniques for exposing ILP – Static branch prediction – VLIW – Advanced compiler
support – Hardware support for exposing more parallelism – Hardware versus software speculation
mechanisms.
UNIT IV
MEMORY AND I/O
9
Cache performance – Reducing cache miss penalty and miss rate – Reducing hit time – Virtual
Memory – Buses – RAID – I/O performance measures – Designing an I/O system.
UNIT V
MULTIPROCESSORS AND MULTICORE ARCHITECTURES
9
Symmetric and distributed shared memory architectures – Performance issues – Synchronization
issues – Models of memory consistency – Software and hardware multithreading.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, “Computer Architecture – A quantitative approach”,
5th Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011.
2. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”, 9th
3. David E. Culler, Jaswinder Pal Singh, “Parallel Computing Architecture: A hardware / software
approach”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 1999.
4. Behrooz Parhami, “Computer Architecture”, Oxford University Press, 2011.
5. John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.
6. Douglas E. Comer, “Essentials of Computer Architecture”, 1st International Edition, Pearson
Education, 2005.
7
CCC14
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATING SYSTEM
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamentals of Language processing
 To learn the functionalities of Assembler and Compilers
 To study the functions of operating System
 To discuss about CPU scheduling and Storage Management
UNIT I
LANGUAGE PROCESSORS
9
Language processors: Introduction, Language processing Activities, Fundamentals of language
Processing - Data Structures, Search data structures, Allocation data structures, Assemblers: Elements
of assembly language programming, simple assembly scheme, and pass structure of Assemblers.
Compilers and Interpreters: Aspects of Compilation, Memory allocation, Compilation of control
structures, Code optimization,
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO OS
10
Introduction to OS: Types of OS, I/O Structure, Storage structure, Network Structure, CPU
Scheduling: Scheduling criteria – Scheduling algorithms – Multiple-processor scheduling – Real time
scheduling – The critical-section problem - Semaphores – Classic problems of synchronization –
critical regions – Monitors. Deadlock: System model – Deadlock characterization – Methods for
handling deadlocks – Deadlock prevention – Deadlock avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery
from deadlock.
UNIT III
MEMORY MANAGEMENT
9
Memory Management: Background – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation – Paging –
Segmentation – Segmentation with paging. Virtual Memory: Background – Demand paging – Process
creation – Page replacement – Allocation of frames – Thrashing.
UNIT IV
FILE SYSTEM INTERFACE
9
File-System Interface: File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – File system Mounting –
Protection. File-System Implementation: Directory implementation – Allocation methods – Freespace management – efficiency and performance – recovery – log-structured file systems.
UNIT V
I/O SYSTEMS
8
I/O Systems – I/O Hardware – Application I/O interface. Mass-Storage Structure: Disk scheduling –
Disk management – Swap-space management - Case study: I/O in Linux, Process scheduling in
Linux, Memory management in Linux, File system in Linux – file system in Windows XP
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, 9th
Edition, 2012.
2. D.M.Dhamdhere, “Systems Programming and Operating Systems”- 2nd Revised Edition, Tata
McGraw- Hill Publishing Company limited, New Delhi, 2003.
REFERENCE:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Albert S, WoodHull “Operating System Design and Implementation”,
2nd Edition, PHI, 2006.
8
CCC15
INTERNET AND JAVA PROGRAMMING
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about Internet and HTML.
 To know about server side programming
 To impart knowledge of XML and its applications
 To know about Mobile device programming
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to the Internet and World Wide Web - World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) - History of
the Internet - History of the World Wide Web - History of SGML –XML Introduction to Hyper Text
Markup Language - Editing HTML - Common Elements – Headers - Linking - Images - Unordered
Lists - Nested and Ordered Lists – HTML Tables-Basic HTML Forms
UNIT II
XML
9
Creating Markup with XML -Parsers and Well-formed XML Documents -Parsing an XML Document
with msxml - Document Type Definition (DTD) - Document Type Declaration - Element Type
Declarations - Attribute Declarations - Document Object Model – DOM Implementations - DOM
Components - path - XSL: Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations (XSLT)
UNIT III
SERVLETS AND JSP
9
Introduction – Servlet Overview Architecture – Handling HTTP Request – Get and post request –
redirecting request – multi-tier applications – JSP – Overview – Objects – scripting – Standard
Actions – Directives.
UNIT IV
ENTERPRISE JAVABEANS
9
Introduction - EJB Fundamentals - Writing first Bean - Session beans - Entity Beans - Writing session
bean web services.
UNIT V
J2ME AND PHP
9
J2ME - J2ME Architecture - MIDlet programming – Multiple MIDlets in a MIDlet suit - PHP - Form
Processing and Business Logic – Connecting to Database – Cookies – Dynamic Content in PHP
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Deitel & Deitel, “Internet & World Wide Web How to Program”, Pearson Education India - 4th
Edition, 2008
REFERENCES:
1. Ed Roman, “Mastering Enterprise JavaBeans”, Wiley - 3rd Edition 2007.
2. James Keogh, “J2ME – The Complete reference”, Tata McGRAW Hill 2003.
3. Robert W.Sebesta , “ Programming with World Wide Web”, Pearson Education, 4th Edition
2009.
9
CCC16
COMPUTER COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the various digital communication concepts
 To understand the basic principles of data communications and computer networks.
 To appreciate the complex trade-offs that are inherent in the design of networks.
 To provide a guided tour of network technologies from the lowest levels of data transmission
up to network applications.
 To learn about current networking technologies, especially Internet protocols.
UNIT I
CONSTANT ENVELOPE MODULATION
9
Advantages of Constant Envelope Modulation; Binary Frequency Shift Keying-Coherent and Noncoherent Detection of BFSK; Minimum Shift Keying; Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying; M-ary Phase
Shift Keying; M-ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation; M-ary Frequency Shift Keying.
UNIT II
BLOCK CODED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
9
Architecture and performance – Binary block codes; Orthogonal; Biorthogonal; Transorthogonal –
Shannon’s channel coding theorem; Channel capacity; Matched filter; Concepts of Spread spectrum
communication – Coded BPSK and DPSK demodulators – Linear block codes; Hamming; Golay;
Cyclic; BCH; Reed – Solomon codes.
UNIT III
CONVOLUTIONAL CODED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
9
Representation of codes using Polynomial, State diagram, Tree diagram, and Trellis diagram –
Decoding techniques using Maximum likelihood, Viterbi algorithm, Sequential and Threshold
methods – Error probability performance for BPSK and Viterbi algorithm, Turbo Coding.
UNIT IV
IP NETWORKS
9
Open Data Network Model – Narrow Waist Model of the Internet – Success and Limitations of the
Internet – Suggested Improvements for IP and TCP – Significance of UDP in modern
Communication – Network level Solutions – End to End Solutions - Best Effort service model –
Scheduling and Dropping policies for Best Effort Service model.
UNIT V
ADVANCED ROUTING
9
Intra AS routing – Inter AS routing – Router Architecture – Switch Fabric – Active Queue
Management – Head of Line blocking – Transition from IPv4 to IPv6 – Multicasting – Abstraction of
Multicast groups – Group Management – IGMP – Group Shared Multicast Tree – Source based
Multicast Tree – Multicast routing in Internet – DVMRP and MOSPF – PIM – Sparse mode and
Dense mode
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Haykins, “Communication Systems”, 5th Edition, John Wiley, 2008.
2. M.K.Simon, S.M.Hinedi and W.C.Lindsey, “Digital Communication Techniques; Signaling
and detection”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi. 1995.
REFERENCES:
2. M. K. Simon and M. S. Alouini, “Digital Communication Over Fading Channels”, 2000.
3. R. G. Gallager, “Principles of Digital Communication”, Cambridge University Press, 2008.
4. Jean Warland and Pravin Vareya, “High Performance Networks”, Morgan Kauffman
Publishers, 2002.
5. Mahbub Hassan and Raj Jain, “High Performance TCP/IP Networking”, Pearson Education,
2004.
10
Regulations’
6. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks: Performance and Quality of Service”, 2nd Edition,
7. Kurose and Ross, “Computer Networks : A top down Approach”, Pearson Education, 2002
11
CCC17
Regulations’
COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING LABORATORY – I
LTPC
0 0 3 2
1. Implementation of CPU scheduling algorithms.
2. Implementation of Lexical analyzer.
3. Implementation of Semaphores and monitors in classical problems of
synchronization.
4. Usage of System Calls.
5. Web design with HTML
6. Web design with JAVA
7. Simulation of Modulation and Coding in a AWGN Communication Channel using
Simulation Packages.
8. Implementation of Linear and Cyclic Codes
9. Simulation of Adaptive Filters, periodogram and multistage multirate systems
10. Simulation of QMF using Simulation Packages.
12
CCC21
DESIGN PRINCIPLES OF COMPUTER NETWORKS
Regulations’
L TPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about multimedia networks and related services
 To brief about the VPN networks and advanced networking principles
 To discuss about network modeling and performance in networks
 To learn about the network security, security standards and network management
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Review of OSI, TCP/IP, Multiplexing, Modes of Communication, Switching, Routing. SONET –
DWDM – DSL – ISDN – BISDN, ATM.
UNIT II
MULTIMEDIA NETWORKING
9
Multimedia Networking Applications-Streaming Stored Video -Voice-Over-IP -Protocols for RealTime Interactive Applications- Network Support for Multimedia.
UNIT III
ADVANCED NETWORKS CONCEPTS
10
VPN-Remote-Access VPN - site-to-site VPN - Tunneling to PPP - Security in VPN - MPLS operation
–Routing - Tunneling and use of FEC - Traffic Engineering - MPLS based VPN - overlay networks P2P connections.
UNIT IV
TRAFFIC MODELING
7
Little’s theorem, Need for modeling - Poisson modeling and its failure - Non – poisson models Network performance evaluation.
UNIT V
NETWORK SECURITY AND MANAGEMENT
10
Principles of cryptography-Message Integrity and Digital Signatures-End-Point Authentication,
Securing E-mail- Securing TCP Connections: SSL - Network-Layer Security: IP SEC and Virtual
Private Networks, Securing Wireless LANs, Operational Security: Firewalls And Intrusion Detection
Systems-Infrastructure for Network Management, Internet-Standard Management Framework,
ASN.1.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. J.F. Kurose & K.W. Ross, “Computer Networking- A top down approach featuring the
Internet”, Pearson, 6th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Nader F.Mir ,Computer and Communication Networks, 1st Edition,2003.
2. LEOM-GarCIA, WIDJAJA, “Communication networks”, TMH 7th reprint, 2002.
3. Aunurag kumar, D.M.Anjunath, Joy kuri, “Communication Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers, 1st Edition, 2004.
4. Hersent Gurle & petit, “IP Telephony, packet Pored Multimedia communication Systems”,
5. Fred Halsall and Lingana Gouda Kulkarni, “Computer Networking and the Internet”, 5th
6. Walrand .J. Varatya, “High performance communication network”, Morgan Kauffman –
Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd. 2nd Edition, 2000.
13
Regulations’
CCC22
WIRELESS NETWORKS
(Common to CC & CS)
LTPC
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To Study about Wireless transmission basics and Protocols
 To know about Wireless LAN and ATM
 To Understand the Mobile Application Architecture, Messaging and Security
 To understand the concepts of 4G technologies
UNIT I
WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS
9
Introduction to wireless LANs - IEEE 802.11 WLANs - Physical Layer- MAC sublayer - MAC
Management Sublayer- Wireless ATM - HIPERLAN- HIPERLAN-2, WiMax
UNIT II
3G OVERVIEW AND 2.5G EVOLUTION
9
Migration path to UMTS, UMTS Basics, Air Interface, 3GPP Network Architecture, CDMA2000
overview- Radio and Network components, Network structure, Radio network, TD-CDMA, TDSCDMA.
UNIT III
ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS
9
Characteristics of MANETs, Table-driven and Source-initiated On Demand routing protocols, Hybrid
protocols, Wireless Sensor networks- Classification, MAC and Routing protocols.
UNIT IV
INTERWORKING BETWEEN WLANS AND 3G WWANS
9
Interworking objectives and requirements, Schemes to connect WLANs and 3G Networks, Session
Mobility, Interworking Architectures for WLAN and GPRS, System Description, Local Multipoint
Distribution Service, Multichannel Multipoint Distribution system.
UNIT V
4G AND BEYOND
9
4G features and challenges, Technology path, IMS Architecture, Convergent Devices, 4G
technologies, Advanced Broadband Wireless Access and Services, Multimedia, MVNO.
TUTORIAL: 15
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vijay. K. Garg, “Wireless Communication and Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers, http://books.elsevier.com/9780123735805. 2007.
2. Kaveth Pahlavan,. K. Prashanth Krishnamoorthy, "Principles of Wireless networks", Prentice
Hall of India, 2006.
3. Clint Smith. P.E., and Daniel Collins, “3G Wireless Networks”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. William Stallings, "Wireless Communications and networks" Pearson / Prentice Hall of India,
2nd Edition, 2007.
2. Dharma Prakash Agrawal & Qing-An Zeng, “Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems”,
Thomson India Edition, 2nd Edition, 2007.
3. Sumit Kasera and Nishit Narang, “3G Networks – Architecture, Protocols and Procedures”,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
4. Savo G.Glisic, “Advanced Wireless Networks: 4G Technologies”, Kindle Editions, 2006.
14
Regulations’
CCC23
OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING
LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
networks.
UNIT I
FIBER OPTIC WAVE GUIDES
9
Light wave generation systems, system components, optical fibers, SI, GI, fibers, modes, Dispersion
in fibers, limitations due to dispersion, Fiber loss, non linear effects, Dispersion shifted and
Dispersion flattened fibers.
UNIT II
OPTICAL TRANSCEIVER
9
Basic concepts, LED’s structure, spectral distribution, semiconductor lasers, gain coefficients, modes,
SLM and STM operation, Transmitter design, Receiver PIN and APD diodes design, noise sensitivity
and degradation, Receiver amplifier design, Basic concepts of Semiconductor Optical amplifiers and
EDFA operation.
UNIT III
LIGHT WAVE SYSTEM
9
Coherent, homodyne and heterodyne keying formats, BER in synchronous and asynchronous
receivers, Multichannel, WDM, multiple access networks, WDM components, TDM, Subcarrier and
Code division multiplexing.
UNIT IV
DISPERSION COMPENSATION
9
Limitations, Post- and Pre- compensation techniques, Equalizing filters, fiber based gratings,
Broadband compensation, Soliton communication system, fiber Soliton, Soliton based communication
system design, High capacity and WDM Soliton system.
UNIT V
PRINCIPLES OF OPTICAL NETWORKS
9
First and second generation optical networks: system network evaluation, SONET / SDH, MAN
layered architecture broadcast and select networks MAC protocols, test beds, wavelength routing
networks.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. G.P. Agarwal, “ Fiber Optic Communication Systems”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, New York, 2008.
2. G. Keiser, “ Optical Fiber Communications”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2008.
3. Rajiv Ramaswami, Kumar Sivarajan and Galen Sasaki, “Optical Networks: A Practical
Perspective”, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2009.
4. Harold Kolimbiris, “Fiber Optic Communication”, 1st Edition (Reprint), Pearson
Education, 2004.
15
CCC24
Regulations’
COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING LABORATORY – II
LTPC
0 0 3 2
1. DC characteristics of PIN PD and APD.
2. P-I characteristics of LED and LASER.
3. Optical link simulation using simulator packages.
4. Performance Comparison of MAC Protocols (using NS2).
5. Performance Comparison of Routing Protocols (using CISCO Packet Tracer).
6. Implementation of Chat Server using P2P Connections
7. Simulation of ATM switches.
8. Simulation and Implementation of ATM congestion control algorithm.
(Using free ATM network simulator software)
16
CCE2A
ADVANCED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Regulations’
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basics of Wireless voice and data communications technologies.
 To build working knowledge on various telephone and satellite networks.
 To study the working principles of wireless LAN and its standards.
 To build knowledge on various Mobile Computing algorithms.
 To build skills in working with Wireless application Protocols to develop mobile
content applications.
UNIT I
THE WIRELESS CHANNEL
9
Overview of wireless systems, Physical modeling for wireless channels, Time and Frequency
coherence, Statistical channel models, Fading, Capacity of wireless Channel, Capacity of Flat Fading
Channel, Channel Distribution Information known, Channel Side Information at Receiver, Channel
Side Information at Transmitter and Receiver.
UNIT II
PERFORMANCE OF DIGITAL MODULATION OVER WIRELESS
CHANNELS
8
Capacity with Receiver diversity, Capacity comparisons, Capacity of Frequency Selective Fading
channels, Outage Probability, Average Probability of Error, Combined Outage and Average Error
Probability, Doppler Spread, Intersymbol Interference.
UNIT III
DIVERSITY
9
Realization of Independent Fading Paths, Receiver Diversity, Selection Combining, Threshold
Combining, Maximal-Ratio Combining, Equal Gain Combining, Transmitter Diversity, Channel
known at Transmitter, Channel unknown at Transmitter, The Alamouti Scheme.
UNIT IV
MULTICARRIER MODULATION
10
Data Transmission using Multiple Carriers, Multicarrier Modulation with Overlapping Sub channels,
Mitigation of Subcarrier Fading, Space-time Multiplexing, Peak to Average Power Ratio- Frequency
and Timing offset, Case study IEEE 802.11a.
UNIT V
SPREAD SPECTRUM
9
Spread Spectrum Principles, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum, Spreading Codes, Synchronization,
RAKE receivers, Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum, Multiuser DSSS Systems, Multi user FHSS
Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
2. T.S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications: Principles and Practices”, 2nd Edition,
3. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, 1st
Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. Andreas F. Molisch, “Wireless Communications”, 2nd Edition, Wiley - IEEE, 2011.
17
CCE2B
NETWORK SECURITY
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about basic security issues
 Description of modeling issues and mathematical analysis using various encryption schemes
 To discuss the basic fire walls and layer security issues
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION ON SECURITY
9
Security Goals, Types of Attacks: Passive attack- active attack, attacks on confidentiality- attacks on
Integrity and availability, Security services and mechanisms, Techniques CryptographySteganography - Modular arithmetic, Euclid’s algorithm, Polynomial arithmetic, Groups, Rings and
finite fields.
UNIT II
9
Substitutional Ciphers- Transposition Ciphers, Stream and Block Ciphers principles- Simplified DESThe Data Encryption Standards (DES)-Block cipher modes of operations, Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES), RC5, Principle of asymmetric key algorithms, RSA Algorithm.
UNIT III
9
Message Integrity- Hash functions: MD5 Message Digest algorithm- SHA, Digital signatures:
Authentication protocols- Digital signature standards, Authentication: Requirements and function,
Biometrics, Key management – Diffie Hellman key exchange, Techniques.
UNIT IV
NETWORK SECURITY, SYSTEM SECURITY AND WEB SECURITY
9
Kerberos – X.509 authentication service – Email Security: PGO, S/MIME,
Firewalls: Design principles, Types, Trusted systems, IP Security: Architecture, authentication
Header, Security payload, security associations, Web security: Requirements, SSL, TLS, Secure
electronic transaction, - Intruders – Malicious Software.
UNIT V
9
Wireless Network Security: Fundamentals, Types of WNS technology, Standards, Design Issues Security Attack issues specific to Wireless systems: Worm hole, Tunneling, DoS, WEP for Wi-Fi
network, Security for 4G networks: Secure Ad hoc Network, Secure Sensor Network
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Behrouz A. Fourouzan, “Cryptography and Network security”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGrawHill, 2012
2. William Stallings, "Cryptography and Network Security", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2003
REFERENCES:
1. Tom Karygiannis, Les Owens,"Wireless Network Security 802.11, Bluetooth and Handheld
Devices", National Institute of Standards and Technology, US Dept. of Commerce Special
Publication 800-48, 2002.
2. Atul Kahate, "Cryptography & Network Security", 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
3. Mark D. Ciampa, “Security + Guide to Network Security Fundamentals”, 2008.
4. William Stallings “Network Security Essentials: Applications and Standards” 4th Edition,
2010.
5. Stuart McClure, Joel Scambray and George Kurtz “Hacking Exposed: Network Security
Secrets and Solutions”, 6th Edition 2009.
18
CCE2C
MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
processing.
 To study the image enhancement techniques
 To study image restoration procedures.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Special features of Multimedia, Graphics and Image Data Representations, Fundamental Concepts in
Video and Digital Audio, Storage requirements for multimedia applications, Need for Compression,
Taxonomy of compression techniques, Overview of source coding, source models, scalar and vector
quantization theory, Evaluation techniques, Error analysis and methodologies.
UNIT II
TEXT COMPRESSION
9
Compression techniques, Huffman coding, Adaptive Huffman Coding, Arithmetic coding, ShannonFano coding, Dictionary techniques, LZW family algorithms.
UNIT III
AUDIO COMPRESSION
9
Audio compression techniques - µ- Law and A- Law companding, Frequency domain and filtering,
Basic sub-band coding, Application to speech coding, G.722, Application to audio coding, MPEG
audio, progressive encoding for audio, silence compression, speech compression techniques , Formant
and CELP Vocoders.
UNIT IV
IMAGE COMPRESSION
9
Predictive techniques, DM, PCM, and DPCM: Optimal Predictors and Optimal Quantization, Contour
based compression, Transform Coding, JPEG Standard, Sub-band coding algorithms, Design of Filter
banks, Wavelet based compression: Implementation using filters, EZW, SPIHT coders, JPEG 2000
standards, JBIG, JBIG2 standards.
UNIT V
VIDEO COMPRESSION
9
Video compression techniques and standards, MPEG Video Coding I: MPEG - 1 and 2, MPEG Video
Coding II: MPEG – 4 and 7, Motion estimation and compensation techniques, H.261 Standard, DVI
technology, PLV performance, DVI real time compression, Packet Video.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Khalid Sayood, “Introduction to Data Compression”, Morgan Kauffman Harcourt India, 2 nd
Edition, 2000.
2. David Salomon, “Data Compression – The Complete Reference”, Springer Verlag New York
Inc., 2nd Edition, 2007.
3. Mark S.Drew, Ze-Nian Li, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, PHI, 1st Edition, 2003.
4. John F. Buford, “Multimedia Systems”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
19
Regulations’
CCE2D
ADHOC NETWORKS
LT PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
 To learn the MAC address spoofing concepts and basics of networks.
UNIT I
ADHOC MAC
9
Introduction – Issues in Adhoc Wireless Networks – MAC Protocols – Issues – Classifications of
MAC protocols – Multi channel MAC and Power control MAC protocol.
UNIT II
9
Classifications, Tree based, Mesh based. Adhoc Transport Layer Issues. TCP Over Adhoc – Feedback
UNIT III
WSN - MAC
9
Introduction – Sensor Network Architecture – Data dissemination – Data Gathering. MAC Protocols–
UNIT IV
9
UNIT V
MESH NETWORKS
9
Necessity for Mesh Networks – MAC enhancements – IEEE 802.11’s Architecture – Opportunistic
routing – Self configuration and Auto configuration – Capacity Models – Fairness – Heterogeneous
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. C.Siva Ram Murthy, B.S. Manoj, “Adhoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols”,
1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
Publishers, 2004.
Publishers, 2007.
Education, 2009.
6. Azzedine Boukerche, “Handbook of algorithms for wireless Networking and Mobile
computing”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2006.
20
CCE2E
SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION
Regulations’
LT PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 This course provides an introduction to system modeling using both computer simulation and
mathematical techniques.
 To provide an understanding of methods, techniques and tools for modeling, simulation and
performance analysis of complex systems such as communication and computer networks.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MODELING AND SIMULATION
9
Nature of Simulation Systems, Models and Simulation, Continuous and Discrete Systems, system
modeling, concept of simulation, Components of a simulation study, Principles used in modeling,
Static and Dynamic physical models, Static and Dynamic Mathematical models, Introduction to Static
and Dynamic System simulation, Advantages, Disadvantages and pitfalls of Simulation.
UNIT II
SYSTEM SIMULATION AND CONTINUOUS SYSTEM SIMULATION
9
Types of System Simulation, Monte Carlo Method, Comparison of analytical and Simulation
methods, Numerical Computation techniques for Continuous and Discrete Models, Distributed Lag
Models, Cobweb Model, Continuous System models, Analog and Hybrid computers, Digital-Analog
Simulators, Continuous system simulation languages, Hybrid simulation, Real Time simulations.
UNIT III
SYSTEM DYNAMICS AND PROBABILITY CONCEPTS IN SIMULATION 9
Exponential growth and decay models, logistic curves, Generalization of growth models,
System dynamics diagrams, Multi segment models, Representation of Time Delays,
Discrete and Continuous probability functions, Continuous Uniformly Distributed Random Numbers,
Generation of Random numbers, Generating Discrete distributions, Non-Uniform Continuously
Distributed Random Numbers, Rejection Method.
UNIT IV
SIMULATION OF QUEUEING SYSTEMS AND DISCRETE SYSTEM
SIMULATION
9
Poisson arrival patterns, Exponential distribution, Service times, Normal Distribution Queuing
Disciplines, Simulation of single and two server queue, Application of queuing theory in computer
system, Discrete Events, Generation of arrival patterns, Simulation programming tasks, Gathering
statistics, Measuring occupancy and Utilization, Recording Distributions and Transit times.
UNIT V
INTRODUCTION TO SIMULATION LANGUAGES AND ANALYSIS OF
SIMULATION OUTPUT
9
GPSS: Action times, Succession of events, Choice of paths, Conditional transfers,
program control statements.
SIMSCRIPT: Organization of SIMSCRIPT Program, Names & Labels, SIMSCRIPT statements.
Estimation methods, Relication of Runs, Batch Means, Regenerative techniques, Time
Series Analysis, Spectral Analysis and Autoregressive Processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Andrew Seila, “Applied Simulation Modeling”, w/CD, 1st Edition, 2009.
2. Averill M.Law, “Simulation Modeling and Analysis” 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill 2006.
REFERENCES
1. Seila Andrew.F, “Simulation Modeling”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
2. Narshing Deo, ”System Simulation with Digital Computer”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2004.
3. H.James Harrington, “Simulation Modeling Methods”, McGrawHill, 2009.
4. Gorden.G., “System Simulation”, Prentice Hall, 2006.
21
CCE2F
SOFT COMPUTING
Regulations’
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES
UNIT I
9
Intelligence – Derivative based optimization: Descent Methods, Newton’s method – Step size
determination – Derivative free optimization.
UNIT II
FUZZY SYSTEMS
9
UNIT III
9
Machine Learning Using Neural Network, Adaptive Networks – Feed forward Networks – Supervised
UNIT IV
9
Applications.
UNIT V
GENETIC ALGORITHMS
9
Classification of GA: Simple GA, Parallel and Distributed GA, Adaptive GA – Ant Colony
Optimization – Particle Swarm Optimization – Application of GA: Machine Learning, Image
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing”,
1st Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
2. S.N.Sivanandam, S.N.Deepa, “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, 1st Edition, Springer,
2007.
3. S.N.Sivanandam, S.N.Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition,
2007.
4. Agoston E.Eiben, J.E.Smith, “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing”, 1st Edition, Springer,
2008.
5. S.N.Sivanandam, S.Sumathi and S.N.Deepa, “Introduction to Fuzzy Logic using MATLAB”,
1st Edition, Springer, 2007.
6. James A.Freeman and David M.Skapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications, and
22
CCE2G
DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
 To learn the various paradigms in distributed environment.
 To know about distributed operating systems.
 To study the concept of distributed resource management.
 To understand the concept of fault tolerance system.
UNIT I
8
Object Invocation – Message – Oriented Communication – Unicasting, Multicasting and
Broadcasting – Group Communication.
UNIT II
12
Issues in Distributed Operating System – Threads in Distributed Systems – Clock Synchronization:
Logical Clock – Vector Clock – Causal Ordering – Global States – Election Algorithms – Distributed
Mutual Exclusion – Distributed Transactions – Distributed Deadlock – Agreement Protocols.
UNIT III
10
Distributed Shared Memory – Data-Centric Consistency Models – Client-Centric Consistency
Models – Ivy – Munin – Distributed Scheduling – Distributed File Systems – Sun NFS.
UNIT IV
FAULT TOLERANCE
7
Introduction to Fault Tolerance – Process Resilience – Reliable Client Server Communication –
Reliable Group Communication – Distributed Commit Protocols – Failure – Recovery.
UNIT V
DISTRIBUTED OBJECT BASED SYSTEM
8
Distributed Object Based System: Architecture – Communication – Naming – CORBA – Distributed
Coordination Based System – Coordination model – Architecture – Content based routing –
Synchronization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore and Tim Kindberg, “Distributed Systems Concepts and
Design”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, M. Van Steen, “Distributed Systems”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall,
2006.
Advanced Topics”, 2nd Edition, Wiley publishers, 2004.
4. Mukesh Singhal, “Advanced Concepts In Operating Systems”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill,
2004.
5. M. L. Liu, “Distributed Computing Principles and Applications”, Fourth Impression, Pearson
Education, 2009.
23
CCE2H
PERVASIVE COMPUTING
Regulations’
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES
 To understand the pervasive computing concepts.
 To know the voice standards and speech applications.
 To know the issues in pervasive computing.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Pervasive Computing Application – Pervasive Computing devices and Interfaces – Device technology
trends, Connecting issues and protocols.
UNIT II
WEB APPLICATIONS
9
Pervasive Computing and web based Applications – XML and its role in Pervasive Computing –
Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) Architecture and Security – Wireless Mark-Up language
(WML) – Introduction.
UNIT III
SPEECH APPLICATIONS
9
Voice Enabling Pervasive Computing – Voice Standards – Speech Applications in Pervasive
Computing and security.
UNIT IV
PDA AND PERVASIVE COMPUTING
9
PDA in Pervasive Computing – Introduction – PDA software Components – Standards – emerging
trends – PDA Device characteristics – PDA Based Access Architecture.
UNIT V
ADVANCED CONCEPTS
9
User Interface Issues in Pervasive Computing – Architecture – Smart Card based Authentication
Mechanisms – Wearable computing Architecture.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Jochen Burkhardt, Horst Henn, Stefan Hepper, Thomas Schaec and Klaus Rindtorff,
“Pervasive Computing Technology and Architecture of Mobile Internet Applications”, 1st
Edition, Addision Wesley professional, 2002.
2. Uwe Hansman, Lothat Merk, Martin S Nicklous and Thomas Stober, “Principles of Mobile
Computing”, 2nd Edition, Springer - Verlag, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Rahul Banerjee, “Internetworking Technologies: An Engineering Perspective”, 2nd Edition,
4. Rahul Banerjee, “Lecture Notes in Pervasive Computing”, Outline Notes, BITS-Pilani, 2003.
5. Jochen Burkhardt, Dr. Horst Henn, Stefan Hepper and Klaus Rintdorff, Thomas Schaeck,
“Pervasive Computing”, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2009.
6. F.Adelstein, S.K.S. Gupta, “Fundamentals of Mobile and Pervasive Computing”, 1st Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.
24
CCE2J
DIGITAL IMAGING
Regulations’
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES
 To understand the fundamentals of image processing.
 To learn the various image enhancement and segmentation techniques.
 To know the various image compression standards.
 To know the applications of image processing.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF IMAGE PROCESSING
9
hue, saturation – Color fundamentals and models – Image file formats – Image Acquisition –
Sampling and Quantization – Pixel Relationships – Image operations – Morphological Image
Processing – Matlab: Basics - Implementation of Image operations.
UNIT II
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT
9
Spatial Domain Gray level Transformations Histogram Processing Spatial Filtering – Smoothing and
Sharpening Frequency Domain: Filtering in Frequency Domain – DFT, FFT, DCT – Smoothing and
Sharpening filters – Homomorphic Filtering – Matlab functions of Transformations.
UNIT III
IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND ANALYSIS
9
Color Image Processing – Image Segmentation – Detection of Discontinuities – Edge Operators –
Edge Linking and Boundary Detection – Thresholding – Region Based Segmentation –
Morphological WaterSheds – Motion Segmentation, Feature Analysis and Extraction –
Implementation of Image Segmentation techniques using Matlab.
UNIT IV
MULTI RESOLUTION ANALYSIS AND COMPRESSIONS
9
Multi Resolution Analysis: Image Pyramids – Multi resolution expansion – Wavelet Transforms.
Image Compression: Fundamentals – Models – Elements of Information Theory – Error Free
Compression – Lossy Compression – Compression Standards Matlab Implementation of Wavelets
and Compression – Matlab: Wavelets Basics – Types – Compression Techniques.
UNIT V
IMAGE REPRESENTATION AND RECOGNITION
9
Image Representation – Boundary Descriptors – Regional Descriptors – Relational Descriptors –
Object Recognition – Applications of Image Processing – Matlab Implementation of Object
Recognition.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2009.
2. S.Jayaraman, S.Esakkirajan and T.Veerakumar, “Digital Image Processing”, 1st Edition, Tata
Mc Graw Hill, 2009.
3. Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods and Steven L.Addins, “Digital Image Processing Using
MATLAB”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
4. Wilhelm Burger, Mark Burge, “Principles of Digital Image Processing: Fundamental
Techniques”, 1st Edition, Springer, 2009.
5. Castleman, “Digital Image Processing”, 1st Edition Pearson Education, 2007.
6. Anil K.Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
2003.
25
CCE2K
SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING
Regulations’
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the fundamental mechanics of speech production and the nature of the speech
signals.
 To study the time domain and frequency domain methods for speech processing.
 To study the Predictive analysis of speech and the algorithm for estimation and detection.
UNIT I
MECHANICS OF SPEECH
8
Speech production mechanism, Nature of Speech signal, Discrete time modeling of Speech
production, Representation of Speech signals, Classification of Speech sounds, Phones, Phonemes,
Phonetic and Phonemic alphabets, Articulatory features, Music production, auditory perception,
Anatomical pathways from the ear to the perception of sound, peripheral auditory system, Psycho
acoustics.
UNIT II
TIME DOMAIN METHODS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING
8
Time domain parameters of Speech signal, Methods for extracting the parameters Energy, Average
Magnitude, Zero crossing Rate, Silence Discrimination using ZCR and energy, Short Time Auto
Correlation Function, Pitch period estimation using Auto Correlation Function.
UNIT III FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHOD FOR SPEECH PROCESSING
9
Short Time Fourier analysis, Filter bank analysis, Formant extraction, Pitch Extraction Analysis by
Synthesis, Analysis synthesis systems, Phase vocoder, Channel Vocoder, Homomorphic Speech
Analysis: Cepstral analysis of Speech, Formant and Pitch Estimation, Homomorphic Vocoders.
UNIT IV
LINEAR PREDICTIVE ANALYSIS OF SPEECH
10
Formulation of Linear Prediction problem in Time Domain, Basic Principle, Auto correlation method,
Covariance method, Solution of LPC equations, Cholesky method, Durbin’s Recursive algorithm,
lattice formation and solutions, Comparison of different methods, Application of LPC parameters,
Pitch detection using LPC parameters, Formant analysis, VELP, CELP.
UNIT V
APPLICATION OF SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING
10
Algorithms: Spectral Estimation, dynamic time warping, hidden Markov model, Music analysis, Pitch
Detection, Feature analysis for recognition, Automatic Speech Recognition, Feature Extraction for
ASR, Deterministic sequence recognition, Statistical Sequence recognition, ASR systems, Speaker
identification and verification, Voice response system, Speech Synthesis: Text to speech, voice over
IP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, “Speech and Audio Signal Processing”, 2nd Edition,
John Wiley and Sons Inc., Singapore, 2004.
2. Quatieri, “Discrete-time Speech Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2008.
3. Lawrence Rabiner and Ronald Schafer, “Theory and Applications of Digital Speech
Processing”, Pearson Education, 2010.
4. Nejat Ince, “Digital Speech Processing-Speech Coding, Synthesis and Recognition”, The
Springer International Series in Engineering and Computer Science, 2010.
26
Regulations’
CCE3A
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
UNIT I
9
system development-embedded system IDE- ARM Family-Core Types-Memory Mapping and ARM
UNIT II
ARM ARCHITECTURE
9
memory address translation, TLB, Domains and memory access permission, cache and write buffer,
Extension.
UNIT III
9
UNIT IV
9
UNIT V
ARM COMMUNICATION INTERFACING AND DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
9
I2S voice bus interface communication. Basic Embedded system Development Tools-Embest
JTAG emulator
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
6. Embedded System Development and Labs for ARM, (Edited, revised and updated by Radu
Muresan).
27
CCE3B
DATA MINING ALGORITHMS
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics and various techniques of data mining.
 To classify and cluster the data
 To know about mining of various types of data.
 To gain knowledge about mining of various multidimensional data
UNIT I
MINING FREQUENT PATTERNS, ASSOCIATIONS AND CORRELATIONS 9
Introduction to data mining algorithms, Basic Concepts and a Road Map, Efficient and Scalable
Frequent Item set Mining Methods, Mining Various Kinds of Association Rules, From Association
Mining to Correlation Analysis, Constraint Based Association Mining.
UNIT II
CLASSIFICATION AND PREDICTION
9
Classification & Prediction – Definitions, Issues Regarding Classification & Prediction, Classification
by Decision Tree Induction, Bayesian Classification, Rule Based Classification, Classification by
Back propagation, Support Vector Machines, Classification by Association Rule Analysis, Lazy
Learners, Genetic Algorithms, Rough Set & Fuzzy Set Approaches, Prediction Techniques,
Evaluating the Accuracy of a Classifier or Predictor.
UNIT III
CLUSTER ANALYSIS
9
Cluster Analysis, Types of Data in Cluster Analysis, Partitioning Methods, Hierarchical Methods,
Density Based Methods, Grid Based Methods, Model Based Clustering Methods, Clustering High
Dimensional Data, Constraint Based Cluster Analysis, Outlier Analysis.
UNIT IV
MINING STREAM, TIME-SERIES AND SEQUENCE DATA
9
Mining Data Streams, Mining Time-Series Data, Mining Sequence Patterns in Transactional
Databases, Mining Sequence Patterns in Biological Data, Graph Mining: Methods for Mining
Frequent Sub graphs, Mining Variant and Constrained Substructure Patterns, Applications.
UNIT V
MINING OBJECT, SPATIAL, MULTIMEDIA, TEXT AND WEB DATA
9
Multidimensional analysis and descriptive mining of complex data objects – Spatial data mining –
Multimedia Data mining – Text mining – Mining the World Wide Web- Applications of data mining
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Han J and Kamber M, “Data Mining : Concepts and Techniques” (Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. J.S.R.Jang, C.T.Sun and E.Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing”, PHI, Pearson
Education 2004.
2. Davis E.Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms: The Design of Innovation” Springer, 2012.
3. Laurene V. Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Architectures, Algorithms and
Applications”, Prentice Hall, 1994.
28
Regulations’
CCE3C
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION
9
UNIT II
REPRESENTATION, SELECTION AND SEARCH OPERATORS
9
operators.
UNIT III
FITNESS EVALUATION AND CONSTRAINT HANDLING
9
UNIT IV
HYBRID SYSTEM
9
optimization.
UNIT V
PARAMETER SETTING AND APPLICATIONS
9
Total 45 Periods
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Backetal., “Handbook on evolutionary computation”, Institute of Physics,
Publishing, 2000.
Publishing, 1999.
Wesley, 1998.
5. Kenneth A. De Jong, “Evolutionary Computation: A Unified Approach”, MIT Press, 2006.
29
CCE3D
CLOUD COMPUTING
Regulations’
L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To Understand the fundamentals of cloud computing
 To study about the web based applications in cloud
 To know about the use of cloud computing
UNIT I
UNDERSTANDING CLOUD COMPUTING
6
Cloud Computing – History of Cloud Computing – Cloud Architecture – Cloud Storage – Why Cloud
Computing Matters – Advantages of Cloud Computing – Disadvantages of Cloud Computing –
Companies in the Cloud Today – Cloud Services
UNIT II
DEVELOPING CLOUD SERVICES
10
Web-Based Application – Pros and Cons of Cloud Service Development – Types of Cloud Service
Development – Software as a Service – Platform as a Service – Web Services – On-Demand
Computing – Discovering Cloud Services Development Services and Tools – Amazon Ec2 – Google
App Engine – IBM Clouds
UNIT III
CLOUD COMPUTING FOR EVERYONE
10
Centralizing Email Communications – Collaborating on Schedules – Collaborating on To-Do Lists –
Collaborating Contact Lists – Cloud Computing for the Community – Collaborating on Group
Projects and Events – Cloud Computing for the Corporation
UNIT IV
USING CLOUD SERVICES
10
Collaborating on Calendars, Schedules and Task Management – Exploring Online Scheduling
Applications – Exploring Online Planning and Task Management – Collaborating on Event
Management – Collaborating on Contact Management – Collaborating on Project Management –
Collaborating on Word Processing - Collaborating on Databases – Storing and Sharing Files
UNIT V
OTHER WAYS TO COLLABORATE ONLINE
9
Collaborating via Web-Based Communication Tools – Evaluating Web Mail Services – Evaluating
Web Conference Tools – Collaborating via Social Networks and Groupware – Collaborating via
Blogs and Wikis
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Michael Miller, “Cloud Computing: Web-Based Applications That Change the Way You
Work and Collaborate Online”, Pearson Education, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Haley Beard, “Cloud Computing Best Practices for Managing and Measuring Processes for
On-demand Computing, Applications and Data Centers in the Cloud with SLAs”, Emereo Pty
Limited, 2nd Edition, 2009.
30
CCE3E
Regulations’
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES
 To discuss about the various key management and authentication techniques in WSN.
 To study about the operations of existing well known secure routing protocols in WSN.
 To have an idea about the different secured data aggregation mechanisms in WSN.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Communication architecture of WSN – Constraints – security requirements – Threats – evaluation –
attacks; Vulnerabilities of physical layer – jamming, tampering; Vulnerabilities of data link layer –
collisions, exhaustion, unfairness; Vulnerabilities of network layer - Spoofed, Altered, or Replayed
Acknowledgment Spoofing; Vulnerabilities of transport layer – Flooding, Desynchronization.
UNIT II
KEY
MANAGEMENT
PROTOCOLS
AND
BROADCAST
AUTHENTICATION
9
Key distribution – classifications: deterministic and probabilistic; protocols: LEAP, BROSK,
IOS/DMBS, PIKE, SKEW; Broadcast authentication: μTesla, Certificate-Based Authentication
UNIT III
9
SONS, SS-LEACH, INSENS
UNIT IV
DATA
AGGREGATION,
INTRUSION
DETECTION
AND
AUTOCONFIGURATION
9
Data Aggregation – plain text based secure data aggregation – SIA, SINP, ESPDA, SSDA, WDA;
cipher based secure data aggregation – CDA, HSC, Secure hierarchical data aggregation; Intrusion
Detection: IHOP, SEF, DIDS, Decentralized intrusion detection; Auto Configuration – LEADS,
UNIT V
TRUST MANAGEMENT
9
Trust model - Certificate based - Behavior based, Combinational approach; Trust based routing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
2. Yong Wang, Garhan Attebury and Byrav Ramamurthy, “A Survey of security issues in wireless
sensor networks” IEEE Communication Surveys & Tutorials, 2nd Quarter 2006.
3. Mohsen Sharifi, Saeid Peurroostaei Ardakani, Saeed Sedighian Kashi, “SKEW: An Efficient Self
Key Establishment Protocol for Wireless Sensor Networks”, IEEE 2009.
4. Kui Ren, Kai Zeng, Wenjing Lou and Patrick J.Moran, “On Broadcast Authentication in Wireless
Sensor Networks”, Proc. First International Conference on Wireless Algorithms, Systems, and
Applications, WASA 2006, Springer Publication.
5. Hani Alzaid, Ernest Foo and Juan Genzalez Nieto, “Secure Data Aggregation in Wireless Sensor
Network: a survey”, Australasian Information Security Conference (ACSC2008), Wollongong,
Australia, January 2008. Australian Computer Society Inc.
31
CCE3F
HIGH SPEED SWITCHING ARCHITECTURES
Regulations’
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 Introduction to Various high speed networks and its standards.
 To study the LAN and ATM switching architecture.
 To study the packet switching architectures and IP switching
UNIT I
LAN SWITCHING TECHNOLOGY
9
Switching Concepts, switch forwarding techniques, switch path control, LAN Switching, cut through
forwarding, store and forward, virtual LANs.
UNIT II
ATM SWITCHING ARCHITECTURE
9
Blocking networks, basic and enhanced banyan networks, sorting networks, merge sorting, rearrangable networks, full and partial connection networks, non blocking networks - Recursive
network construction, comparison of non-blocking network, Switching with deflection routing,
shuffle switch, tandem banyan switch.
UNIT III
QUEUES IN ATM SWITCHES
`
9
Internal Queueing, Input, output and shared queueing, multiple queueing networks, combined Input,
output and shared queueing, performance analysis of Queued switches.
UNIT IV
PACKET SWITCHING ARCHITECTURES
9
Architectures of Internet Switches and Routers, Bufferless and buffered Crossbar switches, Multistage switching, Optical Packet switching, switching fabric on a chip, internally buffered Crossbars.
UNIT V
IP SWITCHING
9
Addressing model, IP Switching types, flow driven and topology driven solutions, IP over ATM
address and next hop resolution, multicasting, IPV6 over ATM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Achille Pattavina, “Switching Theory: Architectures and performance in Broadband ATM
networks”, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, New York. 1998.
2. Itamar Elhanany and Mounir Hamdi, “High-performance Packet Switching Architectures”,
Springer Publications, 2011.
3. Rich Seifert and James Edwards, “The All-New Switch Book: The Complete Guide to LAN
Switching Technology”, 2nd Edition (Reprint), John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
4. Christopher Y.Metz , “IP Switching: Protocols and architectures”, McGraw Hill, 1999.
32
CCE3G
NEURAL NETWORKS AND ITS APPLICATIONS
(Common to CC & CS)
Regulations’
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about basic neural models and learning algorithms
 To impart knowledge about vector machines and basic function networks
 To learn about EM ALGORITHMS & non linear dynamical systems
 To learn about various neuron models
UNIT I
BASIC LEARNING ALGORITHMS
9
Biological Neuron – Artificial Neural Model – Types of activation functions – Architecture:
Feedforward and Feedback – Learning Process: Error Correction Learning – Memory Based
Learning – Hebbian Learning – Competitive Learning – Boltzman Learning – Supervised and
Unsupervised Learning – Learning Tasks: Pattern Space – Weight Space – Pattern Association –
Pattern Recognition – Function Approximation – Control – Filtering – Beamforming – Memory –
Adaptation – Statistical Learning Theory – Single Layer Perceptron – Perceptron Learning Algorithm
– Perceptron Convergence Theorem – Least Mean Square Learning Algorithm – Multilayer
Perceptron – Back Propagation Algorithm – XOR problem – Limitations of Back Propagation
Algorithm.
UNIT II
RADIAL BASIS FUNCTION NETWORKS AND SUPPORT VECTOR
MACHINES
9
Radial Basis Function Networks: Cover’s Theorem on the Separability of Patterns - Exact
Interpolator – Regularization Theory – Generalized Radial Basis Function Networks - Learning
in Radial Basis Function Networks - Applications: XOR Problem – Image Classification.
Support Vector Machine: Optimal Hyperplane for Linearly Separable Patterns and Nonseparable
Patterns – Support Vector Machine for Pattern Recognition – XOR Problem - -insensitive Loss
Function – Support Vector Machines for Nonlinear Regression
UNIT III
COMMITTEE MACHINES:
9
Ensemble Averaging - Boosting – Associative Gaussian Mixture Model – Hierarchical Mixture of
Experts Model (HME) – Model Selection using a Standard Decision Tree – A Priori and Postpriori
Probabilities – Maximum Likelihood Estimation – Learning Strategies for the HME Model - EM
Algorithm – Applications of EM Algorithm to HME Model
Neurodynamics Stems: Dynamical Systems – Attractors and Stability – Non-linear Dynamical
Systems - Lyapunov Stability – Neurodynamical Systems – The Cohen - Grossberg
UNIT IV
ATTRACTOR NEURAL NETWORKS
10
Associative Learning – Attractor Neural Network Associative Memory – Linear Associative Memory
– Hopfield Network – Content Addressable Memory – Strange Attractors and Chaos - Error
Performance of Hopfield Networks - Applications of Hopfield Networks – Simulated Annealing
– Boltzmann Machine – Bidirectional Associative Memory – BAM Stability Analysis – Error
Correction in BAMs – Memory Annihilation of Structured Maps in BAMS – Continuous BAMs
– Adaptive BAMs – Applications
ADAPTIVE RESONANCE THEORY
Noise-Saturation Dilemma - Solving Noise-Saturation Dilemma – Recurrent On-center – Offsurround Networks – Building Blocks of Adaptive Resonance – Substrate of Resonance
Structural Details of Resonance Model – Adaptive Resonance Theory – Applications
33
Regulations’
UNIT V
SELF ORGANISING MAPS
8
Self-organizing Map – Maximal Eigenvector Filtering – Sanger’s Rule – Generalized Learning
Law – Competitive Learning – Vector Quantization – Mexican Hat Networks - Self-organizing
Feature Maps – Applications
PULSED NEURON MODELS
Spiking Neuron Model – Integrate-and-Fire Neurons – Conductance Based Models –
Computing with Spiking Neurons.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Satish Kumar, “Neural Networks: A Classroom Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, Reprint 2007.
2. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks: A Comprehensive Foundation”, 2nd Edition, Addison
Wesley Longman (Singapore) Private Limited, Delhi, 2001.
REFERENCES:
1. Martin T.Hagan, Howard B. Demuth, and Mark Beale, “Neural Network Design”,
Thomson Learning, New Delhi, 2003.
2. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications and
Programming Techniques”, Pearson Education (Singapore) Private Limited, Delhi, 2003.
3. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks and Learning Machines”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009.
34
CCE3H
MODELING AND SIMULATION OF WIRELESS SYSTEMS
Regulations’
LTPC
30 0 3
OBJECTIVES
 To study about the simulation and verification techniques for generation of random numbers
and random variables.
 To understand about the simulation and modeling of communication channels and models.
 To estimate different parameters which are considered for simulation and analyses the
performance measures from simulation with some test cases.
UNIT I
SIMULATION OF RANDOM VARIABLES AND RANDOM PROCESS
9
Univariate and multi-variate models, Transformation of random variables, Bounds and approximation,
Random process models – Markov and ARMA sequences, Sampling rate for simulation, Computer
generation and testing of random numbers.
UNIT II
MODELING OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
9
Information Sources, Formatting/Source Coding, Digital Waveforms, Line Coding, Channel Coding,
Radio frequency and Optical Modulation, Demodulation and Detection, Filtering,
Multiplexing/Multiple Access, Synchronization, Calibration of Simulations.
UNIT III
COMMUNICATION CHANNELS AND MODELS
9
Fading and Multipath Channels, Almost Free-Space Channels, Finite State Channel Models,
Methodology for Simulating Communication Systems Operating over Fading Channels, Reference
Models for Mobile Channels: GSM, UMTS-IMT-2000.
UNIT IV
ESTIMATION OF PARAMETERS IN SIMULATION
9
Quality of an estimator, estimating the Average Level of a Waveform, Estimating the Average power
of a waveform, Estimating the Power Spectral Density of a process, Estimating the Delay and Phase.
UNIT V
ESTIMATION OF PERFORMANCE MEASURES FROM SIMULATION
9
Estimation of SNR, Performance Measures for Digital Systems, Importance sampling method,
Efficient Simulation using Importance Sampling, Quasianalytical Estimation. Case Studies: 16-QAM
Equalized Line of Sight Digital Radio Link, CDMA Cellular Radio System.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. M.C. Jeruchim, Philip Balaban and K.Sam Shanmugam, “Simulation of Communication
Systems Modeling, Methodology and Techniques”, 3rd Edition, Kluwer Academic/Plenum
Publishers, New York, 2000.
2. C. Britton Rorabaugh, “Simulating Wireless Communication Systems: Practical Models In
C++”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.
3. William H. Tranter, K. Sam Shanmugan, Theodore S. Rappaport, Kurt L. Kosbar, “Principles
of Communication Systems Simulation with Wireless Applications”, 3rd Edition, Prentice
Hall PTR, 2002.
4. John G. Proakis, Masoud Salehi, Gerhard Bauch, Bill Stenquist, Tom Ziolkowski,
“Contemporary Communication Systems Using MATLAB” Thomson-Engineering, 2nd
Edition, 2002.
35
CCE3J
XML AND WEB SERVICES
Regulations’
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES
 To understand the need of XML in web based systems.
 To learn the architecture of web services.
 To gain knowledge in protocols used in web services.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Role of XML – XML and the Web – XML Language Basics – Comparison with HTML – XML
Documents – Well-Formed XML Document – XML Elements – Types of Elements –
Attributes – Elements Vs Attributes – C DATA Sections.
UNIT II
XML TECHNOLOGY
9
XML – XML Schemas – Validating XML documents using XML Schema – Namespaces –
Structuring with Schemas – Presentation Techniques – Transformation Techniques.
UNIT III
WEB SERVICES
9
Overview – Architecture – Key Technologies – UDDI Data Structure – Business Entity – Business
Service – WSDL – Types, Messages, Ports, Bindings, Services.
UNIT IV
SOAP
9
Overview of SOAP – HTTP – XML – RPC – Message Structure – Intermediaries – Actors – Design
Patterns and Faults – SOAP with Attachments – SOAP and Web Services in E- Commerce.
UNIT V
XML SECURITY
9
Security Overview – Canonicalization – XML Security Framework – XML Encryption – XML
Digital Signature – XKMS Structure – Guidelines for Signing XML Documents – XML in Practice
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Michael Papazoglou, “Web Services: Principles and Technology”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall
of India, 2008.
2. Frank. P. Coyle, “XML, Web Services and the Data Revolution”, 1st Edition, Pearson
Education, 2002.
3. Ron Schmalzer, Travis Vandersypen, Jason Bloomberg, “XML and Web Services
Unleashed”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
4. Ramesh Nagappan, Robert Skoczylas and Rima Patel Sriganesh, “Developing Java Web
Services”, 2nd Edition, Wiley Technology Publishing, 2004.
5. Sandeep Chatterjee, James Webber, “Developing Enterprise Web Services”, 1st Edition,
Prentice Hall Professional, 2004
6. James McGovern, Sameer Tyagi, Michael Stevens and Sunil Mathew, “Java Web Services
Architecture”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2005.
36
www.nec.edu.in
REGULATIONS - 2013
DEPARTMENT OF
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
M.E. – HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING
Regulations’2013
Curriculum & Syllabi of M.E. (HVE)
M.E. HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING
SEMESTER I
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
THEORY
1
HVC11
Applied Mathematics for Electrical
Engineers
(Common to HVE, C&I and EST)
2
HVC12
Dielectric and Insulation Engineering
3
HVC13
Generation and Measurement of High
voltages
4
HVC14
Electrical Transients in Power System
5
HVC15
Electromagnetic Field Computation and
Modeling
6
HVC16
High Voltage Switchgear
PRACTICAL
7
HVC17
High Voltage Laboratory I
Total
S. No.
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
1
0
4
3
0
0
3
0
18
0
2
3
3
2
22
L
T
P
C
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
18
0
0
3
3
2
20
SEMESTER II
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
THEORY
1
HVC21
High Voltage Testing Technology
2
HVC22
EHVAC Transmission
3
HVC23
Insulation Design of High Voltage
Power Apparatus
4
Elective – I
5
Elective – II
6
Elective – III
PRACTICAL
7
HVC24
High Voltage Laboratory II
S. No.
Total
2
Regulations’2013
SEMESTER III
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
2
3
PRACTICAL
4
HVC31
S.No
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
Elective - IV
Elective - V
Elective - VI
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
Project Work (Phase – I)
0
9
0
0
12
12
6
15
L
T
P
C
0
0
0
0
24
24
12
12
Total
SEMESTER IV
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
PRACTICAL
1
HVC32
Project Work (Phase – II)
S. No
Total
II Semester (Elective I, II & III)
S.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
HVE2A Electromagnetic Interference and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (Common to HVE and C&I)
HVE2B Soft Computing Techniques
(Common to HVE and C&I)
HVE2C System Theory (Common to C&I and HVE)
HVE2D Analysis of Electrical Machines
HVE2E Special Electrical Machines
HVE2F Pulse Power Engineering
HVE2G Wind Energy Conversion Systems
HVE2H Power Electronics for Renewable Energy Systems
HVE2J
HVE2K
HVE2L
HVE2M
HVE2N
HVE2P
HVE2Q
HVE2R
Flexible AC Transmission Systems
Advanced Electromagnetic Fields
Restructured Power Systems
Power System Planning and Reliability
Power System Analysis
Modern Rectifiers and resonant Converters
Analysis of Power Converters
Power Electronics in Power Systems
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Regulations’2013
III Semester (Elective IV, V & VI)
S.
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
HVE3A Pollution Performance of Power Apparatus and
Systems
HVE3B Advanced Digital Signal Processing
(Common to CS,CC,HVE and C&I)
HVE3C Evolutionary Computing
(Common to HVE,CSE,CS and CC)
HVE3D Advanced Digital System Design
(Common to C&I and HVE)
HVE3E High Voltage Direct Current Transmission
HVE3F Power Quality
HVE3G Power System Operation and Control
HVE3H Control of Electric Drives
HVE3J
Design of Embedded Systems
HVE3K Applications of MEMS Technology
HVE3L Microcontroller and DSP based System Design
HVE3M Reactive Power Compensation and
Management
HVE3N Computer Aided Design of Power Electronics
Circuits
HVE3P Collision Phenomenon
HVE3Q Computer Aided Design of Instrumentation
Systems
HVE3R Condition Monitoring of High Voltage Power
Apparatus
HVE3S Advanced Topics in High Voltage Engineering
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
4
Regulations’2013
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI OF PART TIME
M.E. HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING
SEMESTER I
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE
No
CODE
THEORY
1
HVC11
(Common to HVE, C&I and EST)
2
HVC12
Dielectric and Insulation Engineering
3
HVC13
Generation and Measurement of High
voltages
TOTAL
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
9
1
0
10
L
T
P
C
3
3
0
1
0
0
3
4
3
0
0
3
9
1
0
10
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
0
9
0
0
3
3
2
11
SEMESTER II
S.
No
1
2
3
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
HVC21
High Voltage Testing Technology
HVC22
EHVAC Transmission
HVC23
Insulation Design of High Voltage Power
Apparatus
TOTAL
SEMESTER III
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE
No
CODE
THEORY
1
HVC14
Electrical Transients in Power System
2
HVC15
Electromagnetic Field Computation and
Modeling
3
HVC16
High Voltage Switchgear
PRACTICAL
4
HVC17
High Voltage Laboratory I
TOTAL
5
Regulations’2013
SEMESTER IV
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
2
3
PRACTICAL
4
HVC24
S. No
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
Elective – I
Elective – II
Elective – III
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
High Voltage Laboratory II
0
9
0
0
3
3
2
11
TOTAL
IV Semester (Elective I, II & III)
S.
No
1
COURSE
CODE
HVE2A
2
HVE2B
3
HVE2C
4
5
6
7
8
HVE2D
HVE2E
HVE2F
HVE2G
HVE2H
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
HVE2J
HVE2K
HVE2L
HVE2M
HVE2N
HVE2P
HVE2Q
HVE2R
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
Electromagnetic Interference and
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Soft Computing Techniques
System Theory (Common to C&I and
HVE)
Analysis of Electrical Machines
Special Electrical Machines
Pulse Power Engineering
Wind Energy Conversion Systems
Power Electronics for Renewable Energy
Systems
Flexible AC Transmission Systems
Advanced Electromagnetic Fields
Restructured Power Systems
Power System Planning and Reliability
Power System Analysis
Modern Rectifiers and resonant Converters
Analysis of Power Converters
Power Electronics in Power Systems
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
Regulations’2013
SEMESTER V
S.No
COURSE
CODE
THEORY
1
2
3
PRACTICAL
4
HVC31
COURSE TITLE
Elective - IV
Elective - V
Elective - VI
Project Work (Phase – I)
Total
L
T
P
C
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
9
0
0
12
12
6
15
SEMESTER VI
COURSE
CODE
PRACTICAL
1
HVC32
S. No
COURSE TITLE
Project Work (Phase – II)
Total
L
T
P
C
0
0
0
0
24
24
12
12
7
Regulations’2013
V SEMESTER (Elective IV, V & VI)
S.
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
COURSE
COURSE TITLE
CODE
HVE3A Pollution Performance of Power Apparatus and
Systems
HVE3B Advanced Digital Signal Processing
(Common to CS,CC,HVE and C&I)
HVE3C Evolutionary Computing
(Common to HVE,CSE,CS and CC)
HVE3D Advanced Digital System Design
HVE3E High Voltage Direct Current Transmission
HVE3F Power Quality
HVE3G Power System Operation and Control
HVE3H Control of Electric Drives
HVE3J
HVE3K Applications of MEMS Technology
HVE3L Microcontroller and DSP based System Design
HVE3M Reactive Power Compensation and
Management
HVE3N Computer Aided Design of Power Electronics
Circuits
HVE3P Collision Phenomenon
HVE3Q Computer Aided Design of Instrumentation
Systems
HVE3R Condition Monitoring of High Voltage Power
Apparatus
HVE3S Advanced Topics in High Voltage Engineering
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
8
Regulations’2013
HVC11
APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
(Common to HVE, C&I, EST)
LTPC
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES
 To learn the concepts of matrix theory
 To understand simplex method, two phase method and graphical solution in linear
programming.
 To learn moment generating functions and one dimensional random variables.
 To understand queueing models and computation methods in engineering
UNIT I
9
Eigen-values using QR transformations – Generalized eigen vectors – Canonical forms – Singular
value decomposition and applications – Pseudo inverse – Least square approximations.
UNIT II
LINEAR PROGRAMMING
9
Formulation – Graphical Solution – Simplex Method – Two Phase Method – Transportation and
UNIT III
9
properties – Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions –
Function of a Random Variable.
UNIT IV
QUEUEING MODELS
9
Poisson Process – Markovian queues – Single and Multi Server Models – Little’s formula – Machine
Interference Model – Steady State analysis – Self Service queue.
UNIT V
9
Boundary value problems for ODE – Finite difference methods – Numerical solution of PDE –
Solution of Laplace and Poisson equations – Liebmann's iteration process – Solution of heat
conduction equation by Schmidt explicit formula and Crank - Nicolson implicit scheme – Solution of
wave equation.
L: 45
T: 15
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bronson,R., “Matrix Operation, Schaum’s outline series”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1989.
2. Taha, H. A., “Operations Research: An Introduction”, 7th Edition, Pearson Education Edition,
3. R. E. Walpole, R. H. Myers, S. L. Myers, and K. Ye, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers
& Scientists”, 8th Edition, Asia, 2007.
Wiley and Sons, New York 1985.
5. Grewal, B.S., “Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, 7th Edition, Khanna
Publishers, 2000.
9
Regulations’2013
HVC12
DIELECTRIC AND INSULATION ENGINEERING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the general properties of insulating materials.
 To know the concept of various breakdown mechanism in gaseous dielectrics.
 To know the concept of various breakdown mechanism in solid dielectrics.
 To know the concept of various breakdown mechanism in liquid dielectrics.
 To understand the application of different insulating materials in electrical equipments.
UNIT I GENERAL PROPERTIES OF INSULATING MATERIALS
9
Requirements of insulating materials – electrical properties – molecular properties of
dielectrics – dependence of permittivity on temperature, pressure, humidity and voltage, permittivity
of mixtures, practical importance of permittivity – behavior of dielectric under alternating fields –
complex dielectric constants – bipolar relaxation and dielectric loss - dielectric strength.
UNIT II BREAKDOWN MECHANISMS IN GASEOUS DIELECTRICS
9
Behaviour of gaseous dielectrics in electric fields – gaseous discharges – different ionization
processes – effect of electrodes on gaseous discharge – Townsend’s theory - Streamer theory –
electronegative gases and their influence on gaseous discharge – Townsend’s criterion for spark
breakdown, gaseous discharges in non-uniform fields – breakdown in vacuum insulation.
UNIT III BREAKDOWN MECHANISMS IN SOLID DIELECTRICS
9
Intrinsic breakdown of solid dielectrics – electromechanical breakdown-Streamer breakdown, thermal
breakdown and partial discharges in solid dielectrics - electrochemical breakdown – tracking and
treeing – classification of solid dielectrics, composite insulation and its mechanism of failure.
UNIT IV BREAKDOWN MECHANISMS IN LIQUID DIELECTRICS
9
Liquids as insulators - conduction and breakdown in pure and commercial liquids - Cryogenic
insulation.
UNIT V APPLICATION OF INSULATING MATERIALS
9
Application of insulating materials in transformers, rotating machines, circuit breakers, cables, power
capacitors and bushings.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Adrinaus, Dekker J., “Electrical Engineering Materials”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1979.
2. Alston L.L, “High Voltage Technology”, Oxford University Press, London, 1968 (B.S
Publications, First Indian Edition 2006).
3. Kuffel E., Zaengl W.S. and Kuffel J., “High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals”, Elsvier
India Pvt. Ltd, 2005.
4. Dieter Kind and Hermann Karner, “High Voltage Insulation Technology”, (Translated from
German by Narayana Rao Y., Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn, Braunschweig), 1985.
5. Naidu M.S. and Kamaraju V., “High Voltage Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
6. Ushakov V.Y., “Insulation of High Voltage Equipment”, Springer, ISBN.3-540-20729- 5,
2004.
10
Regulations’2013
HVC13
GENERATION AND MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To understand the various types of high voltages in power system and protection
methods.
 To study the various methods for generation of AC, DC and impulse voltage.
 To learn the various measurement techniques of AC, DC and impulse voltage.
 To know the various methods for generation and measurement of impulse currents.
UNIT I GENERATION OF DIRECT VOLTAGES
9
Generation and transmission of electric energy – voltage stress – testing voltages-AC to DC
conversion – single phase rectifier circuits – cascaded circuits – voltage multiplier circuits – CockroftWalton circuits – voltage regulation – ripple factor – Design of HVDC generator – Vande-Graff
generator.
UNIT II GENERATION OF ALTERNATING VOLTAGES
9
Testing transformer – single unit testing transformer, cascaded transformer – equivalent circuit of
cascaded transformer – series resonance circuit – resonant transformer – voltage regulation.
UNIT III GENERATION OF IMPULSE VOLTAGES
9
Marx generator – Impulse voltage generator circuit – analysis of various impulse voltage generator
circuits – multistage impulse generator circuits – Switching impulse generator
circuits – impulse
current generator circuits – generation of non-standard impulse voltages and nanosecond pulses.
UNIT IV MEASURMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES
9
Peak voltage measurements by sphere gaps – Electrostatic voltmeter – generating voltmeters and field
sensors – Chubb - Fortescue method – voltage dividers and impulse voltage measurements.
UNIT V GENERATION AND MEASUREMENT OF IMPULSE CURRENTS
9
Generation of impulse currents, measurement of impulse currents – Resistive shunts, Hall Generators
and Faraday generators and their applications – measurement using magnetic coupling - Fast digital
transient recorders for impulse measurements.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kuffel E., Zaengl W. S. and Kuffel J., “High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals”, Elsevier
2. Dieter Kind, Kurt Feser, “High Voltage Test Techniques”, SBA Electrical Engineering
Series, New Delhi, 2001.
3. Naidu M.S. and Kamaraju V., “High Voltage Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
4. Gallagher T.J., and Permain A., “High Voltage Measurement, Testing and Design”, John
Wiley Sons, New York, 1983.
5. Mazen Abdel Salam R., Hussein Anis, Ahdab El-Morshedy, Roshdy Radwan, “High Voltage
Engineering Theory and Practice” Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, Second Edition (Revised
and Expanded), 2000.
6. Malik N.H.,.Al-Arainy A.A, Qureshi M.I., “Electrical Insulation in Power Systems”, Marcel
Dekker, Inc., New York 1997.
7. Adolf J. Schwab, “High Voltage Measurement Techniques”, M.I.T Press, ANSI, IEEE STD,
Sixth Edition, 1978.
11
Regulations’2013
HVC14
ELECTRICAL TRANSIENTS IN POWER SYSTEM
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To understand the concept of travelling waves on transmission line.
 To solve transient problems in power networks and components.
 To learn the basic concepts of lightning and switching and temporary over voltages.
 To understand the behavior of electrical equipments under transient conditions.
 To learn how to design the insulation coordination of different types of sub stations.
UNIT I TRAVELLING WAVES ON TRANSMISSION LINE
9
Lumped and Distributed Parameters – Wave Equation – Reflection - Refraction - Behaviour of
Travelling waves at the line terminations – Lattice Diagrams – Attenuation and Distortion – Multi
conductor system and Velocity wave.
UNIT II COMPUTATION OF POWER SYSTEM TRANSIENTS
9
Principle of digital computation – Matrix method of solution - Modal analysis - Z transforms Computation using EMTP, MNA Program– Simulation of switches and non-linear elements.
UNIT III LIGHTNING, SWITCHING AND TEMPORARY OVERVOLTAGES
9
Lightning: Physical phenomena of lightning – Interaction between lightning and power system –
Factors contributing to line design – Switching: Short line or kilometric fault – Energizing transients closing and re-closing of lines - line dropping, load rejection – Voltage induced by fault – Very Fast
Transient Overvoltage (VFTO).
UNIT IV BEHAVIOUR OF WINDING UNDER TRANSIENT CONDITION
9
Initial and Final voltage distribution - Winding oscillation - traveling wave solution -Behaviour of the
transformer core under surge condition – Rotating machine – Surge in generator and motor.
UNIT V INSULATION CO-ORDINATION
9
Principle of insulation co-ordination in Air Insulated Substation (AIS) and Gas Insulated Substation
(GIS) - insulation level - statistical approach - co-ordination between insulation and protection level –
overvoltage protective devices – lightning arresters - substation earthing.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pritindra Chowdhari, “Electromagnetic transients in Power System”, John Wiley and Sons
Inc., 1996.
2. Allan Greenwood, “Electrical Transients in Power System”, Wiley & Sons Inc. New York,
1991.
3. Klaus Ragaller, “Surges in High Voltage Networks”, Plenum Press, New York, 1980.
4. Rakosh Das Begamudre, “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”, New Age
International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, Second Edition, 2011.
5. Naidu M.S and Kamaraju V., “High Voltage Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
6. IEEE Guide for safety in AC substation grounding IEEE Standard 80-2000.
7. Working Group 33/13-09, “Very fast transient phenomena associated with Gas Insulated
System”, CIGRE, 33-13, pp. 1-20, 1988.
12
Regulations’2013
HVC15
ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD COMPUTATION AND
MODELING
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
OBJECTIVES
 To learn the basic concepts in electric and magnetic fields.
 To learn how to find the solutions of electro static boundary value problems.
 To find the field computations of basic configurations.
 To put into practice the FE method to analyze and design electrical machines and apparatus.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
12
Review of basic field theory – electric and magnetic fields – Maxwell’s equations –Laplace, Poisson
and Helmoltz equations – principle of energy conversion – force/torque calculation – Electro thermal
formulation.
UNIT II SOLUTION OF FIELD EQUATIONS I
12
Limitations of the conventional design procedure need for the field analysis based design, problem
definition and solution by analytical methods-direct integration method – variable separable method –
method of images, solution by numerical methods- Finite Difference Method.
UNIT III SOLUTION OF FIELD EQUATIONS II
12
Finite element method (FEM) – Differential/ integral functions – Variational method –Energy
minimization – Discretisation – Shape functions –Stiffness matrix –1D and 2D planar and axial
symmetry problem.
UNIT IV FIELD COMPUTATION FOR BASIC CONFIGURATIONS
12
Computation of electric and magnetic field intensities– Capacitance and Inductance –Force, Torque,
Energy for basic configurations.
UNIT V DESIGN APPLICATIONS
Insulators- Bushings – Cylindrical magnetic actuators – Transformers – Rotating machines.
12
L =45 T = 15 Total = 60 Periods
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Binns K.J., Lawrenson P.J. and Trowbridge C.W, “The analytical and numerical solution of
Electric and magnetic fields”, John Wiley & Sons, 1993.
2. Nathan Ida and Joao Bastos P.A., “Electromagnetics and calculation of fields”, SpringerVerlage, Second Edition, 2002.
3. Nicola Biyanchi, “Electrical Machine analysis using Finite Elements”, Taylor and Francis
Group, CRC Publishers, 2005.
4. Salon S.J., “Finite Element Analysis of Electrical Machines.” Kluwer Academic Publishers,
London, 1995(distributed by TBH Publishers & Distributors, Chennai, India).
5. User manuals of MAGNET, MAXWELL & ANSYS software.
6. Silvester and Ferrari, “Finite Elements for Electrical Engineers” Cambridge University press,
Third Edition, 1996.
7. Marcel Dector “Finite Element Analysis of Electrical Machines.” Tata McGraw-Hill Edition
2003.
8. William Hayt, “Engineering Electromagnetics” Tata McGraw-Hill Edition 2012.
9. Mathew Sadiku,“Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press, Ninth Edition,
2007.
10. Bhag Singh Guru, Hüseyin R. Hızıroğlu, “Electromagnetic Field Theory Fundamentals”,
13
Regulations’2013
HVC16
HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To discuss the causes of abnormal operating conditions (faults, lightning and switching
surges) of the apparatus and system.
 To understand the characteristics and functions of relays and protection schemes.
 To understand the problems associated with circuit interruption by a circuit breaker.
 To study about the testing and types of circuit breakers.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Insulation of switchgear - coordination between inner and external insulation, Insulation clearances in
air, oil, SF6 and vacuum, bushing insulation, solid insulating materials – dielectric and mechanical
strength consideration.
UNIT II CIRCUIT INTERRUPTION
9
Switchgear terminology – Arc characteristics – direct and alternating current interruption – arc
quenching phenomena – computer simulation of arc models – transient re-striking voltage – RRRVrecovery voltage-current chopping-capacitive current breaking-auto reclosing.
UNIT III SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS AND RATING OF CIRCUIT 9
BREAKERS
Types of faults in power systems-short circuit current and short circuit MVA calculations for different
types of faults-rating of circuit breakers – symmetrical and asymmetrical ratings.
UNIT IV TYPES OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
9
Classification of circuit breakers-design, construction and operating principles of bulk oil, minimum
oil, air blast, SF6 and vacuum circuit breakers – Comparison of different types of circuit breakers.
UNIT V TESTING OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
9
Type tests and routine tests – short circuit testing - synthetic testing of circuit breakers - recent
advancements in high voltage circuit breakers.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chunikhin, A. and Zhavoronkov, M., “High Voltage Switchgear Analysis and Design”, Mir
Publishers, Moscow, 1989.
2. Kuffel, E., Zaengl, W.S. and Kuffel J., “High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals”, Elsvier
3. Flursscheim, C.H. (Editor), “Power Circuit Breaker-Theory and Design”, IEE Monograph
Series 17, Peter Peregrinus Ltd., Southgate House, Stevenage, Herts, SC1 1HQ, England,
1982.
4. Ananthakrishnan S and Guruprasad K.P., “Transient Recovery Voltage and Circuit Breakers”,
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.
5. Funio Nakanishi, “Switching Phenomena in High Voltage Circuit Breakers”, Marcel Dekker
Inc., New York, 1991.
14
Regulations’2013
HVC17
HIGH VOLTAGE LABORATORY I
L
0
T
0
P
3
C
2
1. Basics of Dielectrics Laboratory
2. Measurement of dielectric strength of liquid dielectric (Transformer Oil)
3. Measurement of Loss angle and resistivity of liquid dielectric (Transformer Oil)
4. Measurement of Flash point & Fire point of liquid dielectrics
5. Measurement of Viscosity of liquid dielectrics
6. Measurement of pH
7. Measurement of Conductivity of samples
8. FEM Simulation of different electrode configurations
9. FEM Simulation of single and composite dielectrics field distribution
10. Simulation of Lightning and Switching Impulse voltage generator
11. Simulation of RL,RC and RLC-DC transient circuit
12. Analyzing Field distribution of dielectric in Rogowski Profile, 11 kV disc insulator and
coaxial cable
Total = 45 Periods
15
Regulations’2013
HVC21
HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING TECHNOLOGY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To brief concept about the various classification of testing methods, measurement
techniques and standards.
 To learn statistical evalution of distribution function, confidence limits and up and down
method.
 To study the testing techniques of various types of electrical equipments.
 To study the partial discharge measurements, corona and RIV measurements.
To know pollution tests and design of high voltage lab.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Objectives of high voltage testing - classification of testing methods- self restoration and non-self
restoration systems-standards and specifications - measurement techniques - Diagnostic testing online measurement.
UNIT II STATISTICAL EVALUTION OF MEASURED RESULTS
9
Determination of probability values - Distribution function of a measured quantity, confidence limits
of the mean values of disruptive discharges - ‘Up and Down’ method for determining the 50%
disruptive discharge voltage - multi stress ageing - life data analysis.
UNIT III TESTING TECHNIQUES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
9
Testing of insulators, bushings, air break switches, isolators, circuit breakers, power transformers,
voltage transformers, current transformers, surge diverters, cable – testing methodology - recording of
oscillograms - interpretation of test results.
UNIT IV NON-DESTRUCTIVE INSULATION TEST TECHNIQUES
9
Dynamic properties of dielectrics-dielectric loss and capacitance measurement - partial discharge
measurements - PD equivalent model – PD quantities - Digital PD instruments and measurements acoustic emission technique and UHF Techniques for PD identification - Corona and RIV
measurements.
UNIT V POLLUTION TESTS AND DESIGN OF HIGH VOLTAGE LAB
9
Artificial Pollution tests- salt-fog method, solid layer method - Dimensions of High voltage
laboratory, equipment - fencing, earthing and shielding - circuits for high voltage experiments.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Dieter Kind, Kurt Feser, “High Voltage Test Techniques”, SBA Electrical Engineering Series,
New Delhi, 1999.
2. Naidu M.S. and Kamaraju V., “High voltage Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
India P Ltd, 2005.
4. Gallagher T.J. and Pearmain A., “High Voltage Measurements, Testing and Design”, John
Willey & Sons, New York, 1983.
5. IS, IEC and IEEE standards for Dielectric Testing of High Voltage Apparatus.
6. Nelson W., “Applied Life Data Analysis”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1982.
7. Kennedy W., “Recommended Dielectric Tests and Test Procedures for Converter
Transformer and Smoothing Reactors”, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol.1, No. 3,
pp. 161-166, 1986.
8. IEC – 60270, “HV Test technique – Partial Discharge Mechanism”, 3rd Edition, December
2000.
9. Judd M.D., Liyang and Ian BB Hunter, “P.D Monitoring of Power Transformers using UHF
Sensors” Vol.21, No.2, pp. 5-14, 2004.
16
Regulations’2013
HVC22
EHVAC TRANSMISSION
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the role of EHV AC Transmission and Mechanical considerations in line parameters.
 To know the calculation methods of the line parameters for multiconductor lines.
 To learn surface voltage gradient and distribution of voltage gradient for multiconductor lines.
 To study the concepts of generation of audible noise and corona pulse, limitation of radio
interference.
 To understand the effect of electrostatic field on humans and vehicles and calculation of
electrostatic field of AC lines and unenergised circuit of D/C line.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
EHVAC Transmission - line trends and preliminary aspects - standard transmission voltages – power
handling capacities and line losses – mechanical aspects.
UNIT II CALCULATION OF LINE PARAMETERS
9
Calculation of resistance, inductance and capacitance for multi-conductor lines – calculation of
sequence inductances and capacitances – line parameters for different modes of propagation –
resistance and inductance of ground return - numerical example involving a typical 400/220kV line
using line constant program.
UNIT III VOLTAGE GRADIENTS OF CONDUCTORS
9
Charge-potential relations for multi-conductor lines – surface voltage gradient on conductors –
gradient factors and their use – distribution of voltage gradient on sub conductors of bundle - voltage
gradients on conductors in the presence of ground wires on towers.
UNIT IV CORONA EFFECTS
9
2
Power losses and audible losses: I R loss and corona loss - audible noise generation and
characteristics - limits for audible noise - Day-Night equivalent noise level- radio interference corona pulse generation and properties - limits for radio interference fields.
UNIT V ELECTROSTATIC FIELD OF EHV LINES
9
Effect of EHV line on heavy vehicles - calculation of electrostatic field of AC lines - effect of high
field on humans, animals, and plants - measurement of electrostatic fields –electrostatic induction in
un-energized circuit of a D/C line - induced voltages in insulated ground wires - electromagnetic
interference.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rakosh Das Begamudre, “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd., Second Edition, 2011.
2. Power Engineer’s Handbook, TNEB Engineers’ Association, Revised and Enlarged Sixth
Edition, October 2002.
3. Microtran Power System Analysis Corporation, Microtran Reference Manual, Vancouver
Canada. (Website: www.microtran.com).
17
Regulations’2013
HVC23
INSULATION DESIGN OF HIGH VOLTAGE POWER
APPARATUS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the arrangements of the insulation systems and electric field distribution in
homogeneous and multi dielectric istropic material.
 To study the design principles and classifications insulators, capacitors and bushings.
 To learn insulation schemes and design of transformer.
 To study the design of instrumental transformers and cables joints.
 To know the characteristics and types of surge arresters.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Basic arrangements of the insulation systems - factors affecting the performance of dielectric
materials - Electric field distribution-utilization factor - field in homogeneous and multi dielectric
isotropic material.
UNIT II DESIGN OF INSULATORS, BUSHINGS AND CAPACITORS
9
Basic configurations - Classification based on insulating materials and application - design principles.
UNIT III INSULATION DESIGN OF POWER TRANSFORMERS
9
Insulation schemes in transformer - design of transformer windings - surge phenomena in transformer
windings - effect of series and shunt capacitance and stress control techniques.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS AND CABLE JOINTS
9
Classification based on insulating materials and design of potential and current transformers - Types
of cable joints and terminations-capacitive grading- non-linear resistive grading.
UNIT V SURGE ARRESTER
9
Types of surge arresters - gapped and gapless - electrical characteristics – housing materials pollution performance - modeling of arrestor - insulation co-ordination.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Dieter Kind and Hermann Karner, “High Voltage Insulation Technology”, translated from
German by Y.Narayana Rao, Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn, Braunschweig, 1985.
2. Kuffel E., Zaengl W.S. and Kuffel J., “High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals”, Elsevier
India Pvt. Ltd, 2005
3. Alston L.L., “High Voltage Technology”, Oxford University Press, London 2006.
4. Karsai K., Kerenyi D. and Kiss L., “Large Power Transformers”, Elsevier, Armsterdam,
1987.
5. Feinberg R., “Modern Power Transformer Practice”, Macmillan Press Ltd., New York, 1979.
6. Franklin A.C. and Franklin J.S.C., “The J & P Transformer Book”, Butterworth- Heinmann,
New Delhi, Eleventh Edition, 1995.
7. Minoo Mobedjina, Bengt Johnnerfelt, Lennart Stenstrom, “Design and testing of polymer –
housed surge arrester”, GCC CIGRE 9th Symposium, 1998.
8. Steinfield K., Krusha B. and Welsh W., “Manufacturing and Application of Cage Design
High Voltage Metaloxide Surge Arresters” XIII International Symposium on High Voltage
Engineering, Netherland, 2003.
9. Dr.Ahmed Zahedi, “Effect of Day Band on Performance of UHV Surge Arrester and
Leakage Current Monitoring using New Developed Model,” paper 7237,Proceedings of the
4th International Conference on Properties and Application of Dielectric Materials, Brishane
Australia, 1994.
18
Regulations’2013
HVC24
HIGH VOLTAGE LABORATORY II
L
0
T
0
P
3
C
2
1. Basics of High Voltage lab
2. Measurement of dielectric strength of solid dielectric (Rubber gloves)
3. Measurement of capacitance and tan delta using high voltage Schering Bridge
4. Generation and measurement of AC, DC and Impulse voltage
5. Breakdown measurement of gaseous dielectric under AC Voltage
6. Breakdown measurement of gaseous dielectric under DC Voltage
7. Measurement of Partial discharge in dielectric using Partial Discharge Meter
8. Measurement of total harmonics distortion (THD) using harmonic analyzer
9. Earth resistance measurement
10. Power frequency test on Insulators
11. Power frequency test on Cables
12. Lightning Impulse voltage test on 11kV Pin type insulator
13. Lightning Impulse voltage test on 11kV Disc type insulator
Total = 45 Periods
19
Regulations’2013
HVE2A
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study characteristics and design of electromagnetic compatibility and methods of
eliminating interferences.
 To learn coupling, grounding and guard shields.
 To know filtering, shielding and methods of coating.
 To study digital logic noise and digital circuit ground noise.
 To learn electrostatic discharge, standards and laboratory techniques.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Sources of EMI - Conducted and radiated interference - Characteristics - Designing for
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - EMC regulation - typical noise path - use of network theory methods of eliminating interferences.
UNIT II METHOD OF HARDENING
9
Cabling – capacitive coupling - inductive coupling - shielding to prevent magnetic radiation - shield
transfer impedance - Grounding – safety grounds – signal grounds - single point and multipoint
ground systems- hybrid grounds - functional ground layout – grounding of cable shields- ground
loops - guard shields.
UNIT III BALANCING, FILTERING AND SHIELDING
9
Power supply decoupling - decoupling filters-amplifier filtering – high frequency filtering shielding
– near and far fields - shielding effectiveness - absorption and reflection loss - Shielding with
magnetic material - conductive gaskets - windows and coatings - grounding of shields.
UNIT IV DIGITAL CIRCUIT NOISE AND LAYOUT
9
Frequency versus time domain - analog versus digital circuits - digital logic noise- internal noise
sources - digital circuit ground noise – power distribution - noise voltage objectives measuring noise
voltages - unused inputs - logic families.
UNIT V ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE, STANDARDS AND LABORATORY
9
TECHNIQUES
Static Generation - human body model - static discharges -ED protection in equipment design - ESD
versus EMC - Industrial and Government standards – FCC requirements – CISPR recommendations
- Laboratory techniques - Measurement methods for field strength - EMI.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Henry W.Ott, “Noise reduction techniques in electronic systems”, John Wiley &Sons, 2011.
2. Bernhard Keiser, “Principles of Electro-magnetic Compatibility”, Artech House, Inc. (685
canton street, Norwood, MA 020062 USA) 1987.
3. Bridges J.E., Milleta J. and Ricketts L.W., “EMP Radiation and Protective techniques”, John
Wiley and sons, USA 1976.
4. IEEE National Symposium on “Electromagnetic Compatibility”, IEEE, 445, Hoes Lane,
Piscataway, NJ 08854. USA.
20
Regulations’2013
HVE2B
SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To understand the fundamental concept of intelligent control.
 To study about the applications of ANN, various transformations and its controllers.
 To aware about the fuzzy logic system and to design a various control schemes for nonlinear systems.
 To understand the basic concepts of genetic algorithms.
 To study about the applications of GA, ANN and Fuzzy logic system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Approaches to intelligent control - Architecture for intelligent control - Symbolic reasoning systemrule-based systems - AI approach - Knowledge representation - Expert systems.
UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS
9
Concept of Artificial Neural Networks and its basic mathematical model, McCulloch-Pitts neuron
model - simple perceptron - Adaline and Madaline - Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron. Learning
and Training the neural network - Data Processing: Scaling, Fourier transformation, principalcomponent analysis and wavelet transformations - Hopfield network, Self-organizing network and
Recurrent network - Neural Network based controller.
UNIT III FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM
9
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets - basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning Introduction to fuzzy logic modeling and control - Fuzzification, inferencing and defuzzification Fuzzy knowledge and rule bases. Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for nonlinear systems - Selforganizing fuzzy logic control - Fuzzy logic control for nonlinear time-delay system.
UNIT IV GENETIC ALGORITHM
9
Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detail algorithmic steps - adjustment of free parameters Solution of typical control problems using genetic algorithm - Concept on some other search
techniques like tabu search and ant-colony search techniques for solving optimization problems.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS
9
GA application to power system optimization problem - Case studies: Identification and control of
linear and nonlinear dynamic systems using Matlab - Neural Network toolbox - Stability analysis of
Neural-Network interconnection systems - Implementation of fuzzy logic controller using Matlab
fuzzy-logic toolbox - Stability analysis of fuzzy control systems.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jacek M Zurada, "Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems", Jaico Publishing House, 1999.
2. Kosko.B, "Neural Networks And Fuzzy Systems", Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd., 1994.
3. Klir G.J. and Folger T.A., "Fuzzy sets, Uncertainty and Information", Prentice-Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd., 1993.
4. Zimmerman H.J., "Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications"-Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.
5. Driankov and Hellendroon, "Introduction to Fuzzy Control", Narosa Publishers, 2001.
21
Regulations’2013
HVE2C
SYSTEM THEORY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
The student can able
 To design a state space model for a system
 To determine the controllability, observability, and stability of state variable systems.
 To use state variable feedback to place systems poles.
 To design state variable observers and controllers.
UNIT I MODERN CONTROL THEORY
9
Limitations of conventional control theory - Concepts of state, State variables and state model – state
model for linear time invariant systems: State space representation using physical-Phase and
canonical variables.
UNIT II SYSTEM RESPONSE
9
Transfer function from state model - Transfer matrix - Decomposition of transfer functions Direct,
cascade and parallel decomposition techniques - Solution of state equation - State transition matrix
computation.
UNIT III SYSTEM MODELS
9
Characteristic equation - Eigen values and Eigen vectors - Invariance of Eigen values Diagonalization - Jordan Canonical form - Concepts of controllability and observability
Kalman's and Gilbert's tests - Controllable and observable phase variable forms - Effect of pole-zero
cancellation on controllability and observability.
UNIT IV MODEL CONTROL
9
Introduction – Stability improvement by State Feedback – Necessary and sufficient conditions for
Arbitary Pole Placement - Pole Placement by State Feedback - Full-Order Observers - ReducedOrder Observers - Deadbeat Control by State Feedback - Deadbeat Observers.
UNIT V LIAPUNOV STABILITY
9
Liapunov stability analysis - Stability in the sense of Liapunov - Definiteness of Scalar Functions –
Quadratic forms - Second method of Liapunov - Liapunov stability analysis of linear time invariant
systems.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, "Modern Control Engineering", 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India Private
Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
2. Nagrath I J and Gopal M, "Control Systems Engineering", New Age International
Publisher, New Delhi, 2006.
3. Nise S Norman, “Control Systems Engineering”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc,
Delhi, 2000.
4. Benjamin C Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Delhi, 2002.
22
Regulations’2013
HVE2D
ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the conversion characteristic of Electro Magnetic Energy conversion with the help
of single and doubly excited system.
 To study the fundamentals of reference frame and its transformation.
 To evaluate the steady state and dynamic characteristic of DC machines.
 To analyze the steady state and dynamic characteristic of Induction Machines using reference
frame variables.
 To study the steady state analysis, dynamic characteristic with computer simulation.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY CONVERSION
9
General expression of stored magnetic energy - co-energy and force/ torque – example using single
and doubly excited system – Calculation of air gap mmf and per phase machine inductance using
physical machine data.
UNIT II REFERENCE FRAME THEORY
9
Static and rotating reference frames – transformation of variables – reference frames– transformation
between reference frames – transformation of a balanced set – balanced steady state phasor and
voltage equations – variables observed from several frames of reference.
UNIT III DC MACHINES
9
Voltage and toque equations – dynamic characteristics of permanent magnet and shunt DC motors –
state equations - solution of dynamic characteristic by Laplace transformation.
UNIT IV INDUCTION MACHINES
9
Voltage and toque equations – transformation for rotor circuits – voltage and torque equations in
reference frame variables – analysis of steady state operation – free acceleration characteristics –
dynamic performance for load and torque variations – dynamic performance for three phase fault –
computer simulation in arbitrary reference frame.
UNIT V SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES
9
Voltage and Torque Equation – voltage Equation in arbitrary reference frame and rotor reference
frame – Park equations - rotor angle and angle between rotor – steady state analysis – dynamic
performances for torque variations- dynamic performance for three phase fault – transient stability
limit – critical clearing time – computer simulation.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Paul C. Krause, OlegWasyzczuk, Scott S., and Sudhoff, “Analysis of Electric Machinery and
Drive Systems”, IEEE Press, Second Edition, 2002.
2. Krishnan R., “Electric Motor Drives, Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall of
India, 2002.
3. Samuel Seely, “ Electromechanical Energy Conversion”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company, 1962.
4. Fitzgerald A.E., Charles Kingsley, Jr, and Stephan D. Umanx, “Electric Machinery”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, Fifth Edition, 1992.
23
Regulations’2013
HVE2E
SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the construction, operation and the drive systems for stepper motor.
 To study the construction, operation and controller for Switched Reluctance Motor.
 To illustrate the constructional based types, operation and characteristics of Synchronous
Reluctance motor.
 To study the principle operation and control techniques & its characteristics of PMSM.
 To study the construction, drives and controller of Permanent Magnet BLDC motor.
UNIT I STEPPING MOTOR
9
Constructional features – Principle of operation – Modes of excitation – Torque production in
variable reluctance stepping motor - Dynamic characteristics – Drive systems and circuit for open
loop control – Closed loop control of stepping motor.
UNIT II SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS
9
Constructional features – principle of operation – Torque equation – Power controllers –
Characteristics and control - microprocessor based controller.
UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS RELUCTANCE MOTORS
9
Constructional features: axial and radial air gap Motors – Operating principle –Reluctance torque –
phasor diagram - motor characteristics.
UNIT IV PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MOTROS
9
Principle of operation –EMF –Power input and torque expressions –Phasor diagram –Power
controller-Torque speed characteristics-Self control –Vector control –Current control schemes.
UNIT V PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS DC MOTORS
9
Commutation in DC motors, Difference between mechanical and electronic commutators- Hall
sensors, Optical sensors - Multiphase Brushless motor –Square wave permanent magnet brushless
motor drives –Torque and emf equation-Torque speed characteristics-Controllers –Microprocessors
based controller.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Miller T.J.E., “Brushless permanent magnet and reluctance motor drives”, Clarendon Press,
Oxford, 1989.
2. Kenjo T., “Stepping motors and their microprocessor control”, Clarendon Press, Oxford
1989.
3. Krishnan R., “Switched Reluctance Motors Drives: Modeling, Simulation, Analysis Design
and Applications”, CRC Press, New York, 2010.
24
Regulations’2013
HVE2F
PULSE POWER ENGINEERING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the static and dynamic breakdown strength of dielectric materials.
 To learn energy storage in Marx generators and pulse discharge capacitors.
 To know the types and operation of various switches.
 To learn production of pulses with lossless transmission line.
 To study pulse transmission and transformation.
UNIT I STATIC AND DYNAMIC BREAKDOWN STRENGTH OF DIELECTRIC
9
MATERIALS
Introduction-Gases-static breakdown-pulsed breakdown-spark formation-liquids-basic electrical
process-steamer breakdown-practical considerations-solids-General observations-charge transport,
injection and Breakdown-statistical Interpretation of breakdown Strength Measurements.
UNIT II ENERGY STORAGE
9
Pulse Discharge Capacitors-Marx Generators-classical Marx generators-LC Marx Generator-Basic
Pulsed-Power Energy Transfer Stage-inductive energy storage-power and voltage multiplicationrotors and homo polar Generators.
UNIT III SWITCHES
9
Closing switches-gas switches-semi conductor closing switches-magnetic switches-summaryopening switches-fuses-mechanical interrupters-superconducting opening switches-plasma opening
switches-plasma flow switches-semiconductor opening switches.
UNIT IV PULSE FORMING NETWORKS
9
Transmission lines-terminations and junctions-transmission lines with losses-the finite transmission
line as a circuit element-production of pulses with lossless transmission lines-RLC networks-circuit
simulation with LEITER.
UNIT V PULSE TRANSMISSION AND TRANSFORMATION
9
Self magnetic insulation in vacuum lines-vacuum break down in metallic surfaces-qualitative
description of self magnetic insulation-quantitative description of self magnetic insulation-pulse
Transformers-High Voltage Power supplies-Capacitor-Charging Techniques-Cascade CircuitsTransformation Lines.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hansjoachim Bluhm, “Pulsed Power Systems: Principles and Applications”, Springer; 2006.
2. Pai S.T., “Introduction to High Power Pulse Technology (Advanced Series in Electrical and
Computer Engineering)”, Wspc Publisher, 1995.
3. Paul W. Smith, “Transient Electronics: Pulsed Circuit Technology”, Wspc, Wiley; First
Edition 2002.
25
Regulations’2013
HVE2G
WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS
L T
3 0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study about the fundamentals of wind energy conversion systems.
 To illustrate the wind turbine concept with its design considerations.
 To develop the model of fixed speed system for WECS.
 To study about the variable speed system and the various generator used in WECS.
 To study the Grid connected WECS and its controller.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Components of WECS-WECS schemes-Power obtained from wind-simple momentum theory-Power
coefficient-Sabinin’s theory-Aerodynamics of Wind turbine.
UNIT II WIND TURBINES
9
HAWT – VAWT - Power developed – Thrust – Efficiency – Rotor selection - Rotor design
considerations -Tip speed ratio-No. of Blades-Blade profile-Power Regulation-yaw control-Pitch
angle control-stall control-Schemes for maximum power extraction.
UNIT III FIXED SPEED SYSTEMS
9
Generating Systems- Constant speed constant frequency systems -Choice of Generators-Deciding
factors-Synchronous Generator-Squirrel Cage Induction Generator- Model of Wind Speed- Model
wind turbine rotor - Drive Train model- Generator model for Steady state and Transient stability
analysis.
UNIT IV VARIABLE SPEED SYSTEMS
9
Need of variable speed systems-Power-wind speed characteristics-Variable speed constant frequency
systems synchronous generator- DFIG- PMSG -Variable speed generators modeling - Variable
speed variable frequency schemes.
UNIT V GRID CONNECTED SYSTEMS
9
Stand alone and Grid Connected WECS system-Grid connection Issues-Machine side & Grid side
controllers-WECS in various countries.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Freris L.L., “Wind Energy conversion Systems”, Prentice Hall, 1990.
2. Ion Boldea, “Variable speed generators”, Taylor & Francis group, 2006.
3. Golding E.W., “The generation of Electricity by wind power”, Redwood burn
Ltd.,Trowbridge, 1976.
4. Heir S.,“Grid Integration of WECS”, Wiley 1998.
5. Rai G.D., “Non-conventional Sources of Energy”, Khanna publishers, Fourth
Edition,
2009.
26
Regulations’2013
HVE2H
POWER ELECTRONICS FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY
SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To aware about the various renewable energy resources.
 To study the fundamental of reference frame and operation of various generator used for
renewable energy system.
 To study about the variety of converters used in solar and wind energy generation system.
 To study in detail about the solar and wind power system.
 To develop the hybrid power system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Environmental aspects of electric energy conversion: impacts of renewable energy generation on
environment (cost-GHG Emission) - Qualitative study of different renewable energy resources:
Solar, Wind, Ocean, Biomass, Fuel cell, Hydrogen energy systems and hybrid renewable energy
systems.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY CONVERSION
9
Review of reference theory fundamentals-principle of operation and analysis: IG, PMSG, SCIG and
DFIG.
UNIT III POWER CONVERTERS
9
Solar: Block diagram of solar photo voltaic system -Principle of operation: line commutated
converters (inversion-mode) - Boost and buck-boost converters- selection of inverter, battery sizing,
array sizing.
Wind: Three phase AC voltage controllers- AC-DC-AC converters: uncontrolled rectifiers, PWM
Inverters, Grid Interactive Inverters-matrix converters.
UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF WIND AND PV SYSTEMS
9
Stand alone operation of fixed and variable speed wind energy conversion systems and solar systemGrid connection Issues -Grid integrated PMSG and SCIG Based WECS Grid Integrated solar
system.
UNIT V HYBRID RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS
9
Need for Hybrid Systems- Range and type of Hybrid systems- Case studies of Wind-PV Maximum
Power Point Tracking (MPPT).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Hand book”, Academic press, 2011.
2. Rai G.D, “Non-conventional energy sources”, Khanna publishes, 2009.
3. Rai G.D,” Solar energy utilization”, Khanna publishes, 1993.
4. Gray L. Johnson, “Wind energy system”, prentice hall linc, 1995.
5. Khan B.H., “Non-conventional Energy sources”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company,
New Delhi, 2006.
27
Regulations’2013
HVE2J
FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the importance of compensation in transmission lines and the concepts of FACTS
devices.
 To know the design, modeling and applications of SVC.
 To learn the operation, modes, modeling and applications of TCSC.
 To study the principle, characteristics, modeling and applications of STATCOM and SSSC.
 To learn about the importance in coordination of FACTS controllers.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Reactive power control in electrical power transmission lines –Uncompensated transmission line series compensation – Basic concepts of Static Var Compensator (SVC) – Thyristor Controlled
Series capacitor (TCSC) – Unified power flow controller (UPFC).
UNIT II STATIC VAR COMPENSATOR (SVC) AND APPLICATIONS
9
Voltage control by SVC – Advantages of slope in dynamic characteristics – Influence of SVC on
system voltage – Design of SVC voltage regulator –Modeling of SVC for power flow and transient
stability – Applications: Enhancement of transient stability –Steady state power transfer –
Enhancement of power system damping – Prevention of voltage instability.
UNIT III THYRISTOR CONTROLLED SERIES CAPACITOR AND APPLICATIONS
9
Operation of the Thyristor Controlled Series Capacitor (TCSC) – Different modes of operation –
Modeling of TCSC – Variable reactance model – Modeling for Power Flow and stability studies Applications: Improvement of the system stability limit – Enhancement of system damping-SSR
Mitigation.
UNIT IV VOLTAGE SOURCE CONVERTER BASED FACTS CONTROLLERS
9
Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM) – Principle of operation – V-I Characteristics Applications: Steady state power transfer-Enhancement of transient stability - Prevention of voltage
instability - SSSC-operation of SSSC and the control of power flow –Modeling of SSSC in load flow
and transient stability studies - Applications: SSR Mitigation-UPFC and IPFC.
UNIT V CO-ORDINATION OF FACTS CONTROLLERS
9
Controller interactions – SVC – SVC interaction – Coordination of multiple controllers using linear
control techniques – Control coordination using genetic algorithms.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mohan Mathur R. and Rajiv K. Varma, “Thyristor – Based Facts Controllers for Electrical
Transmission Systems”, IEEE press and John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2002.
2. Narain G. Hingorani, “Understanding FACTS -Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC
Transmission Systems”, Standard Publishers Distributors, Delhi.
3. Padiyar K.R.,” FACTS Controllers in Power Transmission and Distribution”, New Age
International (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi, 2008.
4. John A.T., “Flexible A.C. Transmission Systems”, Institution of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers (IEEE), 1999.
5. Sood V.K., “HVDC and FACTS controllers – Applications of Static Converters in Power
System”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, April 2004.
28
Regulations’2013
HVE2K
ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To learn the basic concepts in electrostatics.
 To study the concepts of electric fields and space charge free fields.
 To study the different techniques for analyzing the electric fields.
 To know the concept of analyzing the electric fields with combination of different
computation techniques.
 To study the electric filed behavior in conductors and dielectrics.
UNIT I ELECTROSTATICS
9
Electrostatic Fields – Coulomb’s Law – Electric Field Intensity (EFI) – EFI due to a line and a
surface charge – Work done in moving a point charge in an electrostatic field – Electric Potential –
Properties of potential function – Potential gradient – Gauss’s law – Application of Gauss’s Law –
Maxwell’s first law – Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations – Solution of Laplace’s equation in one
variable.
UNIT II ELECTRIC FIELDS-1
9
Introduction - Analytical calculation of space-charge-free fields - simple geometries - transmission
conductors to ground - fields in multi dielectric media - experimental analogs for space charge free
fields - electrolytic tank - semi conducting paper analog – resistive mesh analog.
UNIT III ELECTRIC FIELDS-2
9
Numerical computation of space charge free fields - successive imaging technique - the dipole
method - charge-simulation technique - finite-difference technique - combined charge-simulation
and finite difference technique - finite element technique - combined charge simulation and finiteelement technique - boundary-element method – integral equations technique - montecario
technique.
UNIT IV ELECTRIC FIELDS-3
9
Analytical calculations of fields with space charges - numerical computation of fields with space
charges finite element technique - finite element technique combined with the method of
characteristics - charge-simulation technique combined with the method of residues - electric stress
control and optimization.
UNIT V CONDUCTORS & DIELECTRICS
9
Behavior of conductors in an electric field – conductors and insulators – electric field inside a
dielectric material – polarization – dielectric – conductor and dielectric – dielectric boundary
conditions – energy stored and energy density in a static electric field – current density – conduction
and convection current densities – ohm’s law in point form – equation of continuity.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William H. Hayt andJohn. A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Companies, Seventh Edition, 2012.
2. Kraus J. D., “Electromagnetics”, McGraw-Hill Inc., Fourth Edition, 1999.
3. Gangadhar, “Field Theory”, Khanna Publishers, 2002.
4. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetic field theory”, Oxford Publication, 2010.
5. Paul C.R. and Nasar S.A., “Introduction to E-Magnetics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications,
2005.
29
Regulations’2013
HVE2L
RESTRUCTURED POWER SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the operators involved in Restructured market and methods used for pricing and
congestion process.
 To know the functions and operations of U.S. Re-structured markets.
 To study the structure and functions of OASIS and ATC calculation.
 To know the importance, factors and derivative instruments of electric energy trading.
 To understand the factors and challenges of eclectic price volatility and forecasting methods.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF KEY ISSUES IN ELECTRIC UTILITIES
9
RESTRRESTRUCTURING
Restructuring Models: Pool Co Model, Bilateral Contracts Model, Hybrid Model - Independent
System Operator (ISO): The Role of ISO - Power Exchange(PX): Market Clearing Price(MCP) Market operations: Day-Ahead and Hour-Ahead Markets, Elastic and Inelastic Markets - Market
Power - Stranded costs - Transmission Pricing: Contract Path Method, The MW-Mile Method Congestion Pricing: Congestion Pricing Methods, Transmission Rights - Management of InterZonal/Intra Zonal Congestion: Solution procedure, Formulation of Inter-Zonal Congestion Sub
problem, Formulation of Intra-Zonal Congestion Sub problem.
UNIT II ELECTRIC UTILITY MARKETS IN THE UNITED STATES
9
California Markets: ISO, Generation, Power Exchange, Scheduling Co-ordinator, UDCs, Retailers
and Customers, Day-Ahead and Hour-Ahead Markets, Block forwards Market, Transmission
Congestion Contracts(TCCs) - New York Market: Market operations - PJM interconnection - Ercot
ISO - New England ISO - Midwest ISO: MISO’s Functions, Transmission Management,
Transmission System Security, Congestion Management, Ancillary Services Coordination,
Maintenance Schedule Coordination - Summary of functions of U.S. ISOs.
UNIT III OASIS: OPEN ACCESS SAME TIME INFORMATION SYSTEM
9
FERC order 889 - Structure of OASIS: Functionality and Architecture of OASIS - Implementation
of OASIS Phases: Phase 1, Phase 1-A, Phase 2 - Posting of information: Types of information
available on OASIS, Information requirement of OASIS, Users of OASIS - Transfer Capability on
OASIS: Definitions, Transfer Capability Issues, ATC Calculation, TTC Calculation, TRM
Calculation, CBM Calculation - Transmission Services - Methodologies to Calculate ATC Experiences with OASIS in some Restructuring Models: PJM OASIS, ERCOT OASIS.
UNIT IV ELECTRIC ENERGY TRADING
9
Essence of Electric Energy Trading - Energy Trading Framework: The Qualifying factors Derivative Instruments of Energy Trading: Forward Contracts, Futures Contracts, Options, Swaps,
Applications of Derivatives in Electric Energy Trading - PortFolio Management: Effect of Positions
on Risk Management - Energy Trading Hubs - Brokers in Electricity Trading - Green Power
Trading.
UNIT V ELECTRICITY PRICING - VOLATILITY, RISK AND FORECASTING
9
Electricity Price Volatility: Factors in Volatility, Measuring Volatility - Electricity Price Indexes:
Case Study for Volatility of Prices in California, Basis Risk - Challenges to Electricity Pricing:
Pricing Models, Reliable Forward Curves - Construction of Forward Price Curves: Time frame for
Price Curves, Types of Forward Price Curves – Short-term Price Forecasting: Factors Impacting
Electricity Price, Forecasting Methods, Analyzing Forecasting Errors, Practical Data Study.
30
Regulations’2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jain M.K. and Rao N.D., G.J.Berg, “Improved Area Interchange Control Method for use
with any Numerical Technique”, I.E.E.E. P.E.S Winter Power Meeting 1974.
2. Britton J.P., “Improved Area Interchange Control for Newton’s method Load Flows”, Paper
69 TP 124-PWR presented at IEEE Winter Power Meeting, NewYork, Jan 26-31, 1969.
3. Tinney W.F. and Meyer W.S., “Solution of Large Sparse System by Ordered Triangular
Factorization” IEEE Trans. on Automatic Control, Vol: AC-18, pp: 333-346, Aug 1973.
4. Zollenkopf K., “Bi-Factorization: Basic Computational Algorithm and Programming
Techniques; pp: 75-96, 1970.
5. Book on “Large Sparse Set of Linear Systems” Editor: Rerd J.K., Academic Press, 1971.
31
Regulations’2013
HVE2M
POWER SYSTEM PLANNING AND RELIABILITY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the objectives and importance of load forecasting and the methods involved in it.
 To determine LOLP and reliability of ISO.
 To learn contingency analysis and load flow reliability analysis.
 To learn the concept, procedure and problems faced in Expansion planning.
 To understand the planning, protection and coordination of protective devices in distribution
systems.
UNIT I LOAD FORECASTING
9
Objectives of forecasting - Load growth patterns and their importance in planning - Load forecasting
based on discounted multiple regression technique-Weather sensitive load forecasting Determination of annual forecasting-Use of AI in load forecasting.
UNIT II GENERATION SYSTEM RELIABILITY ANALYSIS
9
Probabilistic generation and load models- Determination of LOLP and expected value of demand not
served –Determination of reliability of ISO and interconnected generation systems.
UNIT III TRANSMISSION SYSTEM RELIABILITY ANALYSIS
9
Deterministic contingency analysis-probabilistic load flow-Fuzzy load flow probabilistic
transmission system reliability analysis-Determination of reliability indices like LOLP and expected
value of demand not served.
UNIT IV EXPANSION PLANNING
9
Basic concepts on expansion planning-procedure followed for integrate transmission system
planning, current practice in India-Capacitor placer problem in transmission system and radial
distributions system.
UNIT V DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PLANNING OVERVIEW
9
Introduction - sub transmission lines and distribution substations-Design of primary and secondary
systems-distribution system protection and coordination of protective devices.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sullivan R.L., “Power System Planning”, Tata McGraw-Hill, US, 1977.
2. Roy Billinton and Allan Ronald, “Power System Reliability”, Gordon and Breach, Science
Publishers, 1970.
3. Proceeding of work shop on energy systems planning & manufacturing CI.
4. Turan Gonen, “Electric power distribution system engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1986.
32
HVE2N
POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS
Regulations’2013
L T
3 0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To learn the various solution techniques for large scale power systems.
 To study the various load flow analysis techniques and assessment of ATC.
 To facilitate the importance of optimal power flow and methods involved in calculating
OPF.
 To know the fault analysis calculation using bus impedance matrix.
 To learn the numerical integration methods and factors influencing numerical and transient
stability.
UNIT I SOLUTION TECHNIQUE
9
Sparse Matrix techniques for large scale power systems: Optimal ordering schemes for preserving
sparsity - Flexible packed storage scheme for storing matrix as compact arrays – Factorization by
Bifactorization and Gauss elimination methods - Repeat solution using Left and Right factors and L
and U matrices.
UNIT II POWER FLOW ANALYSIS
9
Power flow equation in real and polar forms - Review of Newton’s method for solution - Adjustment
of P-V buses - Review of Fast Decoupled Power Flow method - Sensitivity factors for P-V bus
adjustment - Net Interchange power control in Multi-area power flow analysis: ATC, Assessment of
Available Transfer Capability (ATC) using Repeated Power Flow method - Continuation Power
Flow method.
UNIT III OPTIMAL POWER FLOW
9
Problem statement - Solution of Optimal Power Flow (OPF) – The gradient method, Newton’s
method, Linear Sensitivity Analysis - LP methods – With real power variables only – LP method
with AC power flow variables and detailed cost functions - Security constrained Optimal Power
Flow - Interior point algorithm - Bus Incremental costs.
UNIT IV SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
9
Fault calculations using sequence networks for different types of faults - Bus impedance matrix
(ZBUS) construction using Building Algorithm for lines with mutual coupling - Simple numerical
problems - Computer method for fault analysis using ZBUS and sequence components - Derivation
of equations for bus voltages - fault current and line currents - both in sequence and phase domain
using Thevenin’s equivalent and ZBUS matrix for different faults.
UNIT V TRANSIENT STABILITY ANALYSIS
9
Introduction, Numerical Integration Methods: Euler and Fourth Order Runge-Kutta methods Algorithm for simulation of SMIB and multi-machine system with classical synchronous machine
model - Factors influencing transient stability - Numerical stability and implicit Integration methods.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stagg G.W. and El. Abiad A.H., “Computer Methods in Power System Analysis”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, 1968.
2. Kundur P., “Power System Stability and Control”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1994.
3. Wood A.J. and Wollenberg B.F., “Power Generation Operation and Control”, John Wiley
and sons, New York, 1996.
4. Tinney W.F. and Meyer W.S., “Solution of Large Sparse System by Ordered Triangular
Factorization” IEEE Trans. on Automatic Control, Vol.18, pp. 333-346, Aug 1973.
5. Zollenkopf K., “Bi-Factorization: Basic Computational Algorithm and Programming
Techniques” pp. 75-96.
6. Book on “Large Sparse Set of Linear Systems” Editor: J.K.Rerd,Academic Press, 1971.
33
Regulations’2013
HVE2P
MODERN RECTIFIERS AND RESONANT CONVERTERS
L T
3 0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study about the causes for arising the harmonics and basic filter techniques.
 To study about the pulse width modulated rectifier and its control techniques.
 To study and analyze the performance of resonant converter of its various types.
 To develop the state space model and dynamic analysis of switching converter.
 To design the various control scheme for resonant converter.
UNIT I POWER SYSTEM HARMONICS & LINE COMMUTATED RECTIFIERS
9
Average power-RMS value of waveform-Power factor-AC line current harmonic standards
IEC1000-IEEE 519- The Single phase full wave rectifier – Continuous Conduction ModeDiscontinuous Conduction Mode-Behaviour - Minimizing THD - Three phase rectifiers- Continuous
Conduction Mode-Discontinuous Conduction Mode-Harmonic trap filters.
UNIT II PULSE WIDTH MODULATED RECTIFIERS
9
Properties of Ideal rectifiers-Realization of non ideal rectifier-Control of current waveform-Average
current control-Current programmed Control- Hysteresis control- Nonlinear carrier control-Single
phase converter system incorporating ideal rectifiers- Modeling losses and efficiency in CCM high
quality rectifiers-Boost rectifier Example - expression for controller duty cycle-expression for DC
load current-solution for converter Efficiency.
UNIT III RESONANT CONVERTERS
9
Review on Parallel and Series Resonant Switches-Soft Switching- Zero Current Switching - Zero
Voltage Switching -Classification of Quasi resonant switches-Zero Current Switching of Quasi
Resonant Buck converter, Zero Current Switching of Quasi Resonant Boost converter, Zero Voltage
Switching of Quasi Resonant Buck converter, Zero Voltage Switching of Quasi Resonant Boost
converter: Steady State analysis.
UNIT IV DYNAMIC ANLYSIS OF SWITCHING CONVERTERS
9
Review of linear system analysis-State Space Averaging-Basic State Space Average Model-State
Space Averaged model for an ideal Buck Converter, ideal Boost Converter, ideal Buck Boost
Converter, for an ideal Cuk Converter.
UNIT V CONTROL OF RESONANT CONVERTERS
9
Pulse Width Modulation-Voltage Mode PWM Scheme-Current Mode PWM Scheme- Design of
Controllers: PI Controller, Variable Structure Controller, Optimal Controller for the source current
shaping of PWM rectifiers.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Erickson and Dragon Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Second
Edition, Springer science and Business media, 2001.
2. William Shepherd and Li zhang, “Power Converters Circuits”, Marceld Ekkerin,C, 2005.
3. Simon Ang and Alejandro Oliva, “Power Switching Converters”, Taylor & Francis Group,
2010.
34
HVE2Q
ANALYSIS OF POWER CONVERTERS
Regulations’2013
L T
3 0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the types and its principle operation of single phase AC-DC converter.
 To study the various three phase AC-DC converter and its operation.
 To study about the types of DC-DC converter and fundamentals of Resonant converter
 To study about the various inverter and its analysis with different loads.
 To study about the voltage controller, cyclo converter and matrix converter.
UNIT I SINGLE PHASE AC-DC CONVERTERS
9
Uncontrolled, half controlled and fully controlled with RL, RLE loads and freewheeling diode continuous and discontinuous modes of operation – inverter operation –Dual converter – Sequence
control of converters – Performance parameters: harmonics, ripple, distortion, power factor – effect
of source impedance and overlap.
UNIT II THREE PHASE AC-DC CONVERTERS
9
Uncontrolled, half controlled and fully controlled with RL, RLE loads and freewheeling diodes –
Inverter operation and its limit – Dual converter – Performance parameter effect of source
impedance and overlap.
UNIT III DC – DC CONVERTERS
9
Principles of step-down and step-up converters – Analysis of buck, boost, buck-boost and Cuk
converters – Time ratio and current limit control – Full bridge converter – Resonant and Quasiresonant converters.
UNIT IV DC – AC CONVERTERS
9
Voltage source inverters - Principle of operation of half and full bridge inverters – 180 degree and
120 degree conduction mode inverters – Voltage control of three phase inverters using various PWM
techniques – Harmonics and various harmonic elimination techniques – Analysis with RL, RLE
loads – Multi level inverters.
UNIT V AC – AC CONVERTERS
9
Principle of operation of AC Voltage Controllers, Cyclo converters – Analysis with RL, RLE loads –
Introduction to Matrix converters.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ned Mohan, Undeland and Robbin, “Power Electronics: Converters, Application and
Design”, A John Wiley and Sons Inc., Newyork, 2012.
2. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Sen P.C, ”Modern Power Electronics”, Wheeler publishing Co, New Delhi, First Edition,
2005.
4. Bimbhra P.S., “Power Electronics”, Eleventh Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2003.
5. Bin Wu, “High Power Converters and AC Drives”, IEEE Press, A John Wiley and Sons Inc.,
2006.
35
Regulations’2013
HVE2R
POWER ELECTRONICS IN POWER SYSTEMS
L T
3 0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study about the fundamental concept of power electronic devices.
 To study about the single phase and three phase power converter and its operation.
 To study about the single phase and three phase inverter with its control strategies.
 To illustrate the reactive power compensation and the FACTS devices.
 To aware about the power quality and various power quality problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Basic Concept of Power Electronics - Different types of Power Electronic Devices – Diodes,
Transistors and SCR, MOSFET, IGBT and GTO’s.
UNIT II AC TO DC CONVERTERS
9
Single Phase and three phase bridge rectifiers - Half Controlled and Fully Controlled Converters
with R, RL and RLE loads - Free Wheeling Diodes - Dual Converter - Sequence Control of
Converters – inverter operation - Input Harmonics and Output Ripple - Smoothing Inductance –
Power Factor Improvement effect of source impedance - Overlap, Inverter limit.
UNIT III DC TO AC CONVERTERS
9
General Topology of single Phase and three phase voltage source and current source inverters- Need
for feedback diodes in anti parallel with switches – Multi Quadrant Chopper viewed as a single
phase inverter- Configuration of Single phase voltage source inverter: Half and Full bridge, Selection
of Switching Frequency and Switching Device - Voltage Control and PWM strategies.
UNIT IV STATIC REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION
9
Shunt Reactive Power Compensation – Fixed Capacitor Banks, Switched Capacitors, Static Reactor
Compensator, Thyristor Controlled Shunt Reactors (TCR) – Thyristor Controlled Transformer FACTS Technology-Applications of static thyristor Controlled Shunt Compensators for load
compensation - Static Var Systems for Voltage Control - Power Factor Control and Harmonic
Control of Converter Fed Systems.
UNIT V POWER QUALITY
9
Power Quality – Terms and Definitions – Transients – Impulsive and Oscillatory Transients –
Harmonic Distortion – Harmonic Indices – Total Harmonic Distortion – Total Demand DistortionLocating Harmonic Sources - Harmonics from commercial and industrial Loads –Devices for
Controlling Harmonics - Passive and Active Filters -Harmonic Filter Design.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ned Mohan, Undeland and Robbin, “Power Electronics: Converters, Application and
Design”, A John Wiley and Sons Inc., Newyork, 2012.
2. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Prentice Hall of
India, 2011.
3. Bose B.K., “Power Electronics and A.C. Drives”, Prentice Hall, 2010.
4. Roger C Dugan, Mark F Mc Granaghan, Surya Santaso and Wayne Beaty H., “Electrical
Power Systems Quality”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
5. Miller T.J.E., “Static Reactive Power Compensation”, John Wiley and Sons, Newyork,
1982.
6. Mohan Mathur R., Rajiv K Varma, “Thyristor Based FACTS controllers for Electrical
Transmission Systems”, IEEE press 2002.
36
Regulations’2013
HVE3A
POLLUTION PERFORMANCE OF POWER APPARATUS
AND SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the Mechanism of pollution flashover, Analytical determination.
 To study the artificial pollution testing methods.
 To study the pollution performance of insulators.
 To study the pollution performance of surge diverters.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Fundamental process of pollution flashover – Development and effect of contamination layer –
Creepage distance – Pollution conductivity – Mechanism of pollution flashover –Analytical
determination of flashover voltage.
UNIT II POLLUTION TESTING
9
Artificial pollution testing – Salt-fog method – Solid layer method – Monitoring of parameters –
Measurement of layer conductivity – Field testing methods.
UNIT III POLLUTION PERFORMANCE OF INSULATORS
9
Ceramic and non-ceramic insulators – Design of shed profiles – Rib factor effect in AC and DC
insulators – Modeling.
UNIT IV POLLUTION PERFORMANCE OF SURGE DIVERTERS
9
External insulation – Effect of pollution on the protective characteristics of gap and gapless arresters –
Modeling of surge diverters under polluted conditions.
UNIT V POLLUTION PERFORMANCE OF INDOOR EQUIPMENT
9
Condensation and Contamination of indoor switch gear – Performance of organic insulator under
polluted conditions – Accelerated testing techniques.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kind and Karner, “High Voltage Insulation”, Translated from German by Y.Narayana Rao,
Frider. Vieweg, & Sohn, Braunschweig, Weishaden, 1985.
3. Klaus Ragaller, “Surges in High Voltage Networks”, Plenum Press, New York, 1980.
4. Loom. J.S.T., “Insulators for High Voltages”, Peter Peregrinus Ltd., London, 1988.
5. Dieter Kind and Kurt Feser, “High Voltage Test Techniques”,SBA Electrical Engineering
Series, New Delhi, Second Edition,1999.
6. Ravi S Gorur “Outdoor Insulators”, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona 85044, USA, 1999.
37
HVE3B
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 1 04
OBJECTIVES:
adaptive filtering.
UNIT I
9
UNIT II
SPECTRAL ESTIMATION
9
algorithm.
UNIT III
9
UNIT IV
ADAPTIVE FILTERS
9
UNIT V
9
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
4th Edition, 2009.
4. Emmanuel C. Ifeachor and Barrie W. Jervis, “Digital signal processing: A practical approach”
38
HVE3C
L
3
OBJECTIVES
 To brief the basic concepts of evolutionary computation
 To give idea about various representation, selection and search operations
 To discuss the basic of fitness evaluation and constraint handling mechanism
 To outline the concepts of hybrid systems
 To understand the effect of parameter setting and applications
Regulations’2013
T
0
P
0
C
3
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION
9
9
operators.
9
9
optimization.
UNIT V PARAMETER SETTING AND APPLICATIONS
9
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thomas Back et al, “Handbook on evolutionary computation”, Institute of Physics,
Publishing, 2000.
Publishing, 1999.
Wesley, 1998.
5. Kenneth A De Jong, “Evolutionary Computation: A Unified Approach”, MIT Press, 2006.
39
Regulations’2013
HVE3D
ADVANCED DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
(Common to C&I, HVE)
OBJECTIVES




L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Able to design a small digital system to the specified functionality
Able to have good understanding and experience of modern techniques in
combinational and sequential circuit design with VHDL
Able to be aware of modern technology in implementation of digital designs
Ability to know the structure of field programmable logic circuits FPGAs
UNIT I SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
9
Analysis of Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks (CSSN) Modelling of CSSN –State
Stable Assignment and Reduction – Design of CSSN – Design of Iterative Circuits – ASM Chart
– ASM Realization, Design of Arithmetic circuits for Fast adder- Array Multiplier.
UNIT II ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
9
Analysis of Asynchronous Sequential Circuit (ASC) – Flow Table Reduction – Races in ASC –
State Assignment Problem and the Transition Table – Design of ASC – Static and Dynamic
Hazards – Essential Hazards – Data Synchronizers – Designing Vending Machine Controller –
Mixed Operating Mode Asynchronous Circuits.
UNIT III FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND TESTABILITY ALGORITHMS
9
Fault Table Method – Path Sensitization Method – Boolean Difference Method – Kohavi
Algorithm – Tolerance Techniques – The Compact Algorithm – Practical PLA’s – Fault in PLA –
Test Generation – Masking Cycle – DFT Schemes – Built-in Self Test.
UNIT IV SYSTEM DESIGN USING VHDL
9
VHDL operators – Arrays – concurrent and sequential statements – packages- Data flow
– Behavioral – structural modeling – compilation and simulation of VHDL code –Test
bench - Realization of combinational and sequential circuits using HDL – Registers –
counters – sequential machine – serial adder – Multiplier- Divider – Design of simple
microprocessor.
UNIT V NEW GENERATION PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES
9
Foldback Architecture with GAL,PEEL, PML; PROM – Realization State machine using PLD –
FPGA – Xilinx FPGA – Xilinx 2000 - Xilinx 3000.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Donald G. Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill 2001.
2. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL
Design”, Tata McGraw Hill –Higher Education, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mark Zwolinski, “Digital System Design with VHDL”, Pearson Education, 2001.V
2. Parag K Lala, “Digital System design using PLD”, BS Publications, 2001.II
3. John M Yarbrough, “Digital Logic applications and Design”, Thomson Learning, 2001.
5. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Fundamentals of Logic design”, Thomson Learning, 6th Edition
2010.
6. Charles H Roth Jr.”Digital System Design using VHDL” Thomson learning, 2004.
7. Douglas L.Perry “VHDL programming by Example” Tata McGraw.Hill – 2006.
40
Regulations’2013
HVE3E
HIGH VOLTAGE DIRECT CURRENT TRANSMISSION
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES

To understand the concept, planning of DC power transmission and comparison with AC
power transmission.

To analyze HVDC converters.

To study about compounding and regulation.

To analyze harmonics and design of filters.

To learn about HVDC cables and simulation tools.
UNIT I DC POWER TRANSMISSION TECHNOLOGY
6
Introduction – Comparison of AC and DC transmission – Application of DC transmission –
Description of DC transmission system – Planning for HVDC transmission – Modern trends in DC
transmission – DC breakers – Cables – VSC based HVDC.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF HVDC CONVERTERS AND HVDC SYSTEM CONTROL
12
Pulse number – Choice of converter configuration – Simplified analysis of Graetz circuit - Converter
bridge characteristics – Detailed analysis of converters - General principles of DC link control –
Converter control – System control hierarchy - Firing angle control – Current and extinction angle
control – Generation of harmonics and filtering.
UNIT III MULTITERMINAL DC SYSTEMS
9
Introduction – Potential applications of MTDC systems – Types of MTDC systems – Control and
protection of MTDC systems – Study of MTDC systems.
UNIT IV POWER FLOW ANALYSIS IN AC/DC SYSTEMS
9
Per unit system for DC Quantities – Modeling of DC links – Solution of DC load flow – Solution of
AC-DC power flow – Case studies.
UNIT V SIMULATION OF HVDC SYSTEMS
9
Introduction – System simulation: Philosophy and tools – HVDC system simulation –Modeling of
HVDC systems for digital dynamic simulation – Dynamic interaction between DC and AC systems.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Padiyar K.R., “HVDC Power Transmission Systems”, New Age International (P)Ltd., New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Arrillaga J., “High Voltage Direct Current Transmission”, Peter Pregrinus, London, 2007.
3. Kundur P., “Power System Stability and Control”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1993.
4. Erich Uhlmann, “Power Transmission by Direct Current”, BS Publications, 2004.
5. Sood V.K., “HVDC and FACTS controllers – Applications of Static Converters in Power
System”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, April 2004.
41
Regulations’2013
HVE3F
POWER QUALITY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the production of voltages sags, over voltages and harmonics and methods of control.
 To study various methods of power quality monitoring.
 To discuss the various types of measurements and analysis methods.
 To outline the concepts of Mitigation methods.
 To study the overview of power quality improvement.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction – Characterization of Electric Power Quality – Transients – Short duration and long
duration voltage variations – Voltage imbalance – Waveform distortion – Voltage fluctuations Power frequency variation – Power acceptability curves – Power quality problems – Poor load power
factor – Non linear and unbalanced loads – DC offset in loads – Notching in load voltage –
Disturbance in supply voltage – Power quality standards.
UNIT II NON-LINEAR LOADS
9
Single phase static and rotating AC/DC converters – Three phase static AC/DC converters – Battery
chargers – Arc furnaces – Fluorescent lighting – Pulse modulated devices – Adjustable speed drives.
UNIT III MEASUREMENT AND ANALYSIS METHODS
9
Voltage, Current, Power and Energy measurements – Power factor measurements and definitions –
Event recorders – Measurement Error – Analysis: Analysis in the periodic steady state – Time domain
methods – Frequency domain methods: Laplace’s, Fourier and Hartley transform – The Walsh
Transform – Wavelet Transform.
UNIT IV ANALYSIS AND CONVENTIONAL MITIGATION METHODS
9
Analysis of power outages – Analysis of unbalance – Symmetrical components of phasor quantities –
Instantaneous symmetrical components – Instantaneous real and reactive powers – Analysis of
distortion – On-line extraction of fundamental sequence components from measured samples –
Harmonic indices – Analysis of voltage sag – Detroit Edison sag score – Voltage sag energy –
Voltage Sag Lost Energy Index (VSLEI) – Analysis of voltage flicker – Reduced duration and
customer impact of outages – Classical load balancing problem – Open loop balancing – Closed loop
balancing – Current balancing – Harmonic reduction – Voltage sag reduction.
UNIT V POWER QUALITY IMPROVEMENT
9
Utility – Customer interface – Harmonic filters: passive, Active and hybrid filters – Custom power
devices – Network reconfiguring Devices – Load compensation using DSTATCOM – Voltage
regulation using DSTATCOM – Protecting sensitive loads using DVR, UPQC – control strategies –
P-Q theory – Synchronous detection method – Custom power park – Status of application of custom
power devices.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Arindam Ghosh, “Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power Devices”, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2002.
2. Heydt G.T., “Electric Power Quality”, Stars in a Circle Publications, 2nd Edition, 1994.
3. Duggan R.C., “Electrical Power Systems Quality”, McGraw-Hill, 2012.
4. Arrillga A.J., “Power system harmonics”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2nd Edition, 2003.
Derek A Paice, “Power electronic converter harmonics”, IEEE Press, 1996.
42
Regulations’2013
HVE3G
L
3
POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To understand the basic concept of load prediction and various approaches.
 To develop the various method to get the solution for constraints.
 To study about the generation scheduling and the economic dispatch.
 To develop t the various control strategies of power systems.
 To design the state estimation using different algorithms.
UNIT I LOAD FORECASTING
9
Introduction – Estimation of Average and trend terms – Estimation of periodic components –
Estimation of Stochastic components – Time series approach – Auto-Regressive Model – AutoRegressive Moving – Average Models – Kalman Filtering Approach – On-line techniques for non
stationary load prediction.
UNIT II UNIT COMMITMENT
9
Constraints in unit commitment – Spinning reserve – Thermal unit constraints – Other constraints –
Solution using Priority List method - Dynamic programming method – Forward DP approach –
Lagrangian relaxation method – adjusting λ.
UNIT III GENERATION SCHEDULING
9
The Economic dispatch problem – Thermal system dispatching with network losses considered –
The Lambda-iteration method – Gradient method of economic dispatch – Economic dispatch with
Piecewise Linear cost functions – Transmission system effects – A two generator system –
coordination equations – Incremental losses and penalty factors – Hydro Thermal Scheduling using
DP.
UNIT IV CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEMS
9
Review of AGC and reactive power control – System operating states by security control functions –
Monitoring, evaluation of system state by contingency analysis – Corrective controls (Preventive,
emergency and restorative) – Energy control center – SCADA system – Functions – Monitoring –
Data acquisition and controls – EMS system.
UNIT V STATE ESTIMATION
9
Maximum likelihood Weighted Least Squares Estimation – Concepts – Matrix formulation –
Example for Weighted Least Squares state estimation – State estimation of an AC network –
development of method – Typical results of state estimation on an AC network – State Estimation
by Orthogonal Decomposition algorithm – Introduction to Advanced topics –Detection and
Identification of Bad Measurements – Estimation of Quantities Not Being Measured – Network
observability and Pseudo measurements – Application of Power Systems State Estimation .
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Elgerd O.I., “Electric Energy System Theory - an Introduction”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Kundur P., “Power System Stability and Control”, EPRI Publications, California, 1994.
3. Allen J Wood and Bruce F Wollenberg, “Power Generation Operation and Control’, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 1996.
4. Mahalanabis A.K., Kothari D.P. and Ahson S.I., “Computer Aided Power System Analysis
and Control”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1984.
43
Regulations’2013
HVE3H
CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DRIVES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To understand the concept of converter fed DC drives.
 To study of the various modes of operation of chopper fed DC drives.
 To analyze the various inverters fed DC drives and its sampling techniques.
 To develop the mathematical model of the frequency controlled drive also to study the steady
state and dynamic behavior.
 To study the various measurement and control techniques.
UNIT I CONVERTER FED DC DRIVES
9
Microcontroller hardware circuit – flow charts waveforms – Performance characteristics of dc drives
fed through single phase converters – 3-phase converters – dual converters – 1-phase fully controlled
converter and 3-phase fully controlled converter fed dc drive.
UNIT II CHOPPER FED DC DRIVES
9
Microcontroller hardware circuits and waveforms of various modes of operation of chopper fed DC
drives.
UNIT III INVERTER FED INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVE
9
Microcomputer controlled VSI fed induction motor drive – Detailed power circuit – generation of
firing pulses and firing circuit – flow charts and waveforms for 1-phase, 3-phase Non-PWM and 3phase PWM VSI fed induction motor drives – Sampling techniques for PWM inverter.
UNIT IV MATHEMATICAL MODELING OF FREQUENCY CONTROLLED DRIVE
9
Development of mathematical model for various components of frequency controlled induction drive
– mathematical model of the system for steady state and dynamic behavior – Study of stability based
on the dynamic model of the system.
UNIT V CLOSED LOOP CONTROL OF MICROCOMPUTER BASED DRIVES
9
Voltage, Current, Torque and Speed measurements using digital measurement techniques – Types of
controllers – position and velocity measurement algorithm – closed loop control of microcomputer
based drives.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bose B.K., “Power Electronics and Motor Drives - Advances and Trends”, IEEE Press, 2006.
2. Buxbaum, Schierau A., and Staughen K., “A design of control systems for DC drives”,
Springer- Verlag, Berlin, 1990.
3. Vedam Subrahmanyam, “Thyristor control of Electric drives”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1988.
4. Krishnan R., “Electric Motor Drives, Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall of
India, 2002.
5. Bin Wu, “High Power Converters and AC Drives”, IEEE Press, A John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
2006.
6. Dubey G.K., “Power semiconductor controlled drives”, Prentice-HALL,1989.
7. Leonard W., “Control of Electric Drives”, Springer Verlag, NY, 1985.
8. Bose B.K., “Microcomputer control of power electronics and drives”, IEEE Press, 1987.
9. Bose B.K., “Adjustable Speed A.C. drives”, IEEE Press, 1993.
44
Regulations’2013
HVE3J
DESIGN OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To learn about embedded design life cycle, product testing and performance tools.
 To study partition decision in embedded systems and hardware manipulation.
 To study the interrupt service routines, debugging and computer optimization.
 To learn about the circuit emulators.
 To learn the concept of testing and analyze the performance and maintenance
UNIT I EMBEDDED DESIGN LIFE CYCLE
9
Product specification – Hardware / Software partitioning – Detailed hardware and software design –
Integration – Product testing – Selection Processes – Microprocessor Vs Microcontroller –
Performance tools – Bench marking – RTOS Microcontroller – Performance tools – Bench marking
– RTOS availability – Tool chain availability – Other issues in selection processes.
UNIT II PARTITIONING DECISION
9
Hardware / Software duality – coding Hardware – ASIC revolution – Managing the Risk – Coverification – Execution environment – Memory organization – System startup – Hardware
manipulation – Memory mapped access – Speed and code density.
UNIT III INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES
9
Watch dog timers – Flash Memory basic toolset – Host based debugging – Remote debugging – ROM
emulators – Logic analyzer – Caches – Computer optimization – Statistical profiling.
UNIT IV IN CIRCUIT EMULATORS
9
Buller proof run control – Real time trace – Hardware break points – Overlay memory – Timing
constraints – Usage issues – Triggers.
UNIT V TESTING
9
Bug tracking – Reduction of risks & costs – Performance – Unit testing – Regression testing –
Choosing test cases – Functional tests – Coverage tests – Testing embedded software – Performance
testing – Maintenance.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Arnold S Berger, “Embedded System Design”, CMP books, USA 2002.
2. Sriram Iyer, “Embedded Real time System Programming” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., 2004.
3. Arkin R.C., “Behaviour-based Robotics”, The MIT Press, 1998.
45
Regulations’2013
HVE3K
L
3
APPLICATIONS OF MEMS TECHNOLOGY
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To learn the basic of fabrication processes and electro mechanical concepts.
 To give idea about electrostatic sensors, actuators and its applications.
 To outline the concepts of thermal sensing and actuation techniques.
 To discuss the concepts of piezoelectric sensing and actuation techniques.
 To discuss the various case studies in MEMS technology.
UNIT I MICRO-FABRICATION, MATERIALS AND ELECTRO-MECHANICAL
9
CONCEPTS
Overview of micro fabrication – Silicon and other material based fabrication processes – Concepts –
Conductivity of semiconductors – Crystal planes and orientation – Stress and strain – flexural beam
bending analysis – Torsional deflections – Intrinsic stress – Resonant frequency and quality factor.
UNIT II ELECTROSTATIC SENSORS AND ACTUATION
9
Principle – Material – Design and fabrication of parallel plate capacitors as electrostatic sensors and
actuators – Applications
UNIT III THERMAL SENSING AND ACTUATION
9
Principle – Material – Design and fabrication of thermal couples – Thermal bimorph sensors –
Thermal resistor sensors – Applications.
UNIT IV PIEZOELECTRIC SENSING AND ACTUATION
9
Piezoelectric effect – Cantilever piezoelectric actuator model – Properties of piezoelectric materials –
Applications.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES
9
Piezoresistive sensors - Magnetic actuation - Micro fluidics applications - Medical applications Optical MEMS.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006.
2. Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC Press, 2009.
3. Boston, “Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook”, WCB Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
4. Bao M.H., “Micromechanical transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers and gyroscopes”,
Elsevier, Newyork, 2000.
46
Regulations’2013
HVE3L
MICROCONTROLLER AND DSP BASED SYSTEM DESIGN
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the architecture, addressing modes and programming techniques of PIC 16C7X
microcontroller.
 To study the various peripherals of 16C7X microcontroller.
 To study the architecture, addressing modes and programming techniques of motor control
signal processors.
 To study the various peripherals of motor control signal processors.
 To outline the applications of 16C7X microcontroller and motor control signal processors.
UNIT I PIC 16C7X MICROCONTROLLER
9
Architecture memory organization – Addressing modes – Instruction set – Programming techniques –
Simple programs.
UNIT II PERIPHERALS OF PIC 16C7X
Timers – Interrupts – I/O ports – I2C bus for peripheral chip access – A/D converter –UART.
9
UNIT III MOTOR CONTROL SIGNAL PROCESSORS
9
Introduction – System configuration registers – Memory Addressing modes – Instruction set –
Programming techniques – Simple programs.
UNIT IV PERIPHERALS OF SIGNAL PROCESSORS
9
General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Functionality – Interrupts – A/D converter – Event Managers
(EVA, EVB) – PWM signal generation.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF PIC AND SIGNAL PROCESSORS
9
Voltage regulation of DC-DC converters – Stepper motor and DC motor control – Clarke’s and parks
transformation – Space vector PWM – Control of Induction Motors and PMSM.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John B Peatman, “Design with PIC Microcontrollers”, Pearson Education, Asia, 2004.
2. Hamid A Toliyat, Steven Campbell, “DSP based Electromechanical Motion Control”, CRC
Press, 2004.
47
Regulations’2013
HVE3M
REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION AND MANAGEMENT
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To understand the basic concepts of load compensation.
 To develop the reactive power compensation in transmission line and it’s characteristic.
 To study about the basic concepts of power quality and its issues.
 To understand the concepts of load shaping and tariffs.
 To study about the reactive power management and its consideration.
UNIT I LOAD COMPENSATION
9
Objectives and specifications – Reactive power characteristics – Inductive and capacitive approximate
biasing – Load compensator as a voltage regulator – Phase balancing and power factor correction of
unsymmetrical loads – Examples.
UNIT II REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION IN TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
9
Steady state reactive power compensation in transmission system: Uncompensated line – Types of
compensation – Passive shunt and series and dynamic shunt compensation – Examples.
Transient state reactive power compensation in transmission systems: Characteristic time periods –
Passive shunt compensation – Static compensations – Series capacitor compensation –Compensation
using synchronous condensers – Examples.
UNIT III REACTIVE POWER COORDINATION
9
Objective – Mathematical modeling – Operation planning – Transmission benefits – Basic concepts of
quality of power supply – Disturbances – Steady – State variations – Effects of under voltages –
Frequency – Harmonics, radio frequency and electromagnetic interferences.
UNIT IV DEMAND SIDE MANAGEMENT
9
Load patterns – Basic methods load shaping – Power tariffs – KVAR based tariffs – Penalties for
voltage flickers and Harmonic voltage levels.
UNIT V REACTIVE POWER MANAGEMENT
9
Distribution side Reactive power Management: System losses – Loss reduction methods – Examples –
Reactive power planning – Objectives – Economics Planning capacitor placement – Retrofitting of
capacitor banks.
User side reactive power management: KVAR requirements for domestic appliances – Purpose of
using capacitors – Selection of capacitors – Deciding factors – Types of available capacitor,
characteristics and Limitations.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Miller T.J.E., “Reactive power control in Electric power systems”, John Wiley and sons,
1982.
2. Tagare D.M., “Reactive power Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004.
48
Regulations’2013
HVE3N
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF POWER ELECTRONICS
CIRCUITS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To aware about the fundamentals of simulation and analysis of basic power electronic
devices.
 To develop the advanced algorithms in computer simulation.
 To develop the model of power electronic devices in simulation.
 To study the various analysis in simulation circuits.
 To study the various case studies about the simulation of different power electronic devices.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Importance of simulation – General purpose circuit analysis – Methods of analysis of power
electronic systems – Review of power electronic devices and circuits.
UNIT II ADVANCED TECHNIQUES IN SIMULATION
9
Analysis of power electronic systems in a sequential manner – Coupled and decoupled systems –
Various algorithms for computing steady state solution in power electronic systems – Future trends in
computer simulation.
UNIT III MODELING OF POWER ELCTRONIC DEVICES
9
Introduction – AC sweep and DC sweep analysis – Transients and the time domain analysis – Fourier
series and harmonic components – BJT, FET, MOSFET and its model- Amplifiers and Oscillator –
Non-linear devices.
UNIT IV SIMULATION OF CIRCUITS
9
Introduction – Schematic capture and libraries – Time domain analysis – System level integration and
analysis – Monte Carlo analysis – Sensitivity/stress analysis – Fourier analysis.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES
9
Simulation of Converters, Choppers, Inverters, AC voltage controllers, and Cycloconverters feeding
R, R-L, and R-L-E loads – Computation of performance parameters: harmonics, power factor, angle
of overlap.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rashid M., “Simulation of Power Electronic Circuits using PSPICE”, PHI, 2006.
2. Rajagopalan V., “Computer Aided Analysis of Power Electronic systems” Marcell –Dekker
Inc., 1987.
3. John Keown, “Microsim, Pspice and Circuit Analysis”- Prentice Hall Inc., 1998.
49
Regulations’2013
HVE3P
COLLISION PHENOMENON
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To brief the concepts of collision phenomenon.
 To know the behavior of charged particles in gaseous medium under different electric fields
conditions.
 To study the concept of self sustaining discharge breakdown mechanisms.
 To study the concepts of partial discharge and breakdown mechanism under alternating fields.
 To study the concepts of breakdown, glow and plasma.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Ionization, Deionization and Electron Emission – Ionization and plasma conductivity –Production of
charged particles – Ionization by cosmic rays – Thermal ionization – The free path – Excited states –
Metastable states – Diffusion – Recombination – Negative ions – Photoelectric
emission –
Thermionic emission – Field emission.
UNIT II BEHAVIOUR OF CHARGED PARTICLES IN A GAS IN ELECTRIC
9
FIELDS OF LOW E/p AND HIGH E/p
Definition and significance of mobility – Forces between ions and molecules – Diffusion under low
fields – Electron drift velocity – High E/p – Coefficient of ionization by electron collision –
Evaluation of  – Electron avalanche – Effect of the cathode – Ionization coefficient in alternating
fields.
UNIT III SELF-SUSTAINING DISCHARGE BREAKDOWN MECHANISMS
9
Ionization by positive-ion collision – Cathode processes – Space-charge field of an avalanche –
Critical avalanche size – Townsend mechanism and its limitations – Streamer formation – The
transition between the breakdown mechanisms – The effect of electron attachment.
UNIT IV PARTIAL BREAKDOWN AND BREAKDOWN UNDER ALTERNATING
9
FIELDS
Electron current – positive ion current – Total current – Characteristic time – Effect of space charge
– Anode coronas – Cathode coronas.
UNIT V BREAKDOWN GLOW AND PLASMA
9
Breakdown: Mobility controlled breakdown, Microwave of diffusion controlled breakdown, Nonuniform alternating field breakdown – Laser breakdown.
Glow and Plasma: General description – The cathode zone – Negative glow and Faraday dark space –
Positive column – Anode region – Other effects – Definition of plasma – Debye length – Scope of
known plasmas – Plasma oscillations – High-temperature plasmas – Plasma diagnostics.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Essam Nasser, “Fundamentals of Gaseous Ionization and Plasma Electronics”, John Willey &
Sons, 1971.
2. Alexander Fridman and Lawrence A Kennedy, “Plasma Physics and Engineering”, Taylor &
Francis, 2004.
3. Kwan Chi Kao, “Dielectric Phenomena in Solids [Electronic Resource]”, Academic Press
2004.
50
Regulations’2013
HVE3Q
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF INSTRUMENTATION
SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To brief basic concept of the data acquisition and instrument interface.
 To outline the concepts of architecture of a virtual instrument and programming techniques.
 To give idea about the stability analysis, fault analysis, white analysis and synchronization
testing.
 To give the idea about the PC based instrumentation.
 To discuss the simulation of linear and nonlinear models of systems.
UNIT I DATA ACQUISITION AND INSTRUMENT INTERFACE
9
Programming and simulation of Building block of instrument Automation system – Signal analysis –
I/O port configuration with instrument bus protocols – ADC, DAC,DIO, counters & timers – PC
hardware structure, timing, interrupts, DMA, software and hardware installation – current loop, RS
232/RS485, GPIB and USB protocols.
UNIT II VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES
9
Block diagram and architecture of a virtual instrument – Graphical programming in data flow,
comparison with conventional programming – Vis and sub-Vis, loops and charts, arrays, clusters and
graphs – case and sequence structures – formula nodes, local and global variables– string and file I/O.
UNIT III DESIGN TEST AND ANALYSIS
9
Spectral estimation using Fourier Transform, power spectrum, correlation methods, Stability analysis
and Fault analysis – Sampling, Data Parity and error coding checks – Synchronization testing – Watch
dog timer, DMA method – Real time Clocking, Noise- Gaussian, White analysis.
UNIT IV PC BASED INSTRUMENTATION
9
Introduction – Evolution of signal standard – HART Communication protocol – Communication
modes – HART networks – Control system interface – HART commands – HART field controller
implementation – HART and the OSI model
UNIT V SIMULATION OF PHYSICAL SYSTEMS
9
Simulation of linear and Nonlinear models of systems – Hardware in loop simulation of physical
systems using special software’s.
REFERENCES:
1. Ogatta K., “Modern control engineering”, Perason Education, 4th Edition, 2002.
2. Dorf and Bishop, “Modern Control Engineering”, Addison Weseley, 1998.
3. Patrick H Garrett,” High performance Instrumentation and Automation”, CRC Press, Taylor
& Francis Group, 2005.
4. MAPLE V programming guide.
5. MATLAB/SIMULINK user manual.
6. MATHCAD/VISSIM user manual.
7. LABVIEW simulation user manual
51
Regulations’2013
HVE3R
CONDITION MONITORING OF HIGH VOLTAGE POWER
APPARATUS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To brief the general concept of condition monitoring of high voltage power apparatus.
 To study the condition monitoring in power transformer.
 To study the power generation condition monitoring.
 To give the idea of various diagnostic techniques and condition monitoring.
 To study the insulation materials in application area and various testing techniques.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
General concept of condition monitoring – General issues of condition monitoring – Main
Components in a condition monitoring system – Condition monitoring techniques.
UNIT II POWER TRANSFORMER CONDITION MONITORING
9
Transformer faults and monitoring techniques – Monitoring for on-load tap changer – Insulation
monitoring – Sweep frequency response test for condition monitoring – Recent trend/research on
Power transformer condition monitoring.
UNIT III POWER GENERATION CONDITION MONITORING
9
Power generation faults and monitoring methods – Stator winding faults – Rotor body faults – rotor
winding faults – Stator-core faults – Condition monitoring for generator stator windings.
UNIT IV DIAGNOSTICS AND CONDITION MONITORING
9
Need for diagnostics and condition monitoring – On-line/on-site testing – Diagnostic tests –
transformer impulse test – Digital techniques – Data acquisition principles and problems – winding
structure – Natural frequencies – PD measurement – Background, analysis, calibration – digital PD
measurement – PD as a diagnostic tool – PD signal – Noise reduction methods – PD pattern – Fault
discrimination – Insulation degradation.
UNIT V INSULATION MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS
9
Outdoor insulation: Materials, ageing, diagnostic, polymeric materials, semi-conducting, Ceramic
glazes – AC and impulse voltage flashover studies on a string of insulators – RIV and Corona Studies
on insulator strings – High voltage testing – Dry, wet and pollution testing.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Naidu M. S. and Kamaraju V., “High Voltage Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1995.
2. Kulkarni S.V. and Khaparde S.A., “Transformer Engineering”, Marcel and Dekker Inc., 2004.
3. Tavner P. J. and Penman J., “Condition Monitroing of Electrical Machine”, Letchworth,
England,Research Studies Press, Ltd., 1987.
4. Kuffel E., Zaengl W.S. and Kuffel L., “High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals,”
Butterworth Heimann, 2nd Edition, 2000.
5. Rao B. K. N., “Handbook of Condition Monitoring”, Elsevier Science Publisher, 1st Edition,
1996.
6. Han Y. and Song Y. H., “Condition Monitoring Techniques for Electrical Equipment – A
Literature Survey.” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, Vol. 18, No. 1, January 2003.
7. Wadhwa C. L., “High Voltage Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 1994.
52
Regulations’2013
HVE3S
ADVANCED TOPICS IN HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
OBJECTIVES
 To study the measurement and diagnostic technologies
 To know the various application of high voltage engineering in industry.
 To get knowledge about the safety and electrostatic hazards, Lightning protection.
 To study the electrical breakdown, pulse generators and treatment chamber design.
UNIT I MEASUREMENT AND DIAGNOSTIC TECHNOLOGIES
9
Introduction – Digital Impulse Recorders – Digital Techniques in HV tests – Testing automation –
Electric field measurement – Electro-optic Sensors- Magneto-optic Sensors – Measurement of very
fast transients in GIS – Space charge measurement techniques – Electro-optical imaging techniques.
UNIT II APPLICATION OF HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRY
9
Introduction – Electrostatic applications – Electrostatic precipitation, separation , painting coating,
spraying, imaging, printing, Transport of materials – Sandpaper Manufacture – Smoke particle
detector – Electrostatic spinning, pumping, propulsion – Ozone generation – Biomedical applications.
UNIT III SAFETY AND ELECTROSTATIC HAZARDS
9
Introduction – Nature of static electricity – Triboelectric series – Basic laws of Electrostatic electricity
– Materials and static electricity – Electrostatic Discharges (ESD) – Static electricity problems –
Hazards of Electrostatic electricity in industry – Hazards from electrical equipment and installations –
Static eliminators and charge neutralizers –Lightning protection.
UNIT IV PULSED ELECTRIC FIELDS
9
Introduction – Definitions, descriptions and applications – Mechanisms of microbial inactivation’s –
Electrical breakdown – Electroporation – Inactivation models – Critical factors analysis of process,
product and microbial factors – Pulse generators and treatment chamber design – Research needs.
UNIT V APPLICATION OF PEF TECHNOLOGY IN FOOD PRESERVATION
9
Processing of juices, milk, egg, meat and fish products – Processing of water and waste – Industrial
feasibility, cost and efficiency analysis.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Malik N.H., Ai-Arainy A.A., Qureshi M.I., “Electrical Insulation in Power Systems”, Marcel
Dekker, Inc., 1998.
2. Mazen Abdel-Salam, Hussien Anis, Ahdab EI-Morshedy, “High Voltage Engineering”,
Theory and Practice, Marcel Dekker Inc., 2nd Edition, 2000,
3. John D Kraus, Daniel A Fleisch, “Electromagnetics with Applications” Tata McGraw- Hill
4. Shoait Khan, “Industrial Power System”, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis group, 2008.
5. Barbosa-Canovas G.V., “Pulsed electric fields in food processing: Fundamental aspects and
applications” CRC Publisher Edition, March 1st, 2001.
6. Lelieveld H.L.M., Notermans S., et al, “Food preservation by pulsed electric fields: From
research to application”, Woodhead Publishing Ltd, October 2007.
53
www.nec.edu.in
REGULATIONS - 2013
DEPARTMENT OF
ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
M.E. – CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
Curriculum & Syllabi of M.E. (C&I)
Regulations’2013
REGULATIONS - 2013
M.E. CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
SEMESTER I
SL.
No.
Course
Code
Course Title
L
T
P
C
THEORY
1
CIC11
3
1
0
4
2
CIC12
Transducers and Measurements
3
0
0
3
3
CIC13
System Theory (Common to C&I, HVE)
3
0
0
3
4
CIC14
Digital Control System
3
1
0
4
5
CIC15
Microcontroller based System Design
3
0
0
3
6
CIC16
Digital Instrumentation
3
0
0
3
Digital Control and Instrumentation Laboratory - I
0
0
3
2
18
2
3
22
L
T
P
C
PRACTICAL
7
CIC17
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
SL.
Course
No.
Code
THEORY
Course Title
1
CIC21
PC Based Instrumentation System Design
3
0
0
3
2
CIC22
Process Dynamics and Control
3
0
0
3
3
CIC23
Nonlinear Control
3
0
0
3
Elective - I
3
0
0
3
Elective - II
Elective - III
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
Digital Control and Instrumentation Laboratory - II
0
0
3
2
18
0
3
20
4
5
6
PRACTICAL
7
CIC24
TOTAL
L - Lecture hours
T-Tutorial hours
P- Practical hours
C- Credit
2
Regulations’2013
SEMESTER – II (ELECTIVE I, II & III)
SEMESTER – II (Elective I)
SL.
No.
Course
Code
Course Title
L
T
P
C
1
CIE2D
Power Plant Instrumentation
3
0
0
3
2
CIE2C
Instrumentation for Non-Destructive Testing
3
0
0
3
3
CIE2E
Instrumentation in Pulp and Paper Industries
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
SEMESTER – II (Elective II)
SL.
No.
Course
Code
Course Title
1
CIE2F
Smart Sensors
3
0
0
3
2
CIE2G
Multi Sensor Data Fusion
3
0
0
3
3
CIE2H
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems
3
0
0
3
4
CIE2J
Medical Imaging Systems
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
SEMESTER – II (Elective III)
SL.
No.
Course
Code
Course Title
1
CIE2B
Soft Computing Techniques (Common to HVE, C&I)
3
0
0
3
2
CIE2K
Robotics and Industrial Automation
3
0
0
3
3
CIE2A
Electromagnetic Interference and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (Common to HVE, C&I)
3
0
0
3
L - Lecture hours
T-Tutorial hours
P- Practical hours
C- Credit
3
Regulations’2013
SEMESTER III
SL.
No.
Course
Code
THEORY
1
2
3
PRACTICAL
4
CIC31
Course Title
L
T
P
C
Elective IV
Elective V
Elective VI
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
Project Work Phase I
0
0
12
6
9
0
12
15
L
T
P
C
0
0
0
0
24
24
12
12
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
SL.
No.
Course
Code
Course Title
PRACTICAL
1
CIC41
Project Work Phase II
TOTAL
4
Regulations’2013
ELECTIVES FOR M.E CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
SEMESTER – III (Elective IV)
SL.
No.
Course
Code
Course Title
L
T
P
C
1
CIE3A
Optimal Control and Filtering
3
0
0
3
2
CIE3C
System Identification and Adaptive control
3
0
0
3
3
CIE3E
Biocontrol
3
0
0
3
4
CIE3F
Advanced Process Control
3
0
0
3
SEMESTER – III (Elective V)
SL.
No.
Course
Code
Course Title
L
T
P
C
1
CIE3G
Industrial Automation
3
0
0
3
2
CIE3H
Solar Photovoltaic Technologies and
Applications
3
0
0
3
3
CIE3J
Automobile Instrumentation
3
0
0
3
4
CIE3K
Applied Industrial Instrumentation
3
0
0
3
5
CIE3L
Modern Medical Instruments
3
0
0
3
SEMESTER – III (Elective VI)
SL.
No.
Course
Code
Course Title
Advanced Digital System Design
(Common to CC,CS, HVE,C&I)
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
1
CIE3D
2
CIE3B
3
CIE3M
Advanced Digital Image Processing
3
0
0
3
4
CIE3N
3
0
0
3
L - Lecture hours
T-Tutorial hours
P- Practical hours
C- Credit
5
CIC11
APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the concepts of matrix theory
• To understand simplex method, two phase method and graphical solution in linear
programming.
• To learn moment generating functions and one dimensional random variables.
• To understand queueing models and computation methods in engineering
UNIT I
9
Eigen-values using QR transformations – Generalized eigen vectors – Canonical forms – Singular
value decomposition and applications – Pseudo inverse – Least square approximations.
UNIT II
LINEAR PROGRAMMING
9
Formulation – Graphical Solution – Simplex Method – Two Phase Method – Transportation and
UNIT III
9
properties – Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions –
Function of a Random Variable.
UNIT IV
QUEUEING MODELS
9
Poisson Process – Markovian queues – Single and Multi Server Models – Little’s formula – Machine
Interference Model – Steady State analysis – Self Service queue.
UNIT V
9
Boundary value problems for ODE – Finite difference methods – Numerical solution of PDE –
Solution of Laplace and Poisson equations – Liebmann's iteration process – Solution of heat
conduction equation by Schmidt explicit formula and Crank - Nicolson implicit scheme – Solution of
wave equation.
L: 45 T: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Bronson,R., “Matrix Operation, Schaum’s outline series”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1989.
2. Taha, H. A., “Operations Research: An Introduction”, 7th Edition, Pearson Education Edition,
3. R. E. Walpole, R. H. Myers, S. L. Myers, and K. Ye, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers
& Scientists”, 8th Edition, Asia, 2007.
Wiley and Sons, New York 1985.
5. Grewal, B.S., “Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, 7th Edition, Khanna
Publishers, 2000.
6
CIC12
Regulations’2013
TRANSDUCERS AND MEASUREMENTS
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To understand the characteristics of various sensors.
ii. To calibrate the measuring instruments.
iii. To apply sensors in various aspects.
UNIT I RESISTIVE, INDUCTIVE AND CAPACITIVE ELEMENTS
9
Potentiometric, strain-gage and electrode elements – Inductive and Capacitive elements: structures,
equivalent circuits and characteristics, single, differential and angle displacement elements,
displacement to phase converters, and proximity elements, magnetostrictive elements, temperature
instabilities and features.
UNIT II TRANSFORMER, ELECTRODYNAMIC, SERVO AND RESONANT ELEMENTS 9
Transformer elements: Single core, differential, rotating coil and synchro transformers, weak-field
sensors - Electrodynamic elements: Moving-coil, variable-reluctance- - Resonant elements: vibrating
strings, vibrating beams, vibrating cylinders, piezoelectric resonators, acoustical resonators,
microwave cavity resonators.
UNIT III MECHANICAL, ACOUSTICAL AND FLOWMETERING ELEMENTS
9
Stresses state of diaphragm, dynamic characteristics of diaphragm, temperature drifts, sensitivity
drifts, sensitivity to acceleration – Inertial mass elements: sensing and transduction elements of
flowmeters, electromagnetic flowmeters, nanoelectrode electromagnetic flowmeters -ultrasonic
elements – Acoustical elements: acoustical filters.
UNIT IV OPTICAL MICROSTRUCTURE SENSORS
9
Photo detectors: Thermal detectors, pneumatic detectors, pyroelectric detectors, photoemissive
devices, photo conductive detectors, photo diodes, avalanche photo diodes, schottky photo diodes,
photo transistors – Fiber optic sensors: Fibers as light guides, reflection sensors, Intrinsic multimode
sensor, temperature sensor, phase modulated sensor, fiber optic gyroscopes and other fiber sensors.
UNIT V MISCELLANEOUS MINIATURE SENSORS
9
Magnetic sensors: Hall Effect sensors, magnetoresistors and other sensors – Solid state chemical
sensors: Silicon based sensors, metal oxide sensors, solid electrolyte sensors, membranes –
Electromechanical micro sensors and basic factors of design
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. Alexander D Khazan, “Transducers and their elements – Design and application”, PTR
REFERENCES
1. Pavel Ripka ,Alois Tipek,“Modern sensors hand book”, Instrumentation and measurement
series, ISTE Ltd., 2007.
2. David Fraden., “Hand book of Modern Sensors, Physics, Design and Applications”, 3rd
Edition, PHI 2004, Springer India Private Limited, 2006.
7
CIC13
SYSTEM THEORY
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To design a state space model for a system
ii. To determine the controllability, observability, and stability of state variable systems.
iii. To use state variable feedback to place systems poles.
iv. To design state variable observers and controllers.
UNIT I MODERN CONTROL THEORY
9
Limitations of conventional control theory - Concepts of state, State variables and state model – state
model for linear time invariant systems: State space representation using physical-Phase and
canonical variables.
UNIT II SYSTEM RESPONSE
9
Transfer function from state model - Transfer matrix - Decomposition of transfer functions Direct,
cascade and parallel decomposition techniques - Solution of state equation - State transition matrix
computation.
UNIT III SYSTEM MODELS
9
Characteristic equation - Eigen values and Eigen vectors - Invariance of Eigen values Diagonalization - Jordan Canonical form - Concepts of controllability and observability - Kalman's
and Gilbert's tests - Controllable and observable phase variable forms - Effect of pole-zero
cancellation on controllability and observability.
UNIT IV MODEL CONTROL
9
Introduction – Stability improvement by State Feedback – Necessary and sufficient conditions for
Arbitary Pole Placement - Pole Placement by State Feedback - Full-Order Observers - ReducedOrder Observers - Deadbeat Control by State Feedback - Deadbeat Observers.
UNIT V LIAPUNOV STABILITY
9
Liapunov stability analysis - Stability in the sense of Liapunov - Definiteness of Scalar Functions –
Quadratic forms - Second method of Liapunov - Liapunov stability analysis of linear time invariant
systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Gopal .M, “Modern Control System Theory”, 2nd Edition, New Age International Publisher, New
Delhi, 2006.
2. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, India, 2003.
REFERENCES
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, "Modern Control Engineering", 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2002.
2. Nagrath I J and Gopal M, "Control Systems Engineering", New Age International Publisher,
New Delhi, 2006.
3. Nise S Norman, “Control Systems Engineering”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Delhi,
2000.
4. Benjamin C Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Delhi, 2002.
8
CIC14
DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
Regulations’2013
LT P C
3 104
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The Student can able to
Discretize the continuous plants
i.
ii.
Design a compensator and digital controller
iii.
Analyses the state variable present in digital system
UNIT I
SIGNAL PROCESSING IN DIGITAL CONTROL
12
Advantage of Digital Control – Principles of Signal Conversion – Basic Discrete Time Signal – Time
Domain Models for Discrete Time Systems – Review of Z Transforms – Transfer Function Models –
Sample and Hold System – Sampled Spectra and Aliasing – Reconstruction of Analog Signals –
Selection of Sampling Rate –Principles of Discretization
UNIT II MODELS OF DIGITAL CONTROL DEVICES AND SYSTEMS
12
Basic Digital Control Scheme – Z Domain Description of Sampled Continuous Time Plants – Z
Domain Description of Systems with Dead Time – Implementation of Digital Controller – Digital PID
controller – Digital Temperature Control System – Digital Position Control System – Stepping Motors
and their Control
UNIT III DESIGN OF DIGITAL CONTROLLER
12
Introduction - Z Plane Specifications of Control System Design – Digital Compensator Design Using
Frequency Response Plots – Digital Compensator Design Using Root Locus Plots – Z Plane Synthesis
– Stability on the Z Plane and Jury Stability Criterion
UNIT IV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS OF DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
12
State Descriptions of Digital Processors – State Description of Sampled Continuous Time Plants State Description of System with Dead Time – Solution of State Difference Equations –
Controllability and Observability
UNIT V DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS WITH STATE FEEDBACK
12
State Regulator Design –State Observers – Separation Principle – State feedback with Integral control
– Dead beat control by state feedback and dead beat observers - Pole Placement Design by State
Feedback (Single Input) –Pole Placement Design by Output Feedback (Single Input)
L:45 T:15 Total : 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. M.Gopal “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, 4th Edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2012.
REFERENCES
1.
2.
Benjamin C. Kuo “Digital control systems”, Oxford University Press, 2004.
G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and M Workman, “Digital Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI
(Pearson), 2002.
9
CIC15
MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To familiarizes the architecture of 8051 microcontroller
ii. To study the architecture of PIC microcontroller
iii. To understand the operation of CCP modules, ADC and DAC programming
UNIT I 8051 ARCHITECTURE
9
Architecture – memory organization – addressing modes – instruction set – Timers -Interrupts - I/O
ports, Interfacing I/O Devices – Serial Communication - Arithmetic Instructions – Logical
Instructions –Single bit Instructions.
UNIT II 8051 PROGRAMMING
9
Assembly language programming –– Timer Counter Programming – Serial Communication
Programming Interrupt Programming – RTOS for 8051 – RTOSLite – FullRTOS –Task creation and
run – LCD digital clock/thermometer using FullRTOS.
UNIT III PIC MICROCONTROLLER
9
Architecture – memory organization, RAM & ROM Allocation –Timers – Interrupts, I/O ports- I2C
bus-A/D converter-UART - addressing modes – instruction set.
UNIT IV PIC MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
9
PIC programming in Assembly & C –I/O port, Data Conversion, Timer programming - CCP modules
-ADC, DAC and Sensor Interfacing –Flash and EEPROM memories.
UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN – CASE STUDY
9
Interfacing LCD Display – Keypad Interfacing - Generation of Gate signals for converters and
Inverters - Motor Control – Controlling AC appliances –Measurement of frequency - Stand alone
Data Acquisition System.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Rolin D. Mckinlay, Danny Causey, “PIC Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems using Assembly and C for PIC18”, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Kenneth J.Ayala “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming & Applications”, 2nd
Edition, Penram International Publishing (India), 2000.
REFERENCE BOOK
1. Myke Predko, “Programming and customizing the 8051 microcontroller”, Tata McGraw Hill
2001.
10
CIC16
DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i.
To make the students to gain a clear knowledge of the basics of digital instruments and
measurement techniques.
ii. To have an adequate knowledge in various display and recording devices.
iii. To have an elaborate study of communication standards
UNIT I
DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS
9
Overview of A/D converter, types and characteristics – Sampling. Objective – Building blocks of
Automation systems –Counters – Modes of operation- Frequency, Period, Time interval
measurements, Prescaler, Heterodyne converter for frequency measurement, Single and Multi channel
Data Acquisition systems.
UNIT II INTERFACING AND DATA TRANSMISSION
9
Data transmission systems – 8086 Microprocessor based system design – Peripheral Interfaces – Time
Division Multiplexing (TDM) – Digital Modulation – Pulse Modulation – Pulse Code Format –
Interface systems and standards – Communications.
UNIT III INSTRUMENTATION BUS
9
Introduction - Modem standards - Basic requirements of Instrument Bus standards - Bus
communication - interrupt and data handshaking - Interoperability - interchangeability - RS-232 USB - RS-422, RS-485.
UNIT IV PARALLEL PORT BUSES
9
Field bus, Mod bus, GPIB, IEEE-488, VME, VXI, Network buses – Ethernet – TCP/IP protocols;
CAN bus- basics, Message transfer, Fault confinement.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES
9
PC based DAS, Data loggers, PC based industrial process measurements like flow, temperature,
pressure and level development system, CRT interface and controller with monochrome and colour
video display.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. A.J. Bouwens, “Digital Instrumentation”, TATA McGraw - Hill, 1998.
2. N. Mathivanan, “Microprocessors, PC Hardware and Interfacing”, Prentice-Hall India, 2005.
REFERENCES
1. H S Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw- Hill, 2006.
2. Joseph J. Carr, “Elements of Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement” 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2003.
3. Buchanan, “Computer busses”, Arnold, London, 2000.
4. Jonathan W Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer systems”, Asia Pvt. Ltd., Brooks/Cole,
Thomson, 2001.
11
CIC17
Regulations’2013
DIGITAL CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY – I
LTPC
0 0 3 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The Student can able
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
To understand the components present in the system
To tune the controllers for our needs
To solve a real practical problems in process industry
To use software such as Matlab and LabVIEW for simulating a system
Familiar with different types of flow meters.
DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Characteristics of control valve with and without positioner.
2. Operation of on-off controlled thermal process.
3. Closed loop response of flow control loop
4. Closed loop response of level control loop
5. Closed loop response of pressure control loop
6. Closed loop response of temperature control loop
7. Study of complex control system(ratio/cascade)
8. Experimental study of following using matlab
a) Response of different order processes with and without transportation lag
b) Cohen-coon method
c) Z-N method
9. Characteristics of resistive potentiometer, Strain gauge, load cell and LVDT
10. Characteristics of RTD, Thermocouple and Thermistor
11. Experimental determination of coefficient of discharge for orifice, pitot and venturi tube
12. Design of lead, lag, lead-lag compensator and implementation using ELVIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
12
CIC21
Regulations’2013
PC BASED INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM DESIGN
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i.
ii.
iii.
To make the students to gain a clear knowledge of the basics of digital instruments and
measurement techniques.
To have an adequate knowledge in various display and recording devices.
To have a study of virtual instrumentation and its applications.
UNIT I DATA ACQUISITION AND INSTRUMENT INTERFACE
9
Programming and simulation of Building block of instrument Automation system – Signal analysis,
I/O port configuration with instrument bus protocols - ADC, DAC, DIO, counters & timers, PC
hardware structure, timing, interrupts, DMA, software and hardware installation, current loop.
UNIT II VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES
9
Block diagram and architecture of a virtual instrument, Graphical programming in data flow,
comparison with conventional programming, VI’s and sub-VI’s, loops and charts, arrays, clusters and
graphs, case and sequence structures, formula nodes, local and global variables, string and file I/O.
UNIT III DESIGN TEST & ANALYSIS
9
Spectral estimation using Fourier Transform, power spectrum, correlation methods, Stability analysis,
Fault analysis –Sampling, Data Parity and error coding checks, Synchronization testing – Watch dog
timer, DMA method – Realtime Clocking, Noise- Gaussian, White analysis.
UNIT IV PC BASED INSTRUMENTATION
9
Introduction - Evolution of signal standard – HART Communication protocol communication modes
– HART networks – control system interface – HART commands – HART field controller
implementation – HART and the OSI model
UNIT V SIMULATION OF PHYSICAL SYSTEMS
Simulation of linear & Non-linear models of systems, Hardware in loop simulation of
physical systems using special softwares.
9
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. N. Mathivanan, “Pc-Based Instrumentation:Concepts and Practice”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
2. K. Ogatta, “Modern control Engineering”, 5th Edition, Perason Education 2010.
3. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation using Labview”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Dorf and Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2008.
2. Patrick H. Garrett, “High performance Instrumentation and Automation”, CRC Press, Taylor &
Francis Group, 2005.
3. MAPLE V programming guide
4. MATLAB/SIMULINK user manual
5. MATHCAD/VIS SIM user manual.
6. LABVIEW simulation user manual
13
CIC22
PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
To analyze the dynamics of process operations mathematically
To analyze the characteristics of various controller
To design the controller and to obtain the controller parameter
To understand control schemes and analysis its performance
UNIT I
PROCESS DYNAMICS
9
Introduction to process control - objective of modeling - models of industrial process hydraulic tanks fluid flow systems - mixing process - chemical reactions - thermal systems heat exchangers and
distillation column.
UNIT II
CONTROL ACTIONS AND CONTROLLER TUNING
9
Basic control actions-on/off, P, P+I, P+I+D, floating control-pneumatic and electronic controllerscontroller tuning-time response and frequency response methods- non-linear controllers.
UNIT III COMPLEX CONTROL TECHNIQUES
Feed forward-ratio-cascade-split range-inferential-predictive-adaptive and multivariable control.
9
UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
9
Evolution of PLC – Sequential and Programmable controllers – Architecture – Programming of PLC
– Relay logic and Ladder logic – Functional blocks – Communication Networks for PLC.
UNIT V
COMPUTER CONTROL OF PROCESS
9
PLC based control of processes – Computer control of liquid level system – heat exchanger – Smart
sensors and Field bus.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Chidambarm. M, “Computer control of processes”, Narosa Publications, 2002.
2. George Stephanopolus, “Chemical Process Control”, Prentice Hall India-1984
REFERENCES
1. K.Krishna Swamy, “Process Control”, New Age International, 2007.
2. Marlin T.E., “Process Control”, 2nd Edition McGraw Hill, New York, 2000.
3. Norman A Anderson, “Instrumentation for Process Measurement and Control” CRC Press
LLC, Florida, 1998.
4. Harriot P, “Process Control”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1991.
5. Pertrezeulla, “Programmable Controllers”, McGraw-Hill, 1989.
6. Balchan J.G. and Mumme G, “Process Control Structures and Applications”, Van Nostrand
Renhold Co., New York,1988.
7. Lucas M.P, “Distributed Control System”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co. NY 1986.
14
CIC23
Regulations’2013
NONLINEAR CONTROL
LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the course, students can able to:
i. Understand issues related to nonlinear systems and their stability analysis
ii. Understand controls design techniques involving feedback linearization and input-state
linearization.
iii. Understand Lyapunov stability analysis.
UNIT I DESCRIBING FUNCTION
9
Common Nonlinear behavior, Common Nonlinearities -Definitions – Computing Describing
Functions -Common Nonlinearities and its Describing Functions-Nyquist Criterion and its ExtensionExistence of Limit Cycles-Stability of limit Cycles.
UNIT II PHASE PLANE ANALYSIS
9
Concepts of phase plane analysis- Phase portraits- singular points- Symmetry in phase plane portraitsConstructing Phase Portraits- Phase plane Analysis of Linear and Nonlinear Systems
UNIT III LYAPUNOV THEORY
9
Nonlinear Systems and Equilibrium Points-Concepts of Stability-Linearization and Local StabilityLyapunov’s Direct Method-Positive definite Functions and Lyapunov Functions- LTI System
Analysis based on Lyapunov’s Direct Method-Krasovski’s Method-Variable Gradient Method- Popov
method - Control Design based on Lyapunov’s Direct Method.
UNIT IV FEEDBACK LINEARIZATION
9
Feedback Linearization and the Canonical Form-Mathematical Tools-Input-State Linearization of
SISO Systems- input-Output Linearization of SISO Systems-Generating a Linear Input-Output
Relation-Inverse Dynamics and Non-Minimum-Phase Systems-Feedback Linearization of MIMO
Systems Zero-Dynamics and Control Design.
UNIT V SLIDING MODE CONTROL
9
Sliding Surfaces- Continuous approximations of Switching Control laws- Variable structure systemsSliding modes in variable structure system conditions for existence of sliding regions -MIMO
Systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. J A E Slotine and W Li, “Applied Nonlinear control”, PHI, 1991.
2. M Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Conventional and Intelligent Control
Systems”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. Hasan Khalil, “Nonlinear systems and control”, Prentice Hall.2002.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall Inc., 1997.
3. G. J. Thaler, “Automatic control systems”, Jaico publishers, 1993.
15
Regulations’2013
CIC24
DIGITAL CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY – II
LTPC
003 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To design linear and nonlinear controller.
ii. To acquire data from real world into pc for analysis purpose.
iii. To verify the system’s controllability and observability
iv. To use software such as Matlab and LabVIEW for simulating a system
v. Familiar with DCS, NI ELVIS and PLC
DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Developing voltmeter and signal generator using DAQ cards.
2. Simulating reactor control using Virtual Instrumentation
3. Real time temperature control using Virtual Instrumentation
4. Linear and nonlinear PID controller using Virtual Instrumentation
5. Design of Instrumentation amplifier and implementation using ELVIS
6. Design of low pass, high pass, band pass filter for different order systems and
implementation using ELVIS
7. Study of PLC and programming
8. Develop and implement a ladder diagram for bottle filling plant and mixing process using
PLC
9. Study of DCS – Process Field Control Station and Human Interface system
10. Develop a project using DCS for controlling flow, level, pressure and temperature processes
11. Develop a project using DCS for implementing logical sequence of a typical plant
12. Experimental study of following using matlab
a) Check the controllability and observability of systems
b) Design a dead beat algorithm.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
16
CIE2D
POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To gain knowledge on the operation of various conventional power plants & also on the
different types of controls being used in boilers.
ii. To acquire knowledge in Solar radiation measurements, Solar Photovoltaic systems and
applications of solar energy.
iii. To understand the prospective ideas about Wind Energy Conversion Systems and
Biomass conversion technologies.
iv. To extend the views in the analysis of Geothermal resources, Ocean Energy and
additional alternate energy resources
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF CONVENTIONAL POWER GENERATION AND
CONTROL LOOPS IN BOILER
9
Brief survey of methods of power generation – Thermal Power plant, Hydro-Electric Power plant,
Nuclear Power plant and Cogeneration – Control system diagramming – P&I diagram of boiler –
Control loops in boiler – Combustion control – Measurement of furnace draft – Drum level control –
Main steam and reheat steam temperature control – Deaerator –Combustion air flow control.
UNIT II SOLAR ENERGY
9
Solar radiation – Solar radiation measurements, Estimation of average solar radiation, Solar radiation
on tilted surfaces – Solar energy collectors –Solar Photovoltaic systems – Solar cell characteristics,
Solar cell Classification, Construction of PV module, panel and array, MPPT, Classification of PV
systems – Applications of solar energy – Solar water heaters, Solar thermal electric conversion, Solar
PV power generation, Solar cooking.
UNIT III WIND AND BIOMASS ENERGY
9
Wind Energy – Origin of winds, Nature of winds, Site selection considerations, Wind turbine
aerodynamics, Basic components of a Wind Energy Conversion System, Wind turbine types and their
construction, Design consideration of horizontal axis type wind turbine, Schemes for electrical energy
generation (CSCF, VSCF, VSVF), Environmental aspects.
Biomass Energy – Biomass resources, Biomass conversion technologies, Biomass gasification,
Constant pressure type and constant volume type biogas plants.
UNIT IV GEOTHERMAL AND OCEAN ENERGY
9
Geothermal Energy – Types of Geothermal resources, Analysis of geothermal resources,
Environmental consideration.Ocean Energy – Tidal Energy – Conversion scheme, Estimation of
power – Wave Energy – Power in waves, Wave energy technology – Ocean Thermal Energy
Conversion (OTEC) schemes – Claude cycle, Anderson cycle, Hybrid cycle, Environmental impacts.
UNIT V ADDITIONAL ALTERNATE ENERGY RESOURCES
9
Magneto Hydro Dynamic (MHD) power generation – Principles, MHD systems, Voltage and Power
output of MHD generator, Materials for MHD generator. Thermoelectric power generation – Basic
principles, Thermoelectric power generator and its performance analysis, Selection of materials.
Thermionic power generation – Principle, Thermionic generator and its performance analysis
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. G.D.Rai, “Non-Conventional Energy Resources”, 5th Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2011.
2. B.H. Khan, “Non-Conventional Energy Resources”, 11th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2012.
17
Regulations’2013
REFERENCES
1. G.F. Gilman, “Boiler Control Systems Engineering”, 2005, ISA Publication.
2. E.Al. Wakil, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984.
3. S. P. Sukhatme, “Solar Energy”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1996.
4. Sam G. Dukelow, “The Control of Boilers”, Instrument Society of America, 1991.
5. P.K. Nag, “Power Plant Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
18
CIE2C
INSTRUMENTATION FOR NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To study the fundamental concepts of Visual Inspection & Liquid Penetrant Testing
ii. To learn various types of Electromagnetic Testing
iii. To understand the clear concepts of Industrial Application using NDT
UNIT I
NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING: AN INTRODUCTION, VISUAL
INSPECTION & LIQUID PENETRANT TESTING
6
Introduction to various non-destructive methods, Comparison of Destructive and Non destructive
Tests, Conditions for effective non-destructive testing Visual Inspection, Optical aids used for visual
inspection, Applications. Physical principles, procedure for penetrant testing, Penetrant testing
materials, Penetrant testing methods-water washable, Post – Emulsification methods, Applications.
UNIT II
ELECTROMAGNETIC TESTING
10
Eddy Current Testing: Principles, Instrumentation for ECT, Absolute, differential probes,
Inspection of Ferromagnetic materials – Instrumentation for pulsed eddy current techniques applications
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing: Principles, Inductive coils probe and Hall Effect probes -Factors
affecting flux leakage- applications.
Magnetic particle testing: Principle of MPT, procedure used for testing a component, Equipment
used for MPT, Magnetizing techniques, Applications.
UNIT III RADIOGRAPHY & THERMOGRAPHY
10
Principle of Radiography, Radiographic imaging, Inspection Techniques – Single wall single image,
Double wall Penetration, Multiwall Penetration technique- Applications and limitations of
radiographic inspection- Real Time Radiography
Principle of Thermography, Detectors and Equipments. Applications – Thermal Imaging for condition
Monitoring of Industrial Components.
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC & ACOUSTIC EMISSION TESTING
10
Principle, Ultrasonic transducers, Ultrasonic Flaw detection Equipment- Inspection Methods- Normal
Incident Pulse- Echo Inspection, Normal Incident Through-transmission Testing, Angle Beam PulseEcho testing- Applications of Normal Beam Inspection in detecting fatigue cracks, Inclusions, Slag,
Porosity and Intergranular cracks. Modes of display A- scan, B-Scan, C- Scan, Applications, Principle of AET, Instrumentation, Applications - testing of metal pressure vessels, Fatigue crack
detection in aerospace structures
UNIT V
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS, COMPARISON AND SELECTION OF
NDT METHODS
9
Applications of NDE in Nuclear, Aircraft, Automotive and petroleum Industries. A Comparison and
selection of various NDT techniques. Codes, standards, specification and procedures.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. Baldev Raj, Jeyakumar.T., Thavasimuthu.M., “Practical Non Destructive Testing” Narosa
publishing house, New Delhi, 2002.
19
Regulations’2013
REFERENCES
1. Krautkramer. J., “Ultra Sonic Testing of Materials”, 1st Edition, Springer – Verlag
Publication, New York, 1996.
2. Peter J. Shull “Non Destructive Evaluation: Theory, Techniques and Application” Marcel
Dekker, Inc., New York, 2002.
3. www.ndt.net.
4. Prasad J and C.G.K. Nair, “Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials”, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
5. Charles J. Hellier, “Hand Book of Non-Destructive Evaluation”, The McGraw-Hill
Companies, New York, 2001.
20
CIE2E
Regulations’2013
INSTRUMENTATION IN PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRIES
LTPC
30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To study the fundamental concepts of paper making process
ii. To understand the various types of paper properties and measurement techniques
iii. To introduce the consistency measurement & control techniques
iv. To learn the concepts of paper making machine
UNIT I AN OVERVIEW OF PAPER MAKING PROCESS
9
Paper making process — Raw materials — Pulp separation — screening — Bleaching —Cooking —
Chemical reaction — chippers — types of digesters — H factor and Kappa factors-Stock preparation
— Instrumentation needs — Energy conservation and paper quality control.
UNIT II PAPER PROPERTIES AND ITS MEASUREMENT
9
Physical, electrical, optical and chemical properties of paper — Basic weight, thickness, density,
Porosity, smoothness, softness, hardness and compressibility — stress-strain relationship-Tensile
strength, bursting strength, tearing resistance, folding endurance, stifihess and impact strength —
Dielectric constant, dielectric strength, dielectric loss and Properties of electrical insulating paper —
Brightness, color, gloss and capacity — Starch constant acidity and pH - Measurement techniques.
UNIT III CONSISTENCY MEASUREMENT
9
Definition of consistency — Techniques for head box consistency measurement — Stock consistency
measurement and control.
UNIT IV PAPER MAKING MACHINE
9
Functioning of Paper making machine — Quality parameters — moisture, basic weight, caliper,
brightness, colour, ash content, strength, gloss and tensile strength - parameters monitoring
Instrumentation.
UNIT V
CONTROL ASPECTS
9
Machine and cross direction control technique — consistency, moisture and basic weight control
dryer control — computer based control systems - mill wide control.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Sankaranarayanan, P.E., “Pulp and Paper Industries - Technology and Instrumentation”,
Kotharis Desk book series, 1995.
2. James P.Casey, “Pulp and Paper chemistry and chemical Technology”, John Wiley and
sons, 1981.
REFERENCES
1. Kenneth W. Britt, “Handbook of Pulp and Paper technology”, Britt K.W.Van Nostrand
Reinbold Company, 1970.
2. Austin G.T., Shrencs “Chemical Process Industries”, McGraw Hill International Student
Edition, Singapore, 1985.
21
CIE2F
Regulations’2013
SMART SENSORS
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To study the fundamental concepts of micro sensors and actuators
ii. To understand the various types of sensors used in industries
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF SMART SENSOR SYSTEMS
9
Definitions for Several Kinds of Sensors- Automated Production Machines - Automated Consumer
Products. Interface Electronics and Measurement Techniques for Smart Sensor Systems: Objectoriented Design of Sensor Systems - Sensing Elements and Their Parasitic Effects - Analog-to-digital
Conversion - A Universal Transducer Interface.
UNIT II SILICON SENSORS, OPTICAL SENSORS & PHYSICAL CHEMOSENSORS 9
Silicon Sensors: Introduction- Measurement and Control Systems- Transducers.
Optical Sensors: Introduction - Photon Absorption in Silicon – Interfacing of Photon Transmission
into Silicon - Photon Detection in Silicon Photoconductors - Photon Detection in Silicon pn Junctions.
Physical Chemosensors: Introduction - Physical Chemosensing - Energy Domains Examples and Applications.
UNIT III SMART TEMPERATURE SENSORS, CAPACITIVE SENSORS & HALL
MAGNETIC SENSORS
9
Smart Temperature Sensors and Temperature-Sensor Systems: Introduction - Resistive Temperaturesensing Elements - Temperature-sensor Features of Transistors - Smart Temperature Sensors and
Systems.
Capacitive Sensors: Basics of Capacitive Sensors - The Design of Electrode Configurations Selectivity for Electrical Signals and Electrical Parameters.
Integrated Hall Magnetic Sensors: Hall Effect and Hall Elements - Integrated Hall Sensor Systems.
UNIT IV
UNIVERSAL ASYNCHRONOUS SENSOR INTERFACES AND DAQ
9
Universal Sensor Interfaces - Asynchronous Converters - Dealing with Problems of
Low-cost
Design of Universal Interface ICs - Front-end Circuits.
Data Acquisition for Frequency- and Time-domain Sensors: DAQ Boards - Design for Quasi-digital
Sensors - Universal Frequency-to-digital Converters (UFDC).
UNIT V
MICROCONTROLLERS AND DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS FOR SMART
SENSOR SYSTEMS
9
Introduction - MCU and DSP Architectures, Organization, Structures, and Peripherals - Choosing a
Low-Power MCU or DSP - Timer Modules - Analog Comparators, ADCs, and DACs as Modules of
Microcontrollers - Embedded Networks and LCD Interfacing - Development Tools and Support.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Gerard C.M. Meijer, “Smart Sensor System”, A John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2008.
2. Sergey Y. Yurish, Maria T.S.R. Gomes and Maria Teresa S.R. Gomes, “Smart Sensors and
MEMS”, Klumer Academic Publishers, 2004.
22
CIE2G
Regulations’2013
MULTI SENSOR DATA FUSION
LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To study the fundamental concepts of multisensor Data Fusion
ii. To learn and understand the various types of Algorithm for Data Fusion
iii. To introduce advanced filtering techniques and estimation analysis
iv. To gain the knowledge of high performance Data Structure Algorithm and its application
UNIT I MULTISENSOR DATA FUSION INTRODUCTION
9
Sensors and sensor data, Use of multiple sensors, Fusion applications. The inference hierarchy: output
data. Data fusion model. Architectural concepts and issues. Benefits of data fusion, Mathematical
tools used:Algorithms, co-ordinate transformations, rigid body motion. Dependability and Markov
chains, Meta – heuristics.
UNIT II ALGORITHMS FOR DATA FUSION
Taxonomy of algorithms for multisensor data fusion. Data association. Identity declaration.
9
UNIT III ESTIMATION
9
Kalman filtering, practical aspects of Kalman filtering, extended Kalmal filters. Decision levels
identify fusion. Knowledge based approaches.
UNIT IV ADVANCED FILTERING
9
Data information filter, extended information filter. Decentralized and scalable decentralized
estimation. Sensor fusion and approximate agreement. Optimal sensor fusion using range trees
recursively. Distributed dynamic sensor fusion.
UNIT V HIGH PERFORMANCE DATA STRUCTURES
9
Tessellated, trees, graphs and function. Representing ranges and uncertainty in data structures.
Designing optimal sensor systems with in dependability bounds. Implementing data fusion system.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1.
David L. Hall, “Mathematical techniques in Multisensor data fusion”, Artech House, Boston,
2004.
REFERENCES
1. R.R. Brooks and S.S. Iyengar, “Multisensor Fusion: Fundamentals and Applications with
Software”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1998.
2. Arthur Gelb, “Applied Optimal Estimation”, The M.I.T. Press, 1999.
3. James V. Candy, “Signal Processing: The Model Based Approach”, McGraw –Hill Book
Company, 1987.
23
CIE2H
MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To describe various Microsystems & MEMS technologies and their applications
ii. To explain various semiconductor processes, micro fabrication, techniques & water –
level packaging technologies.
iii. To describe different sensing & actuating mechanisms in Microsystems
iv. To study various MEMS systems using micro fabrication techniques & transduction
mechanisms
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF MEMS
9
History of MEMS, MEMS and Microsystems, Scaling laws in Miniaturization. Materials for MEMS
and Microsystems.
UNIT II MICRO FABRICATIONS AND MICROMACHINING
9
Microsystem Design and Fabrication, Microsystem fabrication processes- Photolithography, Ion
Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation, Chemical and Physical Vapor deposition, Deposition by Epitaxy,
Etching. Bulk Micro manufacturing, Surface micromachining, LIGA process.
UNIT III PHYSICAL MICROSENSORS
9
Design of Acoustic wave sensors, resonant sensor, Vibratory gyroscope, Capacitive and Piezo
Resistive Pressure sensors- engineering mechanics behind these Microsensors.
UNIT IV MICROACTUATORS
9
Design of Actuators: Actuation using thermal forces, Actuation using shape memory Alloys,
Actuation using piezoelectric crystals, Actuation using Electrostatic forces (Parallel plate, Torsion
bar, Comb drive actuators), Micromechanical Motors and pumps.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES
9
Ink jet pointer heads, Micro mirror TV Projector, DNA chip, Micro arrays, and RF electronic devices.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, 2nd Edition, CRC press 2002.
2.
Stephen D. Senturia, “Micro system Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001.
REFERENCES
1.
B.H. Bao, “Analysis and design principles of MEMS Devices”, Elsevier, 2005.
2.
Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture”, Tata Mcraw Hill,
2002.
3.
Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson education India limited, 2006.
24
CIE2J
MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEMS
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
i. To apply the knowledge of human physiology in imaging modalities.
ii. To understand the latest technology of image formation techniques in various imaging
modalities.
UNIT I HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY
9
Cell and its structure – Skeletal system – Muscular system – Nervous system- Cardiovascular system
– respiratory system – Basic components of a biomedical system – Transducers for physiological
measurement – selection criteria for transducers.
UNIT II IMAGING PRINCIPLES AND RADIOGRAPHIC IMAGING
9
Imaging modalities – Image quality – Contrast, Resolution, Noise, SNR, Nonrandom effects,
Accuracy – Physics of Radiography – Attenuation of EM radiation – Narrow beam, Broad beam –
Radiation dosimetry – Exposure, Dose and Kerma, f-factor, Dose equivalent, effective dose.
UNIT III PROJECTION RADIOGRAPHY AND COMPUTED TOMOGRAPHY
9
Projection Radiography – Instrumentation – X-Ray tubes, Filtration, grids, image intensifiers – Image
formation – Basic Imaging equation, Geometric effects, Blurring effects, Film characteristics, SNR.
Computed Tomography – Instrumentation – X-Ray source and collimation, CT detectors, Gantry and
slip ring – Image formation – Parallel Ray reconstruction, Fan Beam reconstruction – Artifacts.
UNIT IV ULTRASOUND IMAGING AND MAGNETIC RESONANCE IMAGING
9
Ultrasound imaging – Wave propagation – Instrumentation – Pulse-Echo imaging – Transducer
motion – Ultrasound imaging modes – Depth of penetration, Pulse repetition rate – Steering and
Focusing – Transmit type, Beam forming and Dynamic Focusing.
MRI – Precession and Larmor Frequency – Instrumentation – MRI Data acquisition – Encoding
spatial position, Slice selection, Frequency and Phase encoding, Gradient Echoes – Image
reconstruction – Rectilinear data, Polar data – Image quality – Sampling, Resolution, SNR.
UNIT V NUCLEAR MEDICINE IMAGING
9
Radioactive decay and modes of decay – Planar Scintigraphy – Instrumentation – Collimators, crystal,
PMT, PHA, Gating circuit – Image formation – Event position estimation, Acquisition modes, Anger
camera imaging equation – Image quality in Planar Scintigraphy – SPECT Image formation – PET
Image formation – Image quality in SPECT and PET.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jerry L. Prince, Jonathan M. Links, “Medical Imaging – Signals and Systems” Pearson
Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2006.
2. B H Brown, P V Lawford , R H Smallwood, D R Hose, D C Barber, “Medical Physics and
Biomedical Engineering”, IOP publishers, 1999.
REFERENCES
1. Arthur C.Guyton and John Edward Hall, “Textbook of Medical Physiology”, 12th Edition,
Elsevier Publication, 2010.
2. Jacobson B. and Webster J.G. “Medicine and Clinical Engineering”, Prentice Hall India,
New Delhi, 1999.
3. Steve Webb, “The Physics of Medical Imaging”, Institute of Physics Publishing; 2Rev
Edition, 2008.
4. R.S.Khandpur, “Hand Book of Bio-Medical instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co
Ltd., 2003.
25
CIE2B
SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES
Regulations’2013
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To understand the fundamental concept of intelligent control.
ii. To study about the applications of ANN, various transformations and its controllers.
iii.
To aware about the fuzzy logic system and to design a various control schemes for nonlinear systems.
iv. To understand the basic concepts of genetic algorithms.
v. To study about the applications of GA, ANN and Fuzzy logic system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Approaches to intelligent control - Architecture for intelligent control - Symbolic reasoning systemrule-based systems - AI approach - Knowledge representation - Expert systems.
UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS
9
Concept of Artificial Neural Networks and its basic mathematical model, McCulloch-Pitts neuron
model - simple perceptron - Adaline and Madaline - Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron. Learning
and Training the neural network - Data Processing: Scaling, Fourier transformation, principalcomponent analysis and wavelet transformations - Hopfield network, Self-organizing network and
Recurrent network - Neural Network based controller.
UNIT III FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM
9
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets - basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning Introduction to fuzzy logic modeling and control - Fuzzification, inferencing and defuzzification Fuzzy knowledge and rule bases. Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for nonlinear systems - Selforganizing fuzzy logic control - Fuzzy logic control for nonlinear time-delay system.
9
UNIT IV GENETIC ALGORITHM
Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detail algorithmic steps - adjustment of free parameters Solution of typical control problems using genetic algorithm - Concept on some other search
techniques like tabu search and ant-colony search techniques for solving optimization problems.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS
9
GA application to power system optimization problem - Case studies: Identification and control of
linear and nonlinear dynamic systems using Matlab - Neural Network toolbox - Stability analysis of
Neural-Network interconnection systems - Implementation of fuzzy logic controller using Matlab
fuzzy-logic toolbox - Stability analysis of fuzzy control systems.
Total: 45 Periods
REFERENCES
1. Jacek M Zurada, "Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems", Jaico Publishing House, 1999.
2. Kosko.B, "Neural Networks And Fuzzy Systems", Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd., 1994.
3. Klir G.J. and Folger T.A., "Fuzzy sets, Uncertainty and Information", Prentice-Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd., 1993.
4. Zimmerman H.J., "Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications"-Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.
5. Driankov and Hellendroon, "Introduction to Fuzzy Control", Narosa Publishers, 2001.
26
CIE2K
Regulations’2013
ROBOTICS AND INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
To study the individual components of Robotics
To learn the kinematics transformation techniques used in Robotics
To gain the knowledge about Jacobian matrix
To understand how the image processing techniques used in Robotics
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND TERMINOLOGIES
9
Definition-Classification-History- Robots components-Degrees of freedom-Robot joints coordinatesReference frames-workspace-Robot languages-actuators-sensors-Position, velocity and acceleration
sensors-Torque sensors-tactile and touch sensorsproximity and range sensors-social issues.
UNIT II KINEMATICS
Mechanism-matrix representation-homogenous transformation-DH
kinematics-solution and programming-degeneracy and dexterity.
representation-
9
Inverse
UNIT III DIFFERENTIAL MOTION & VELOCITIES
9
Jacobian-differential motion of frames-Interpretation-calculation of Jacobian-Inverse JacobianDesign-Lagrangian mechanics-dynamic equations-static force analysis.
UNIT IV ROBOT CONTROL SYSTEM
9
Sensor characteristics- Hydraulic, Pneumatic and electric actuators-trajectory planningdecentalised
PID control- non-linear decoupling control.
UNIT V IMAGE PROCESSING & VISION SYSTEMS
9
Two and three dimensional images-spatial and frequency domain representation-noise and edgesconvolution masks-Processing techniques-thersholding-noise reductionedge detection-segmentationImage analysis and object recognition.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1.
Saeed B. Niku, “Introduction to Robotics”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
REFERENCES
1.
Fu, Gonzalez and Lee McGrahill, “Robotics”, International TATA McGraw Hill, 2008.
2.
R.D. Klafter, TA Chmielewski and Michael Negin, “Robotic Engineering, An
Integrated Approach”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
27
CIE2A
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Regulations’2013
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
i. To study characteristics and design of electromagnetic compatibility and methods of
eliminating interferences.
ii. To learn coupling, grounding and guard shields.
iii. To know filtering, shielding and methods of coating.
iv. To study digital logic noise and digital circuit ground noise.
v. To learn electrostatic discharge, standards and laboratory techniques.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
9
Sources of EMI - Conducted and radiated interference - Characteristics - Designing for
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - EMC regulation - typical noise path - use of network theory methods of eliminating interferences.
UNIT II METHOD OF HARDENING
9
Cabling – capacitive coupling - inductive coupling - shielding to prevent magnetic radiation - shield
transfer impedance - Grounding – safety grounds – signal grounds - single point and multipoint
ground systems- hybrid grounds - functional ground layout – grounding of cable shields- ground
loops - guard shields.
UNIT III BALANCING, FILTERING AND SHIELDING
9
Power supply decoupling - decoupling filters-amplifier filtering – high frequency filtering shielding
– near and far fields - shielding effectiveness - absorption and reflection loss - Shielding with
magnetic material - conductive gaskets - windows and coatings - grounding of shields.
9
UNIT IV DIGITAL CIRCUIT NOISE AND LAYOUT
Frequency versus time domain - analog versus digital circuits - digital logic noise- internal noise
sources - digital circuit ground noise – power distribution - noise voltage objectives measuring noise
voltages - unused inputs - logic families.
UNIT V ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE, STANDARDS AND LABORATORY
9
TECHNIQUES
Static Generation - human body model - static discharges -ED protection in equipment design - ESD
versus EMC - Industrial and Government standards – FCC requirements – CISPR recommendations
- Laboratory techniques - Measurement methods for field strength - EMI.
Total: 45 Periods
REFERENCES
1. Henry W.Ott, “Noise reduction techniques in electronic systems”, John Wiley &Sons, 2011.
2. Bernhard Keiser, “Principles of Electro-magnetic Compatibility”, Artech House, Inc. (685
canton street, Norwood, MA 020062 USA) 1987.
3. Bridges J.E., Milleta J. and Ricketts L.W., “EMP Radiation and Protective techniques”, John
Wiley and sons, USA 1976.
4. IEEE National Symposium on “Electromagnetic Compatibility”, IEEE, 445, Hoes Lane,
Piscataway, NJ 08854. USA.
28
CIE3A
OPTIMAL CONTROL AND FILTERING
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
• Describe the classification of optimal control problem
• Investigate the dynamic programming Analysis of optimal control
• Acquire a effective knowledge on Filtering and Estimation in optimal control
• Attain the performance analysis of Kalman Filter and its properties
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Statement of optimal control problem – Problem formulation and forms of optimal Control –Selection
of performance measures. Necessary conditions for optimal control – Pontryagin’s minimum principle
– State inequality constraints – Minimum time problem.
UNIT II
LQ CONTROL PROBLEMS AND DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING
9
Linear optimal regulator problem – Matrix Riccatti equation and solution method – Choice of
weighting matrices – Steady state properties of optimal regulator – Linear tracking problem – LQG
problem – Computational procedure for solving optimal control problems – Characteristics of
dynamic programming solution – Dynamic programming application to discrete and continuous
systems – Hamilton Jacobi Bellman equation.
UNIT III
NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES FOR OPTIMAL CONTROL
9
Numerical solution of 2-point boundary value problem by steepest descent and Fletcher Powell
method solution of Ricatti equation by negative exponential and interactive Methods.
UNIT IV
FILTERING AND ESTIMATION
9
Filtering – Linear system and estimation – System noise smoothing and prediction –Gauss Markov
discrete time model – Estimation criteria – Minimum variance estimation – Least square estimation –
Recursive estimation.
UNIT V
KALMAN FILTER AND PROPERTIES
9
Filter problem and properties – Linear estimator property of Kalman Filter – Time invariance and
asymptotic stability of filters – Time filtered estimates and signal to noise ratio improvement –
Extended Kalman filter.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. KiRk D.E., “Optimal Control Theory – An introduction”, Dover Pub,2001.V
2. Anderson, BD.O. And Moore J.B., “Optimal Filtering”, Prentice hall Inc., N.J., 2nd edition
2005.
REFERENCES
1. S.M. Bozic, “Digital and Kalman Filtering”, Edward Arnould, London, 2nd Edition 1994.
2. David G.Hull., “Optimal control theory for Applications”, Springer Publishing Company,
2001.
3. D. Subbaram Naidu, “Optimal control systems”, CRC Press (Aug 2002).
29
CIE3C
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL
Regulations’2013
LTPC
30 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Explain why different system identification methods and model structures are necessary in
engineering practice
• Describe the different phases that constitute the process of building models, from
identification experiment to model validation
• Show hands-on experience with analyzing actual data, have working knowledge of the
available tools, and to reason how to choose identification methods and model structures for
real-life problems.
• Extend the definition of adaptive control and methods of adaptation.
• Show the practical application through case studies of adaptive control system.
UNIT I
MODELS FOR IDENTIFICATION
9
Basic approaches to System Identification, Models of LTI systems: Linear Models-State space
Models - Model sets, Structures and Identifiability-Models for Time-varying and Non-linear systems:
Models with Nonlinearities – Non-linear state-space models-Black box models, Fuzzy models
UNIT II NON-PARAMETRIC AND PARAMETRIC IDENTIFICATON
9
Transient response and Correlation Analysis – Frequency response analysis – Spectral Analysis –
Least Square – Recursive Least Square –Forgetting factor- Maximum Likelihood – Instrumental
Variable methods.
UNIT III NON-LINEAR IDENTIFICATION AND MODEL VALIDATION
9
Open and closed loop identification: Approaches – Direct and indirect identification – Joint inputoutput identification – Non-linear system identification – Wiener models – Power series expansions State estimation techniques – Model Validation.
UNIT IV ADAPTIVE COTROL AND ADAPTATION TECHNIQUES
9
Introduction – Uses – Auto tuning – Self Tuning Regulators (STR) – Model Reference Adaptive
Control (MRAC) – Types of STR and MRAC – Different approaches to self tuning regulators –
Stochastic Adaptive control – Gain Scheduling.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES
9
Inverted Pendulum, Aircraft Flight Control, process control application: heat exchanger, Distillation
column, Wind mill application, Ship steering control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ljung, “System Identification Theory for the User”, PHI, 1999.
2. Astrom and Wittenmark, “Adaptive Control”, Pearson Education, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. Torsten Soderstrom, Petre Stoica, “System Identification”, prentice Hall `International (UK)
Ltd, 1994.
2. Narendra and Annasamy, “Stable Adaptive Control Systems”, Prentice Hall, Dover Edition
2005.
30
CIE3E
BIOCONTROL
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Gain the system concepts and different mathematical techniques applied in analyzing any
given system.
• Acquire the knowledge on the techniques of plotting the responses in both domain analysis.
• Apply these analysis to study the biological systems.
UNIT I CONTROL SYSTEM MODELLING
9
Dynamic Systems and their Control - Modelling and Block Diagrams - Open and Closed loop
Systems - Closed Loop Dynamics of First Order and Second Order - System Stability and
Compensation - Frequency Response and Techniques - Root Locus Method - Introduction to Nonlinear Control.
UNIT II PHYSIOLOGICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
9
Block diagram representation of the muscle stretch reflex – Difference between engineering and
physiological control – generalized system properties – models with combination of system elements
– introduction to simulation.
UNIT III
BIOLOGICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
9
Pupil Control System - Visual Fixation System –- Oculo-motor System - Skeletal Muscle
Servomechanism - Thermo Regulation - Prosthetic control.
UNIT IV PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEM MODELLING
9
Westheimer Saccadic Eye Movement Model - Respiration Models and Controls - Cardiovascular
Control Systems - Sugar Level Control Mechanism - Endocrine Control System -Excretion Control.
UNIT V TRANSFER FUNCTIONS
9
Human Operator Tracking Characteristics - Biological Receptors - Receptor Characteristics Transfer Function Models of Receptors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ogata Katsuhika, “Modern Control Engineering”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
2010.
2. John Enderle, Susan Blanchard, Joseph Bronzino, “Introduction to Biomedical
Engineering”, third edition, Academic Press, 2012.
REFERENCES
1. Milsum John H., “Biological Control Systems Analysis”, McGraw-Hill, 2007.
2. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson, 2004.
3. Michel C Khoo, “Physiological Control Systems – Analysis, simulation and Estimation”,
31
CIE3F
ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
• Describe the various linear model identification
• Analyze the Internal Model Control
• Appraise the transient response of open and closed loop control systems
• Develop advanced controller for real time process
UNIT I
ADVANCED PROCESS MODELLING AND IDENTIFICATION
9
Process Time Constant – Domain Transformation – Common Elements in Control - Model
application – Types of Models – Empirical (linear) Dynamic Model – Model Structure Considerations
– Model Identification – Identification of Parametric Model – Identification of Non-Parametric Model
UNIT II
INTERNAL MODEL CONTROL
9
Introduction to Model-Based Control – Practical Open –Loop Controller – Model Uncertainty and
Disturbances – Development of the IMC Structures – IMC Design procedure – Effect of Model
Uncertainty and Disturbances – Improved Disturbance Rejection Design – Manipulated Variable
Saturation
UNIT III
ELEMENTS OF COMPUTER PROCESS CONTROL
9
Review of Conventional Process Control: Introduction to Process Control - Process Dynamics and
Mathematical Models-Types of Dynamic Processes - Basic Feedback Control - Stability of
Conventional Control Systems - Problem Control Situations - Computer - Control Hardware and
Software :Conventional Control versus Computer Control - Basic Concepts of Computers- Computer
System Hardware Concepts - Computer System Software Concepts - Configurable Digital Systems
and Networks - Single - Loop Computer Control : The Present System - Switchover to Computer
Control
UNIT IV
DESIGN OF ADVANCED CONTROL SCHEMES
9
Modified Z Transforms: Definitions and Evaluation of Modified Z Transforms - Application of
Modified Z Transforms to Systems with Dead Time - Application of Modified Z Transforms to
Determine Output Between Sampling Instants - Design and Application of Advanced Control
Concepts: Process Modeling from Step - Test Data - Pulse Testing for Process Identification - Time
Domain Process Identification - Algorithms for Processes with Dead Time : Smith Predictor
Algorithm - Analytical Predictor Algorithm - Algorithm of Gautam and Mutharasan
UNIT V
MULTIPLE LOOP CONTROL SCHEMES
9
Feed forward control: Introduction and Design Fundamentals - Cascade Control: Controller Design of
Cascade Systems - An Industrial Application of Cascade - Control Technique - Use of Cascade
Control - Multivariable Control Systems : The Interaction Measure - Interaction and Decoupling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. PradeepB.Deshpande and Raymond H.Ash, “Elements of Computer Process Control with
Advanced Control Applications”, Prentice Hall 2004.
2. B.Roffel and B.H.L. Betlem, “Advanced Practical Process Control”, Springer , 2004
REFERENCES
1. B.Wayne Beqyett, “Process Control Modeling, Design and Simulation”, PHI Learning Private
Limited, 2010
2. Astrom, K. J. and B. Wittenmark, “Computer Controlled Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2005.
32
Regulations’2013
CIE3G INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Gain knowledge in DCS and its architecture.
• Explain the overview of SCADA.
• Describe the programming techniques in PLC.
• Acquire knowledge in hardware part of Automation-Field bus and its topology.
• Comprehend the application of DCS in Various Industries.
UNIT I
DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM
Evolution-Different architectures-Local Control Unit-Operator
Interface.
9
Interface-Displays-Engineering
UNIT II
SCADA
9
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition(SCADA)-overview-Developer and run time packagesarchitecture-Tools-Tag-Internal and External Graphics, Alarm logging-Tag logging-Structured tagsTrends-History-Report Generation.
UNIT III
PLC
9
Evolution of PLC-Components of PLC-Advantages over relay logic-PLC Programming languagesLadder diagram-Programming Timers and Counters-Design of PLC. Program control InstructionsMath Instructions-Sequencer instructions.
UNIT IV
FIELD BUS
Introduction-Architecture-Basic requirements
Interoperability-Interchangeability.
of
field
bus
standard-Field
Bus
9
topology-
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF DCS
9
Applications of DCS in Power Plants-Iron and Steel Plants, Chemical Plants, Cement Plants, Pulp and
Paper Plants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Lukas, Michael.P., “Distributed Control Systems”, Van Nostrand Rein fold company,2002.
2. Popovic D and Bhatkar V.P., “Distributed Computer Control For Industrial Automation”,
Marcel Dekkar Inc., New York, 1990.
REFERENCES
1. Climlicity SCADA Packages Manual Fanuc India Ltd, 2004.
2. Deshpande, P.B and Ash R. H., “Computer Process Control”, Instrument Society of America
Publication, Newyork, 1995.
33
CIE3H
Regulations’2013
SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC TECHNOLOGIES AND
APPLICATIONS
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Acquire knowledge on fundamentals of Electronics & Solar photo voltaic
• Design Power Electronic converters
• Comprehend the different algorithm on MPPT
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF SOLAR ENERGY AND ELECTRONICS
9
Need for sustainable Energy Sources, Sustainable Sun’s Energy, Current status of Renewable Energy.
Fundamentals of Semiconductor-Semiconductor as Solar cell material, Arrangements of Atoms, Atom
model, Formation of Energy band, Charge carriers in semiconductor, carrier motion in semiconductor,
Generation and Recombination of carriers.PN Junction under Illumination-Generation of
Photovoltage – Light generated I-V Equation of Solar Cells-Solar Cell Characteristics.
UNIT II
DESIGN OF SOLAR CELLS
9
Solar cell-Introduction, Generation of Electric Current using Solar Cell-Factors affecting Electricity
generated by Solar Cell-Upper limits of Solar Cell Parameters-Losses in Solar Cell-Solar Cell DesignDesign for High Isc, Design of High Voc, Design for High FF.
UNIT III SOLAR POWER ELECTRONICS
9
DC to DC Converters Types: Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost-Charge Controllers-DC to AC Converters
Types: Single phase,3 phase, Inverter with PWM-MPPT design and Algorithm-Perturb &
Observence, Hill Climbing.
UNIT IV PV SYSTEM DESIGN
9
Introduction-Stand alone PV System Configuration, Types-Stand alone system with DC Load (Type
A, Type B)-Stand alone system with Battery, DC Load-Stand alone system with AC/DC load with
Battery-Design Methodology –Hybrid PV Systems-Grid Connected PV Systems.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Solar Water heaters - Solar Air heaters - Solar Crop Drying - Solar Distillation - Solar thermal power
generation - Solar thermoelectric refrigeration.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Chetan Singh Solanki, “Solar Photovoltaics : Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications”,
2nd Edition, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
2. Chetan Singh Solanki, “Solar Photovoltaic Technology and Systems: A Manual for
Technicians, Trainers and Engineers, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2013.
REFERENCE
1. Solar Energy utilization: Khanna Publishers. 2010.
34
CIE3J AUTOMOBILE INSTRUMENTATION
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Recall the fundamentals of Automotive Electronics
• Identify basic electric and electronic components
• Describe the principles of magnetism and magnetic fields
• Identify types of electrical test meters and equipment
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS
9
Open loop and closed loop system components for electronic engine management, vehicle motion
control, Current trends in modern Automobiles.
UNIT II
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION AND IGNITION SYSTEMS
9
Introduction, Carburettor control system,throttle body ignition and multi port or point fuel injection,
Advantages of electronic ignition system, Types of solid state ignition systems and their principle of
operation, electronic spark timing control system.
UNIT III ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
9
Engine cranking and warm up control, Acceleration enrichment –Deacceleration leaning and idle
speed control, integrated engine control system, exhaust emission control system, Engine performance
testing.
UNIT IV AUTOMOBILE CHASSIS ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
9
Principle of electronic braking, automatic transmission electronic control circuit, cruise control
circuit, the electronic steering control theory, Antilock Braking System(ABS), Anti Slip
Regulation(ASR), Electronic Stability Program(ESP) and other electronic control method.
UNIT V
AUTO BODY ELECTRONIC CONTROL TECHNOLOGY
9
Automotive central locking and anti-theft system control technology, electronically controlled
windows and doors and airbag technology, principle of control circuit components and characteristics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTS BOOKS
1. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Hand Book”, 5th Edition, SAE, 2000.
2. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”‚ 5th Edition, (Butterworth
Heinemann Woburn), 1998.
REFERENCES
1. Jiri Marek, Hans Peter trah, “Sensors Applications, Sensors for Automotive Technology”, 1st
Edition, Wiley, 2003.
2. T. Mellard, “Automotive Electronic Systems”, Heinenmann Professional, 1987.
35
CIE3K
APPLIED INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
Regulations’2013
LT P C
300 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Demonstrate the measurement procedure of different industrial parameters.
• Explain the measurement procedure of different parameters in thermal power plant.
• Illustrate the measurement procedures for measurement of process parameters in
Petrochemical Industry.
Describe
the various types of pulp and paper properties and measurement techniques.
•
• Explain the measurement principles for measuring the industrial parameters for different
applications.
UNIT I REVIEW OF INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
9
Measurement of Force, Torque, Velocity, Acceleration, Pressure, Temperature, Flow, Level,
Viscosity, Humidity & Moisture (Qualitative Treatment Only).
UNIT II MEASUREMENT IN THERMAL POWER PLANT
9
Selection, Installation and maintenance of Instruments used for the measurement of fuel flow, Air
flow, Drum level, Steam pressure, Steam temperature and other parameters in thermal power plant –
Analyzers-Dissolved Oxygen Analyzers- Flue gas Oxygen Analyzers-pH measurement- Coal/Oil
Analyzer – Pollution Controlling Instruments
UNIT III MEASUREMENT IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRY
9
Parameters to be measured in refinery and petrochemical industry-Temperature, Flow and Pressure
measurements in Pyrolysis, catalytic cracking, reforming processes- Selection and maintenance of
measuring instruments – Intrinsic safety.
UNIT IV INSTRUMENTATION FOR PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRIES
9
Definition of consistency — Techniques for head box consistency measurement -Functioning of
Paper making machine — Quality parameters — moisture, basic weight, caliper, brightness, colour,
ash content, strength, gloss and tensile strength - parameters monitoring Instrumentation.
UNIT V SPECIAL PURPOSE INSTRUMENTATION
9
Toxic gas monitoring- Detection of Nuclear radiation – Water quality monitoring- Monitor
measurement by neutron-Thermo-luminescent detectors – Measurement of length, mass, thickness,
flow, level using nuclear radiation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. B.G.Liptak, “Instrument Engineers Hand Book”, Fourth Edition, CRC press, 2012.
REFERENCES
1. D.Patranabis, “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
2. John G Webster, “Measurement, Instrumentation and Sensors Handbook”, CRC press,
Second Edition, 2014.
36
CIE3L MODERN MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS
Regulations’2013
LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
• Explain the human physiology
•
Model and experiment with the medical equipment
•
Test the safety of medical equipment
UNIT I HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY AND SIGNALS
9
Overview of Cell - Cardio Vascular System - Nervous System - Respiratory system - musculo skeletal
system. Bio-potential: generation and propagation. Electrodes: Micro – Skin – surface – needle
electrodes
UNIT II DIAGNOSTIC AND IMAGING DEVICES
9
Block diagram, operation, advancements in X-ray imaging – Tomogram – computerized Axial
tomography - Ultrasonic imaging techniques - Echo cardiograph – Angiogram - CT scanner Magnetic Resonance Imaging - Electrical Impedance Tomography - Endoscope, Proton Beam
Radiotherapy - Medical Infrared Imaging.
UNIT III
THERAPEUTIC AND ASSISTIVE DEVICES
9
Working principle, types and advancements in Pacemakers – defibrillators - heart valves - heart-lung
machines - ventilators –incubators - dialyzers.
UNIT IV
PATIENT MONITORING SYSTEM AND TELEMETRY
9
ECG – Respiration – BP – Temperature - O2 and CO2 measurement - Blood Gas Analyzer - Drug
Dosage calculator - Drug Management System - RFID in PMS - Real Time Patient Location System Wearable PMS.
UNIT V MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS’ SAFETY AND CERTIFICATION
9
Regulations, Standards and organizations – Basic Protection Concepts – Verification of
Constructional Requirements – Medical Equipment safety tests – Electromagnetic Compatibility Patient care technology and safety.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. S.Ananthi, “A Textbook of Medical Instruments”, New Age International Pub Ltd., 2005.
2. Joseph D Bronzino, Taylor and Francis, “The Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, “Medical
Devices and Systems”, 3rd Edition, 2006.
REFERENCES
1. Medical Instrument Design and Development: From Requirements to Market Placements Claudio Becchetti, Alessandro Neri, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2013.
2. R. S. Khandpur, “Handbook of Bio – Medical Instrumentation”, Tata Mcgraw Hill Education,
2003.
3. Mandeep Singh, “Introduction to Biomedical Instrumentation,” PHI Publication, 2010.
37
CIE3D
ADVANCED DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
Regulations’2013
LT PC
3003
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
• Design a small digital system to the specified functionality
• Recognize modern techniques in combinational and sequential circuit design with VHDL
• Describe modern technology in implementation of digital designs
• Explain the structure of field programmable logic circuits (FPGA)
UNIT I SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
9
Analysis of Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks (CSSN) Modelling of CSSN –State Stable
Assignment and Reduction – Design of CSSN – Design of Iterative Circuits – ASM Chart – ASM
Realization, Design of Arithmetic circuits for Fast adder- Array Multiplier.
UNIT II ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
9
Analysis of Asynchronous Sequential Circuit (ASC) – Flow Table Reduction – Races in ASC – State
Assignment Problem and the Transition Table – Design of ASC – Static and Dynamic Hazards –
Essential Hazards – Data Synchronizers – Designing Vending Machine Controller – Mixed Operating
Mode Asynchronous Circuits.
UNIT III
FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND TESTABILITY ALGORITHMS
9
Fault Table Method – Path Sensitization Method – Boolean Difference Method – Kohavi Algorithm –
Tolerance Techniques – The Compact Algorithm – Practical PLA’s – Fault in PLA – Test Generation
– Masking Cycle – DFT Schemes – Built-in Self Test.
UNIT IV
SYSTEM DESIGN USING VHDL
9
VHDL operators – Arrays – concurrent and sequential statements – packages- Data flow
– Behavioral – structural modeling – compilation and simulation of VHDL code –Test
bench - Realization of combinational and sequential circuits using HDL – Registers –
counters – sequential machine – serial adder – Multiplier- Divider – Design of simple
microprocessor.
UNIT V NEW GENERATION PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES
9
Foldback Architecture with GAL,PEEL, PML; PROM – Realization State machine using PLD –
FPGA – Xilinx FPGA – Xilinx 2000 - Xilinx 3000.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Donald G. Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill 2001.
2. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design”,
Tata McGraw Hill –Higher Education, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. Mark Zwolinski, “Digital System Design with VHDL”, Pearson Education, 2001.
2. Parag K Lala, “Digital System design using PLD”, BS Publications, 2001.
3. John M Yarbrough, “Digital Logic applications and Design”, Thomson Learning, 2001.
5. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Fundamentals of Logic design”, Thomson Learning, 6th Edition 2010.
6. Charles H Roth Jr.”Digital System Design using VHDL” Thomson learning, 2004.
7. Douglas L.Perry “VHDL programming by Example” Tata McGraw.Hill – 2006.
38
CIE3M
ADVANCED DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to
• Understand image formation and the role human visual system plays in perception of gray and
color image data.
• Apply image processing techniques in both the spatial and frequency (Fourier) domains.
• Design image analysis techniques in the form of image segmentation and to evaluate the
methodologies for segmentation.
• Conduct independent study and analysis of feature extraction techniques.
• Understand the concepts of image registration and image fusion.
• Analyze the constraints in image processing when dealing with 3D data sets and to apply
image processing algorithms in practical applications.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
9
Elements of visual perception, brightness, contrast, hue, saturation, mach band effect, 2D image
transforms-DFT, DCT, KLT, and SVD. Image enhancement in spatial and frequency domain, Review
of morphological image processing
UNIT II SEGMENTATION
9
Edge detection, Thresholding, Region growing, Fuzzy clustering, Watershed algorithm, Active
contour methods, Texture feature based segmentation, Model based segmentation, Atlas
based segmentation, Wavelet based Segmentation methods
UNIT III FEATURE EXTRACTION
9
First and second order edge detection operators, Phase congruency, Localized feature extractiondetecting image curvature, shape features Hough transform, shape skeletonization, Boundary
descriptors, Moments, Texture descriptors- Autocorrelation, Co-occurrence features,Runlength
features, Fractal model based features, Gabor filter, wavelet features
UNIT IV REGISTRATION AND IMAGE FUSION
9
Registration- Preprocessing, Feature selection-points, lines, regions and templates Feature
correspondence - Point pattern matching, Line matching, region matching Template matching.
Transformation functions-Similarity transformation and Affine Transformation. Resampling-Nearest
Neighbour and Cubic Splines Image Fusion-Overview of image fusion, pixel fusion, Multi resolution
based fusion discrete wavelet transform, Curvelet transform. Region based fusion.
UNIT V 3D IMAGE VISUALIZATION
9
Sources of 3D Data sets, Slicing the Data set, Arbitrary section planes, The use of color, Volumetric
display, Stereo Viewing, Ray tracing, Reflection, Surfaces, Multiply connected surfaces, Image
processing in 3D, Measurements on 3D images.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. John C.Russ, “The Image Processing Handbook”, CRC Press, 2007.
2. Mark Nixon, Alberto Aguado, “Feature Extraction and Image Processing”, Academic Press,
2008.
3. Ardeshir Goshtasby, “2D and 3D Image registration for Medical, Remote Sensing and
Industrial Applications”, John Wiley and Sons, 2005.
REFERENCES
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson, Education, Inc.,
Second Edition, 2004.
2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
3. Rick S.Blum, Zheng Liu, “Multisensor image fusion and its Applications”, Taylor&
Francis, 2006.
39
CIE3N DESIGN OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Regulations’2013
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
• Explain the basic concepts and building blocks of embedded system
• Infer the fundamentals of Embedded processor Modeling
• Illustrate bus communication in processors and I/O interfacing
• Summarize processor scheduling algorithms and to explain the basics of RTOS
• Distinguish the different phases & modeling of embedded system with its applications on
various fields
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
9
Introduction to Embedded Systems -The build process for embedded systems-Structural units
in Embedded processor-Selection of processor & memory devices- DMA –Memory management
methods-Timer and Counting devices, Watchdog Timer, Real Time Clock-Software Development
tools-IDE, assembler, compiler, linker, simulator, debugger-In circuit emulator, Target Hardware
Debugging, Boundary Scan.
UNIT II
HARDWARE SOFTWARE PARTITIONING
9
Hardware/Software Co-Design-Basic concepts-Goals-Issues in Co-Design Models -Finite state
Machine-HFSM-PSM-Architectures control/data flow nets ,task graphs-Generic Co-Design
Methodology-Approaches-Challenges, System Specification languages-State charts and modelingSingle processor Architectures-Hardware / Software duality – HW/SW portioning- Algorithm
development-Prototyping & emulation technique.
UNIT III EMBEDDED NETWORKING AND INTERRUPTS SERVICE MECHANISM 9
Embedded Networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports & Buses-Serial Bus communication protocols
-RS232 standard-RS485-CAN Bus-Inter Integrated Circuits (I2C)-Interrupt sources ,Programmed I/OBusy-wait approach without interrupt service mechanism-ISR concept-Multiple interrupts-Context
and periods for context switching, interrupt latency and deadline-Device Driver-Introduction to Basic
Concept of Parallel port & Serial port Device Drivers.
UNIT IV RTOS BASED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN
9
Introduction to basic concepts of RTOS-Need, Task, process & threads, interrupt routines in RTOSMultiprocessing and Multitasking- Preemptive and non-preemptive scheduling - Task Communication
- Shared memory - Message passing – Inter process Communication - Synchronization between
processes-Semaphores – Mailbox - Pipes-Priority inversion-Priority inheritance-Comparison of Real
time Operating systems: VxWorks, чC/OS-II, RT Linux
UNIT V EMBEDDED SYSTEM APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT WITH PROCESSOR 9
Objective, Need, different Phases & Modelling of the EDLC-Choice of Target Architectures for
Embedded Application Development for Control Dominated-Data Dominated Systems-Case studies
on Digital Camera, Adaptive Cruise control in a Car, Mobile Phone software for key inputs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Rajkamal, “Embedded system-Architecture, Programming, Design”, TMH, 2011.
2. Shibu.K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. Peckol, “Embedded system Design”, John Wiley& Sons, 2010.
2. Lyla B Das, “Embedded Systems-An Integrated Approach”, Pearson 2013
3. Elicia White, “Making Embedded Systems”, O’ Reilly Series, SPD, 2011.
4. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded System Architecture, A comprehensive Guide for Engineers
and Programmers”, Elsevier, 2006.
5. Prasad KVKK, “Embedded/ Real-Time Systems-Concepts, Design & Programming-Black
Book”, dream tech Press, 2010.
40
www.nec.edu.in
REGULATIONS - 2013
DEPARTMENT OF
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
M.C.A – MASTER OF COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
I & II YEAR
Curriculum & Syllabi of M.C.A.
REGULATIONS - 2013
M.C.A. – Master of Computer Applications
SEMESTER - I
Sl.
Course
No.
Code
Theory
Course Title
L
T
P
C
1.
MCC11
Computer Organization
3
0
0
3
2.
MCC12
Problem Solving and C Programming
3
0
0
3
Database Management Systems
Data Structures
Mathematical Foundations of Computer Science
3
3
3
0
0
1
0
0
0
3
3
4
0
0
TOTAL 15
0
0
1
3
3
6
2
2
20
L
T
P
C
3.
MCC13
4.
MCC14
5.
MCC15
Practical
6.
MCC16
7.
MCC17
C and Data Structures Laboratory
Database Management Systems Laboratory
SEMESTER – II
Sl.
Course
No.
Code
Theory
1.
MCC21
2.
MCC22
3.
MCC23
4.
MCC24
5.
MCC25
Object Oriented Programming
Design and Analysis of Algorithms
System Software
Operating Systems
Software Engineering
Practical
6.
MCC26
7.
MCC27
8.
MCC28
Object Oriented Programming Laboratory
System Programming Laboratory
Communication Skills Laboratory
Course Title
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
1
TOTAL 16
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
3
3
3
0
0
0
2
3
3
2
8
2
2
2
23
2
SEMESTER – III
Sl.
Course
No.
Code
Theory
Course Title
L
T
P
C
1.
2.
MCC31
MCC32
Java Programming
Object Oriented Analysis and Design
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
3.
MCC33
Computer Graphics
3
0
0
3
4.
MCC34
Computer Networks
3
0
0
3
5.
MCC35
Resource Management Techniques
3
0
0
3
Practical
6.
MCC36
Java Programming Laboratory
0
0
3
2
7.
MCC37
Case Tools Laboratory
0
0
3
2
8.
MCC38
Graphics Laboratory
0
0
3
2
TOTAL 15
0
9
21
L
T
P
C
SEMESTER – IV
Sl.
Course
No.
Code
Theory
Course Title
1.
2.
MCC41
MCC42
Network Programming
Web Programming
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
3.
MCC43
Compiler Design
3
0
0
3
4.
Elective – I
3
0
0
3
5.
Elective – II
3
0
0
3
Practical
6.
MCC44
Network Programming Laboratory
0
0
3
2
7.
MCC45
Web Programming Laboratory
0
0
3
2
8.
MCC46
Compiler Design Laboratory
0
0
3
2
TOTAL 15
0
9
21
3
SEMESTER – V
Sl.
Course
No.
Code
Theory
Course Title
L
T
P
C
1.
MCC51
.NET Programming and Scripts
3
0
0
3
2.
MCC52
XML and Web Services
3
0
0
3
3.
Elective – III
3
0
0
3
4.
Elective – IV
3
0
0
3
5.
Elective – V
3
0
0
3
Practical
6.
MCC53
XML and Web Services Laboratory
0
0
3
2
7.
MCC54
.NET Programming Laboratory
0
0
3
2
8.
MCC55
Mini Project Work
0
0
3
2
15
0
9
21
TOTAL
SEMESTER – VI
Sl.
Course
No.
Code
Practical
1.
MCC61
Course Title
L
Project Work
TOTAL
0
0
T
0
0
P
C
24
24
12
12
4
LIST OF ELECTIVES OF IV SEMESTER
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Course
Code
MCE4A
MCE4B
MCE4C
MCE4D
MCE4E
MCE4F
MCE4G
MCE4H
MCE4J
MCE4K
Course Title
Numerical and Statistical Methods
Electronic Commerce
Information Systems
Web Graphics
Advanced Databases
Software Quality Management
TCP/IP Design and Implementation
Distributed Systems
Unix Internals
Visual Programming
L
T
P
C
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
L
T
P
C
LIST OF ELECTIVES OF V SEMESTER
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Course
Code
MCE5A
MCE5B
MCE5C
MCE5D
MCE5E
MCE5F
MCE5G
MCE5H
MCE5J
MCE5K
MCE5L
MCE5M
Human Resource Management
Data Mining and Data Warehousing
Component Based Technology
Managerial Economics
Mobile Computing
Digital Imaging
Enterprise Resource Planning
Agent Based Intelligent Systems
Natural Language Processing
Software Agents
Supply Chain Management
Healthcare for IT Services
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
MCE5N
MCE5P
MCE5Q
MCE5R
MCE5S
MCE5T
MCE5V
MCE5W
Portfolio Management
Artificial Intelligence
Parallel and Distributed Computing
Soft Computing
Software Project Management
Professional Ethics
Mobile Engineering
Infrastructure Administration and Management
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Course Title
5
MCC11
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
• To study the Digital fundamentals.
• To understand the concepts and issues of Computer Organization.
• To learn the basics of Memory and Processor design.
• To describe the Interrupts and I/O interfaces.
UNIT I
DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS
9
Number Systems and Conversions – Boolean Algebra and Simplification – Minimization of Boolean
Functions – Karnaugh Map – Logic Gates – NAND – NOR Implementation.
UNIT II
COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS
9
Design of Combinational Circuits – Adder / Subtracter – Encoder – Decoder – MUX / DEMUX –
Comparators – Flip Flops – Triggering – Master/Slave Flip Flop – State Diagram and Minimization –
Counters – Registers.
UNIT III
BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS
9
Functional units – Basic operational concepts – Bus structures – Performance and Metrics –
Instruction and Instruction sequencing – Addressing modes – Instruction Set: ARM Processor – ALU
design – Fixed point and Floating point operation.
UNIT IV
PROCESSOR DESIGN
9
Processor basics – Execution of Complete Instruction – Multi bus organization– Hard wired control –
Micro programmed control – Pipeline control - Basic concepts – Hazards – Super scalar operation.
UNIT V
MEMORY AND I/O SYSTEM
9
Memory technology – Memory systems – Virtual memory – Caches – Design methods Associative
memories – Input/Output system – Programmed I/O – DMA and Interrupts – I/O Devices and
Interfaces.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS
1. M. Morris Mano, Michael D. Ciletti , “Digital Design”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
1997.
2. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, “Computer Organization”, 5th Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
REFERENCES
1. Charles H. Roth Jr, Larry L. Kinney, “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, 6th Edition, Cengage
Learning, 2010.
2. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”,
6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. David A. Patterson, John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software interface”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2002.
4. John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
1998.
6
MCC12
PROBLEM SOLVING AND C PROGRAMMING
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
• To learn and analyze problems and formulate algorithms.
• To learn the fundamentals of C.
• To understand the usage of arrays, functions and structures.
• To study the importance of pointers and files.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING
9
Introduction to computing – Building blocks for simple programs – Problem to Program – Problem
Solving with Decision Structures – Problem Solving with Loop Structures – Problem Analysis –
Programming Style – Documentation and Testing – Procedural – Functional – Recursive – Rule-based
– Structured programming.
UNIT II
C PROGRAMMING BASICS
9
Introduction to C programming – Constants – Variables – Data Types – Storage classes – Operators –
Managing Input and Output Operations – Decision Making and Branching – Looping Statements –
Solving Simple Scientific and Statistical Problems.
UNIT III
ARRAYS AND FUNCTIONS
9
Arrays – One dimensional and two dimensional arrays - String – String operations – String Arrays –
Functions – Call by value – Call by reference – Recursion.
UNIT IV
STRUCTURES AND UNIONS
9
Introduction – Need for structure – Structure Declaration – Structure Definition – Nested Structures –
Unions – Programs using Structures and Unions – Pre-processor Directives.
UNIT V
POINTERS AND FILE MANIPULATION
9
Pointers – Definition – Initialization – Pointer Arithmetic – Pointers with Arrays – Dynamic Memory
Allocation – FILE Pointers – File Operation: Creation, Copy, Delete, Update – File Type: Text File
and Binary File.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ashok N. Kamthane, “Computer programming”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
2. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, 12th Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
3. Kernigan Brian W, Dennis M. Ritchie, “The C Programming Language”, 2nd Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2006.
REFERENCES
1. Maureen Sprankle, “Problem Solving and Programming Concepts”, 7th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2009.
2. Deitel and Deitel, “C How to program”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1994.
3. Cormen, Leiserson, Rivest, Stein “Introduction to algorithms”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill
publishers, 2002.
4. Stephen G.Kochan “Programming in C”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
7
MCC13
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
• To understand the basics of Database Management System.
• To use Standard Query Language.
• To understand normalization techniques.
• To understand mportance of backup and recovery techniques.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Purpose of Database Systems – View of Data – Relational Databases – Database Design – Database
Architecture – Database users and Administrators – Database Schema – Keys – Relational algebra –
Tuple Relational Calculus – Domain Relational Calculus.
UNIT II
SQL, PROGRAMMING AND TRIGGERS
11
SQL Data Definition – Basic Structure of SQL Queries – Basic Operations – Set Operations –
Aggregate Functions – Nested Subqueries – Modification of the Database – Join Expressions –
Views – Transactions – Integrity Constraints – Authorization – Functions and Procedures – Triggers.
UNIT III
NORMAL FORMS, STORAGE AND FILE STRUCTURE
9
Introduction to Normal Forms – Normalization using Functional and Multivalued Dependencies –
Overview of Physical Storage Media – Magnetic Disk and Flash Storage – RAID – File
Organization – Organization of Records in Files – Ordered Indices – B+ Tree Index Files.
UNIT IV
HASHING, QUERY PROCESSING AND TRANSACTION
7
Static and Dynamic Hashing – Overview of Query Processing and Query Optimization – Measures of
Query cost. Transaction: Transaction concepts – Transaction state – Serializability.
UNIT V
CONCURRENCY CONTROL AND RECOVERY SYSTEM
10
Concurrency control: Lock-Based Protocols - Deadlock Handling – Multiple granularity –
Timestamp-Based Protocols – Thomas’ Write Rule – Validation-Based Protocols. Recovery System:
Failure Classification – Storage structure – Recovery and Atomicity – Log-Based Recovery – Shadow
Paging – Recovery with Concurrent Transactions.
TOTAL : 45
TEXT BOOK
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry. F. Korth and S. Sudharshan, “Database system Concepts”, 6th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Raghu RamaKrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, 3rd Edition,
McGraw Hill Publishers, 2003.
2. C. J. Date, “An Introduction to Database Systems”, 7th Edition, Addison Wesley Publishers,
1997.
8
MCC14
DATA STRUCTURES
LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES
• To learn about the basic linear data structures, their implementations and applications.
• To make the students to study about non linear data structures.
• To learn about various sorting types and its efficiency.
• To make the students to learn about hashing techniques.
UNIT I
LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES
9
Elementary Data Structures – ADT – List ADT: Array based Implementation – Doubly and Circularly
Linked Lists – Cursor based Linked List – Applications of List – The stack ADT: Model –
Implementation – Applications – The Queue ADT: Model – Implementation – Applications.
UNIT II
TREE STRUCTURES AND BALANCED TREES
9
Trees - Preliminaries – implementation of Tree – Tree Traversals – Binary tree Implementation –
Expression Tree – The Search Tree ADT – Binary Search Tree Operations – AVL tree – Splay tree –
B-Tree – Binary Heap: Structure Property – Heap Order Property – Heap Operations – d-heaps.
UNIT III
GRAPH
9
Graph - Representation of Graphs – Bi-connectivity – Topological sort – Graph Traversal:
Breadth-First Traversal – Depth-First Traversal – Shortest path Algorithms: Minimum Spanning Tree
– Prim's and Kruskal's Algorithms – Applications of Graph.
UNIT IV
SORTING
9
Sorting – Lower Bound for Simple Sorting Algorithms – Internal and External Sorting: Bubble Sort –
Insertion Sort – Shell Sort – Merge Sort – Heap Sort – Quick Sort – Bucket Sort – Radix Sort –
Distribution Sort – Shuffle Sort.
UNIT V
HASHING AND SET
9
Hashing: Hash function – Open hashing – Closed hashing – Double hashing – Extendible hashing Rehashing. The Disjoint set ADT: Equivalence Relations – Dynamic Equivalence Problem – Smart
Union Algorithms – Path compression – Applications of Set.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK
1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2012.
REFERENCES
1. Clifford A. Shaffer, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis”, 3rd Edition, Dover
Publications, 2013.
2. Richard F. Gilberg, Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach
with C”, 2nd Edition, Cengage Learning, 2004.
3. Narasimha Karumanchi, “Data Structures and Algorithms Made Easy”, 2nd Edition, Career
Monk Publications, 2011.
9
MCC15
MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATIONS OF COMPUTER SCIENCE
LTPC
3 10 4
OBJECTIVES
• To learn about the basic linear algebra concepts.
• To understand the relations and logics of computer science.
• To make the students to understand the basics of network theory using graph.
UNIT I MATRIX ALGEBRA
12
Matrices – Rank of Matrix – Solving System of Equations – Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors –
Inverse of a Matrix – Cayley Hamilton Theorem.
UNIT II SETS, RALATIONS AND FUNCTIONS
12
Sets – Basic Definitions – Set operations – Laws of set theory – Principles of inclusion and exclusion
– Relations – Properties of relations – Matrices of relations – Closure operations on relations –
Functions: injective - surjective – bijective.
UNIT III MATHEMATICAL LOGIC
12
Propositions and logical operators – Truth table – Propositions generated by a set – Equivalences and
implications – Basic laws – Some more connectives – Functionally complete set of connectives –
Normal forms – Proofs in Propositional calculus.
UNIT IV FORMAL LANGUAGES
12
Languages and Grammars – Phrase Structure Grammar – Classification of Grammars – Pumping
Lemma for Regular Languages – Context Free Languages.
UNIT V GRAPH THEORY
12
Graph – Special types of graphs – Sub graph – Graph isomorphism – Euler graph – Hamiltonian
graph.
TOTAL: 60
TEXT BOOKS
1. Kenneth H.Rosen, “Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2002
2. J.P.Trembly, R.Manohar “Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to Computer
Science”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1997
REFERENCES
1. Hopcroft, Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and Computation”, Narosa
Publishing House, 2002.
2. Narsingh Deo, “Graph Theory with applications to Engineering and Computer Science”,
Reprint, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt.Ltd, 2006.
3. A.Tamilarasi, A.M.Natarajan, “Discrete Mathematics and its Application”, 2nd Edition,
Khanna Publishers, 2005.
4. M.K.Venkataraman “Engineering Mathematics”, Volume II, 2nd Edition, National Publishing
Company, 1989.
10
MCC16
C AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY
LT PC
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
• To implement various operations on linear data structures.
• To perform the various tree traversals in binary tree.
• To implement various internal and external sorting techniques.
• To implement shortest path algorithms using Floyd’s algorithm and Warshall’s algorithm.
• To implement minimum spanning tree of graph using Prim’s algorithm and Kruskals
algorithm.
1. Write a program to perform the following operations on single linked list:
i) Creation ii) Insertion iii) Deletion iv) Reversal v) Sorting vi) Traversal
2. a) Write a program that uses functions to perform the following operations on Double linked list:
i) Creation ii) Insertion iii) Deletion iv) Traversal
b) Write a program to create and traverse a circular single linked list
3. a) Write a program to create a stack using array and linked list and perform the following
operations:
i) push ii) pop iii) display
b) Write a program to create a queue using array and linked list and perform the following
operations:
i) insert ii) delete iii) display
4. Write a program to perform the following stack applications:
i) Convert infix expression into postfix expression
ii) Evaluation of postfix expression
5. Write the program to perform the following traversal in Binary tree
i) Inorder traversal ii) Preorder traversal iii) Postorder traversal
6. Write a program to perform the following operations in Binary Search Tree (BST):
i) Creation ii) Insertion iii) Deletion iv) Traversal
7. Write a program that implement the following sorting techniques:
i) Bubble sort ii) Insertion sort iii) Selection sort
8. Write a program that implement the following sorting techniques:
i) Quick sort ii)Merge sort iii) Heap sort
9. Write a program to perform following Traversal in Graph
i) Breadth First Search, ii) Depth first search
10. Write a program to find out the shortest path between every vertex in Graph using
the following algorithms
i)Floyd’s algorithm ii)Warshall’s algorithm
11. Write a program to find out the shortest path in Graph using the following algorithms
i) Prim’s algorithm ii) Kruskal’s Algorithm
12. Write a program to implement Huffman’s Algorithm.
Required Software: C/C++
11
MCC17
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LABORATORY
LTPC
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
• To implement the Basic Queries.
• To implement the SQL program.
• To implement the GUI program.
List of Experiments
1. Execute DDL commands for tables like Bank Management System.
2. Execute DML commands for table for Student Processing System.
3. Execute and manipulate the views for Bank Management System.
4. Apply different joins like equi-join and outer join by relating two or more tables in Payroll
processing system.
5. Manipulate student processing system using SET operations and Aggregate functions.
6. Execute Built-in functions for Characters, Numbers and Date.
7. Write basic PL/SQL programming for the following:
a) Write a programme to find the factorial of a number.
b) Find odd and even numbers from 100 to 1000.
c) Write a program to input 2 numbers if the 1st no >2nd no then swap it, else if 1st no < 2nd
no doubles it else multiply 10 with both numbers?
d) Write a program to input 2 numbers and an operator, and display the result.
e) Print multiplication table from 1 to a given Number.
8. Do Advanced PL/SQL programming using
a) Cursors b)
Procedures
c) Triggers
9. Create Forms, Menus and Report for
a) Payroll Processing System
b) Bank Management System
c) Library Management System
Required Software: Oracle, Visual Basic.
12
MCC21
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING
LTPC
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES
• To understand the fundamentals of OOP’s Concepts.
• To understand the C++ Concepts.
• To understand the file operations in C++.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS
10
Object Oriented Programming Concepts: Objects - Classes – Methods – Messages – Abstraction and
Encapsulation – Inheritance – Abstract Classes – Polymorphism. Introduction to C++:
Classes –
Access Specifiers – Function and Data Members – Default Arguments – Static Members – Class
Objects – Pointers and Objects – Constant Objects – Nested Classes – Local Classes.
UNIT II
FUNCTIONS, CONSTRUCTORS AND DESTRUCTORS
15
Function: Inline Function – Difference between member and non-member function – Call by
reference and Return by reference – Function Overloading – Friend Function – Const and Volatile
Functions – Static Function – Private and Public functions – Function Pointer. Constructor: Default
and Explicit Constructors – Parameterized Constructors – Constructor Overloading – Dynamic
Constructor – Copy Constructor – Destructors.
UNIT III
INHERITANCE AND POLYMORPHISM
15
Need of Inheritance - public, private, and protected derivations – Access control. Types of
inheritance: Single inheritance, Multilevel inheritance, Multiple inheritance, Hierarchical inheritance
and Hybrid inheritance – Virtual base classes – Constructors in derived class. Pointers – Pointers to
Objects – this Pointer – Pointers to derived classes - Virtual and Pure Virtual Functions – Virtual
Constructors and Destructors.
UNIT IV
I/O FORMATTING AND FILE HANDLING
9
Streams and Formatted I/O: C++ stream for console I/O operations – Classes Hierarchy – Formatted
and unformatted I/O – Formatting I/O. File handling: Classes for file stream operations - Opening
and Closing a file – End of file detection – File Pointers and their manipulations - Random access –
Error handling during file operations.
UNIT V
TEMPLATES
11
Drawbacks of Macros - Function Templates – Function Templates with Multiple / Two Generic
Arguments – Overloading of Template Function – Member Function Templates – Class Templates –
Class Template with Multiple Arguments – Exception Handling.
L : 45 T : 15 TOTAL : 60
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bhushan Trivedi, “Programming with ANSI C++- A Step-by-Step Approach”, 4th Impression,
Oxford University Press, 2012.
2. E.Balagurusamy, “Object Oriented Programming with C++”, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill
Education, 2012.
REFERENCES
1. Robert Lafore, “Object oriented Programming in C++”, 4th Edition, Sams Publishing, 2002.
2. Stanley B. Lippman, Josee Lajoie, Barbara E. Moo, “C++ Primer”, 4th Edition, Addison
Wesley Professional Publisher, 2005.
13
MCC22
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS
LTPC
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES
• To study about the fundamentals of problem solving and algorithm analysis.
• To understand the problem using Divide and conquer methods and Greedy technique.
• To learn about Dynamic programming techniques to solve Knapsack problem.
• To study about N Queens problem, sum of subset problem using Backtracking
method.
• To learn about approximation algorithm for NP-hard and NP-complete problems.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
12
Fundamentals of algorithmic problem solving – Important problem types –Fundamentals of analysis
of algorithm efficiency – Analysis frame work – Asymptotic notations – Mathematical analysis for
recursive and non-recursive algorithms.
UNIT II
DIVIDE AND CONQUER METHOD AND GREEDY METHOD
12
Divide and conquer methodology – Merge sort – Quick sort – Binary search – Binary tree traversal –
Multiplication of large integers – Strassen’s matrix multiplication – Greedy method – Prim’s
algorithm – Kruskal’s algorithm – Dijikstra’s algorithm.
UNIT III
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING
12
Computing a binomial co-efficient – Warshall’s and Floyds’ algorithm – Optimal binary search tree –
Knapsack problem – Memory functions.
UNIT IV
BACKTRACKING AND BRANCH AND BOUND
12
Backtracking – N-Queens problem – Hamiltonian circuit problem – Subset sum problem – Branch
and bound – Assignment problem – Knapsack problem – Traveling salesman problem.
UNIT V
NP-HARD AND NP-COMPLETE PROBLEMS
12
P & NP problems – NP-complete problems – Approximation algorithms for NP-hard problems –
Traveling salesman problem – Knapsack problem.
L: 45 T: 15 TOTAL: 60
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2011.
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Sanguthevar Rajasekaran, “Fundamentals of computer
algorithms”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008.
REFERENCES
1. Horowitz, Sahni, Anderson-Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, 2nd Edition,
University Press, 2007.
2. G. A.V.PAI, “Data structures and algorithms, concepts, Techniques and Applications”, 1st
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
3. Jean-Paul Tremblay, Paul G. Sorenson, "An Introduction to Data Structures with
Applications", 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
4. Parag Dave & Himanshu Dave, "Design and Analysis of Algorithms”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2008.
14
MCC23
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
LTPC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
• To discuss the machine architecture of SIC & SIC/XE.
• To elaborate the functionality of an assembler, loader and linker with necessary data
structures.
• To differentiate between machine dependent and machine independent assembler
features.
• To design assemblers, loaders, linkers and text editors.
• To describe the functionality of macro processors.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction – System software and machine architecture – The Simplified Instructional Computer
(SIC) – Machine Architectures (SIC and SIC/XE) – Data and Instruction Formats – Addressing
Modes – Instruction sets – I/O.
UNIT II
ASSEMBLERS
9
Basic assembler functions – A simple SIC assembler – Assembler algorithms and Data Structures –
Machine dependent assembler features: Instruction formats and addressing modes – Program
relocation. Machine independent assembler features: Literals – Symbol-defining statements –
Expressions – Program Blocks – Control Sections and Program Linking. One-Pass Assembler and
Multi-pass Assembler – Implementation examples: MASM assembler.
UNIT III
LOADERS AND LINKERS
9
Basic loader functions: Design of an Absolute Loader – A Simple Bootstrap Loader - Machine
dependent loader features: Relocation – Program Linking – Algorithm and Data Structures for
Linking Loader. Machine-independent loader features: Automatic Library Search – Loader Options Loader design options: Linkage Editors – Dynamic Linking – Bootstrap Loaders - Implementation
example: MSDOS linker.
UNIT IV
MACRO PROCESSORS
9
Basic macro processor functions – Macro Definition and Expansion – Macro Processor Algorithm and
Data Structures – Machine independent macro processor features: Concatenation of Macro
Parameters – Generation of Unique Labels – Conditional Macro Expansion – Keyword Macro
Parameters. Macro Processor Design Options: Recursive Macro Expansion – General Purpose macro
Processors – Macro Processing within Language Translators - Implementation examples: MASM
Macro Processor – ANSI C macro language.
UNIT V
TEXT EDITOR AND DEBUGGER
9
Text editors – Overview of Editing Process – User Interface – Editor Structure – Interactive
Debugging Systems – Debugging functions and capabilities – User Interface Criteria.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK
1. Leland L. Beck, “System Software – An Introduction to Systems Programming”, 3rd Edition,
REFERENCE
1. D. M. Dhamdhere, “Systems Programming and Operating Systems", 1st Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.
15
MCC24
OPERATING SYSTEMS
LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES
• Understand how the operating system abstractions can be used in the development of
application programs or to build higher level abstractions.
• Understand how the operating system abstractions can be implemented.
• Understand the principles of concurrency and synchronization, and apply them to write
correct concurrent programs/software.
• Understand basic resource management techniques and principles and how they can be
implemented. These also include issues of performance and fairness objectives, avoiding
deadlocks, as well as security and protection.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definition and types of operating systems – Batch Systems – multi programming – Time-sharing –
parallel – Distributed and real-time systems – Operating system structure – Operating system
components and services – System calls – System programs – Virtual machines.
UNIT II
PROCESS MANAGEMENT
9
Process concept – Process scheduling – Cooperating processes – Threads – Interprocess
communication – CPU scheduling criteria – Scheduling algorithms – Multiple-processor scheduling.
UNIT III
PROCESS SYNCHRONIZATION AND DEADLOCKS
9
The Critical-Section problem – Synchronization hardware – Semaphores – Classical problems of
synchronization – Critical regions – Monitors – Deadlocks – System model – Characterization –
Deadlock prevention – Avoidance – Detection – Recovery from deadlock – Combined approach to
deadlock handling.
UNIT IV
STORAGE MANAGEMENT
9
Memory Management – Logical and Physical Address Space – Swapping – Contiguous Allocation –
Paging – Segmentation – Virtual Memory – Demand paging and its performance – Page replacement
algorithms – Thrashing – Demand segmentation – File systems – File concept – Access methods –
Directory implementation – Efficiency and performance – Recovery – Disk structure – Disk
scheduling methods.
UNIT V
CASE STUDY
9
Case study – Introduction – Process – File system – Storage management (WINDOWS, UNIX and
LINUX).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK
1. Abraham Siberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin, “Operating System Concepts”, 7th Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, Reprint 2009.
REFERENCES
1. Richard Peterson, “Linux: The Complete Reference”, 6th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2003.
2. Maurice J. Bach, “Design of the Unix Operating System”, Pearson Education, 1996.
3. William Stallings, “Operating systems: internals and design principles”, 6th Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2008.
16
MCC25
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
LTPC
30 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To gain knowledge of basic software engineering methods and practices, and their
•
appropriate application.
•
A general understanding of software process models such as the waterfall and evolutionary
models.
An understanding of the role of project management software requirements SRS document,
•
implementation issues, verification and validation reviews, software testing approaches,
software evolution, version management and how to ensure good quality software.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to Software Engineering – Software Components – Software Characteristics – Software
Crisis – Software Engineering Processes – Similarity and Differences from Conventional Engineering
Processes – Software Quality Attributes. Software Development Life Cycle (SDLC) Models: Water
Fall Model – Prototype Model – Spiral Model – Evolutionary Development Models – Iterative
Enhancement Models.
UNIT II
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENT SPECIFICATIONS (SRS)
9
Requirement Engineering Process: Elicitation – Analysis – Documentation – Review and
Management of User Needs – Feasibility Study – Information Modeling – Data Flow Diagrams –
Entity Relationship Diagrams – Decision Tables – SRS Document – IEEE Standards for SRS.
Software Quality Assurance (SQA): Verification and Validation – SQA Plans – Software Quality
Frameworks – ISO 9000 Models – CMM Model.
UNIT III
SOFTWARE DESIGN
9
Basic Concept of Software Design – Architectural Design – Low Level Design: Modularization –
Design Structure Charts – Flow Charts – Coupling and Cohesion Measures – Design Strategies:
Function Oriented Design – Object Oriented Design – Top-Down and Bottom-Up Design. Software
Measurement and Metrics: Various Size Oriented Measures – Halestead’s Software Science –
Function Point (FP) Based Measures – Cyclomatic Complexity Measures – Control Flow Graphs.
UNIT IV
SOFTWARE TESTING
9
Testing Objectives – Unit Testing – Integration Testing – Acceptance Testing – Regression Testing –
Testing for Functionality and Testing for Performance – Top-Down and Bottom-Up Testing
Strategies: Test Drivers and Test Stubs – Structural Testing (White Box Testing) – Functional
Testing (Black Box Testing) – Test Data Suit Preparation – Alpha and Beta Testing of Products.
Static Testing Strategies: Formal Technical Reviews (Peer Reviews) – Walk Through – Code
Inspection – Compliance with Design and Coding Standards.
UNIT V
SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
9
Need for Maintenance – Categories of Maintenance: Preventive – Corrective and Perfective
Maintenance – Cost of Maintenance – Software Re-Engineering – Reverse Engineering. Software
Configuration Management Activities – Change Control Process – Software Version Control – An
Overview of CASE Tools.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. R. S. Pressman, “Software Engineering - A Practitioners Approach”, 7th Edition, McGraw
Hill, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. K. K. Aggarwal and Yogesh Singh, “Software Engineering”, 3rd Edition, New Age
2. Ian Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, 9th Edition, Addison Wesley, 2010.
17
MCC26
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
LTPC
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
• To implement the basic concepts of C++.
• To implement the polymorphism and template concepts.
• To implement the file operations.
1. Write a program to perform a student’s internal mark calculation.
2. Write a program to calculate the area of circle, rectangle and triangle using function overloading
3. Write a class Square which has a field for side. It must have a constructor to initialize the side. Add
methods to the Square class to calculate area and perimeter.
4. Write a class Circle which has a field for radius. It must have a constructor to initialize the radius.
Add methods to the Circle class to calculate area and perimeter.
5. Write a class CheckoutCalculator which behaves somewhat like the machine at the checkout
counter in supermarkets. This calculator should ask for the number of items for which the total is
to be calculated and then allow you to enter the price for every item. After entering all the items it
displays all the prices entered and the total amount. (Hint: Here you need to use dynamic memory
allocation since you do not know how many items will be there. Use an array to store the prices of
items)
6. Write a class Results which stores all the results in an array. Assume that we need to store only the
results of a single semester which is four results. Each result will be final marks for a course
between 0-100 and is stored in an integer array. Use dynamic memory allocation and the four
methods mentioned above. Add separate methods to calculate the total marks for all courses and
the average marks. Add a field for student ID.
7. Modify the Circle class which you have written earlier to overload the + operator so that you can
add two Circle objects. Adding two Circle object should give another Circle whose radius is the
sum of the radius of the two Circle objects.
8. Modify the Rectangle class which you have written earlier to overload the + operator so that you
can add two Rectangle objects. Adding two Rectangle objects should give another Rectangle object
whose length is the sum of the lengths of the two Rectangle objects and whose breadth is the sum
of the breadths of the two Rectangle objects.
9. Write a class Time which represents time. The class should have three fields for hours, minutes and
seconds. It should have constructor to initialize the hours, minutes and seconds. A method
printTime() to print the current time. Overload the following operators: plus operator (+) (add two
time objects based on 24 hour clock) and < (compare two time objects)
18
10. Modify the Rectangle class which you have written earlier to overload the < (less than) operator
so that you can compare two Rectangles as to which is bigger (or smaller). The logic you will use
is to compare the areas of the Rectangle objects and decide which is bigger.
11. Modify the Circle class which you have written earlier to overload the > (greater than) operator so
that you can compare two Circles as to which is bigger (or smaller). The logic you will use is to
compare the radii of the Circle objects and decide which is bigger.
12. Write a program to perform Stack and Queue operations using template.
13. Write a function calculateAverage() which takes four int arguments which are marks for four
courses in the semester and returns their average as a float. The calculateAverage() function should
take only valid range for marks which is between 0 - 100. If the marks are out of range throw an
OutOfRangeException - define this exception as a class.
14. Write a program to perform a bank management system using file.
Required Software: C++
19
MCC27
SYSTEM PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
LTPC
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
• To develop and analyze the data structures needed for developing an assembler, loader
and linker.
• To perform file handling using file manipulation system calls
• To implement process management
• To implement IPC techniques
• To analyze scheduling algorithms and demonstrate page replacement policies
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Write a C program to create symbol table and intermediate file using the algorithm for pass1
of the two pass assembler.
Write a C program to create object file and list file with the output of the previous program
using the algorithm for pass2 of the two pass assembler.
Write a C program to implement the absolute loader.
Write a C program to implement relocating loader.
Write a C Program to implement the pass1 of the linking loader.
Write a C program to implement the pass2 of the linking loader.
Develop a text editor with features like insertion / deletion of a character, word, and sentence.
Write a C program to perform file management tasks using file manipulation system calls in
UNIX creat( ), open( ), read( ), write( ), close( )
Write a C program to create a new process using fork( ). Make the child process to execute a
new program using exec( ). Terminate the execution of the child process using exit( ). Make
the parent to read the termination status of the child process using wait( ) / waitpid( ).
Write a C program to implement IPC using pipe( ).
Write a C program to implement IPC using message queue for unrelated process.
Write a program to implement the following process scheduling algorithms
a. First Come First Serve
b. Shortest Remaining Job First (preemptive & non preemptive)
c. Round Robin
d. Priority Scheduling
Write a program that demonstrates how two processes can share a variable using semaphore.
Write a program to implement producer consumer problem using semaphore.
Write a program to demonstrate page replacement policies like
a. Optimal
b. Least Recently Used (LRU)
c. First-In-First-Out
Required Software: LINUX & C
20
MCC28
COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY
LTPC
1 02 2
OBJECTIVES
• To help the learners to improve their communicative skill.
• To facilitate the learners to improve the pronunciation of words with proper stress.
• To help the learners acquire the soft skills and interpersonal skills which will help the
student
• ts to excel in their workplace.
• To inculcate the habit of reading and to improve the active vocabulary among the
learners.
• To enhance the performance of students in placement, interviews and Group discussion.
Unit I
1. Vocabulary Building
2. Splitting Syllables
3. Stress and Shift of words and sentences
4. Common errors in Speaking
5. Letter writing
6. Writing Application, Bio-data, Resume, Curriculum Vitae.
7. Reading Comprehension and Answering Multiple Choice questions and Fill ups.
15
Unit II
1. Listening to audio files and answering questions
2. Planning for an event
3. Extempore Speech - On the spot topics for speech Practice
4. Identifying tonal variations expressing
5. E-Mail writing
10
Unit III
1. Listening to Presentation Skills (GD & Debate)
2. Group Discussion
3. Reading Practice: Dr.Abdul Kalam’s “Wings of Fire”
4. Report Writing
5. Paper Presentation
10
Unit IV
1. Listening to Telephonic Conversation & Situational Conversation
2. Debate
3. Note Taking
4. Interview Skills
10
RECORD LAY OUT
Every student has to maintain a record in which he / she have to incorporate the following details.
1. Students have to collect materials related to topics for Group Discussion / Debate
2. 10 assignments of Lab observations related to Presentation Skills about 200 words each
3. Covering letter with Bio data / Resume / Curriculum Vitae
4. Paper Presentation Topics with source materials to be pasted in the record
TOTAL: 45
Required Software: Oral Digital Language Lab & Globarena
21
MCC31
JAVA PROGRAMMING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• Analyze and design a computer program to solve real world problems based on object-oriented
principles of Java.
• Understand and able to design applications using multithreading and well suitable runtime error
handling.
• Develop GUI interfaces for a computer program to interact with users, and to understand the
event-based GUI handling principles.
Develop
applications with components and patterns of Networking and database activities.
•
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
7
Java basics – Features – Object Oriented Concepts – Data types, Variables – Arrays – Operators –
Control statements – Class – Object – Methods – Constructor – Method overloading – Access
Controls.
UNIT II
INHERITANCE
9
Basics – Types – Member Access – Role of Constructor – Method Overriding – Dynamic Method
Dispatch – super keyword – Abstract class – final – Interface: Creation –
Implementation –
Variables in Interface – Nested Interface – Extending interfaces.
UNIT III
EXCEPTION AND MULTITHREADING
9
Packages: Purpose – Access Protection – Class path specification – Sub packages – Exception
Handling: Fundamentals – Types – uncaught exception – try – catch – finally – throw – throws – User
defined Exception – Multithreading: Thread model – Creation – Priorities – Synchronization.
UNIT IV
APPLET AND AWT
12
Applet: Basics – Architecture – Life cycle methods – Applet Tag – Passing parameters – Windows
fundamentals – Frame – Color – Font – AWT Controls – Layout Management – Images – Event
Handling: Delegation Model – Event Classes and Listeners.
UNIT V
I/O AND NETWORKING
8
I/O Classes: File – Streams – Byte Stream classes – Character Streams – Networking: InetAddress –
URL – Sockets – Datagram – Java Database Connectivity.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Herbert Schildt, “Java: The Complete Reference “, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
REFERENCES
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Java How to Program”, 9th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2011.
2. Cay S. Horstmann and Gary Cornell, Core Java, Volume I - Fundamentals, 9th Edition,
3. Bruce Eckel, “Thinking in Java”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2006.
4. Elliotte Rusty Harold, “Java Network Programming”, 4th Edition, O'Reilly Media, 2013.
22
MCC32
OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Develop the knowledge of structural and behavioral modeling techniques.
• Develop effective model-based software development methodology.
• Implement the design patterns and their application in a software design project.
• Demonstrate knowledge of Design and Testing Process Improvement Models.
UNIT I
REVIEW OF OBJECT ORIENTATION
9
An overview – Object basics – Object state and properties – Behavior – Methods – Messages –
Information hiding – Class hierarchy – Relationships – Associations – Aggregations – Identity –
Dynamic binding – Persistence – Metaclasses – Object oriented system development life cycle.
UNIT II
METHODOLOGY AND UML
9
Introduction – Survey – Rumbugh, Booch, Jacobson methods – Patterns – Frameworks – Unified
approach – Unified modeling language – Static and Dynamic models – UML diagrams – Class
diagram – Usecase diagrams – Dynamic modeling – Model organization – Extensibility.
UNIT III
OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS
9
Identifying Usecase – Business object analysis – Usecase driven object oriented analysis – Usecase
model – Documentation – Classification – Identifying object, relationships, attributes, methods –
Super-sub class – A part of relationships Identifying attributes and methods – Object responsibility.
UNIT IV
OBJECT ORIENTED DESIGN
9
Design process – Axioms – Corollaries – Designing classes – Class visibility – Refining attributes –
Methods and protocols – Object storage and object interoperability Databases – Object relational
systems – Designing interface objects – Macro and Micro level processes – Purpose of a view layer
interface.
UNIT V
IMPLEMENTATION, USABILITY, TESTING AND QUALITY
9
Mapping models to Code, Mapping Object Model to Database Schema Usability Principles – User
interface design evaluating user interfaces. Testing and Quality – strategies, defects, test cases and test
plan, inspections, quality assurance.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ali Bahrami, “Object Oriented System Development”, McGraw Hill International Edition,
2008.
2. Craig Larman, “Applying UML and Patterns”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
3. Bernd Bruegge, Allen H. Dutoit, “Object Oriented Software Engineering using UML,
Patterns and Java”, Pearson Education, 2011.
REFERENCES
1. Timothy C. Lethbridge, Robert Laganiere “Object-Oriented Software Engineering – A
Practical Software Development using UML and Java”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.
2. Mike O’Docherty “Object-Oriented Analysis & design – understanding system development
with UML 2.0”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
3. Stephan R. Schach, “Object Oriented Software Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
4. Booch, Jacobson, Rumbagh, “The UML user Guide”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2005.
23
MCC33
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Perform pixel-based processing to create simple geometric figures upon a screen.
• Implement transformations of graphical objects in two and three dimensions, project such
objects from three to two dimensions and perform hidden-surface removal on faceted models.
• Understand the principles of color models and animation.
• Understand the use of fractal geometry and ray tracing to the problem of improving visual
realism.
• Demonstrate practical competence in the use of graphics.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
I/O devices – I/O primitives – Attributes of output primitives – DDA – Bresenham technique – Circle
drawing algorithms – Interactive input methods.
UNIT II
2D GRAPHICS
9
2D Transformations – Clipping – Window – View Port Mapping – Graphical User Interfaces and
Interactive Input Methods – Picture Construction Techniques – Virtual Reality Environment.
UNIT III
3D GRAPHICS
9
3D Transformation – 3D Viewing – Visible Surface Detection – Back Face Detection – Depth Buffer
Method – Scan Line Method.
UNIT IV
GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING
9
Color Models – RGB, YIQ, CMY, HSV – Animations – General Computer Animation, Key frame –
Graphics programming using OPENGL – Basic graphics primitives – Drawing three dimensional
objects – Drawing three dimensional scenes.
UNIT V
FRACTALS
9
Fractals and Self similarity – Creating image by iterated functions – Mandelbrot sets – Random
Fractals – Overview of Ray Tracing – Intersecting rays with other primitives – Adding Surface texture
– Reflections and Transparency – Boolean operations on Objects.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Donald D. Hearn, M. Pauline Baker, Warren Carithers, “Computer Graphics with Open GL”,
4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2011.
2. Donald Hearn, Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics – C Version”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2008 (7th Impression).
3. F.S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
REFERENCES
1. Apurva.D.Desai, “Computer Graphics”, PHI learning Private Limited, 2008.
2. James D. Foley, Andries Van Dam, Steven K. Feiner, John F. Hughes, “Computer
Graphics - Principles and Practice in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
24
MCC34
COMPUTER NETWORKS
LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Analyze and solve the data transmission medium oriented numerical problems.
• Construct a network with different topologies.
• Analyze the difference between reliable and unreliable secure data delivery service.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Communication model – Data Communications – Data Transmission: analog and digital data
transmission, Transmission impairments, channel capacity – Transmission media: Guided
Transmission, Wireless Transmission, Wireless Propagation, Line-of-Sight Transmission – Data Link
Control Protocols: Flow Control, Error Control, High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC).
UNIT II
NETWORK FUNDAMENTALS
9
Need for protocol architecture – Reference models: OSI Reference Model, TCP/IP Reference Model,
Comparison of the OSI and TCP/IP Reference Models – LAN Protocol Architecture: Topologies and
Transmission media, Medium Access Control (MAC) and Logical Link Control (LLC) – Bridges:
Functions of a Bridges, Bridge Protocol Architecture, Fixed Routing and Spanning Tree Approach.
UNIT III
NETWORK LAYER
9
Circuit switching network – Packet-Switching Principles – X.25 – Routing Protocols: Characteristics,
Routing Strategies, BGP and OSPF Protocol – Congestion control – Internet Protocol: IP Services,
IPv4, IP Addresses, Subnets, ICMP, ARP and RARP.
UNIT IV
TRANSPORT LAYER
9
Connection-Oriented Transport Protocol Mechanism: Reliable Sequencing Network Service,
Unreliable Network Service – Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) – TCP Congestion Control:
Additive Increase/Multiplicative Decrease, Slow Start and, Fast Retransmit and Fast Recovery – User
Datagram Protocol (UDP).
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Security: Requirements and Attacks, Message Authentication and Secure Hash Algorithm, RSA
Public Key Encryption and Digital Signature – DNS – SNMP – Electronic mail: Architecture and
Services, User agent, Message Format (MIME) and Message Transfer (SMTP, E-mail Gate way and
Final Delivery) – World Wide Web (WWW): HTTP and URLs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communications”, 8th Edition, PHI, 2011.
2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, David J. Wetherall, “Computer Networks”, 5th Edition, Pearson
Education Inc., 2011.
REFERENCES
1. Larry L. Peterson and Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks – A Systems Approach”, 5th
Edition, Harcourt Asia / Morgan Kaufmann, 2011.
25
MCC35
RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Formulate real practical problems by mathematical modeling.
• Solve a LPP, transportation, assignment problems using resource management techniques.
• Apply scheduling and queuing models and propose solutions to them.
• Use computer tools to solve a mathematical model for a practical problem.
UNIT 1
LINEAR PROGRAMMING MODELS
9
Mathematical Formulation of Linear Programming problems – Graphical Solution method – Simplex
method – slack, surplus and artificial variables, two phase method and Big-M method artificial
variable Techniques – Variants of Simplex method.
UNIT II
TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT MODELS
9
Mathematical formulation of transportation problem – Methods for finding initial basic feasible
solution – optimum solution: MODI method – degeneracy – Unbalanced transportation problems –
Mathematical formulation of assignment models – Hungarian Algorithm – Variants of the
Assignment problem – Travelling salesman problem.
UNIT III
INTEGER PROGRAMMING MODELS
Formulation – Gomory’s IPP method – Gomory’s mixed integer method – Branch
technique.
9
and bound
UNIT IV
SCHEDULING BY PERT AND CPM
9
Network Construction – Rules for drawing network diagram – Critical Path Method – Project
Evaluation and Review Technique – Resource Analysis in Network Scheduling.
UNIT V
QUEUEING MODELS
Characteristics of Queuing Models – Poisson Queues – (M / M / 1) : (FIFO / ∞ /∞),
(FIFO / N / ∞), (M / M / C) : (FIFO / ∞ / ∞),(M / M / C) : (FIFO /N / ∞) models.
9
(M / M / 1) :
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. Taha H.A., “Operations Research: An Introduction” 7th Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
REFERENCES
1. A.M.Natarajan, P.Balasubramani, A.Tamilarasi, “Operations Research”, Pearson
Education, Asia, 2005.
2. Prem Kumar Gupta, D.S. Hira, “Operations Research”, S.Chand & Company Limited, New
Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2003.
26
MCC36
JAVA PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
LTPC
0 03 2
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Implement, compile, test and run Java program.
• Make use of hierarchy of Java classes to provide a solution to a given set of requirements
found in the Java API.
• Understand the components and patterns that constitute a suitable development for GUI
application and event handling.
• Demonstrate systematic knowledge of backend and front end by developing an appropriate
application.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Writing Java programs by making use of class, interface, package, etc for the following:
a. Simple programs using control structures
b. Stack / Queue implementation using Array.
c. Constructor
d. Method overloading
e. Types of inheritance
f. Overriding and interfaces
g. Creation of user specific packages
h. User specific exception handling
2. Write a java program to read the contents of a file and copy to destination file.
3. Write a java multithread program to synchronize the producer consumer problem using Inter
Process Communication.
4. Design an applet program to create a color pallet using 5 radio buttons and one Choice box.
Provide appropriate event handling to change the background color using radio button and change
the foreground color by choice.
5. Design a banner Applet program to scroll the Text “Java programming Lab” using Thread.
6. Design an applet to implement Digital clock using Thread
7. Design an Applet program to create Email registration Form using different awt components.
(Minimum 5 components). Write an event handling procedure to validate each field and display
appropriate message.
8. Design an applet program to create a Calculator with Grid of Buttons. Write an event handling
procedure to activate the buttons with required functionality. Make the contents of text field
should not be editable.
9. Design a java GUI Frame to Manipulate the Student details in a database using JDBC. The frame
contains the select, insert, delete buttons to do the database activity. The results of database
queries are displayed into a Text Area component. The inputs to the queries are collected by using
Input Dialog control. Write an event handling procedure to do the above work. Use MS Access to
create a student database.
10. Design a Text Editor using java Frame class and the editor must support for creation of new file,
open an exiting file and save the contents of Editor area using Menu components. Write an event
handling procedure to accomplish the above task.
11. Write a java program to implement the Chat application using Sockets.
12. Write a Java GUI Application to display the content of web page using URL Class.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Softwares Required: Java / Netbeans IDE
27
MCC37
CASE TOOLS LABORATORY
LTPC
0 03 2
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Analyze the functional requirements for a system
• Design, implement and test the programs that make appropriate use of advanced objectoriented facilities.
Mini-Project - I: A Point-of-Sale (POS) System
Develop a computerized application for recording sales and handling payments for a retail store.
Mini-Project - II: Online Bookshop Example
Develop a model like amazon.com or bn.com, design and implement an online bookstore.
Mini-Project - III: A Simulated Company
Simulate a small manufacturing company. The resulting application will enable the user to take out a
loan, purchase a machine, and monthly production runs, follow the performance of the company.
Mini-Project - IV: A Multi-Threaded Airport Simulation
Simulate the operations in an airport. Your application should support multiple aircrafts using several
runways and gates avoiding collisions/conflicts. Landing: an aircraft uses the runway, lands, and then
taxis over to the terminal. Take-Off: an aircraft taxies to the runway and then takes off.
Mini-Project -V: An Automated Community Portal
Develop enterprise intranet portals for sharing information.
Mini-Project -VI: A Content Management System
The goal is to enable non-technical end users to easily publish, access, and share information over the
web, while giving administrators and managers complete control over the presentation, style, security,
and permissions.
Mini-Project-VII: An Auction Application
Design and implement an auction application that provides auctioning services. It should clearly
model the various auctioneers, the bidding process, auctioning etc.
Mini-Project -VIII: A Notes and File Management System
Develop personal notes and documents.
Mini-Project - IX: A Customizable Program Editor
Develop an editor for user interaction.
Mini-Project - X: A Graphics Editor
Design and implement graph editing applications, i.e., applications that include the ability to draw
structured and unstructured diagrams.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Softwares Required: Agro UML, Visual paradigm UML, Visual basic, Java
28
MCC38
GRAPHICS LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 2
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Create simple geometric figures upon a screen.
• Implement transformations of graphical objects in two and three dimensions.
• Employ clipping operations through various algorithms.
• Create image editing applications and animation.
• Apply the use of fractal geometry.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Drawing Algorithms
a. Write a program to draw a line using DDA Algorithm
b. Write a program to draw a line using Bresenham Algorithm
c. Write a program to draw a circle using Bresenham Algorithm
d. Write a program to draw an ellipse using Bresenham Algorithm
2. 2D transformations
a. Draw a square object. Write a program in C for moving the object diagonally or turn the
object clockwise by the user choices.
b. Draw a circle object. Write a program in C for moving an object vertically or enlarge the
object by the user choices.
c. Draw a triangle object. Write a program in C for moving an object horizontally or turn the
object counterclockwise by the user choices.
d. Draw an oval object. Write a program in C for enlarging an object or spin the object
counterclockwise by the user choices.
e. Draw a polygon object. Write a program in C for shrinking an object or spin the object
clockwise by the user choices.
f. Draw an ellipse object. Write a program in C for resizing or changing the position of the
object.
3. 2D composite transformations
a. Draw a star object. Write a program in C for moving an object diagonally and rotating the
object using composite transformation.
b. Draw a diamond object. Write a program in C for enlarging and rotating the object using
composite transformation.
4. Reflection and Shear
a. Write a program in C for getting the mirror image of an object in X and Y direction
b. Write a program in C for changing the square to rhombus shape in X and Y direction.
5. Cohen Sutherland line clipping algorithm
a. Write a line clipping program in C which involves logical operations,
b. Write a line clipping program in C which has encoding operations.
6. Liang Barsky line clipping algorithm
a. Write a line clipping program in C which involves clip-test operation.
b. Write a line clipping program in C which has less multiplications and only one division.
7. Sutherland – Hodgeman Polygon clipping Algorithm
29
8. 3D transformations
a. Draw a cylinder object. Write a program in C for moving the object diagonally or turn
the object clockwise by the user choices.
b. Draw a cube object. Write a program in C for moving an object vertically or enlarge the
object by the user choices.
c. Draw a cone object. Write a program in C for moving an object horizontally or shrink
the object by the user choices.
d. Draw a cube object. Write a program in C for rotating the object in X and Y direction.
e. Draw a hexagon object. Write a program in C for rotating the object in X or Z direction.
f. Draw a pyramid object. Write a program in C for rotating the object in Y or X direction
9. 3D composite transformations
a.
Draw a cube object. Write a program in C for moving and resizing the object.
10. Create an application for image editing, enhancement, manipulation by using editing tools, layers,
filters, special effects and color modes using photoshop.
a.
Create an effect such that one image overlaps another.
b. Create a selective color change effect..
c.
Type your name in caps. Apply an image into that.
d. Open a flower. Copy it and paste it four times. Give different colors to each
e.
Open two people’s images. Cut one’s head and paste it into another
f.
Design a greeting card atleast using 3 effects
g. Create a mirror image of an object
h. Print a watermark effect
i.
Create an effect such that a baby’s face smiling inside a flower
j.
Adjust the features of a person’s face
k. Open an Image, try to bring the effect of painting
l.
Repaint the damaged images
m. Make an image glowing
n. Blur and sharpen an image.
o. Take a grayscale image. Change the color only in the face
11. Create an animation using Image Ready.
a.
Two people walking from opposite side handshaking.
b. Changing colors of a rose
c.
Printing our college name one letter by another
d. Rising a sun slowly from sea
e.
Blinking of an eye of a child.
12. Fractal Images
a.
Generating fractal images with self-similarity
b. Generating fractal images with iterated functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Software Required: C, Photoshop, Image Ready.
30
MCC41
NETWORK PROGRAMMING
LT PC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Develop client-server communication using TCP and UDP sockets.
• Develop iterative and concurrent server using TCP.
• Implement I/O multiplexing using select and poll functions.
• Implement concurrent server using threads.
• Develop connection less client-server communication using Java.
UNIT I
ELEMENTARY TCP SOCKETS
9
Introduction to Socket Programming – Introduction to Sockets – Socket address Structures – Byte
ordering functions – Address conversion functions – Elementary TCP Sockets – Socket, connect,
bind, listen, accept, read, write, close functions – TCP Echo Server – TCP Echo Client.
UNIT II
APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
9
Process control – Posix Signal handling – Server with multiple clients – Iterative Server – Concurrent
Server – Boundary conditions: Server process Crashes, Server host Crashes, Server Crashes and
reboots, Server Shutdown – I/O multiplexing – I/O Models – Select function – Shut down function –
TCP echo Server (with multiplexing) – Poll function – TCP echo Client (with Multiplexing).
UNIT III
SOCKET OPTIONS, ELEMENTARY UDP SOCKETS
9
Socket options – getsocket and setsocket functions – generic socket options – IP socket options –
ICMP socket options – TCP socket options – fcntl function – Elementary UDP sockets – UDP echo
Server – UDP echo Client – Multiplexing TCP and UDP sockets – Domain name system –
gethostbyname function – IPv6 support in DNS – gethostbyadr function – getservbyname and
getservbyport functions.
UNIT IV
ADVANCED SOCKETS
9
IPv4 and IPv6 interoperability – Threaded servers – thread creation and termination – TCP echo
server using threads – Mutexes – Condition variables – raw sockets – raw socket creation – raw
socket output – raw socket input – ping program – trace route program.
UNIT V
NETWORK PROGRAMMING IN JAVA
9
Introduction to networked Java – Internet Addresses: InetAddess class, NetworkInterface class –
Sockets for Clients – Sockets for Servers – UDP Datagrams and Sockets – Remote Method
Invocation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. W. Richard Stevens, Bill Fenner, Andrew M. Rudoff, “Unix Network Programming, Volume
1: The Sockets Networking API”, 3rd Edition, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2003.
2. Elliotte Rustty Harold, “Java Network Programming”, 3rd Edition, O'Reilly Media, 2004.
REFERENCES
1. W. Richard Stevens, “Advanced Programming in the UNIX Environment”, Addison Wesley,
1999.
2. Behrouz A.Forouzan, “TCP/IP Protocol Suite”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010.
31
MCC42
WEB PROGRAMMING
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Design and implement complete applications over the web using client and server side
scripting languages.
• Interconnect clients and server using interconnectivity techniques.
• Retrieve data from a database and present it in a web page.
• Modify, add, and delete data in a database through a web page.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Client and Server concepts, Tiered architecture, WWW, IP Address, URL, URI, URN, Domain Name
System, Internet protocols and applications: TCP, UDP, FTP, SMTP, POP, ICMP, SNMP; Types of
Networks and applications, HTML.
UNIT II
DYNAMIC HTML
9
Dynamic HTML – Introduction – Cascading style sheets – Z-Index – Visibility – Positioning –
Object model and collections – Event model – Filters and transition – Data binding – Data control.
UNIT III
SCRIPTS and APPLETS
9
JavaScript – Introduction – Control Structures – Functions – Arrays – Objects – Simple Web
Applications – Applets – Life Cycle – Events – Layouts.
UNIT IV
SERVLETS
9
Servlets – Deployment of simple servlets – Web server (Java web server / Tomcat / Web logic) –
HTTP GET and POST requests – Session Tracking – Cookies – JDBC – Development of web
applications.
UNIT V
ASP and JSP
9
ASP basics – ASP objects – ASP applications – JSP Programming – JSP objects – Applications –
PHP – MySQL.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Deitel, Deitel and Nieto, “Internet and World Wide Web - How to program”, Pearson
Education Publishers, 5th Edition, 2011.
2. Herbert Schildt, “The Complete Reference - Java2”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 8th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCES
1. Chris Bates, “Web Programming – Building Internet Applications”, Wiley India, 3rd Edition,
2006.
2. Krishnamoorthy R. & Prabhu S, “Internet and Java Programming”, New Age International
Publishers, 1st Edition, 2004.
3. Thomos A. Powell, “The Complete Reference HTML and CSS”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2010.
4. Jeffrey C Jackson, “Web Technology – A computer Science perspective”, Pearson Education,
2nd Edition, 2007.
32
MCC43
COMPILER DESIGN
LTP C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Distinguish formal and practical properties of different approaches to parsing.
• Understand and implement various techniques to parse source code.
• Implement a basic compiler.
• Analyze the optimization technique on the intermediate representation.
UNIT I
LEXICAL ANALYSIS
9
Compilers – Analysis of Source Program – Phases of Compiler – Compiler Construction Tools – Role
of a Lexical Analyzer – Specification and Recognition of Tokens – Finite Automata – Regular
Expression to Finite Automata.
UNIT II
SYNTAX ANALYSIS
9
Introduction – Context-free grammar and structure of language – Parser and its types – Top-down
parser – Bottom-up parser – Implementation – Parser generator tool (Yacc) – Error handling.
UNIT III
INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION
9
Introduction – Need for Intermediate code – Types of Intermediate code – Representation of all
language constructs by three-address code – Grammar symbols and attributes – Semantic analysis –
Semantic routines for intermediate code generation.
UNIT IV
CODE OPTIMIZATION
9
Introduction – Hints on writing optimized code at user level – Construction of basic blocks and
processing – Data-flow analysis using flow graph – Data-flow equations for blocks with backward
flow control – Principal sources of optimization and transformations – Alias – Procedural
optimization – Loops in flow graph – Loop optimization.
UNIT V
CODE GENERATION
9
Issues in the Design of a Code Generator – Run-Time Storage Management – Next Use Information –
A Simple Code Generator – DAG Representation of Basic Blocks – Peephole Optimization – Code
Generation from DAG.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. K.Muneeswaran, “Compiler Design”, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press 2013.
REFERENCES
1. Alfred Aho, Monica S.Lam, Ravi Sethi and Jeffrey D.Ullman, “Compiler Principles,
Techniques and Tools”, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley 2007.
2. Steven S.Muchnick, “Advanced Compiler Design Implementation”, Morgan Kaufmann,
2009.
33
MCC44
NETWORK PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 2
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Analyze and develop client/server communication using connection oriented and connection
less protocols.
• Demonstrate domain name system.
• Competent with application development and debugging in Unix environments.
• Demonstrate remote method invocation and remote procedure call.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
Implement a client/server user-level application using TCP sockets in C. The Server
application has to accept string from client and echo the received string. For example,
when client sends “Welcome to Network programming Lab”, Server replies with
“Welcome to Network programming Lab.
2.
application has to support ‘n’ number of clients, but one by one. The Server application
has to accept string from client and replies with received string. For example, when client
sends “Iterative Sever”, Server replies with “Iterative server”.
3.
application has to support ‘n’ number of clients simultaneously. The Server application has
to accept string from client and replies with received string. For example, when client
sends “concurrent sever”, Server replies with “concurrent server”.
4.
application must be able to chat with ‘n’ number of clients simultaneously.
5.
Implement a client/server user-level application using UDP sockets in C. The Server
application must be able to chat with ‘n’ number of clients simultaneously.
6.
application has to accept string from client and echo the received string. For example,
when client sends “Welcome to Network programming Lab”, Server replies with
“Welcome to Network programming Lab.
7.
application has to support ‘n’ number of clients, but one by one. The Server application
has to accept string from client and replies with received string. For example, when client
sends “Iterative Sever”, Server replies with “Iterative server”.
8.
application has to support ‘n’ number of clients simultaneously. The Server application has
to accept string from client and replies with received string. For example, when client
sends “concurrent sever”, Server replies with “concurrent server”.
9.
Write a client/server program wherein the client sends the name of a command
to be executed at the server. The server then sends the result back to the client.
Implement the above using connection less service.
34
10. Write a client/server program wherein the client the name of a program to be
executed at the server. The server then sends the result back to client.
Implement the above using connection oriented service and concurrent server.
11. Write a client server program wherein the client when connects to the server, the
server then sends the system data and time to the client. Implement the above
using RMI.
12. Develop a client / server communication program in Java using connection less protocol.
13. Write a client / server program wherein the client sends the IP – address and
the server responds by sending the corresponding host's name. Use connection less service
to implement the above.
14. Write a client / server program wherein the client sends the name of a file and the
server returns the contents of the file. Use connection oriented service to
implement the above. Implement the server as an iterative server.
15. Write a client / server program wherein the client sends two numbers, the server
finds its gcd and returns to the client. Use RPC to implement above.
16. Write client / server program wherein the client sends a Unix Command (like 'ls')
and the server returns the result of execution of the command. Use RPC to
implement the above.
17. Write a program to implement the following interaction between client and server.
User supplies the filename to the client program. Client program in turn sends it to the
server; the server reads the contents of a text file and then sends the contents to the client,
then the client displays it on the screen. Implement with concurrent TCP server.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Software Required: Unix, C and Java
35
MCC45
WEB PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
LTPC
0 0 3 2
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Design Web Pages using Client Side Scripting and DHTML.
• Implement server side languages like Servlets, JSP and ASP.
• Develop web services and E-business applications.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Design of image mapping for an image using HTML. Link the documents using an image and
mark the hot spots in the image.
2. Development of web page using cascading Style Sheets (CSS) and implement its types.
3. Create a registration form and do the validation using HTML and Java Script.
4. Design of color palette using java and change the background and foreground of web pages.
5. Implement the types of layouts for different application and develop a simple calculator using
grid layout.
6. Design and develop an application using servlets and interconnect client and server.
7. Invoke HTML form using servlets and create interactivity.
8. Develop a real time application using applets.
9. Implement an Employee payroll processing application using ASP and connect client and server.
10. Develop an Online examination using JSP and display the marks.
11. Implement a web system using JDBC and interconnect client and server using servlets.
12. Design an online shopping web page using JSP and design an interactive online shopping web
site.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Software Required: Java, XML, HTML, Scripting languages, ASP, JSP, Servlets.
36
MCC46
COMPILER DESIGN LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 2
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Understand the language translation peculiarities by designing complete translator for mini
language.
• Understand the design aspect of various phases of compiler.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Implement a lexical analyzer in “C”.
Use LEX tool to implement a lexical analyzer.
Write a C Program to convert a grammar into finite automata
Write a C Program to convert a Regular expression into finite automata
Implement a recursive descent parser for an expression grammar that generates
arithmetic expressions with digits, + and *.
6. Implement LL (1) parser using C Program.
7. Write semantic rules to the YACC program in problem 5 and implement a calculator that takes
an expression with digits, + and * and prints its value.
8. Implement the front end of a compiler that generates the three address code for a simple
language with: one data type integer, arithmetic operators, relational operators, variable
declaration statement, one conditional construct, one iterative construct and assignment
statement.
9. Implement the back end of the compiler which takes the three address code generated in
problems 7 and 8, and produces the 8086 assembly language instructions that can be assembled
and run using a 8086 assembler. The target assembly instructions can be simple move, add, sub,
and jump.
10. Implement code optimization technique to improve the quality of the program.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Software Required: TURBO C, LEX, YACC
37
MCE4A
NUMERICAL AND STATISTICAL METHODS
LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of this course, students will be able to
• Use numerical techniques for solving linear system of equations.
• Understand and utilize the problems in numerical differentiation and numerical integration.
• Demonstrate the utility of numerical techniques of ordinary differential equations.
• Apply the concepts of estimation (confidence intervals) and hypothesis testing for population
averages and percentages.
• Analyze the appropriate tabular for displaying design of experiments.
UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS
9
Newton-Raphson method – Gauss Elimination method – Pivoting – Gauss-Jordan method – Iterative
methods of Gauss-Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel – Matrix Inversion by Gauss-Jordan
method –
Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power method .
UNIT II
INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL
INTEGRATION
9
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolation – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
integration using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules for single and double integration.
UNIT III NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
9
Taylor’s series method – Euler’s method – Modified Euler’s method – Fourth order Runge-Kutta
method for solving first and second order equations – Milne’s predictor-corrector methods for
solving first order equations – Finite difference methods for solving second order equation.
UNIT IV TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS
9
Sampling distributions – Tests for single mean, Proportion, Difference of means (large and small
samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – Chi-square test for goodness of fit –
Independence of attributes.
UNIT V DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS
Completely randomized design – Randomized block design – Latin square design.
9
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., “ Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, 6th Edition,
Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
2. R.A. Johnson and C.B. Gupta, “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”,
Pearson Education, Asia, 7th edition, 2007.
REFERENCES
1. Chapra, S. C and Canale, R. P. “Numerical Methods for Engineers”, 5th Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Gerald, C. F. and Wheatley, P. O., “Applied Numerical Analysis”, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education Asia, New Delhi, 2006.
3. R.E. Walpole, R.H. Myers, S.L. Myers, and K Ye, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers
and Scientists”, Pearson Education, Asia , 8th Edition, 2007.
4. M.R. Spiegel, J. Schiller and R.A. Srinivasan, “Schaum’s Outlines Probability and Statistics”,
Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2004.
38
MCE4B
ELECTRONIC COMMERCE
LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Explore basic Internet Transactions features
• Apply the Security Technologies in Electronic Commerce
• Acquire knowledge about the strategies to develop Electronic Commerce web sites and
Payment Systems
• Acquire knowledge about the environment of Electronic commerce , Techniques and Tools of
Electronic Data Interchange
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
6
Networks and Commercial Transactions – Internet and Other Novelties – Electronic Transactions –
Commercial Transactions – Establishing Trust – Internet Environment – Internet Advantage – ECommerce Infrastructure – Internet, Web and Mobile Platforms.
UNIT II
SECURITY TECHNOLOGIES
9
Unsecured Internet – Internet Security Holes – Cryptography: Objective – Codes and Ciphers –
Breaking Encryption Schemes – Data Encryption Standard – Trusted Key Distribution and
Verification – Cryptographic Applications – Encryption – Digital Signature – Non repudiation and
Message Integrity.
UNIT III
ELECTRONIC PAYMENT METHODS
9
Planning electronic commerce initiatives – Strategies for developing electronic commerce web sites –
Managing electronic commerce implementations – Traditional Transactions : Updating – Offline and
Online Transactions – Secure Web Servers – Required Facilities – Digital Currencies and Payment
Systems – Protocols for the Public Transport – Security Protocols – SET – Credit Card Business
Basics.
UNIT IV
ELECTRONIC COMMERCE PROVIDERS
9
Online Commerce Options – Functions and Features – Payment Systems: Electronic, Digital and
Virtual Internet Payment System – Account Setup and Costs – Virtual Transaction Process – Info
Haus – Security Considerations – Cyber Cash: Model – Security – Customer Protection – Client
Application – Selling through Cyber Cash.
UNIT V
ONLINE COMMERCE ENVIRONMENTS
12
Environment of electronic commerce – Legal, Ethical and Tax issues – Commercial Environments –
Payment Methods – Server Market Orientation – Netscape Commerce Server – Microsoft Internet
Servers – Digital Currencies – DigiCash – Using Ecash – Ecash Client Software and Implementation
– Smart Cards – The Chip – Electronic Data Interchange – Internet Strategies, Techniques and Tools.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. Pete Loshin, “Electronic Commerce”, 4th Edition, Firewall media, An imprint of laxmi
publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES
1. Gary P. Schneider, “Electronic Commerce”, 8th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2008.
2. Jeffrey F.Rayport and Bernard J. Jaworski, “Introduction to E-Commerce”, 2nd Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Private Limited., 2006.
3. Greenstein, “Electronic Commerce”, Tata McGraw Hill Private Limited, 2004.
39
MCE4C
INFORMATION SYSTEMS
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Identify and analyze Information System Management and requirements in Decision Making
• Communicate to both business and IT professionals
• Implement practical applications of Information Systems in Business and Society
UNIT I
INFORMATION SYSTEM AND ORGANIZATION
9
Organizations and Information Systems – Types of Information Systems – Challenges of Information
Systems – The Role of Information Systems in Business Today – Impact of Information Systems on
Organizations – Ethical and Social Issues related to information Systems
UNIT II
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY INFRASTRUCTURE
9
IT Infrastructure – Components Hardware Platform Trends – Contemporary Software Platform
Trends – Organizing data in Traditional File Environment and its Problems – Groupware, Team ware,
and Electronic Conferencing – Supply Chain Management Systems
UNIT III
INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND DECISION MAKING
9
Decision Making and Decision Support Systems – Systems for Decision Support – Group Decision
Support Systems – Enterprise Systems – Securing Information Systems – Mobile Digital Platform and
Mobile E-Commerce
UNIT IV
SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT APPROACHES
9
System Analysis and Design – System Development Life Cycle (SDLC) – Different SDLC Models
and Technical challenges – Prototyping – End User Development – Building Information Systems –
Managing Projects – Managing Global Systems
UNIT V
INFORMATION SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT TOOLS AND APPLICATIONS 9
Computer-Aided System Engineering (CASE) Tools – Business – Accounting – Health – Academic
and Social Services
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Kenneth C. Laudon and Jane P. Laudon, “Management Information Systems: Managing the
Digital Firm”, 12th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2012.
2. James O’ Brien and George Maracas, “Management Information Systems”, 10th Edition,
McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Laudon Kenneth C., Laudon Jane P., “Management Information Systems: Managing the
Digital Firm”, 9th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2005.
2. Efraim Turban, R. Kelly Rainer, Richard E. Potter., “Introduction to Information
Technology”, 3rd Edition, Wiley, 2004.
40
MCE4D
WEB GRAPHICS
LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Design the web sites and create images and animated pictures.
• Design logo, brochure and images.
• Develop animations, graphics and movies using Windows Media Player.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Basic web graphics – Web designing, Image maps – Pixels, Resolutions, Principles of Graphic design,
Raster Graphics Vs Vector Graphics, Introduction to CorelDraw – Basic Drawing Skills – Using
Text – Working with Objects – Adding Special Effects – Creating Output.
UNIT II
RASTER IMAGE EDITING SOFTWARE
9
Introduction – Image Basics – File Formats – GIF – JPEG – Color Palette – Color models –Layers –
Creating new Images – Brushes – Grids and Guides – Gradients – Scaling Images – Moving and
Merging Layers – Tool Palette – Dialogs – Masking – Filters – Adding text to images – Designing
icons and background images.
UNIT III
VECTOR IMAGE HANDLING
9
Introduction – Creating Simple Vector graphics – Creating banners – Images – Working with layers –
Tweening – Motion guide – Masking – Frame by Frame animation – Onion Skin Effect – Creating
special effects – Text effects and animation – Action scripts.
UNIT IV
MULTIMEDIA
9
Creating clippings – Animations with sound effects – Adding audio or Video – Windows Media
Player ActiveX Control – Agent control – Embedding VRML in a web page – Real Player ActiveX
control.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Development of interactive web applications with a particular theme using vector graphics and raster
graphics concepts – Animations and Interaction.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Tavmjong Bah, Inkscape, “Guide to Vector Drawing Program”, 2nd Edition, 2011.
2. James L. Mohler, “Flash 5.0 Graphics, Animation & Interactivity”, Macromedia 2000.
REFERENCES
1. Adobe creative team, “Adobe Photoshop Elements 7 and Adobe Premiere Elements
classroom in a book collection”, Adobe Press, 2009.
2. Richard Schrand, “Photoshop 6 Visual Jumpstrat”, Adobe Press 2001.
3. Adobe creative team, “Action Script 3.0 Adobe Flash CS4 professional classroom in a book”,
Adobe Press, 2010.
41
MCE4E
ADVANCED DATABASES
LTPC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Explain and evaluate the fundamental theories and requirements that influence the design of
modern database systems.
• Assess and apply database functions and packages suitable for distributed database
development.
• Critically evaluate alternative designs and architectures for databases and data warehouses.
• Analyze the background processes involved in queries and transactions, and explain how these
impacts on spatial and temporal database operation and design.
UNIT I
DATA WAREHOUSING
8
Introduction to Data warehousing – Multidimensional data model – Architecture – Types of Schemas
– concept Hierarchies – OLAP operations – Indexing – OLAP queries & Tools.
UNIT II
DISTRIBUTED DATABASES
9
Distributed Database Concepts – Distributed Data Storage – Distributed Transactions – Commit
Protocols – Concurrency Control – Distributed Query Processing – Three Tier Client Server
Architecture.
UNIT III
OBJECT ORIENTED DATABASES
10
Concepts for Object Databases: Object Identity – Object structure – Type Constructors –
Encapsulation of Operations – Methods – Persistence – Type and Class Hierarchies – Inheritance –
Complex Objects – Object Database Standards – Languages and Design: ODMG Model – ODL –
OQL.
UNIT IV
SPATIAL AND TEMPORAL DATABASES
9
Spatial Databases: Introduction – Spatial representation – data types – relationships – access methods
– Indexing – Temporal Databases: Motivation – Indexing – Snapshot Index – spatiotemporal
databases.
UNIT V
RESEARCH TRENDS
9
Mobile Databases – Semi structured database – Column store – Web database – Multimedia database
– Data in the Cloud – Google File System.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, 6th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber, “Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques”, 3rd Edition,
Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, March 2011.
REFERENCES
1. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education /Addison Wesley, 2010.
2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management”, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
3. Philippe Rigaux, Michel O. Scholl and Agnes Voisard, “Spatial Databases: with applications
to GIS”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2002.
4. Serge Abiteboul, Peter Buneman, and Dan Suciu, “Data on the Web: From Relations to Semi
structured Data and XML”, 2nd Edition, Morgan-Kaufmann Publishers, 2000.
42
MCE4F
SOFTWARE QUALITY MANAGEMENT
LT P C
300 3
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Use quality models to identify and specify the quality attributes a software system must
satisfy
• Find the interrelation between product quality and process quality
• Apply the product and process quality control techniques and able to create a quality product
with standards
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE QUALITY ENGINEERING
9
Concepts of Quality – Hierarchical Modeling (Boehm and McCall) – Quality Criteria and its
Interrelation – Fundamentals of Software Quality Improvement – Concepts of Quality Improvement –
Concepts of Process Maturity – Improving Process Maturity.
UNIT II
DEVELOPMENTS IN MEASURING QUALITY
9
Selecting Quality Goals – Principles of Measurement – Direct and Indirect Measures – Metrics –
Quality Function Deployment – Goal/ Question / Measure Paradigm – Quality Characteristics Tree –
The FURPS and FURPS+ Model – Gilb Approach – Quality Prompts (COQUAMO).
UNIT III
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
9
Elements of a Quality Engineering Program – SQA – Concept of Reliability, Maintainability,
Verifiability, Testability, Safety and Supportability – Historical Perspective Elements of QMS –
Human Factors – ISO 9000 Series (A Generic Quality Management Standard) – Tools for Quality.
UNIT IV
PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES IN QMS
9
Process – Product – Project – People (4Ps) in Software Development and Management Spectrum –
Principle and Critical Practices in QMS – ISO 9001 and Capability Maturity Models – Six Sigma –
Zero Defects – Statistical Quality Control.
UNIT V
MEASURES AND METRICS IN PROCESS AND PROJECT DOMAINS
9
Steps to improve the Productivity and Quality – Measuring and Improving the Development Process –
Customer Satisfaction analysis – Metrics for Software Quality – Integrating Metrics within Software
Engineering Process – Metrics for Small Organizations about quality.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Stephen H.Kan, “Metrics and Models in Software Quality Engineering”, Addison Wesley, 2nd
Edition, 2002.
2. Daniel Galin, “Software Quality Assurance: From Theory to Implementation”, Pearson
Education, 1st Edition, 2004.
REFERENCES
1. Jeff Tian, “Software Quality Engineering- Testing, Quality Assurance, and Quantifiable
Improvement”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2005.
2. Vivek Nanda, “Quality Management System Handbook for Product development companies”,
1st Edition, 2005.
3. Allan C. Gillies, “Software Quality: Theory and Management”, International Thomson,
Computer Press 1997.
4. Roger S. Pressman, “Software Engineering - A Practitioner’s Approach”, 7th Edition,
McGraw Hill, 2010.
43
MCE4G
TCP / IP DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION
LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Develop the practical experience of IP addresses, and the fundamentals of IP routing
• Build the trade–offs between UDP and TCP and its uses
• Implement the details of IP and TCP operations
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Internetworking concepts and architectural model – Classful Internet address – CIDR – Subnetting
and Supernetting – ARP – RARP – IP – IP Routing – ICMP – IPv6, Microsoft TCP/IP Properties.
UNIT II TCP
9
Services – Header – Connection establishment and termination – Interactive data flow – Bulk data
flow – Timeout and retransmission – Persist timer – Keepalive timer – Futures and performance –
TCP Undiagnosed Problems.
UNIT III IP IMPLEMENTATION
9
IP global software organization – Routing table – Routing algorithms – Fragmentation and reassembly
– Error processing (ICMP) – Multicast Processing (IGMP) Using IP Multicasts with Windows
Sockets Programs – Configuration Parameters Using DHCP.
UNIT IV TCP IMPLEMENTATION I
9
Data structure and input processing − Transmission control blocks − Segment format − Comparison −
Finite state machine implementation − Output processing − Mutual exclusion − Computing the TCP
data length – Integration of Windows NT DNS and WINS Servers.
UNIT V
TCP IMPLEMENTATION II
9
Timers − Events and messages − Timer process − Deleting and inserting timer event − Flow control
and adaptive retransmission − Congestion avoidance and control − Urgent data processing and push
function – Architecture of Microsoft TCP/IP for Windows NT, Nagle Algorithm.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. Douglas E.Comer, “Internetworking with TCP/IP Principles, Protocols and Architecture”,
Vol. 1 & 2, 6th Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. W.Richard Stevens ,“TCP/IP illustrated”, Volume 1, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2011
2. W.Richard Stevens, “TCP/IP illustrated”, Volume 2, 2nd Edition Pearson Education 2011.
44
MCE4H
DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS
LT P C
3 0 03
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Articulate relative advantages and drawbacks of the main types of formal models for a
distributed system
• Describe algorithms and/or impossibility results for typical abstract problems in distributed
computing and Operating system
• Identify appropriate complexity measures and analyze solutions to Fault tolerance in
distributed environment
UNIT I
9
Object Invocation – Message Oriented Communication – Unicasting Multicasting and Broadcasting –
Client-server communication – Group Communication – Interprocess Communication.
UNIT II
11
Issues in Distributed Operating System – Threads in Distributed Systems – Clock Synchronization –
Causal Ordering – Global States – Election Algorithms – Distributed Mutual Exclusion – Distributed
Transactions – Distributed Deadlock – Agreement Protocols .
UNIT III
11
Distributed Shared Memory – Data-Centric Consistency Models – Client-Centric Consistency Models
– Distributed Scheduling – Distributed File Systems – Sun Network File Systems.
UNIT IV
FAULT TOLERANCE AND CONSENSUS
7
Introduction to Fault Tolerance – Distributed Commit Protocols – Byzantine Fault Tolerance –
Impossibilities in Fault Tolerance – Distributed debugging.
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
Ivy – Munin – CORBA – COM+ – Distributed Coordination – Based System – JINI.
7
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore, Tim Kindberg, “Distributed Systems Concepts and
Design”, 5th Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2012.
REFERENCES
Advanced Topics”, Wiley, 2004.
2. A.S.Tanenbaum, M.Van Steen, “Distributed Systems”, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. M.L.Liu, “Distributed Computing Principles and Applications”, Pearson / Addison Wesley,
2004.
45
MCE4J
UNIX INTERNALS
LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Work with UNIX shell and file system.
• Develop skills to experience common UNIX programming tools to create UNIX applications.
• Work with UNIX files, processes, signals, sockets, and various other SystemV constructs
• Implement memory allocation in response to specific requests, to manage and reclaim
memory.
UNIT I
UNIX SYSTEM STRUCTURES
9
Architecture of Unix Operating System – Introduction to system concepts – Kernel – Kernel data
structures – Buffer Cache: Buffer Headers – Structure of Buffer Pool – Retrieval of Buffer –
Advantages of buffer cache.
UNIT II
INTERNAL REPRESENTATION OF FILES
9
Inode – Structure of a regular file – Directories – Conversion of a path names to an Inode –
Superblock – Inode assignment to a file – Allocation of disk blocks – Other file types.
UNIT III
SYSTEM CALLS FOR THE FILE SYSTEM
9
Open – Read – Write – File and Record locking – Lseek – Close – File creation – Creation of special
files – Changing directory and root – Changing Owner and mode – Pipes – Mounting and unmounting
file system – Link – Unlink – File system maintenance.
UNIT IV
PROCESSES
9
Process states and transitions – Layout of system memory – Context of a process – Saving the context
of the process – Manipulation of the process address space – Process Creation – Signals – Process
termination – Invoking other programs – Changing the size of a process – System boot and init
process – Process Scheduling – Sockets.
UNIT V
MEMORY MANAGEMENT
9
Swapping – Application of swap space – File swap – Demand Paging – Data structures for demand
paging – Swap process in and out – Page stealing – Page aging and page fault.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Maurice J Bach, “The Design of the UNIX Operating Systems”, Prentice Hall of India,
2. Uresh Vahalia, “UNIX Internals: The New Frontiers”, Prentice Hall of India, Pearson
Education, 2008.
REFERENCE
1. Richard Stevens, “UNIX Network Programming”, Volume I, Prentice Hall of India, Pearson
Education, 2010.
46
MCE4K
VISUAL PROGRAMMING
LT P C
3 003
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Develop Windows Application Programming Interface (API).
• Build well structured GUI programming using Microsoft Foundation Classes.
• Develop simple applications using Visual C++.
• Integrate the media content with the programming environment.
UNIT I
WINDOWS PROGRAMMING
10
The windows programming model – A simple windows program – Message processing in windows
programming – Creating and displaying the window – Message loop – The window procedure –
Painting and repainting – Introduction to GDI – Device context – Child Window controls.
UNIT II
VISUAL C++ PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTALS
9
Application framework – Creating a simple program in VC++ – Visual C++ components AppWizard – Class Wizard – Introduction to MFC – MFC library – Adding new classes and
functions.
UNIT III DOCUMENT VIEW ARCHITECTURE
9
Introduction to API – Event handling – Mapping modes – Modal and modeless dialog – Menus –
Single and Multiple document interface – Reading and Writing documents – Splitter window and
multiple views.
UNIT IV CONTROLS
9
ActiveX and OLE controls – Installing ActiveX controls – OLE Drag and Drop – Component Object
model – Dynamic controls – Windows common controls.
UNIT V
ADVANCED CONCEPTS
8
Database management with Microsoft ODBC – Sample database applications – Dynamic Linking
Library – VC++ networking issues – Winsock and WinInet – Building a web client – Information
server.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Charles Petzold, “Programming Windows”, 6th Edition, Microsoft Press, 2012.
2. Ivor Horton’s, “Beginning Visual C++”, John Wiley Sons, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. David J. Kruglinski, George Shepherd and Scot Wingo, “Programming Visual C++”,
Microsoft Press, 5th Edition, 2012.
2. Pappas & Murray, “The Complete Reference - Visual C++”, McGrawHill, 2011.
47

regulations - National Engineering College

Transcription

Similar documents

NI CIHT Venturer 19th October 2015

Ancient Indian Syllabi

get protected! - Pine Cellular

- Saurashtra University

www.farhikhtegan.com EPT

autonomous cars - ITS-CH

SignalPro® - EDX Wireless

Dejavoo Systems 1129 Northern Blvd Suite 303

Fun houses - Michael Prager

DIGITAL SYSTEMS